SlideShare a Scribd company logo
HF/50 MHZ TRANSCEIVER


 FT-2000D
OPERATING MANUAL




          VERTEX STANDARD CO., LTD.
          4-8-8 Nakameguro, Meguro-Ku, Tokyo 153-8644, Japan
          VERTEX STANDARD
          US Headquarters
          10900 Walker Street, Cypress, CA 90630, U.S.A.
          YAESU EUROPE B.V.
          P.O. Box 75525, 1118 ZN Schiphol, The Netherlands
          YAESU UK LTD.
          Unit 12, Sun Valley Business Park, Winnall Close
          Winchester, Hampshire, SO23 0LB, U.K.
          VERTEX STANDARD HK LTD.
          Unit 5, 20/F., Seaview Centre, 139-141 Hoi Bun Road,
          Kwun Tong, Kowloon, Hong Kong
          VERTEX STANDARD (AUSTRALIA) PTY., LTD.
          Normanby Business Park, Unit 14/45 Normanby Road
          Notting Hill 3168, Victoria, Australia
ABOUT THIS MANUAL . . .
The FT-2000D is a leading-edge transceiver with a number of new and exciting features, some of which may be unfamiliar
to you. In order to gain the most enjoyment and operating efficiency from your FT-2000D, we recommend that you read
this manual in its entirety, and keep it handy for reference as you explore the many capabilities of your new transceiver.
Before using your FT-2000D, be sure to read and follow the instructions in the “Before You Begin” section of this manual.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Congratulations on the purchase of your Yaesu amateur trans-        Advanced features include Direct Keyboard Frequency En-
ceiver! Whether this is your first rig, or if Yaesu equipment is    try and Band Change, Speech Processor, IF Monitor for Voice
already the backbone of your station, rest assured that your        modes, CW Pitch control, CW Spot switch, Full CW QSK,
transceiver will provide many hours of operating pleasure           adjustable IF Noise Blanker, and all-mode Squelch. Two TX/
for years to come.                                                  RX antenna ports, plus a receive-only antenna port, are pro-
                                                                    vided on the rear panel. Two key jacks are provided (one
The FT-2000D is an elite-class HF transceiver providing ex-
                                                                    each on the front and rear panels), and they may be config-
ceptional performance both on transmit and receive. The FT-
                                                                    ured independently for paddle input or connection to a straight
2000D is designed for the most competitive operating situa-
                                                                    key or computer-driven keying interface. Both Digital Voice
tions, whether you primarily operate in contest, DX, or digi-
                                                                    Recording and CW Message Memory are provided.
tal-mode environments.
                                                                    Frequency setup is extraordinarily simple on the FT-2000D.
Built on the foundation of the popular FTDX9000 transceiver,
                                                                    Besides direct frequency entry for both the Main and Sub
and carrying the proud tradition of the FT-1000 series, the
                                                                    VFOs, separate keys are provided for band selection, and
FT-2000D provides up to 200 Watts of power output on SSB,
                                                                    each band key accesses three independent VFO frequency/
CW, and FM (50 Watts AM carrier). Digital Signal Process-
                                                                    mode/filter settings per band, so you can establish separate
ing (DSP) is utilized throughout the design, providing lead-
                                                                    VFO settings for three different parts of each band. The two
ing-edge performance on both transmit and receive.
                                                                    (Main and Sub) VFOs allow simultaneous reception and dis-
Available as an option for the FT-2000D is the Data Man-            play of two different frequencies, even in different modes
agement Unit (DMU-2000), which provides extensive dis-              and with different IF bandwidths. Receiver audio can be com-
play capabilities via a user-supplied computer monitor. In-         pletely or partially mixed, or monitored separately in each
cluded are Band Scope, Audio Scope, X-Y Oscilloscope,               ear.
World Clock, Rotator Control, and extensive transceiver sta-
                                                                    In addition, 99 memories are provided, each of which stores
tus displays, in addition to station logging capability.
                                                                    its own mode and IF filter selection, in addition to frequency,
For exceptional protection from strong nearby incoming sig-         Clarifier offset, and scan-skip status. What's more, five quick-
nals, the Yaesu-exclusive VRF (Variable RF Front-End Fil-           recall (“QMB”) memories can instantly store operational set-
ter) serves as a high-performance Preselector-ideal for multi-      tings at the push of a button.
operator contest environments. This filter is manually tuned,
                                                                    The built-in automatic antenna tuner includes 100 memories
allowing the operator to optimize sensitivity or signal rejec-
                                                                    of its own, automatically storing antenna matching settings
tion with the twist of a knob. And for then ultimate in re-
                                                                    for quick automatic recall later.
ceiver RF selectivity, the optional RF µTuning Kits may be
connected via the rear panel, providing extraordinarily sharp       Interfacing for digital modes is extremely simple with the
selectivity to protect your receiver from close-in interference     FT-2000D, thanks to dedicated AFSK and FSK connection
on a crowded band.                                                  jacks on the rear panel. Optimization of the filter passbands,
                                                                    DSP settings, carrier insertion point, and display offset are
In addition to the contribution of the VRF Preselector, su-
                                                                    all possible via the Menu programming system.
perb receiver performance is a result of direct lineage from
the legendary FTDX9000, FT-1000D, and FT-1000MP. You                The Yaesu CAT system provides a direct link to the trans-
may select, in the front end, one of two RF preamplifiers, or       ceiver CPU for computer control and customization of tun-
IPO (Intercept Point Optimization) utilizing direct feed to         ing, scanning, and other operating functions. The FT-2000D
the first mixer, and/or three levels of RF attenuation in 6-dB      includes a built-in data level converter for direct connection
steps.                                                              to a personal computer serial port. Yaesu products are sup-
                                                                    ported by most of the leading contest and DX logging pro-
Dual Receive is built into every FT-2000D. The Main re-
                                                                    grams. The extensive programming protocol is described in
ceiver utilizes DSP filtering, incorporating many of the fea-
                                                                    the CAT System Manual, supplied with this transceiver, if
tures of the FTDX9000, such as Variable Bandwidth, IF Shift,
                                                                    you wish to write your own software!
and Passband Contour tuning. Digital Noise Reduction and
Digital Auto-Notch Filtering are also provided, along with a        Advanced technology is only part of the FT-2000D story.
manually-tuned IF Notch filter. The Sub receiver, used for          Vertex Standard stands behind our products with a world-
monitoring within the same band as the Main band, is an             wide network of dealers and service centers. We greatly ap-
analog type ideal for watching both sides of a pile-up, or          preciate your investment in the FT-2000D, and we look for-
keeping an ear on a DX station working stations by call area,       ward to helping you get the most out of your new transceiver.
etc.                                                                Please feel free to contact your nearest dealer, or one of Ver-
                                                                    tex Standard's national headquarters offices, for technical ad-
On the transmit side, the Yaesu-exclusive Three-Band Para-
                                                                    vice, interfacing assistance, or accessory recommendation.
metric Microphone Equalizer allows precise and flexible ad-
                                                                    And watch Vertex Standard U.S.A.’s Home Page for late-
justment of the wave-form created by your voice and micro-
                                                                    breaking information about Vertex, Standard Horizon, and
phone. The Amplitude, Center Frequency, and Bandwidth of
                                                                    Yaesu products: http://www.vertexstandard.com.
equalization may be adjusted independently for the low-fre-
quency, mid-range, and high-audio-frequency spectra, and            Please read this manual thoroughly to gain maximum under-
the transmitted bandwidth may also be adjusted, as well.            standing of the full capability of the FT-2000D. We thank
                                                                    you again for your purchase!



FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                               Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
General Description ..................................................... 1          Advanced Interference-Suppression Features:
Accessories & Options ................................................. 4            RF Front End ............................................................. 53
   Supplied Accessories ............................................... 4                Using the VRF (Variable RF Front-end Filter) ...... 53
   Available Options ..................................................... 4         Interference Rejection
Before You Begin ......................................................... 6         (Signals Off Frequency by Just a Few kHz) ............ 54
   Extending the Front Feet .......................................... 6                 R.FLT (Roofing Filters) ......................................... 54
   Adjusting the Main Tuning Dial Torque .................. 6                        Interference Rejection (Signals within 3 kHz) ........ 55
   Resetting the Microprocessor .................................. 7                     CONTOUR Control Operation .............................. 55
       Resetting Memories (Only) ................................ 7                      IF SHIFT Operation ............................................... 56
       Menu Resetting ................................................... 7              WIDTH (IF DSP Bandwidth) Tuning .................... 57
       Full Reset ............................................................ 7             Using IF Shift and Width Together ................... 57
Installation and Interconnections ............................... 8                      IF Notch Filter Operation ....................................... 58
   Antenna Considerations ........................................... 8                  Digital Noise Reduction (DNR) Operation ............ 59
   About Coaxial Cable ................................................ 8                Digital Notch Filter (DNF) Operation ................... 59
   Grounding ................................................................ 9          NARROW (NAR) One-Touch IF Filter Selection . 60
   Connection of Antenna and                                                             IF Noise Blanker (NB) Operation .......................... 61
   FP-2000 Power Supply .......................................... 10                Tools for Comfortable and Effective Reception ...... 62
   Connection of Microphone and Headphone .......... 11                                  AGC (Automatic Gain Control) ............................. 62
   Key, Keyer, and Computer-Driven Keying                                                    SLOPED AGC Operation ................................. 63
   Interconnections ..................................................... 12             Mute Feature (Main (VFO-A) Band) ..................... 63
   VL-1000 Linear Amplifier Interconnections .......... 13                           SSB/AM Mode Transmission .................................... 64
   Interfacing to Other Linear Amplifiers ................... 14                     Using the Automatic Antenna Tuner ........................ 66
Plug/Connector Pinout Diagrams ............................ 15                           ATU Operation ....................................................... 66
Front Panel Controls & Switches ............................. 16                             About ATU Operation ...................................... 67
Display Indications .................................................... 28              Lithium Battery Replacement ................................ 68
Rear Panel .................................................................. 31     Enhancing Transmit Signal Quality ......................... 69
FP-2000 Switches & Jacks ........................................ 34                     Adjusting the SSB Transmitted Bandwidth ........... 69
Basic Operation: Receiving on Amateur Bands ...... 35                                    Parametric Microphone Equalizer ......................... 70
   Operation on 60-Meter (5 MHz) Band                                                    Using the Speech Processor ................................... 72
   (U.S. version only) ................................................. 38              Low- Distortion CLASS-A Operation .................... 74
   CLAR (Clarifier) Operation on Main (VFO-A) ..... 39                               Transmitter Convenience Features .......................... 76
   LOCK ..................................................................... 40         Voice Memory ........................................................ 76
   DIM ........................................................................ 40           Voice Memory Operation from
Convenience Features ................................................ 42                     the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad ..... 77
   Dual Receive .......................................................... 42            VOX (Automatic TX/RX Switching using Voice Control) ............. 78
       Using Headphones for Dual Receive ............... 43                              MONITOR ............................................................. 78
       Sideband Diversity Reception .......................... 43                        Split Operation Using the TX Clarifier .................. 79
       Bandwidth Diversity Reception ....................... 44                          Split-Frequency Operation ..................................... 80
   P.BACK (Audio Playback) from                                                              VFO Tracking Feature ...................................... 80
   Main (VFO-A) Receiver ........................................ 45                         Quick Split Operation ....................................... 81
       P.BACK feature from                                                           CW Mode Operation ................................................. 82
       the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad ..... 45                                  Setup for Straight Key
   “MY Bands” Operation .......................................... 46                    (and Straight Key emulation) Operation ................ 82
   Band Stack Operation ............................................ 47                  Using the Built-in Electronic Keyer ....................... 83
   C.S (Custom Switch) .............................................. 47                     Full Break-in (QSK) Operation ........................ 83
   Rotator Control Functions ...................................... 48                       Setting the Keyer Weight
   More Frequency Navigation Techniques ............... 49                                   (Dot/Space:Dash) Ratio .................................... 84
       Keyboard Frequency Entry .............................. 49                            Selecting the Keyer Operating Mode ............... 84
       Using the [SUB VFO-B] knob ......................... 49
       Using the UP/DOWN switches of
       the supplied MH-31B8 Hand Microphone ........ 49
   Receiver Operation (Front End Block Diagram) ... 50
   IPO (Intercept Point Optimization) ........................ 51
   ATT ........................................................................ 51
   RF Gain (SSB/CW/AM Modes) ............................ 52



Page 2                                                                                                 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CW Convenience Features ........................................ 85            VFO and Memory Scanning ................................... 105
   CW Spotting (Zero-Beating) .................................. 85               VFO Scanning ...................................................... 105
   Using CW Reverse ................................................. 86          Memory Scan ....................................................... 106
   CW Delay Time Setting ......................................... 87          PMS ........................................................................... 107
   CW Pitch Adjustment ............................................. 87        Packet Operation ..................................................... 108
   Contest Memory Keyer .......................................... 88             Packet Setup (Including Subcarrier Frequency) .. 108
       Message Memory ............................................. 88            Basic Setup .......................................................... 108
           Transmitting in the Beacon Mode .............. 89                   RTTY (Radio Teletype) Operation ......................... 109
       TEXT Memory ................................................. 90           Setting Up for RTTY Operation ........................... 109
           Contest Number Programming ................... 91                      Basic Setup .......................................................... 109
           Decrementing the Contest Number ............. 92                    Miscellaneous AFSK-Based Data Modes .............. 110
   Contest Memory Keyer                                                        About the Transverter Output Terminal ............... 111
   (Using the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad) ...... 92                   Menu Mode .............................................................. 112
       Message Memory ............................................. 92            Using the Menu .................................................... 112
       TEXT Memory ................................................. 94               Menu Mode Reset .......................................... 112
FM Mode Operation ................................................. 96            AGC Group .......................................................... 116
   Basic Operation ...................................................... 96      DISPLAY Group .................................................. 116
   Repeater Operation ................................................ 97         DVS Group .......................................................... 117
Memory Operation .................................................... 98          KEYER Group ..................................................... 117
   Convenient Memory functions ............................... 98                 GENERAL Group ................................................ 118
   QMB (Quick Memory Bank) ................................. 99                   S IF SFT Group .................................................... 120
   Standard Memory Operation ................................ 100                 MODE-AM Group ............................................... 120
       Memory Storage ............................................. 100           MODE-CW Group ............................................... 121
       Memory Channel Recall ................................. 100                MODE-DAT Group ............................................. 122
       Checking a Memory Channel's Status ............ 101                        MODE-FM Group ............................................... 123
       Erasing Memory Channel Data ...................... 101                     MODE-RTY Group .............................................. 123
       Moving Memory Data to                                                      MODE-SSB Group .............................................. 124
       the Main Band (VFO-A) ................................ 102                 RX AUDIO Group ............................................... 124
       Memory Tune Operation ................................ 102                 RX DSP Group .................................................... 125
   Memory Groups ................................................... 103          SCOPE Group ...................................................... 126
       Memory Group Assignment ........................... 103                    TUNING Group ................................................... 127
       Choosing the Desired Memory Group ........... 103                          TX AUDIO Group ............................................... 128
Operation on Alaska Emergency Frequency:                                          TX GNRL Group ................................................. 129
5167.5 kHz (U.S. Version Only) .............................. 104              Specifications ............................................................ 132
                                                                               Installation of the Optional Filter
                                                                               (YF-122C & YF-122CN) ......................................... 134




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                                                          Page 3
ACCESSORIES & OPTIONS
                                      SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
External Power Supply (FP-2000)        1 pc
Hand Microphone (MH-31B8)              1 pc    A07890001
AC Power Cord                          1 pc    T9017882: USA
                                               T29013285: Europe
                                               T9013283A: Australia
DC Power Cord                          1 pc    T9207392
Spare Fuse (15 A)                      1 pc    Q0000136
4-pin DIN Plug                         1 pc    P0091004
5-pin DIN Plug                         1 pc    P0091006
1/4-inch 3-contact Plug                1 pcs   P0090008
3.5 mm 3-contact Plug                  1 pcs   P0091046
3.5 mm 2-contact Plug                  1 pcs   P0090034
RCA Plug                               2 pcs   P0091365
Operating Manual                       1 pc
CAT Reference Book                     1 pc
Warranty Card                          1 pc


                                         AVAILABLE OPTIONS
MD-200A8X                 Ultra-High-Fidelity Desk-Top Microphone
YH-77STA                  Lightweight Stereo Headphone
SP-2000                   External Speaker with Audio Filter
VL-1000/VP-1000           Linear Amplifier/AC Power Supply
DMU-2000                  Data Management Unit
RF µTuning Kit A          For 160 m Band
RF µTuning Kit B          For 80/40 m Bands
RF µTuning Kit C          For 30/20 m Bands
FH-2                      Remote Control Keypad
YF-122C                   Collins® CW Filter (500 Hz/2 kHz: –6 dB/–60 dB)
YF-122CN                  Collins® CW Filter (300 Hz/1 kHz: –6 dB/–60 dB)
T9101556                  Rotator Connection Cable




Page 4                                                                 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
NOTE




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL    Page 5
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
                                         EXTENDING THE FRONT FEET
In order to elevate the front panel for easy viewing, the
front left and right feet of the bottom case may be extended.
    Pull the front legs outward from the bottom panel.
    Rotate the legs counter-clockwise to lock them in the
    extended position. Be sure the legs have locked se-
    curely in place, because the transceiver is quite heavy
    and an unlocked leg could result in damage, should
    the transceiver move suddenly.




Retracting the Front Feet
   Rotate the legs clockwise, and push them inward while
   rotating to the right.
   The front feel should now be locked in the retracted
   position.




                            ADJUSTING THE MAIN TUNING DIAL TORQUE
The torque (drag) of the Main Tuning Dial knob may be
adjusted according to your preferences. Simply hold down
the rear skirt of the knob, and while holding it in place
rotate the knob itself to the right to reduce the drag or to
the left to increase the drag. Available adjustment range is
120°.
                                                Hold the Skirt




                                                     TIGHTEN     LOOSEN




Page 6                                                                    FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
                                   RESETTING THE MICROPROCESSOR
RESETTING MEMORIES (ONLY)
Use this procedure to reset (clear out) the Memory chan-
nels previously stored, without affecting any configura-
tion changes you may have made to the Menu settings.
1. Press the front panel’s [POWER] switch to turn the
   transceiver off.
2. Press and hold in the [A M] button; while holding it
   in, press and hold in the front panel’s [POWER] switch     [POWER] button    [A M] button
   to turn the transceiver on. Once the transceiver comes
   on, you may release the [A M] button.


MENU RESETTING
Use this procedure to restore the Menu settings to their
factory defaults, without affecting the memories you have
programmed.
1. Press the front panel’s [POWER] switch to turn the
   transceiver off.
2. Press and hold in the [MENU] button; while holding it
   in, press and hold in the front panel’s [POWER] switch     [POWER] button   [MENU] button
   to turn the transceiver on. Once the transceiver comes
   on, you may release the [MENU] button.


FULL RESET
Use this procedure to restore all Menu and Memory set-                         [FAST] button
tings to their original factory defaults. All Memories will
be cleared out by this procedure.
1. Press the front panel’s [POWER] switch to turn the
   transceiver off.
2. Press and hold in the [FAST] and [LOCK] buttons;
   while holding them in, press and hold in the front
   panel’s [POWER] switch to turn the transceiver on.
   Once the transceiver comes on, you may release the         [POWER] button     [LOCK] button
   other two switches.
IMPORTANT NOTE
   When the optional DMU-2000 is connected and is
   turned on the [POWER] switch, the DMU-2000’s data
   is also reset when perform the full reset of the FT-
   2000D.
   When the optional RF uTUNE Kit is used, perform
   the full reset of the FT-2000D after taking the optional
   RF µTUNE Kit off.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                        Page 7
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
                                          ANTENNA CONSIDERATIONS
The FT-2000D is designed for use with any antenna system providing a 50 Ohm resistive impedance at the desired oper-
ating frequency. While minor excursions from the 50-Ohm specification are of no consequence, the transceiver’s Auto-
matic Antenna Tuner may not be able to reduce the impedance mismatch to an acceptable value if the Standing Wave Ratio
(SWR) present at the Antenna jack is greater than 3:1.
Every effort should, therefore, be made to ensure that the impedance of the antenna system utilized with the FT-2000D be
as close as possible to the specified 50-Ohm value.
Note that the “G5RV” type antenna does not provide a 50-Ohm impedance on all HF Amateur bands, and an external wide-
range antenna coupler must be used with this antenna type.
Any antenna to be used with the FT-2000D must, ultimately, be fed with 50 Ohm coaxial cable. Therefore, when using a
“balanced” antenna such as a dipole, remember that a balun or other matching/balancing device must be used so as to
ensure proper antenna performance.
The same precautions apply to any additional (receive-only) antennas connected to the RX ANT jack; if your receive-only
antennas do not have an impedance near 50 Ohms at the operating frequency, you may need to install an external antenna
tuner to obtain optimum performance.

                                            ABOUT COAXIAL CABLE
Use high-quality 50-Ohm coaxial cable for the lead-in to your FT-2000D transceiver. All efforts at providing an efficient
antenna system will be wasted if poor quality, lossy coaxial cable is used. This transceiver utilizes standard “M” (“PL-259”)
type connectors, except for the “RX OUT” BNC connector.


                                 1/16''                                                       Adapter


                                             3/4''
                                                                                                            3/4''
                                          1 1/8''
                                                                                                   1/8''




                                                                                                      3/8'' 5/8''




                                               TYPICAL PL-259 INSTALLATION




Page 8                                                                          FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
                                                     GROUNDING
The FT-2000D transceiver, like any other HF communications apparatus, requires an effective ground system for maxi-
mum electrical safety and best communications effectiveness. A good ground system can contribute to station efficiency in
a number of ways:
   It can minimize the possibility of electrical shock to the operator.
   It can minimize RF currents flowing on the shield of the coaxial cable and the chassis of the transceiver; such currents
   may lead to radiation which can cause interference to home entertainment devices or laboratory test equipment.
   It can minimize the possibility of erratic transceiver/accessory operation caused by RF feedback and/or improper cur-
   rent flow through logic devices.
An effective earth ground system may take several forms; for a more complete discussion, see an appropriate RF engineer-
ing text. The information below is intended only as a guideline.
Typically, the ground connection consists of one or more copper-clad steel rods, driven into the ground. If multiple ground
rods are used, they should be positioned in a “V” configuration, and bonded together at the apex of the “V” which is nearest
the station location. Use a heavy, braided cable (such as the discarded shield from type RG-213 coaxial cable) and strong
cable clamps to secure the braided cable(s) to the ground rods. Be sure to weatherproof the connections to ensure many
years of reliable service. Use the same type of heavy, braided cable for the connections to the station ground bus (described
below).
Inside the station, a common ground bus consisting of a copper pipe of at least 25 mm (1”) diameter should be used. An
alternative station ground bus may consist of a wide copper plate (single-sided circuit board material is ideal) secured to the
bottom of the operating desk. Grounding connections from individual devices such as transceivers, power supplies, and
data communications devices (TNCs, etc.) should be made directly to the ground bus using a heavy, braided cable.
Do not make ground connections from one electrical device to another, and thence to the ground bus. This so-called “Daisy-
Chain” grounding technique may nullify any attempt at effective radio frequency grounding. See the drawing below for
examples of proper grounding techniques.
Inspect the ground system - inside the station as well as outside - on a regular basis so as to ensure maximum performance
and safety.
Besides following the above guidelines carefully, note that household or industrial gas lines must never be used in an
attempt to establish an electrical ground. Cold water pipes may, in some instances, help in the grounding effort, but gas lines
represent a significant explosion hazard, and must never be used.


      Transceiver        Linear             TNC                          Transceiver        Linear              TNC
                        Amplifier                                                          Amplifier


                                                                                                "Daisy Chain"

              PROPER GROUND CONNECTION                                          IMPROPER GROUND CONNECTION




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                             Page 9
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
                CONNECTION OF ANTENNA AND FP-2000 POWER SUPPLY
Please refer to the illustration for the proper connection of the antenna coaxial cables and the FP-2000 Power Supply.




                                          ANTENNA "1”




                                                        ANTENNA "2”




   Use a short, thick, braided cable
                                                                                            NOTE
   to connect your station equipment
                                                                      Be sure that the FT-2000D’s [POWER] switch and
   to the buried ground rod (or alter-
                                                                      the FP-2000’s [POWER] switch are both turned
   native earth ground system).
                                                                      off before you plug or unplug any power cable to/
                                                                      from the FP-2000. This will avoid the possibility
                                                                      of potentially-damaging spikes or electrical shock.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
   Do not position this apparatus in a location with direct exposure to sunshine.
   Do not position this apparatus in a location exposed to dust and/or high humidity.
   Do not place equipment, books, or papers on top of the transceiver. Also, provide a few centimeters of space on either
   side of the transceiver.
   Ensure adequate ventilation around this apparatus, so as to prevent heat build-up and possible reduction of performance
   due to high heat.
   Do not install this apparatus in a mechanically-unstable location, or where objects may fall onto this product from
   above.
   To minimize the possibility of interference to home entertainment devices, take all precautionary steps including sepa-
   ration of TV/FM antennas from Amateur transmitting antennas to the greatest extent possible, and keep transmitting
   coaxial cables separated from cables connected to home entertainment devices.
   Ensure that the AC power cord is not subject to undue stress or bending, which could damage the cable or cause it to be
   accidentally unplugged from the rear panel AC input jack.
   Be absolutely certain to install your transmitting antenna(s) such that they cannot possibly come in contact with TV/FM
   radio or other antennas, nor with outside power or telephone lines.

Page 10                                                                         FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
             CONNECTION OF MICROPHONE AND HEADPHONE




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                             Page 11
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
          KEY, KEYER, AND COMPUTER-DRIVEN KEYING INTERCONNECTIONS
The FT-2000D includes a host of features for the CW operator, the functions of which will be detailed in the “Operation”
section later. Besides the built-in Electronic Keyer, two key jacks are provided, one each on the front and rear panels, for
convenient connection to keying devices.
The Menu system allows you to configure the front and rear panel KEY jacks according to the device you wish to connect.
For example, you may connect your keyer paddle to the front panel KEY jack, and use Menu item “052 A1A F-TYPE” for
paddle input, while connecting the rear panel’s KEY jack to the keying line from your personal computer (which emulates
a “straight key” for connection purposes), and configure the rear panel jack using Menu item “054 A1A R-TYPE.”
Both KEY jacks on the FT-2000D utilize “Positive” keying voltage. Key-up voltage is approximately +5V DC, and key-
down current is approximately 1 mA. When connecting a key or other device to the KEY jacks, use only a 3-pin (“stereo”)
1/4” phone plug; a 2-pin plug will place a short between the ring and (grounded) shaft of the plug, resulting in a constant
“key-down” condition in some circumstances.




Page 12                                                                        FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
                                  VL-1000 LINEAR AMPLIFIER INTERCONNECTIONS
Be sure that both the FT-2000D and VL-1000 are turned off, then follow the installation recommendations contained in
the illustration.
       Set the “ATT” switch to the “ON” position on the front panel of the VL-1000. The 200-Watt power output
       from the FT-2000D is far in excess of that which is required to drive the VL-1000 to its full rated output.
NOTE:
  Refer to the VL-1000 Operating Manual for details regarding amplifier operation.
  Do not attempt to connect or disconnect coaxial cables when your hands are wet.



       About the CONTROL Cable
   The VL-1000 may be operated with the FT-
   2000D whether or not the CONTROL Cable is
   connected; however, the CONTROL Cable al-
   lows you to tune up the amplifier automatically
   by just pressing the [F SET] or [TUNE] key on                                                     To link the FT-2000D and VL-1000 Power
   the VL-1000 to transmit a carrier for tuning pur-                                                 switches, set the VL-1000 REMOTE switch to
   poses.                                                                                            the “ON” position.



                                                                                               ANTENNA CABLE (Not Supplied)
                                                                                                        HF Vertical Antenna


                                                                                                                                      HF Dipole Antenna


                                                                                                                                                                   HF Beam Antenna
                                     50 MHz Antenna




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               INPUT 1
                                                                                      ~AC IN




                                                                                                                              ANT 1


                                                                                                                                                          ANT 2


                                                                                                                                                                                     ANT 3
                          ANT 1



                                                      ANT 2




                                                                                                        ANT 1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             INPUT 1
                                                                                                                                                                                              REMOTE                            PTT 1
                                                                                                                                                                                                            ON
                                                                                                                                                                                                            OFF
                                                                                                        ANT 2                                                                                BAND DATA 1                        PTT 2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             INPUT 2


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                ALC 1

                                                                                                        ANT 3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     CONTROL
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                ALC 2


                                                                                                        ANT 4                                                                                                                                       DC48V IN
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                GND
                                                                                                                                                                                             BAND DATA 2
                                                                                                                                                                  BAND-DATA 1




                                                                                                                                                                                                                  ALC 1




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        DC 48V IN
                                                                                                                                                                                              BAND-DATA 2
                                  EXT ALC




                                                                                                                                                                                                                          GND




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               CONTROL
              BAND DATA




                                                              TX REQ




                                                                       BAND DATA CABLE (Supplied w/VL-1000)
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     VP-1000


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         VP-1000




                                                                          CONTROL CABLE (Supplied w/VL-1000)

                                                                                  ALC CABLE (Supplied w/VL-1000)




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                                                                                                                                                Page 13
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
                                          INTERFACING TO OTHER LINEAR AMPLIFIERS



                             50 MHz Antenna




                                                                                   HF Antenna




                                                                                                                 INPUT 1
                                                                         ~AC IN




                                                                                                ANT 1
                     ANT 1



                                              ANT 2




                                                                                  RF OUT                 RF IN
                                                                                                                                 GND   FUSE   AC   E   ALC   E   RY
      GND




                                                      EXT ALC



                                                                TX GND




NOTE                                                                                                                       GND

  The TX/RX switching in the linear amplifier is con-
  trolled by switching components in the transceiver. The
  relay circuit of the FT-2000D used for this switching
  is capable of switching AC voltage of 100 Volts at up
  to 300 mA, or DC voltages or 60 V at 200 mA or 30 V
  at up to 1 Amp. In order to engage the switching relay,
  use Menu item “144 tGEn ETX-GND;” set this Menu
  item to “EnA (Enable)” to activate the amplifier switch-
  ing relay.
  The specified range for ALC voltage to be used with
  the FT-2000D is 0 to –4 Volts DC.
  Amplifier systems utilizing different ALC voltages will
  not work correctly with the FT-2000D, and their ALC
  lines must not be connected if this is the case.




Page 14                                                                                                 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
PLUG /CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS
                 MIC                                  CAT                           DC IN 13. 8 V
                               UP                              N/A
                               +5V                             SERIAL OUT
                               DOWN                            SERIAL IN
                                                               N/A
                               FAST
                                                               GND
                               GND
                                                               N/A
                               PTT                             RTS
                               MIC GND                         CTS
                               MIC                             NC

      (as viewed from front panel)           (as viewed from rear panel)            (as viewed from rear panel)

         DC IN 50 V                            BAND DATA                                 PACKET
                                                               +13V
                                                               TX GND
                                                                                                       DATA IN
                                                               GND
                                                                                                       GND
                                                               BAND DATA A
                                                                                                       PACKET PTT
                                                               BAND DATA B
                                                                                                       DATA OUT
                                                               BAND DATA C
                                                                                                       BUSY
                                                               BAND DATA D
                                                               TX INH

      (as viewed from rear panel)            (as viewed from rear panel)            (as viewed from rear panel)

              RTTY                         ROT (ROTATOR)                                  PHONE

                                                             CW ROTATION                  SUB (VFO-B)
                               SHIFT                         CCW ROTATION
                               RX OUT                        SPEED
                               PTT                           DIRECTION
                               GND                           GND
                                                             NC
                                                                               MAIN (VFO-A)      GND

      (as viewed from rear panel)            (as viewed from rear panel)

     REM (REMOTE)                                  AF OUT                              EXT SPKR

              GND                                      SUB (VFO-B)                         GND




       SIGNAL                               MAIN (VFO-A)    GND                     SIGNAL



         RCA PLUG                                                          KEY
                                          For Internal Keyer                     For Straight Key
                GND or (---)




                                          DOT DASH COMMON                        KEY        GND
       SIGNAL or (+)
                                                                                       Do not use
                                                                                       2-conductor type plug
IMPORTANT NOTE:
The µ-TUNE, DMU, and PGM connectors are special connectors for this transceiver. Please do not connect any accessory
or other device not specifically approved by Vertex Standard. Failure to observe this precaution may cause damage not
covered by the Limited Warranty on this apparatus.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                 Page 15
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES




  POWER Switch                                                MOX Switch
  Press and hold in this switch for one second to turn the    Pressing this button engages the PTT (Push to Talk)
  transceiver on. Similarly, press and hold in this switch    circuit, to activate the transmitter (the LED inside this
  for one second to turn the transceiver off. (The FP-        button will glow red). It must be turned off (the red
  2000’s [POWER] switch must also be set to on “I”            LED will be off) for reception. This button replicates
  before this switch will function.)                          the action of the Push to Talk (PTT) switch on the mi-
  ADVICE:                                                     crophone. When engaging the [MOX] button (the LED
      The main power switch for the system is located         inside this button glows red) or otherwise causing a
      on the front panel of the FP-2000 Power Supply.         transmission to be started, be certain you have either
      When the FP-2000 main power switch is pushed            an antenna or 50-Ohm dummy load connected to the
      down on the “I” side, the FP-2000 is turned on,         selected Antenna jack.
      and the FT-2000D is placed in the “standby” state.
      If the FP-2000 main power switch is not turned
      on, it is not possible to turn on the FT-2000D trans-
      ceiver. For more details about the main power
      switch location on the FP-2000, please see the dis-
      cussion on page 34.
      If you press this switch momentarily while the trans-
      ceiver is turned on, the transceiver’s audio will be
      muted for three seconds.




Page 16                                                                 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
  TUNE Switch                                                  Microphone Connector
  This is the on/off switch for the FT-2000D’s Auto-           This 8-pin jack accepts input from a microphone uti-
  matic Antenna Tuner.                                         lizing a traditional YAESU HF-transceiver pinout.
  Pressing this button momentarily places the antenna
                                                               DIM Switch
  tuner in line between the transmitter final amplifier and
                                                               Press this button to lower the illumination intensity of
  the antenna jack (“         ” icon will appear in the dis-
                                                               the analog meter and the frequency display. Press it
  play). Reception is not affected.
                                                               once more to restore full brightness.
  Pressing and holding in this button for 1/2 second, while
                                                               ADVICE:
  receiving in an amateur band, activates the transmitter
                                                               Menu Items “008 diSP DIM MTR” and “009 diSP
  for a few seconds while the automatic antenna tuner
                                                               DIM VFD” allow you to configure the dimming levels
  rematches the antenna system impedance for minimum
                                                               for the analog meter and the frequency display inde-
  SWR. The resulting setting is automatically stored in
                                                               pendently, so you can customize the brightness levels.
  one of the antenna tuner’s 100 memories, for instant
  automatic recall later when the receiver is tuned near       VOX Switch
  the same frequency.                                          This button enables automatic voice-actuated transmit-
  Pressing this button momentarily, while the Tuner is         ter switching in the SSB, AM, and FM modes. While
  engaged, will take the Automatic Antenna tuner out of        activated, the LED inside this button glows red. The
  the transmit line.                                           controls affecting VOX operation are the front panel’s
  NOTE:                                                        [VOX] and [DELAY] knobs. By proper adjustment of
  When the Automatic Antenna Tuner is tuning itself, a         these controls, hands-free voice-actuated operation is
  signal is being transmitted. Therefore, be absolutely        possible.
  certain that an antenna or dummy load is connected to
                                                               ANTENNA Select Switch
  the selected antenna jack before pressing and holding
                                                               [1/2]: Pressing this selects either the ANT 1 or 2 jack
  in the [TUNE] button to start antenna tuning.
                                                               on the rear panel, and allows convenient antenna
  PHONES Jack                                                  switching at the press of button. The selected antenna
  A 1/4-inch, 3-contact jack accepts either monaural or        jack is indicated at the upper left corner of the display.
  stereo headphones with 2- or 3-contact plugs. When a         [RX]: Normally, the antenna connected to the ANT 1
  plug is inserted, the loudspeaker is disabled. With ste-     or 2 jack is used for receive (and always used for trans-
  reo headphones such as the optional YH-77STA, you            mit). When the [RX] switch is pressed, an antenna con-
  can monitor both Main (VFO-A) and Sub (VFO-B)                nected to the RX ANT will be used during receive.
  receiver channels at the same time during Dual Re-
                                                               MONI (Monitor) Switch
  ceive operation.
                                                               This button enables the transmit monitor in the SSB,
  NOTE:
                                                               CW, AM, and FM modes. While activated, the “           ”
  When wearing headphones, we recommend that you
                                                               icon appears in the display. Adjustment of the Monitor
  turn the AF Gain levels down to their lowest settings
                                                               level is accomplished using the [MONI] knob.
  before turning power on, to minimize the impact on
                                                               ADVICE:
  your hearing caused by audio “pops” during switch-
                                                               When using headphones, the Monitor is highly useful
  on.
                                                               for making adjustments to the Parametric Equalizer or
  KEY Jack                                                     other voice quality adjustments, because the voice qual-
  This 1/4-inch, 3-contact jack accepts a CW key or keyer      ity heard in the headphones is such a “natural” repro-
  paddles (for the built-in electronic keyer), or output       duction of the transmitted audio quality.
  from an external electronic keyer. Pinout is shown on
  page 15. Key up voltage is 5 V, and key down current
  is 1 mA. This jack may be configured for keyer, “Bug,”
  “straight key,” or computer keying interface operation
  via Menu item “052 A1A F-TYPE” (see page 121).
  There is another jack with the same name on the rear
  panel, and it may be configured independently for In-
  ternal Keyer or pseudo-straight-key operation.
  NOTE:
  You cannot use a 2-contact plug in this jack (to do so
  produces a constant “key down” condition).




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                   Page 17
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES




  PROC (Processor) Switch                                      KEYER Switch
  This button enables the Parametric Microphone Equal-         This button toggles the internal CW keyer on and off.
  izer and Speech Processor for SSB/AM transmission.           While activated, the “       ” icon appears in the dis-
  When the Parametric Microphone Equalizer is acti-            play. The Keyer sending speed and the CW Hang Time
  vated, the “       ” icon appears in the display.            are adjusted via the front panel’s [SPEED] and [DE-
  When the Speech Processor is activated, the “            ”   LAY] knobs.
  and “       ” icons appear in the display. Adjustment
                                                               ATT Switch
  of the Processor level is accomplished using the
                                                               This button selects the degree of attenuation, if any, to
  [PROC] knob.
                                                               be applied to the receiver input.
  ADVICE:
                                                               Available selections are –6 dB, –12 dB, –18 dB, or
      The Speech Processor is a tool for increasing the
                                                               OFF, and the selected attenuation level appears in the
      average power output through a compression tech-
                                                               ATT column of the Receiver Configuration Indicator
      nique. However, if the [PROC] knob is advanced
                                                               on the display.
      too far, the increase in compression becomes
                                                               ADVICE:
      counter-productive, as intelligibility will suffer. We
                                                                   The Attenuator affects both the Main (VFO-A) and
      recommend that you monitor the sound of your sig-
                                                                   Sub (VFO-B) receivers.
      nal using the Monitor (with headphones).
                                                                   The Attenuator may be used in conjunction with
      When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management
                                                                   the [IPO] switch to provide two stages of signal
      Unit is connected, you may use the Audio Scope/
                                                                   reduction when an extremely strong signal is being
      Oscilloscope page to help you adjust the setting of
                                                                   received.
      the compression level of the Speech Processor for
      optimum performance using your voice and micro-
      phone.




Page 18                                                                  FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
  IPO (INTERCEPT POINT OPTIMIZATION) Switch                     NB Switch
  This button may be used to set the optimum front end          This button turns the IF Noise Blanker on and off.
  characteristics of the receiver circuit for a very strong-    Press this button momentarily to reduce a short-dura-
  signal environment. Available selections are AMP 1            tion pulse noise; the “     ” icon will appear in the dis-
  (low distortion amplifier), AMP 2 (2-stage low-distor-        play.
  tion RF amplifier), or ON (bypasses the front end RF          Press and hold in this button for one second to reduce
  amplifier), and the selected receiver RF amplifier ap-        a longer-duration man-made pulse noise; the “            ”
  pears at the IPO column of the Receiver Configuration         icon will blink for three seconds, then will appear con-
  Indicator in the display.                                     tinuously in the display.
  ADVICE:                                                       Press this button again to disable the noise blanker;
  The IPO switch affects both the Main (VFO-A) and              the “     ” icon will disappear.
  Sub (VFO-B) receivers.                                        ADVICE:
                                                                When you press (or press and hold) the [NB] button
  R.FLT Switch
                                                                momentarily, it affects the Main band (VFO-A) re-
  This button selects the bandwidth for the Main Band
                                                                ceiver. When you press the [B] button, then press (or
  (VFO-A) receiver’s first IF Roofing Filter. Available
                                                                press and hold in) the [NB] button (within five sec-
  selections are 3 kHz, 6 kHz, 15 kHz, or Auto, and the
                                                                onds of pressing the [B] button), it affects the Sub band
  selected bandwidth appears in the FLT column of the
                                                                (VFO-B) receiver.
  Receiver Configuration Indicator on the display.
  ADVICE:                                                       METER Switch
      The Roofing Filter selection applies to the Main          This control switch determines the function of the meter
      band (VFO-A) only.                                        during transmission.
      Because the roofing filter is in the first IF, the pro-   COMP: Indicates the speech compressor level (SSB
      tection it provides against interference is quite sig-              mode only).
      nificant. When set to AUTO, the SSB bandwidth is          ALC: Indicates the relative ALC voltage.
      6 kHz, while CW is 3 kHz and FM/RTTY are 15               PO:       Indicates the average power output level.
      kHz. On a crowded SSB band, however, you may              SWR: Indicates the Standing Wave Ratio (Forward:
      wish to select the 3 kHz filter, for the maximum                    Reflected).
      possible interference rejection.                          ID:       Indicates the final amplifier drain current.
                                                                VDD: Indicates the final amplifier drain voltage.
  AGC Switch
  This button selects the AGC characteristics for the re-       MONI         PROC Knobs
  ceiver. Available selections are FAST, MID, SLOW,             MONI Knob
  or AUTO, and the “AGC” icon will change according             The inner [MONI] knob adjust the audio level of the
  to the AGC characteristics selected.                          transmit monitor during transmission (relative to the
  Press the [AGC] button repeatedly to select the de-           AF GAIN control), when activated by the [MONI]
  sired receiver-recovery time constant. Press and hold         button.
  in the [AGC] button for two seconds to disable the            PROC Knob
  AGC (for testing or weak-signal reception).                   The outer [PROC] knob sets the compression (input)
  When the [AGC] button is pressed independently, it            level of the transmitter RF Speech Processor in the SSB
  applies to the Main band (VFO-A) receiver.                    and AM modes, when activated by the [PROC] but-
  When you press the [B] button, followed by the [AGC]          ton.
  button (within five seconds of pressing the [B] switch),
                                                                BK-IN Switch
  it affects the Sub band (VFO-B) receiver.
                                                                This button turns the CW break-in capability on and
  ADVICE:
                                                                off. While the CW break-in is activated, the “    ”
  If the AGC receiver-recovery time is set to “Off” by
                                                                icon appears in the display.
  pressing and holding in the [AGC] button, the S-meter
  will no longer deflect. Additionally, you will likely en-     SPOT Switch
  counter distortion on stronger signals, as the IF ampli-      This button turns on the CW receiver spotting tone; by
  fiers and the following stages are probably being over-       matching the SPOT tone to that of the incoming CW
  loaded.                                                       signal (precisely the same pitch), you will be “zero
                                                                beating” your transmitted signal on to the frequency of
                                                                the other station.
                                                                The Sub (VFO-B) frequency display will indicate the
                                                                offset tone frequency when this button is pressed.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                    Page 19
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES




  SPEED          PITCH Knobs                                 NB       SQL Knobs
  SPEED Knob                                                 NB Knob
  The inner [SPEED] knob adjusts the keying speed of         The inner [NB] knob adjusts the noise blanking level
  the internal CW keyer (4 ~ 60 WPM). Clockwise rota-        when the (analog) IF noise blanker is activated by press-
  tion increases the sending speed.                          ing the [NB] button.
  When turning this knob while pressing the [KEYER]          SQL Knob
  button, the Sub (VFO-B) frequency display shows the        The outer [SQL] knob sets the signal level threshold
  keying speed.                                              at which the Main (VFO-A) receiver audio is muted,
  PITCH Knob                                                 in all modes. It is very useful during local rag-chews,
  The outer [PITCH] knob selects your preferred CW           to eliminate noise between incoming transmissions.
  tone pitch (from 300 ~ 1050 Hz, in 50 Hz increments).      This control is normally kept fully counter-clockwise
  The Tx sidetone, receiver IF passband, and display         (off), except when scanning and during FM operation.
  offset from the BFO (carrier) frequency are all affected
  simultaneously. The Pitch control setting also affects
  the operation of the CW Tuning Indicator, as the cen-
  ter frequency of the CW Tuning Indicator will follow
  the setting of this control.




Page 20                                                                FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
  MIC       RF PWR Knobs                                     SUB AF GAIN              SUB RF GAIN
  MIC Knob                                                   AF GAIN Knob
  The inner [MIC] knob adjusts the microphone input          The inner [SUB AF GAIN] knob sets the Sub (VFO-
  level for (non-processed) SSB transmission.                B) receiver’s audio volume level. Typically, you will
  ADVICE:                                                    operate with this control set between the 9 o’clock and
  If you adjust the MIC Gain while speaking in a some-       10 o’clock positions.
  what-louder-than-normal voice level, watch the ALC         RF GAIN Knob
  level and adjust the MIC Gain so that the ALC reaches      The outer [SUB RF GAIN] knob is the Sub (VFO-B)
  just to the right edge of the ALC scale. Then, when        receiver’s RF gain control, which adjusts the gain of
  you speak in a more normal voice level, you’ll be cer-     the Sub (VFO-B) receiver’s RF and IF amplifier stages.
  tain not to be over-driving the mic amplifier stage.       This control is normally left in the fully clockwise po-
  RF PWR Knob                                                sition.
  The outer [RF PWR] knob is the main RF Power out-
                                                             AF GAIN          RF GAIN Knobs
  put control for the transceiver, active in all operating
                                                             AF GAIN Knob
  modes. Clockwise rotation increases the power out-
                                                             The inner [AF GAIN] knob sets the Main (VFO-A)
  put. Adjust this control for the desired power output
                                                             receiver’s audio volume level. Typically, you will op-
  from the FT-2000D.
                                                             erate with this control set between the 9 o’clock and
  VOX        DELAY Knobs                                     10 o’clock positions.
  VOX Knob                                                   RF GAIN Knob
  The inner [VOX] knob sets the gain of the VOX cir-         The outer [RF GAIN ] knob is the Main (VFO-A)
  cuit, to set the level of microphone audio needed to       receiver’s RF gain control, which adjusts the gain of
  activate the transmitter during voice operation while      the Main (VFO-A) receiver’s RF and IF amplifier
  the [VOX] switch is engaged. The [VOX] switch must         stages. This control is normally left in the fully clock-
  be switched “ON” to engage the VOX circuit.                wise position.
  DELAY Knob
                                                             MODE Switches
  The outer [DELAY] knob sets the hang time of the
                                                             [A], [B] Switch
  VOX circuit for voice operation and keying delay for
                                                             Pressing the [A] or [B] button will illuminate the re-
  CW operation.
                                                             spective indicator imbedded within the switch, allow-
  During voice operation, this knob sets the hang time,
                                                             ing adjustment of the operating mode on the Main
  between the moment you stop speaking, and the auto-
                                                             (VFO-A) or Sub (VFO-B) band. Usually, the [A] but-
  matic switch from transmit back to receive. Adjust this
                                                             ton glow Red, signifying that the Main band (VFO-A)
  for smooth VOX operation, so the receiver is only ac-
                                                             is being adjusted. Similarly, pressing the [B] button
  tivated when your transmission is ended and you wish
                                                             will cause its indicator to blink Orange for five sec-
  to receive.
                                                             onds, signifying Sub band (VFO-B) adjustment.
  For CW operation, this knob sets the keying delay,
                                                             ADVICE:
  between the moment you stop sending, and the auto-
                                                             When changing bands, confirm the [A] or [B] button
  matic switch from transmit back to receive during
                                                             illumination status at first, then press the appropriate
  “Semi-break-in” operation. Adjust this just long enough
                                                             [BAND] button, so as to change operating frequencies
  to prevent the receiver from being restored during word
                                                             on the proper (Main or Sub) band.
  spaces at your preferred sending speed.
                                                             [LSB], [USB], [CW], [AM/FM], [RTTY], [PKT] Switch
  SUB SQL Knob                                               Pressing the [ LSB ] , [ USB ] , [ CW ] , [ AM/FM ] ,
  This knob sets the signal level threshold at which Sub     [RTTY], or [PKT] button will select the operating
  (VFO-B) receiver audio is muted, in all modes. It is
                                                             mode. Pressing the [CW ], [AM/FM ], [RTTY ], or
  very useful during local rag-chews, to eliminate noise     [PKT] button multiple times will switch between the
  between incoming transmissions. This control is nor-
                                                             alternate operating features that can be used on these
  mally kept fully counter-clockwise (off), except when
                                                             modes (covered later).
  scanning and during FM operation.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                Page 21
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES




  F1 - F7 / DISPLAY Keys
  These keys can be used to control the Voice Memory          [F7(P.BACK)] key
  capability for the SSB/AM/FM modes, and the Con-            Press and hold in this button for 2 seconds to activate
  test Keyer for the CW mode. You can also play back          the recording feature of the internal Digital Voice Re-
  up to 15 seconds of incoming received audio, as well,       corder. The Voice Recorder allows you to record the
  for verification of a missed callsign or other purposes.    Main band (VFO-A) receiver audio for the most-re-
  When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit             cent 15 seconds. While you’re recording the receiver
  is connected, you can also use the “Function” keys for      audio, the “      ” icon will appear in the display.
  the various functions associated with each “page” of        Press this button momentarily to stop the recording,
  the external display’s capability.                          then press this button momentarily again to play back
  [F1(CH 1)] - [F4(CH 4)] key                                 the receiver audio for the most-recent 15 seconds of
  In the case of Voice Memory, up to 20 seconds of au-        reception before you stopped the recording.
  dio may be stored on each channel. For CW messages,         While playing back the receiver audio, the “      ” icon
  up to 50 characters (“PARIS” specification) may be          will appear in the display.
  stored into each channel. See page 76 (Voice Memory)        Press and hold in this button for 2 seconds again to
  or page 88 (Contest Keyer) for details.                     resume recording.
  [F5(MEM)] key                                               [DISPLAY] key
  This key is pressed for the purpose of storing either a     Press and hold in this key for two seconds to cause the
  Voice Memory or a Contest Keyer Memory channel’s            [F1(CH 1)] - [DISPLAY] keys to act as “Function”
  contents. See page 76 (Voice Memory) or page 88             keys for the optional DMU-2000 Data Management
  (Contest Keyer) for details.                                Unit if connected.
  [F6(DEC)] key
  When utilizing the sequential contest number capability
  of the Contest Keyer, press this key to decrement (back
  up) the current Contest Number by one digit (i.e. to back
  up from #198 to #197, etc.). See page 91 for details.


Page 22                                                                 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
  QMB (Quick Memory Bank) Switches                             C.S Switch
  STO (Store) Button                                           Press this button momentarily to recall a favorite Menu
  Pressing this button copies operating information (fre-      Selection directly.
  quency, mode, bandwidth, and also repeater direction/        To program a Menu selection as the short-cut, press
  shift frequency and CTCSS functions on the FM mode)          the [MENU] button to enter the Menu, then select the
  into consecutive QMB Memories.                               Menu item you want to set as the short-cut. Now press
  RCL (Recall) Button                                          and hold in the [C.S] button for two seconds; this will
  Pressing this button recalls one of up to five Quick         lock in the selected Menu item as the short-cut.
  Memory Bank memories for operation.
                                                               RX Indicator/Switch
  NAR (Narrow) Switch                                          This button, when pressed, engages the Main band
  In the SSB/CW modes on the Main band (VFO-A), this           (VFO-A) receiver; the LED inside this button will glow
  button is used to set the bandwidth of the DSP (digital)     Green when the Main receiver is active.
  IF filters to a user-programmed bandwidth (default           When the Main (VFO-A) receiver is active, pressing
  values are SSB: 1.8 kHz and CW/RTTY/PSK: 300 Hz).            this button momentarily will mute the receiver, and the
  ADVICE:                                                      indicator will blink. Pressing the button once more will
  When [NAR] has been engaged, the [WIDTH] knob                restore receiver operation, and the indicator will glow
  will be disabled, although the [SHIFT] knob still works      Green steadily.
  normally.
                                                               TX Indicator/Switch
  In the SSB/CW modes on the Sub Band (VFO-B), this
                                                               When this button is pushed, the LED inside this button
  button is used to toggle the receiver’s bandwidth be-
                                                               will glow Red, and the transmitter will be engaged on
  tween wide (2.4 kHz) and narrow (1.0 kHz).
                                                               the same frequency and mode as set up for the Main
  ADVICE:
                                                               band (VFO-A) (subject to any Clarifier offset, of
  When the Sub Band’s (VFO-B) optional YF-122C (500
                                                               course).
  Hz) or YF-122CN (300 Hz) CW narrow filter is in-
                                                               ADVICE:
  stalled, the optional narrow filter will be activated when
                                                               If this indicator is not illuminated, it means that the
  the [NAR] switch has been engaged on the CW/RTTY/
                                                               Sub (VFO-B) TX indicator has been selected (it will
  PSK modes.
                                                               be glowing Red). In this case, transmission will be ef-
  In the AM mode, this button is used to toggle the
                                                               fected on the frequency and mode programmed for the
  receiver’s bandwidth between wide (9 kHz) and nar-
                                                               Sub (VFO-B) band.
  row (6 kHz).
  In the FM mode on the 28 MHz and 50 MHz bands,               Main Tuning Dial Knob
  this button is used to toggle the FM deviation/band-         This large knob adjusts the operating frequency of the
  width between wide (±5.0 kHz Dev./25.0 kHz BW)               Main band (VFO-A) or a recalled memory. Clockwise
  and narrow (±2.5 kHz Dev./12.5 kHz BW).                      rotation of this knob increases the frequency. Default
  Pressing the [A ] or [B] button (located above the           tuning increments are 10 Hz (100 Hz in AM and FM
  [MODE] selection buttons) will select either the Main        modes); when the [FAST] button is pressed, the tun-
  band (VFO-A) or Sub band (VFO-B) for individual              ing steps increase. The available steps are:
  bandwidth setting.                                           OPERATING MODE                     1 STEP       1 DIAL ROTATION
                                                               LSB/USB/CW/RTTY/PKT(LSB) 10 Hz (100 Hz) 10 kHz (100 kHz)
  SPLIT Switch                                                 AM/FM/PKT(FM)                   100 Hz (1 kHz) 100 kHz (1 MHz)
  Pressing this button to activate split frequency opera-       Numbers in parentheses indicate steps when the [FAST] button is On.
  tion between the Main band (VFO-A), used for recep-          ADVICE:
  tion, and the Sub band (VFO-B), used for transmis-           The tuning steps for the Main Tuning Dial knob are
  sion. If you press and hold in the [SPLIT] button for        set, at the factory, to 10 Hz per step. Via Menu item
  two seconds, the “Quick Split” feature will be engaged,      “116 tun DIALSTP,” however, you may change this
  whereby the Sub band VFO (VFO-B) will automati-              setting from 10 Hz to 1 Hz instead. When 1 Hz basic
  cally be set to a frequency 5 kHz higher than the Main       steps are selected, the action of the [FAST] button will
  band (VFO-A) frequency with same operating mode,             be changed to 1/10 of the values listed above.
  and the transceiver will be placed in the Split mode.
                                                               FAST Switch
  TXW “TX Watch” Switch                                        Pressing this button will increase or decrease the tun-
  Pressing this button lets you monitor the transmit fre-      ing rate of the Main Tuning Dial knob by a factor of
  quency when split frequency operation is engaged.            ten, as mentioned in the previous section.
  Release the button to return to normal operation.            When this function is activated, the “       ” icon ap-
                                                               pears in the display.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                          Page 23
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES




                                                             CLAR   +




  LOCK Switch                                               [V/M] Switch
  This button toggles locking of the Main Tuning Dial       This button toggles Main band (VFO-A) receiver op-
  knob, to prevent accidental frequency changes. When       eration between the memory system and the VFO. Ei-
  the button is active, the Main Tuning Dial knob can       ther “      ” or “      ” will be displayed to the under
  still be turned, but the frequency will not change, and   the main frequency display field to indicate the cur-
  the “        ” icon appears in the display.               rent selection. If you have tuned off of a Memory chan-
                                                            nel frequency (MT), pressing this button returns the
  [A    B] Switch
                                                            display to the original memory contents (MR), and
  Press this button momentarily to transfer data from the
                                                            pressing it once more returns operation to the Main
  Main band (VFO-A) frequency (or a recalled memory
                                                            VFO (no icon).
  channel) to the Sub band (VFO-B), overwriting any
  previous contents in the Sub band (VFO-B). Use this       [M      A] Switch
  key to set both Main band (VFO-A) and Sub band            Pressing this button momentarily displays the contents
  (VFO-B) receivers to the same frequency and mode.         of the currently-selected memory channel for three sec-
                                                            onds.
  [A B] Switch
                                                            Holding this button in for 2 seconds copies the data
  Pressing this button momentarily exchanges the con-
                                                            from the currently-selected memory to the Main VFO
  tents of the Main band (VFO-A) (or a recalled memory
                                                            (VFO-A), as two beeps sound. Previous data in the
  channel) and the Sub band (VFO-B).
                                                            Main VFO will be overwritten.




Page 24                                                                 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
  [A    M] Switch                                            VRF Knob
  Pressing and holding in this key for 1/2 second (until     This knob tunes the passband of the VRF (Variable RF
  the double beep) copies the current operating data from    Filter) preselector circuit for maximum receiver sensi-
  the Main band (VFO-A) into the currently selected          tivity (and out-of-band interference rejection).
  memory channel, overwriting any previous data stored       ADVICE:
  there.                                                         The relative position of the VRF passband can be
  Also, pressing and holding in this button after recall-        observed on the Tuning Offset Indicator of the dis-
  ing a memory, without first retuning, causes the memory        play via Menu item “010 diSP BAR SEL.”
  channel to be “masked,” and repeating the process re-          When the optional RF µTuning Kit is connected,
  stores the masked memory.                                      this knob allows adjustment of the center frequency
                                                                 of the µ-Tuning filter passband (which is much
  MENU Switch
                                                                 narrower than that of the VRF).
  This button is used for gaining access to the Menu sys-
  tem, for configuring various transceiver characteris-      VRF Switch
  tics. Menu operation is described in detail, in this       This button turns the VRF filter on and off. While ac-
  manual, beginning on page 112.                             tivated, the “    ” icon will appear in the FLT column
  IMPORTANT NOTE:                                            of the Receiver Configuration Indicator on the display.
  Pressing this button momentarily activates the Menu,       ADVICE:
  and the Menu items will appear on the display; once        When the optional RF µTuning Kit is connected, press-
  you are finished, you must press and hold in the           ing this button will engage the µ-Tuning filter. The
  [MENU] button for two seconds to save any configu-         µTuning Kit provides much better RF selectivity than
  ration changes (momentarily pressing the [MENU]            any other RF filter in the Amateur industry, yielding
  button to exit will not save the changes).                 outstanding protection from high RF levels not far re-
                                                             moved from the current operating frequency.
  BAND Keys
  These keys allow one-touch selection of the desired        NOTCH Switch
  Amateur band (1.8 ~ 50 MHz).                               This button turns the Main band (VFO-A) receiver’s
  What’s more, these keys may be used for direct entry       IF Notch Filter on and off.
  of a desired operating frequency during VFO opera-         When the IF Notch Filter is activated, the peak posi-
  tion.                                                      tion of the IF Notch Filter is depicted graphically in
                                                             the display. The IF Notch Filter center frequency is
  RX CLAR Switch
                                                             adjusted via the [NOTCH] knob.
  Pressing this button activates the RX Clarifier, to al-
  low offsetting the Main (VFO-A) receiving frequency        DNF Switch
  temporarily. Press this button once more to return the     This button turns the Main band (VFO-A) receiver’s
  Main receiver to the frequency shown on the main fre-      Digital Notch Filter on and off. When the Digital Notch
  quency display field; the Clarifier offset will still be   Filter is activated, the “   ” icon appears in the dis-
  present, though, in case you want to use it again. To      play. This is an automatic circuit, and there is no ad-
  cancel the Clarifier offset, press the [CLEAR] button.     justment knob for the DNF.
  TX CLAR Switch                                             NOTCH Knob
  Pressing this button activates the TX Clarifier, to al-    This knob adjusts the center frequency of the Main
  low offsetting the Main (VFO-A) transmit frequency         band (VFO-A) receiver’s IF Notch Filter. The Notch
  temporarily.                                               Filter is engaged via the [NOTCH] button.
  Press this button once more to return the transmitter to   Initially, the approximate center frequency of the IF
  the Main (VFO-A) frequency shown on the main fre-          Notch Filter is adjusted by the outer [COARSE] knob;
  quency display field; the Clarifier offset will still be   then, fine tuning of the center frequency is adjusted by
  present, though, in case you want to use it again. To      the inner [FINE] knob.
  cancel the Clarifier offset, press the [CLEAR] button.
  CLEAR Switch
  Pressing this button clears out any frequency offset you
  have programmed into the Clarifier register (thereby
  setting the offset to “Zero”).
  CLAR Knob
  This knob tunes the Clarifier offset frequency up to
  9.99 kHz.



FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                               Page 25
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES




                                                           CLAR   +




  SHIFT        WIDTH Knobs (EXCEPT ON FM MODE)
  SHIFT Knob                                                          WIDTH Knob
  The inner [SHIFT] knob provides adjustment of the                   The outer [WIDTH] knob sets the overall bandwidth
  IF DSP passband, using 20 Hz steps for precise ad-                  of the IF DSP filter for the Main (VFO-A) receiver.
  justment and easy reduction of interference on either               The center (12 o’clock) position establishes the “de-
  side of your operating frequency. The total adjustment              fault” bandwidth (for example, 2.4 kHz for SSB);
  range is ±1 kHz. The normal operating setting for this              clockwise rotation of this knob increases the bandwidth
  knob is straight up, in the 12 o’clock position.                    (out to a maximum of 4 kHz), while counter-clock-
  ADVICE:                                                             wise rotation reduces the bandwidth.
  You may shift the Sub band (VFO-B) filter passband                  When the NAR (Narrow) filter selection is engaged,
  via Menu item “042 S-iF LSB SET” through “049 S-                    the [WIDTH] knob is disabled.
  iF PKT-USB.”                                                        The [SHIFT] knob may be used to re-center the pass-
                                                                      band response on the incoming signal, and you may
                                                                      find that the CONTOUR and IF Notch Filter may also
                                                                      help improve intelligibility and/or reduce interference.
                                                                      See also the discussions of the [CONTOUR] knob and
                                                                      [NOTCH] knob.
                                                                      ADVICE:
                                                                      When the [NAR] button has been pushed, the [WIDTH]
                                                                      knob no longer functions (except the CW mode). The
                                                                      IF SHIFT system is still fully operational, however.




Page 26                                                                         FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
  CONT Switch                                                 SUB VFO-B Knob
  This button turns the Main band (VFO-A) receiver’s          Depending on the status of the [A/B] button located at
  CONTOUR filter on and off. When the CONTOUR                 the right bottom of the [SUB VFO-B] knob, the [SUB
  Filter is activated, the peak position of the CONTOUR       VFO-B] knob is used for functions associated with the
  Filter is depicted graphically in the display. Adjustment   Main (VFO-A) or Sub (VFO-B) frequency control reg-
  of the CONTOUR filter’s center frequency is provided        isters.
  by the [CONTOUR] knob.
                                                              (VFO-A) BAND Switch
  NOTE:
                                                              Pressing this button allows you to select the Main
  There are times, when you’re trying to remove inter-
                                                              (VFO-A) operating band (Amateur bands) using the
  ference with a sharp DSP filter, that the remaining sig-
                                                              [SUB VFO-B] knob.
  nal has a somewhat unnatural sound. This is caused by
  the cutting of some frequency components, leaving           (VFO-A) MHz Switch
  other components in excess. The CONTOUR filter al-          Pressing this button allows you to tune the Main band
  lows you (especially) to roll off certain frequency com-    (VFO-A) frequency down or up in 1 MHz increments,
  ponents inside the remaining passband, but in a smooth      using the [SUB VFO-B] knob.
  manner that helps restore a natural sound and/or raise
  intelligibility.                                            GRP Switch
                                                              Pressing this button allows you to select the memory
  DNR Switch                                                  group using the [SUB VFO-B] knob.
  This button turns the Main band (VFO-A) receiver’s
  Digital Noise Reduction circuit on and off. When the        M CH Switch
  Digital Noise Reduction is activated, the “   ” icon        Pressing this button allows you to select the memory
  appears in the display. Adjustment of the Noise Re-         channel using the [SUB VFO-B] knob.
  duction level is provided by the [DNR] knob.                (VFO-B) BAND Switch
  CONTOUR             DNR Knob                                When the [A/B] button is pressed, and the Orange lamp
  CONTOUR Knob                                                to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob lights up, press-
  The inner [CONTOUR] knob selects the desired Main           ing this button allows you to select the Sub (VFO-B)
  band (VFO-A) receiver’s CONTOUR filter response.            operating band (Amateur bands) using the [SUB VFO-
  The CONTOUR filter is engaged via the [CONTOUR]             B] knob.
  button.                                                     (VFO-B) MHz Switch
  DNR Knob                                                    When the [A/B] button is pressed, and the Orange lamp
  The outer [DNR] knob selects the Main band (VFO-            to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob lights up, press-
  A) receiver’s optimum Digital Noise Reduction re-           ing this button allows you to tune the Sub band (VFO-
  sponse. The Noise Reduction circuit is engaged via          B) frequency down or up in 1 MHz increments, using
  the [DNR] button.                                           the [SUB VFO-B] knob.
  RX Indicator/Switch                                         FAST Switch
  This is the button that turns the Sub (VFO-B) receiver      When the [A/B] button is pushed, and the Orange lamp
  On and Off. When this button is pressed to make the         to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob lights up, the
  Sub (VFO-B) receiver active, the Green LED imbed-           [SUB VFO-B] knob will be controlling the Sub band
  ded within the button will light up. Pressing the button    (VFO-B) frequency; pressing the [FAST] button will
  again will disable this receiver, and the imbedded Green    increase the tuning rate by a factor of 10.
  LED will turn off.
                                                              A/B Switch
  TX Indicator/Switch                                         The [A/B] button determines whether the actions of
  This is the button that turns the Sub (VFO-B) trans-        the [SUB VFO-B] knob will be applied to the Main
  mitter On and Off. When this button is pressed to trans-    band (VFO-A) or the Sub band (VFO-B).
  fer transmitter control to the Sub (VFO-B) frequency        Pressing this button once causes the Orange lamp to
  and mode, the Red LED imbedded within the button            the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob to light up; in this
  will light up. Pressing this button once more will trans-   case, rotation of the [SUB VFO-B] knob affects op-
  fer frequency/mode control back to the Main (VFO-           eration on the Sub band (VFO-B). Pressing the [A/B]
  A) side, and the Red LED imbedded within this button        button once more causes the Orange lamp to turn off;
  will turn off.                                              in this instance, rotation of the [SUB VFO-B] knob
                                                              affects operations associated with the Main band (VFO-
                                                              A).




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                               Page 27
DISPLAY INDICATIONS (LEFT SIDE & CENTER)




  Receiver Configuration Indicators                           SHIFT
  ANT (1, 2, RX):                                             Indicates the peak position of the DSP IF filter.
  Indicates the antenna selected for operation by the front
  panel [1/2] and [RX] antenna switches.
                                                              NB
  ATT (OFF, –6 dB, –12 dB, –18 dB):                           This indicator appears when the Main band (VFO-A)
  Indicates the attenuation level selected for operation      receiver’s (short duration) Noise Blanker is activated.
  by the front panel [ATT] button.                            This indicator will blink for three seconds, and there-
  FLT (VRF, µ-TUNE, THRU):                                    after appears continuously, when the Main band (VFO-
  Indicates the RF filter selected for operation by the       A) receiver’s longer-pulse Noise Blanker is activated.
  front panel [VRF] button.                                   NAR
  ADVICE:                                                     This indicator appears whenever the Main band (VFO-
  The µ-TUNE filter is an option. The “         ” icon will   A) receiver’s narrow IF DSP filter is engaged.
  not appear when the optional µ-TUNE unit is not con-
  nected.                                                     PROC
  IPO (AMP 1, AMP 2, ON):                                     This indicator appears whenever the DSP Speech Pro-
  Indicates the front end RF amplifier selected for op-       cessor is activated.
  eration by the front panel [IPO] button.                    MONI
  R.FLT                                                       This indicator appears whenever the transmit monitor
  Indicates the 1st IF Roofing Filter selected: AUTO          circuit is activated.
  (mode-determined), 3 kHz, 6 kHz, or 15 kHz.
  AGC (AUTO, FAST, MID, SLOW):                                KEYER
  Indicates the AGC decay time selected for Main band         This indicator appears whenever the internal CW keyer
  (VFO-A) operation by the front panel [AGC] switch.          is activated.

  DNR                                                         BK-IN
  This indicator appears whenever the Digital Noise Re-       This indicator appears whenever CW break-in opera-
  duction feature is activated.                               tion is activated.

  DNF                                                         TUNER
  This indicator appears whenever the Digital Notch Fil-      This indicator appears when the internal Automatic An-
  ter is activated.                                           tenna Tuner is activated.

  CONTOUR                                                     HI SWR
  The peak position of the CONTOUR Filter is depicted         This indicator appears if the directional coupler and
  graphically here when the CONTOUR Filter is acti-           microprocessor detect an abnormally high SWR con-
  vated.                                                      dition (over 3.0:1) that cannot be resolved by the Au-
                                                              tomatic Antenna Tuner.
  NOTCH                                                       NOTE:
  The null position of the IF Notch Filter is depicted        If this indicator appears, check to be sure that you have
  graphically here when the IF Notch Filter is activated.     the correct antenna selected on the current operating
  WIDTH                                                       band. If so, you will need to check the condition of the
  Indicates the bandwidth of the DSP IF filter.               antenna, its coaxial cable, and/or the connectors on the
                                                              cable so as to locate and correct the fault.



Page 28                                                                 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
DISPLAY INDICATIONS (CENTER)




  TX                                                            Tuning Offset Indicator
  This indicator appears during transmission on the Main        This is a tuning scale that, as configured from the fac-
  band (VFO-A) frequency.                                       tory, provides a visual CW tuning indication of the in-
                                                                coming signal’s offset from your transceiver’s CW car-
  BUSY
                                                                rier frequency, as programmed by the relative clarifier
  This indicator appears whenever the Main band (VFO-
                                                                offset, or the peak position of the VRF/µ-TUNE filter.
  A) receiver squelch is open. If this indicator is not show-
  ing, and reception seems to have been lost on the Main        REC
  receiver for no apparent reason, check the position of        This indicator appears while the voice recorder is re-
  the SQL knob and rotate it fully counter-clockwise to         cording the receiver audio, and/or the memory is re-
  restore reception.                                            cording your CW or voice message.
  Main (VFO-A) Frequency Display                                PLAY
  This is the Main band (VFO-A) frequency display.              This indicator appears while the voice recorder is play-
  ADVICE:                                                       ing back the recorded audio, and/or the memory is play-
     When setting the Menu items, the Menu item num-            ing back the recorded CW or voice message.
     ber and Menu group name will appear in this area
                                                                Multi-Display Window
     during setup.
                                                                This window displays either the Clarifier offset or
     When setting the CTCSS frequency for Encoding
                                                                Memory Channel Number.
     or Tone Squelch operation, the current tone infor-
                                                                ADVICE:
     mation will appear in this area during setup.
                                                                   During FM operation, the Repeater Shift will be
  LOCK                                                             indicated in this window. A Negative frequency shift
  This indicator appears when the Main Tuning Dial knob            will be indicated by “–” while a Positive frequency
  is locked.                                                       shift will be indicated by “+.”
                                                                   When setting the Menu items, the current setting
  FAST
                                                                   will appear in this area.
  This indicator appears when the Main Tuning Dial
                                                                   When setting the CTCSS frequency for Encoding
  knob’s tuning rate is selected to fast.
                                                                   or Tone Squelch operation, the current repeater shift
  MIC EQ                                                           direction will appear in this area.
  This indicator appears whenever the Three-Band Para-
                                                                CLAR
  metric Microphone Equalizer is activated.
                                                                This indicator appears whenever the Clarifier function
  CLASS-A                                                       is activated.
  This indicator appears when Class-A operation is en-
                                                                MR
  gaged.
                                                                This indicator appears when the FT-2000D is in the
                                                                Memory Recall mode.
                                                                MT
                                                                This indicator appears when the FT-2000D is in the
                                                                Memory Tune mode to indicate that the memory con-
                                                                tents have been temporarily changed.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                  Page 29
DISPLAY INDICATIONS (RIGHT SIDE)




  Sub (VFO-B) Receiver S-Meter                                  LSB, USB, CW, AM, FM, RTTY, PKT
  Displays the strength of signals received on the Sub          Displays the currently selected operating mode for the
  band (VFO-B).                                                 Sub (VFO-B) receiver.
  TX                                                            FAST
  This indicator appears during transmission on the Sub         This indicator appears when the [SUB VFO-B] knob’s
  band (VFO-B) frequency.                                       tuning rate is selected to fast.
  BUSY                                                          AGC A, F, M, S
  This indicator appears whenever the Sub band (VFO-            Displays the currently selected AGC decay time for
  B) receiver squelch is open. If this indicator is not show-   the Sub (VFO-B) receiver.
  ing, and reception seems to have been lost on the Sub         A: Auto, F: Fast, M: Medium, S: Slow
  receiver for no apparent reason, check the position of
                                                                NB
  the Sub [SQL] knob and rotate it fully counter-clock-
                                                                This indicator appears when the Sub (VFO-B)
  wise to restore reception.
                                                                receiver’s (short duration) Noise Blanker is activated.
  Sub (VFO-B) Frequency Display                                 This indicator will blink for three seconds, and there-
  This is the Sub band (VFO-B) frequency display.               after appears continuously, when the Sub (VFO-B)
  ADVICE:                                                       receiver’s longer-pulse Noise Blanker is activated.
     When setting the Menu items, the Menu item name
                                                                NAR
     will appear in this area during setup.
                                                                This indicator appears whenever the optional Sub
     When setting the CTCSS frequency for Encoding
                                                                (VFO-B) receiver’s narrow filter is selected.
     or Tone Squelch operation, the current tone fre-
     quency will appear in this area during setup.
     When activating the CW Spot Tone, the current tone
     frequency will appear in this area.




Page 30                                                                   FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
REAR PANEL




  RX ANT OUT Jack                                                                         COOLING FAN
  This BNC jack provides output of the receiver signal                                    This is a cooling fan for cooling down the Power Am-
  lines from the Antenna jacks which are connected to                                     plifier Unit.
  “RX” side of the transceiver’s main T/R switching cir-                                  Usually, this cooling fan does not rotate. However,
  cuitry.                                                                                 when the temperature begins to rise, the cooling fan
                                                                                          begins to rotate.
  RX ANT IN Jack
  This type-M jack is for a separate receive-only antenna.                                          –
                                                                                          DC 13.8 V ... IN Jack
  An antenna connected here can be used when the [RX]                                     Connect this 6-pin connector to the DC 13.8 V Output
  antenna button on the front panel is pressed.                                           Jack on the FP-2000 AC Power Supply, using the sup-
  If you want to use some special kind of external                                        plied DC Power Cord. This connector provides +13.8
  bandpass filter or preamplifier, you may connect it                                     V DC supply voltage for the FT-2000D.
  between the RX ANT OUT and RX ANT IN jacks.                                                     –
                                                                                          DC 50 V ... IN Jack
  ANT 1/2 Jacks                                                                           Connect this 2-pin connector to the DC 50 V Output
  Connect your main antenna(s) here, using a type-M                                       Jack on the FP-2000 AC Power Supply, using the sup-
  (PL-259) plug and coaxial feedline for each. These an-                                  plied DC Power Cord. This connector provides +50 V
  tenna ports are always used for transmission, and also                                  DC supply voltage for the power amplifier of the FT-
  are used for reception unless a separate receive an-                                    2000D.
  tenna is also used for the receiver. The internal antenna
                                                                                          GND
  tuner affects only the antenna(s) connected here, and
                                                                                          Use this terminal to connect the transceiver to a good
  only during transmission.
                                                                                          earth ground, for safety and optimum performance. Use
                                                                                          a large diameter, short braided cable for making ground
             ANTENNA (1/2) SWITCH   TX/RX RELAY
   ANT “1”                                                          Transmitter Section
                                                                                          connections, and please refer to page 9 for other notes
   ANT “2”                                    ANTENNA (RX) SWITCH                         about proper grounding.
                                                                    Receiver Section
                                                                                          µ-TUNE Jacks
   RX ANT “OUT”
                                                                                          These jacks are used for signal input/output of the op-
     RX ANT “IN”                                                                          tional RF µTuning Kit.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                                           Page 31
REAR PANEL




  ROT (ROTATOR) Jack                                       PTT Jack
  This 5-pin MINI-DIN Jack accepts a cable connected       This RCA input jack may be used to provide manual
  to a YAESU G-800DXA/-1000DXA/-2800DXA An-                transmitter activation using a footswitch or other
  tenna Rotator (listed models are current as of early     switching device. Its function is identical to the [MOX]
  2006). You may control the antenna azimuth rotation      button on the front panel. The same line is available at
  (and rotation speed) using the Function buttons on the   the PACKET and RTTY jacks for TNC control. Open-
  front panel.                                             circuit voltage is +13.5 VDC, and closed-circuit cur-
                                                           rent is 5 mA.
  BND (BAND) DATA Jack
  This 8-pin output jack provides band selection data      MIC (PATCH) Jack
  which may be used for control of optional accessories    This RCA input jack accepts transmitter audio - either
  such as the VL-1000 Solid-state Linear Amplifier.        AFSK or voice - for transmission. This line is mixed
                                                           with the microphone audio input line, so the micro-
  PACKET Jack
                                                           phone should be disconnected if using this jack and
  This 5-pin input/output jack provides receiver audio
                                                           mixing is not desired. The optimum impedance is 500
  and squelch signals, and accepts transmit (AFSK) au-
                                                           ~ 600 Ohms, and the nominal input level should be 5
  dio and PTT control, from an external Packet TNC.
                                                           mV.
  Pinout is shown on page 15. The receiver audio level
  at this jack is approximately 100 mVp-p (@600 Ohms).     TRV Jack
                                                           This RCA jack provides a low level RF output for use
  RTTY Jack
                                                           with a transverter. Maximum output is approximately
  This 4-pin input/output jack provides connections for
                                                           –10 dBm (0.1 mW) at 50 Ohms.
  an RTTY terminal unit. Pinout is shown on page 15.
  The receiver audio level at this jack is at a constant   REC Jack
  100-mV (@600 Ohms) level. FSK keying at this jack        This RCA jack provides low-level receiver audio out-
  is accomplished by a closure of the SHIFT line to        put and transmit audio, for recording or external am-
  ground by the terminal unit.                             plification. Peak signal level is 30 mVp-p at 10 kOhms.
                                                           EXT ALC Jack
                                                           This RCA input jack accepts negative-going external
                                                           ALC (Automatic Level Control) voltage from a linear
                                                           amplifier, to prevent over-excitation by the transceiver.
                                                           Acceptable input voltage range is 0 to –4 VDC.




Page 32                                                              FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
REAR PANEL
  TX REQ Jack                                                 REM (REMOTE) Jack
  When this RCA jack shorted to ground, it puts the FT-       By plugging in the optional FH-2 Remote Control Key-
  2000D into the transmit mode, and sends out a steady        pad to this gold-plated jack, direct access to the FT-
  CW carrier, for linear amplifier or manual antenna tuner    2000D CPU is provided for control functions such as
  adjustment.                                                 contest memory keying, plus frequency and function
                                                              control.
  TX GND Jack
  This RCA jack’s center pin is closed to ground while        EXT SPKR
  the transceiver’s transmitter is engaged. It may be used    This gold-plated two-contact output jack provides re-
  for control of a peripheral device, most typically a lin-   ceiving audio from the Main (VFO-A) and Sub (VFO-
  ear amplifier. To enable this jack, please set Menu item    B) receivers for an external loudspeaker or speakers,
  “144 tGEn ETX-GND” to the “EnA” (Enable) selec-             such as the SP-2000. Inserting a plug into this jack
  tion.                                                       disables the internal loudspeaker. Impedance is 4 ~ 8
  The relay circuit of the FT-2000D used for this jack is     Ohms.
  capable of switching AC voltage of 100 Volts at up to
                                                              µ-TUNE Jack
  300 mA, or DC voltages or 60 V at 200 mA or 30 V at
                                                              This 10-pin MINI-DIN jack used for control of the
  up to 1 Amp.
                                                              optional RF µTuning Kit.
  +13.8 V Jack
                                                              DMU Jack
  This RCA output jack provides regulated, separately
                                                              This 8-pin MINI-DIN jack accepts a cable connected
  fused 13.8 VDC at up to 200 mA, to power an external
                                                              to an optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit.
  device such as a packet TNC. Make sure your device
  does not require more current (if it does, use a separate   PGM (PROGRAM) Jack
  power source).                                              This coverd 9-pin MINI-DIN jack is used at the fac-
                                                              tory. Please do not connect any equipment to this jack.
  AF OUT
  This gold-plated 3-contact jack provides dual-channel       CAT Jack
  low-level receiver output, for recording or external am-    This 9-pin serial DB-9 jack allows external computer
  plification. Peak signal level is 300 mVp-p at 10 k-        control of the FT-2000D. Connect a serial cable here
  Ohms. Main band (VFO-A) receiver audio is on the            and to the RS-232C COM port on your personal com-
  left channel (tip), and sub band (VFO-B) receiver au-       puter (no external interface is required).
  dio is on the right channel (ring). A stereo amplifier or
                                                              KEY Jack
  recorder is recommended, to record each receiver’s
                                                              This 1/4-inch phone jack accepts a CW key or keyer
  audio separately when dual reception is enabled (au-
                                                              paddle. A 2-contact plug cannot be used in this jack.
  dio from either receiver, or both, may be used via this
                                                              Key-up voltage is +5 V, and key-down current is 1 mA.
  jack). The front panel [AF GAIN] knobs do not affect
                                                              Plug wiring is shown on page 15, and this jack may be
  the signals at this jack.
                                                              configured for keyer, “Bug,” “straight key,” or com-
                                                              puter keying interface operation via Menu item “054
                                                              A1A R-TYPE.”




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                               Page 33
FP-2000 SWITCHES & JACKS




  POWER Switch                                                AC IN Jack
  This is the FP-2000’s main ON (I)/OFF (O) switch.           Connect the supplied 3-wire AC line cord to this socket.
  When turned on, the FP-2000 LED indicator will glow
                                                              Cooling Fan
  red several seconds later.
                                                              This is a fan for cooling the internal power supply unit.
  If this main switch is not set to the “(I)” position, the
                                                              Usually, this fan does not rotate. However, when the
  FT-2000D’s [POWER] switch will not function.
                                                              temperature begins to rise, the cooling fan begins to
                                                              rotate.
                                                              OUTPUT DC 13.8 V Jack
                                                              Connect this 6-pin connector to the DC 13.8 V Input
                                                              Jack on the FT-2000D, using the supplied DC Power
                                                              Cord. The DC output is 13.8 Volts, with maximum
                                                              current of 6 Amps.
                                                              OUTPUT DC 50 V Jack
                                                              Connect this 2-pin connector to the DC 50 V Input
                                                              Jack on the FT-2000D, using the supplied DC Power
                                                              Cord. The DC output is 50 Volts, with maximum cur-
                                                              rent of 12 Amps.
                         NOTE                                 FUSE
  Rarely, when a rush of current flows, the FP-2000
                                                              This holder requires a 15 Amp fuse. Always use the 15
  may buzz faintly. This is a normal condition.
                                                              Amp fuse, whether operating on 100 - 120 VAC or
                                                              200 - 240 VAC.




Page 34                                                                 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
Before turning on main power, please verify the following items once more.
   Have you made all ground connections securely? See page 9 for details.
   Do you have your antenna(s) connected to the rear-panel Antenna jack(s)? See page 10 for details.
   Is your microphone (and/or key or paddle) connected? See pages 11 and 12 for details.
   If using a linear amplifier, have all interconnections been successfully completed? See pages 13 and 14 for details.
   Please rotate both [AF GAIN] controls to their fully counter-clockwise positions, to avoid a loud blast of audio when
   the transceiver turns on. See page 21 for details.
   Rotate the [RF PWR] control fully counter-clockwise, to set minimum power at first. See page 21 for details.
   If your AC mains power should suffer a significant fluctuation or interruption, we recommend that you go through a
   complete power-up cycle, in order to ensure that all circuits are properly initialized. To do this, be sure the FT-2000D’s
   [POWER] switch is turned off, then set the FP-2000’s [POWER] switch to the “O” position. Now unplug the AC
   cable from the rear panel of the FP-2000, and wait ten seconds before proceeding with the start-up procedure described
   on next page.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                       Page 35
BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
Here is the typical start-up procedure for normal operation:

                                                                                                                (VFO-B) [BAND] Button
   [POWER] Switch                                [MODE] Button                                                    (VFO-B) [MHz] Button
        [ANTENNA] Button                 [SQL] Knob     Main [RX] Button         [FAST] Button                  Sub [RX] Button




                                                                                                     CLAR   +




                    Sub [SQL] Knob     [AF GAIN] Knob        Main Tuning Dial knob               [BAND] Button                      [A/B] Button
                           Sub [AF GAIN] Knob                                          (VFO-A) [BAND] Button           [SUB VFO-B] Knob
                                                                                         (VFO-A) [MHz] Button



1. Set the FP-2000’s [ POWER ]                                              Press the Sub [RX] button to
   switch to “I” position.                                                   engage Dual Reception (us-
2. Press and hold in the FT-2000D’s                                          ing the Sub (VFO-B) re-
   [POWER] switch for one second                                             ceiver in addition to the
   to turn the transceiver on.                                               Main (VFO-A) receiver).
3. The transceiver will start up on 7.000.00                                 When you press the Sub
   MHz LSB, and normal operation may begin.                                  [RX] button, its imbedded LED
   NOTE:                                                                     will glow green; pressing this
   To turn power off, press and hold in the FT-2000D’s                       button once more will turn off
   [POWER] switch for one second.                                            the Sub (VFO-B) receiver, and
4. Rotate the [AF GAIN] knob to set                                          the imbeded LED will go dark.
   a comfortable audio level on incom-                                       Use the Sub receiver’s Sub [AF
   ing signals or noise. Clockwise ro-                                       GAIN] knob to adjust the Sub
   tation of the [AF GAIN] knob in-                                          (VFO-B) receiver volume level.
   creases the volume level.                                          6. Press the [BAND] but-
   NOTE:                                                                 ton corresponding to
   When using headphones, start by rotating the [AF                      the Amateur band on
   GAIN] knob counter-clockwise, then bring the volume                   which you wish to be-
   level up after you put the headphones on. This will                   gin operation.
   minimize the chance of damage to your hearing caused                  ADVICE:
   by an unexpectedly-high audio level.                                     One-touch selec-
5. Press the Main [RX] but-                                                  tion of each Ama-
   ton to engage the Main                                                    teur band between
   (VFO-A) receiver; the                                                     1.8 and 50 MHz is provided.
   imbedded LED will glow                                                   The FT-2000D utilizes a triple band-stack VFO
   Green.                                                                    selection technique, which permits you to store up
   ADVICE:                                                                   to three favorite frequencies and modes onto each
       If you press the Main                                                 band’s VFO register. For example, you may store
       [RX] button when the imbedded LED is already                          one frequency each on 14 MHz CW, RTTY, and
       glowing Green, the LED will now blink on and off;                     USB, then recall these VFOs by successive, mo-
       this indicates that the Main (VFO-A) receiver is                      mentary presses of the [14] MHz band button. Each
       temporarily muted. Just press the Main [RX] but-                      Amateur band button may similarly have up to three
       ton once more to restore Main (VFO-A) receiver                        frequency/mode settings applied.
       operation.

Page 36                                                                               FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
       If you press the (VFO-A) [BAND ] button, the                  When operating on the FM
       [SUB VFO-B] knob may be used as a band selec-                 mode, rotate the [SQL]
       tion knob. If you press the (VFO-A) [MHz] but-                (Squelch) knob clockwise just
       ton, rotation of the [SUB VFO-B] knob allows fre-             to the point where the back-
       quency navigation in 1 MHz steps. Depending on                ground noise is just silenced.
       the setting of the (VFO-A) [BAND ], (VFO-A)                   This is the point of maximum
       [MHz], and [A/B] buttons, the function of the [SUB            sensitivity to weak signals. Excessive
       VFO-B] knob will change.                                      advancement of the [SQL] knob will
                                                                     degrade the ability of the receiver to
                                                                     detect weak signals. Adjustment of the
                                                                     Sub band (VFO-B) Squelch is accom-
                                                                     plished using the Sub [SQL] knob.
                                                               9. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to tune around the
                                                                  band, and begin normal operation.
                                                                  ADVICE:
                                                                     Clockwise rotation of the Main Tuning Dial knob
                                                                     increases the operating frequency, one “step” of the
                                                                     synthesizer at a time; similarly, counter-clockwise
                                                                     rotation of the Main Tuning Dial knob will decrease
7. Press the [ANTENNA 1/2] button to select the appro-               the frequency.
   priate antenna for the band in use; alternatively, if one         Two steps, one “normal”
   is connected, you may also press the                              and one “fast,” are available
   [ANTENNA RX] antenna selection                                    on each operating mode.
   button. Two TX/RX antennas may be                                 Pressing the [FAST] button
   connected, or one RX-only antenna.                                engages the “Fast” tuning
   ADVICE:                                                           selection.
   Once you have made your antenna selection, that an-               It is possible to separate the frequency change over
   tenna is “remembered” by the microprocessor in con-               one dial rotation, only while operating solely on
   junction with the VFO register (frequency and mode)               the CW mode, using the Menu items “116 tun
   in use when you chose that particular antenna.                    DIALSTP,” and “117 tun CW FINE.” See page 127.
8. Press the appropriate [MODE] but-                                 If you want to navigate quickly, so as to effect rapid
   ton to select the desired operating                               frequency change, there are several techniques
   mode.                                                             available:
   ADVICE:                                                                Direct keyboard entry of the frequency (see page
       By convention in the Amateur                                       49).
       bands, LSB is used on the 7 MHz                                    Use the [SUB VFO-B] knob to tune in 1 MHz
       and lower bands (with the excep-                                   steps (see page 49).
       tion of 60 meters), while USB is                                   Use the microphone’s [UP]/[DWN] scanning
       utilized on the 14 MHz and                                         keys, if your microphone is so equipped (see
       higher bands.                                                      page 49).
       When changing modes from SSB
                                                                          MAIN TUNING DIAL KNOB TUNING RATE
       to CW, you will observe a fre-
                                                                OPERATING MODE         1 STEP         1 DIAL ROTATION
       quency shift on the display. This shift represents       LSB, USB, CW,          10Hz           10kHz
       the BFO offset between the “zero beat” frequency         RTTY, PKT(LSB)         [100Hz]        [100kHz]
       and the audible CW pitch (tone) you can hear (the        AM, FM, PKT(FM) 100Hz [1kHz]          100kHz [1MHz]
       pitch is programmed by the [PITCH] knob), even          [ ] : [FAST] switch set to “ON”
       though the actual tone that you hear is not chang-
       ing. If you do not want this frequency shift to ap-
       pear when changing modes from (for example) USB
       to CW, use the Menu item “061 A1A FRQDISP,”
       described on page 122.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                     Page 37
BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
               OPERATION ON 60-METER (5 MHZ) BAND (U.S. VERSION ONLY)
The FT-2000D includes the capability for transmission and reception on the five spot frequencies assigned to the Ama-
teur Service in the United States. To operate on the 5 MHz band:
1. Press the [V/M] button once to enter the “Memory”                                  Main Tuning Dial Knob      [M CH] Button

   mode (a memory channel number “USx” will appear
   on the Multi-Display Window in the display.
2. Press the [M CH] button. The LED imbedded in the
   button will glow red to signify that rotation of the [SUB
   VFO-B] knob will allow selection the memory chan-
   nel.
   ADVICE:
   If the memory channel selection seems not to be oper-                                          [V/M] Button
   ating, check see if the orange lamp to the right of the                                             [SUB VFO-B] Knob

   [SUB VFO-B] knob is illuminated. If so, pressing the                                                             [A/B] Button

   [A/B] button will cause the orange lamp to the right of
   the [SUB VFO-B] knob to go out. Now, press the [M
   CH] button to begin memory channel selection.
3. Memory channels “US1” through “US5” are pre-pro-
   grammed, at the factory, with the permitted frequen-
   cies in the 5 MHz band, and the USB mode is auto-
   matically selected on these channels.
4. To exit from 60-meter operation and return to the VFO
   mode, just press the [V/M] button.
NOTE:
The frequencies and operating mode for 5 MHz band op-
eration are both fixed, and may not be changed.




Page 38                                                                     FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
                     CLAR (CLARIFIER) OPERATION ON MAIN (VFO-A)
The [TX CLAR], [RX CLAR], [CLEAR] buttons and [SUB VFO-B] knob are used to offset either the receive, transmit,
or both frequencies from their settings on the Main band (VFO-A) frequency (the Clarifier does not affect the Sub band
(VFO-B), however). The four small numbers on the Multi-Display Window show the current Clarifier offset. The Clarifier
controls on the FT-2000D are designed to allow you to preset an offset (up to ±9.990 kHz) without actually retuning, and
then to activate it via the Clarifier’s [RX CLAR] and [TX CLAR] buttons. This feature is ideal for following a drifting
station, or for setting small frequency offsets sometimes utilized in DX “Split” work.

Here is the technique for utilizing the Clarifier:                                                                [CLAR] Knob

1. Press the [RX CLAR] button. In the Multi-Display
   Window, the “RX” notation will
   appear, and the programmed off-
   set will be applied to the receive
   frequency.
2. Rotation of the [CLAR] knob will allow you to modify
   your initial offset on the fly. Offsets of up to ±9.990
   kHz may be set using the Clarifier.                                                                   [RX CLAR] Button
                                                                                                         [TX CLAR] Button
To cancel Clarifier operation, press the [RX CLAR] but-                                                  [CLEAR] Button

ton. The “RX” notation will disappear from the display.
                                                                                                  CLAR      +
ADVICE:
Turning the Clarifier Off simply cancels the application of
the programmed offset from the receive and/or transmit
frequencies. To clear out the programmed Clarifier offset
altogether, and reset it to “zero,” press the [CLEAR] but-
ton. The programmed offset is displayed in the small multi-
channel window of the frequency display.
                                                                                        TX CLAR
                                                                    Without changing the receive frequency, you may
                                                                    alternatively apply the Clarifier offset to the trans-
                                                                    mit frequency (typically, for “split” DX pile-ups).
                                                                    See page 79 for details.



              The Tuning Offset Indicator provides a graphical representation of the Clarifier offset.
   On CW, the Tuning Offset Indicator is used for CW Center Tuning, instead of Clarifier Offset, as the transceiver is
   configured at the factory. If you wish to change this, so that the Clarifier Offset is also displayed on CW, use the
   following procedure:

   1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode.                                           [MENU] Button

   2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu
      item “010 diSP BAR SEL.”
   3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select “CLAr
      (Clarifier)” (replacing the default “C-tn (CW TUN-
      ING)” selection).
   4. Press and hold in
      the [MENU ] but-
                               (TX Frequency < RX Frequency)
      ton for two seconds                                                           Main Tuning Dial knob       [SUB VFO-B] knob
      to save the new set-
      ting and exit to nor- (TX Frequency = RX Frequency)
      mal operation.
                              (TX Frequency > RX Frequency)




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                              Page 39
BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
                                                          LOCK
You may lock the setting of the Main Tuning Dial knob, to prevent accidental frequency change.
                                                                                                    [LOCK] Button
To lock out the Main Tuning Dial
knob, just press the [LOCK] but-
ton that is located to the right of the
Dial. To unlock the Dial setting, and
restore normal tuning, just press the
[LOCK] button once more.




                                                            DIM
The illumination level of the analog meter and frequency display may be reduced, if you are using the transceiver in a dark
environment where high brightness is not desired.
To reduce the illumina-                                              [DIM] Button
tion level, press the
[DIM] button, located
to the left of the analog
meter. To restore full
brightness, press the
[ DIM ] button once
more.
You may also customize the amount of brightness reduc-
tion engaged by the pressing of the [DIM] button, and may
use different brightness levels for different front panel ar-
eas. Menu item “008 diSP DIM MTR” adjusts the bright-
ness level of the analog meter; while menu item “009 diSP
DIM VFD” sets the brightness levels of the frequency dis-
play (these settings are effective only when the [DIM] but-
ton is pressed).




Page 40                                                                             FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
NOTES




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL    Page 41
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                                  DUAL RECEIVE
The FT-2000D is capable of simultaneous reception on the same amateur band, using the Main (VFO-A) and Sub (VFO-
B) receivers, in what is called the Dual Receive mode. Especially useful for DX work, here is the operating procedure for
Dual Receive operation.

1. While receiving on the Main band (VFO-A), engage                     Sub [AF GAIN] Knob     Main Tuning Dial Knob
                                                                                  [SQL] Knob                      Sub [RX] Button
   the Sub (VFO-B) receiver by pressing the Sub [RX]
   button, located to the upper left of the [SUB VFO-B]
   knob. You will now be receiving on the two frequen-
   cies shown on the frequency display.
2. Adjusting the volume:
   To adjust the Main (VFO-A) audio level, rotate the
   Main [AF GAIN] knob. To adjust the Sub (VFO-B)
   audio level, rotate the Sub [AF GAIN] knob. In both
                                                                      Sub [SQL] Knob     [B] Button           [BAND] Button
   cases, clockwise rotation of the knob will increase the
                                                                               [AF GAIN] Knob                    [SUB VFO-B] Knob
   volume level.
3. Press the [B] button. Within five seconds of pressing
   the [B] button, while the orange LED is blinking, you        ADVICE:
   may now change the operating mode for the Sub (VFO-            When operating in Dual Receive, the manner in which
   B) band by pressing the appropriate Mode selection             the audio is fed to the left and right sides of your head-
   button.                                                        phones (Stereo, Monaural, or Mixed) may be config-
4. Having pressed the [B] button in the previous step,            ured using Menu item “089 rout HEADPHN” (see
   you may also press the [BAND] buttons to select the            page 124).
   operating band on which you want to set up the Sub             When changing modes from SSB to CW, you will ob-
   (VFO-B) receiver.                                              serve a frequency shift on the display. This shift repre-
5. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to adjust the Main            sents the BFO offset between the “zero beat” frequency
   (VFO-A) frequency, and rotate the [SUB VFO-B]                  and the audible CW pitch (tone) you can hear (the pitch
   knob to adjust the Sub (VFO-B) frequency.                      is programmed by the [PITCH] knob), even though
6. To cancel Dual Receive operation, and receive just on          the actual tone that you hear is not changing. If you do
   the Main (VFO-A) receiver, press the Sub [RX] but-             not want this frequency shift to appear when changing
   ton; the imbedded green LED will go out, and                   modes from (for example) USB to CW, use the Menu
   monoband operation on the Main (VFO-A) receiver                item “061 A1A FRQDISP,” described on page 122.
   will resume.                                                   When operating on the FM mode on the Sub band
                                                                  (VFO-B), rotate the Sub [SQL] knob clockwise just
NOTE:                                                             to the point where the background noise is just silenced.
Please remember that, while the [B] mode button is blink-         This is the point of maximum sensitivity to weak sig-
ing (for five seconds), any mode or band changes will still       nals. Excessive advancement of the Sub [SQL] knob
be applied to the Sub band (VFO-B), whether or not Dual           will degrade the ability of the receiver to detect weak
Receive is engaged.                                               signals. Adjustment of the Main band (VFO-A) Squelch
QUICK POINT:                                                      is accomplished using the Main [SQL] knob.
By convention in the Amateur bands, LSB is used on the 7          The frequency ranges of the various fixed bandpass
MHz and lower bands (with the exception of 60 meters),            filters are shown in the chart below. You may operate
while USB is utilized on the 14 MHz and higher bands.             on Dual Receive              RF BPF FREQUENCY DIVISION
                                                                  with both receivers         0.03000 MHz ~ 0.49999 MHz
                                                                                              0.50000 MHz ~ 1.69999 MHz
                                                                  set within the same
                                                                                              1.70000 MHz ~ 2.49999 MHz
                                                                  range, even if they         2.50000 MHz ~ 3.39999 MHz
                                                                  are not on the same         3.40000 MHz ~ 4.69999 MHz
                                                                  Amateur band (for           4.70000 MHz ~ 6.89999 MHz
                                                                                              6.90000 MHz ~ 9.89999 MHz
                                                                  example, the 14 and         9.90000 MHz ~ 13.89999 MHz
                                                                  18 MHz, or 21 and 13.90000 MHz ~ 20.89999 MHz
                                                                  24.9 MHz bands). 20.90000 MHz ~ 30.09999 MHz
                                                                                            30.10000 MHz ~ 44.99999 MHz
                                                                  Of course, a suitable 45.99999 MHz ~ 59.99999 MHz
                                                                  multiband antenna is
                                                                  required.




Page 42                                                                       FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                                  DUAL RECEIVE
Using Headphones for Dual Receive                            Sideband Diversity Reception
To take advantage of dual reception, you will want to con-   Here you receive a single AM signal through the two re-
nect stereo headphones to the PHONES jack. Like the          ceivers, each receiving the opposite sideband. Skywave-
AF GAIN control, headphone audio mixing can also be          propagated signals often show phase distortion in this
configured as desired from Menu item “089 rout               mode, but it gives you a view of the entire passband, from
HEADPHN.” Three audio mixing schemes are selectable          which you can then select the best sideband for listening
as follows:                                                  (or for SWL Dx’ing, you may want to listen to both side-
                                                             bands at the same time, to get the best copy). On
SEP:  Audio from the Main band (VFO-A) receiver is
                                                             groundwave signals, where the phase of the sidebands is
      heard only in the left ear, and Sub band (VFO-B)
                                                             likely to be the same, there is an interesting sense of depth
      receiver audio solely in the right ear.
                                                             to the signal.
Con1: Audio from both Main band (VFO-A) and Sub
      band (VFO-B) receivers can be heard in both ears,      To tune in a signal using this mode, you should have ste-
      but Sub band (VFO-B) audio is attenuated in the        reo headphones connected to the front panel PHONES
      left ear and Main band (VFO-A) audio is attenu-        jack.
      ated in the right ear.
                                                                Set the Main band (VFO-A) to either LSB or USB
Con2: Audio from both Main band (VFO-A) and Sub
                                                                mode, and tune for zero beat on the desired signal.
      band (VFO-B) receivers are combined and heard
                                                                Press the [A B] button to copy this mode and fre-
      equally in both ears “Monaural” mode).
                                                                quency into the Sub band (VFO-B), then press the mode
                                                                button to select the opposite sideband for the Main band
                                                                (VFO-A).
                                                                If using headphones, set the headphone mixing scheme
                                                                to the “Con1” mode via the Menu item “089 rout
                                                                HEADPHN,” and activate dual reception.
                                                                Adjust the [AF GAIN] knob(s) to balance the volume
                                                                of the two receivers.
                                                                If interference is present on one of the channels, you
                                                                may have to turn its [AF GAIN] knob to suppress that
                                                                channel (or press the green [RX] LED/button to dis-
                                                                able the receiver with the sideband experiencing inter-
                                                                ference). Otherwise, try changing the headphone au-
                                                                dio mixing scheme to “Con2” or “SEP” in the Menu
                                                                item “089 rout HEADPHN,” for different effects (or
                                                                try settings with similar effects on your external am-
                                                                plifier). Although you don’t get the “stereophonic” ef-
                                                                fect in the monaural mode, the two signals are still
                                                                mixed, offering the potential for much better copy than
                                                                in regular AM or even single-sideband ECSS modes.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                    Page 43
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                                  DUAL RECEIVE
Bandwidth Diversity Reception
This mode involves receiving the same signal through two
different bandpass filters. The frequency and mode of both
the Main band (VFO-A) and Sub band (VFO-B) are the
same. The Main band (VFO-A) can be set up for a wide
bandpass, using the [WIDTH] knobs, and the Sub band
(VFO-B) for a narrow bandpass, resulting in a spatial per-
ception of the channel. Although any mode (except FM)
can be used, CW offers the widest array of choices, and
perhaps the most startling effects on crowded channels.
Stereo headphones or an external stereo speaker are rec-
ommended for this mode. To set up the transceiver for
bandwidth diversity reception:
   Select the desired mode on the Main band (VFO-A).
   Tune to the signal of interest.
   Press the [A B] button to copy this mode and fre-
   quency into the Sub band (VFO-B).
   If using headphones, set the headphone mixing scheme
   to the “Con1” mode via the Menu item “089 rout
   HEADPHN,” and activate dual reception.
   Adjust the [AF GAIN] knob(s) to balance the volume
   of the two receivers.
   Now try manipulating the [SHIFT ] and [WIDTH ]
   knobs to observe the interesting effects of bandwidth
   diversity.




Page 44                                                          FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
            P.BACK (AUDIO PLAYBACK) FROM MAIN (VFO-A) RECEIVER
Once engaged by the operator, the FT-2000D begins the automatic recording of the last 15 seconds of incoming receiver
audio on the Main band (VFO-A). This capability is especially useful for confirming a callsign that may have been difficult
to copy due to noise or QRM, etc.

Recording
                                                                                 [AF GAIN] Knob
Press and hold in the [F7(P.BACK)] button for two sec-
onds to initiate record-
ing; the “         ” icon
will appear in the display
to confirm that recording
is in progress. The re-
corder will store up to 15
seconds of the Main
                                                                                [F7(P.BACK)] Button
band (VFO-A) received
audio, and will retain the most-recent 15 seconds of audio
on a running basis.
Pressing the [F7(P.BACK)] button once more will halt             Playback
the recording, and the “   ” icon will go out.                   Press the [F7(P.BACK)] button momentarily, after record-
NOTE:                                   Stop                     ing has been halted, to begin playback of the recorded
When the transceiver is                                          audio; the “        ” icon will appear in the display to con-
turned off, the contents of                                      firm that playback is in progress. The last 15 seconds of
the recording memory will                                        audio will be heard in the speaker or headphones. If you
be erased!                                                       do not intervene, the entire 15 seconds will be played back
                                                                 endlessly. To halt playback at any time, just press the
                                                                 [F7(P.BACK)] button momentarily again. The next time
                                                                 you press the [F7(P.BACK)] button, it will pick up the
                                     Start                       playback where you left off.
                                                                 ADVICE
                                    15 Seconds                   You may adjust the playback level of the recording by the
                                                                 main [AF GAIN] knob




                P.BACK feature from the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad
   The [P/B] key of the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad can also serve as a remote-control recording/playback
   switch. Operation is described below.

   Recording                                                     Playback
   Press and hold in the FH-2’s [P/B] key for two sec-           Press the FH-2’s [P/B] key momentarily, after record-
   onds to initiate recording.                                   ing has been halted, to begin playback of the recorded
   The “         ” icon will appear                              audio; the “        ” icon will appear in the display to
   in the display to confirm that re-                            confirm that playback is in progress.. The last 15 sec-
   cording is in progress.                      LOCK
                                                                 onds of audio will be heard in the speaker or head-
   Press the FH-2’s [P/B] key mo-              ON   OFF
                                                                 phones. If you do not intervene, the entire 15 seconds
   mentarily to halt recording; the                              will be played back endlessly. To halt playback at any
   “        ” icon will go out.                                  time, just press the [P/B] key momentarily again. The
   You may also press the front                                  next time you press the [P/B] key, it will pick up the
   panel’s [F7(P.BACK)] button                                   playback where you left off. You may also press the
   (momentarily) to halt recording,                              front panel’s [F7(P.BACK)] button (momentarily) to
   as well.                                                      play back the recorded audio, as well.
   When the transceiver is turned
                                                                 ADVICE
   off, the contents of the record-
                                                                 You may adjust the playback level of the recording by
   ing memory will be erased.
                                                                 the main [AF GAIN] knob


FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                        Page 45
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                         “MY BANDS” OPERATION
When operating on an Amateur Band, it is possible to use the [BAND] buttons to engage the use of the [SUB VFO-B] knob
for Amateur band selection. The “My Bands” feature allows you to select several Amateur bands, and make only those
bands available for selection via the [SUB VFO-B] knob.
This feature can be very useful in a contest, where the 10/18/24 MHz band are not used, or if you do not have antennas for
some bands.

“My Bands” Setup
1. Press the [MENU] button to engage the Menu mode.                                    Main Tuning Dial knob   [ENT] Button

2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item
   “122 tun MY BAND.”
3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to choose a band that
   you wish to skip (omit) from the band-selection loop
   (when using the [SUB VFO-B] knob for band selec-
   tion). The available choices are 1.8/3.5/5/7/10/14/18/
   21/24/28/50/GE (General Band)/AU (Transverter).
4. Press the [ENT] button to set the omission command                                                [MENU] Button
   to ON. The “E” (Enable) notation at the right of the                                                        [SUB VFO-B] Knob

   band notation will change to “d” (disable).
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select/deselect as many bands
   as you like.
   NOTE:
   The “ON” command sets the selected band to be
   skipped, while the “OFF” command sets the selected
   band to be included in the band-selection list. Return
   the “d” notation to “E” to restore operation on a previ-
   ously-deleted band.                                          ADVICE:
6. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds          The “My Band” feature affects both the Main (VFO-A)
   to lock in the new configuration and exit to normal          and Sub (VFO-B) bands.
   operation.


“My Band” Operation
1. Press the (VFO-A) [BAND] button; the imbedded LED                                                        (VFO-B)[BAND] Button

   will glow Red, if you operate the “My Band” feature                                               (VFO-A)[BAND] Button

   on the Main band (VFO-A).
   ADVICE:
   If the “My Band” feature on the Main band (VFO-A)
   seems not to be operating, check see if the orange lamp
   to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob is illuminated.
   If so, pressing the [A/B] key will cause the orange lamp
   to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob to go out. Now,
   press the (VFO-A) [BAND] button to begin “My Band”                                                      [SUB VFO-B] Knob
                                                                                                                      [A/B] Button
   feature.
2. Press the (VFO-B) [BAND] button; the imbedded LED
                                                                1.8 MHz
   will glow Orange, if you operate the “My Band” fea-          3.5 MHz
   ture on the Sub band (VFO-B).                                 5 MHz
3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to choose the Ama-                7 MHz                            7 MHz
                                                                                                           14 MHz
                                                                                                                     21 MHz
   teur band on which you wish to operate. Only those            10 MHz      3.5 MHz       3.5 MHz                          28 MHz
   Amateur bands that have not been skipped will appear          14 MHz       7 MHz

   as you scroll through the bands.                              18 MHz      14 MHz
                                                                 21 MHz      21 MHz
                                                                 24 MHz      28 MHz
                                                                 28 MHz
                                                                 50 MHz




Page 46                                                                       FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                         BAND STACK OPERATION
The FT-2000D utilizes a triple band-stack VFO selection technique, that permits you to store up to three favorite frequen-
cies and modes onto each band’s VFO register. For example, you may store one frequency each on 14 MHz CW, RTTY, and
USB, then recall these VFOs by successive, momentary presses of the [14] MHz band button. Each Amateur band key may
similarly have up to three frequency/mode settings applied. Both the Main (VFO-A) and Sub (VFO-B) systems have their
own, independent, band stacks.
A typical setup, for the 14 MHz band, might be arranged like this:

1. Program 14.025 MHz, CW Mode, then press the [14]
   MHz band button;
2. Program 14.080 MHz, RTTY Mode, then press the [14]
   MHz band button;
3. Program 14.195 MHz, SSB Mode, then press the [14]
   MHz band button.
With this configuration, successive momentary presses of
                                                                                                                [BAND] Switch
the [14] MHz band button will allow you to toggle se-
quentially through these three VFOs.



                                                                                   USB


                                                                            RTTY


                                                                       CW




                                          C.S (CUSTOM SWITCH)
An often-used Menu mode selection may be brought out to the front panel’s [C.S] button.

C.S Setup
1. Press the [MENU] button to engage the Menu mode;                                      Main Tuning Dial Knob

   the Menu list will appear on the display.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the Menu
   item you want to be able to access via the [C.S] but-
   ton.
3. Press and hold in the [C.S] button for two seconds to
   lock in your selection.
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds
   to save the new configuration and exit to normal op-                                                  [MENU] Button
   eration.                                                                               [C.S] Button


Menu Selection Recall via [C.S] button
Press the [C.S] button.                                                                                  [MENU] Button

The programmed Menu item will appear on the display.
You may now rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to change
the setting of this menu item. Press the [MENU] button
for two seconds, when you are done, to save the new con-
figuration and exit to normal operation.


                                                                                          [C.S] Button             [SUB VFO-B] Knob




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                                Page 47
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                           ROTATOR CONTROL FUNCTIONS
When using a YAESU model G-800DXA, G-1000DXA, or G-2800DXA rotator (not supplied), it is possible to control it
from the front panel of the FT-2000D.
1 Press and hold in the [ENT] button (one of the [BAND]
  button) for two seconds. The frequency display area
  will change over to the “Rotator Control” configura-
  tion.
2 Press either the [F2(CH-2)] button or the [F3(CH-3)]
  button to rotate the antenna. Pressing the [F2(CH-2)]
  button will cause rotation to the left (counter-clock-
  wise), while pressing the [F3(CH-3)] button will cause                                                                      [F5(MEM)], [F6(DEC)] Button                                                       [ENT] Button
  rotation to the right (clockwise).                                             [F2(CH-2)], [F3(CH-3)] Button
3 Press the [F5(MEM)] button or the [F6(DEC)] button
  to control the speed of rotation. Pressing the                                                                                            Speed (0 % ~ 100 %)                                           Direction (0° ~ 360°)

  [F5(MEM)] button will cause slower rotation, while
  pressing the [F6(DEC)] button will speed up rotation.
  Usually, you will be using the “100%” setting.
When you are through exercising rotator control, press the
[ENT] button momentarily. The frequency display will                                                                                                                                             “Overlap” Indicator

return to the main display field.

                                                                                     Counter-clockwise Rotation                                                                                                  Speed Up
                   IMPORTANT NOTE
       Set to match the starting point of your rotator
       control indicator needle via the Menu item
       “012 diSP RTR STU.” The default setting is
       zero (north). If your controller starting point is
                                                                                                                                                 Clockwise Rotation                                  Speed Down
       south, the Menu item “012 diSP RTR STU”
       must be set to “180°.” If not set properly the
       FT-2000 display will not show the correct di-
       rection.
       When the rotator control indicator needle does
       not indicate the precise antenna direction, ad-
       justs the indicator needle precisely to the an-
       tenna direction via the Menu item “013 diSP
       RTR ADJ.”
                                                                        ~AC IN
                      ANT 1



                              ANT 2




                                                                                                   O PER ATI ON      ADJ . MOD E    F ULL   O VER LAP    A              B   O UT VOL
                                                                                                      MOD E                        SCA LE   L ED A D J                        A DJ
                                                                                    EX T                      SE LE CT              A DJ                     P RES ET
                                                                                 CO NT ROL                    SW T CH
                                                                                                                 I                                              ADJ
             ROT




                                                                                             EXT CONTROL




                                                                                                                                                                                       CONTROL
                                                                                                                                                                                       REMOTE




                                 OPTIONAL CONNECTION CABLE (T9101556)




Page 48                                                                                                                            FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                            MORE FREQUENCY NAVIGATION TECHNIQUES
Keyboard Frequency Entry                                           ADVICE:
You may enter operating frequencies, for either the Main           If you attempt to enter a frequency outside the operat-
(VFO-A) or Sub (VFO-B) bands, using the front panel                ing range of 30 kHz ~ 60 MHz, the microprocessor
band/frequency selection keys.                                     will ignore the attempt, and you will be returned to
                                                                   your previous operating frequency. If this happens,
Example 1:
                                                                   please try again, taking care not to repeat the error in
   Enter 14.250.00 MHz into the Main band (VFO-A):
                                                                   the frequency entry process.
1. Press the [ENT] button
   to engage the direct fre-                                    Using the [SUB VFO-B] knob
   quency entry process.                                        You may change the Main band (VFO-A) frequency in 1
   Now, beginning with                                          MHz steps. If you press the (VFO-A) [BAND] button, the
   the “10 MHz” digit of                                        1 MHz steps will be applied to the Main band (VFO-A)
   the frequency (the                                           frequency. The imbedded LED in the (VFO-A) [BAND]
   leftmost digit), we will                                     button will glow Red in the latter case.
   enter the required dig-
                                                                When tuning in 1 MHz steps, clockwise rotation of the
   its of the frequency.                                        [SUB VFO-B] knob will increase the frequency, while
2. Press, in order, the digits of the operating frequency,
                                                                counter-clockwise rotation will decrease the frequency.
   using the [BAND] buttons (which have the frequency-
   entry digit or decimal point on the right side of the        Using the UP/DOWN Switches of the
   slash bar). In this example, enter                              Supplied MH-31B8 Hand Microphone
   [1.8/1] [10/4] [GEN/.] [3.5/2]                               The [UP]/[DWN] switches on             [FST] Button
           [14/5] [50/0] [50/0] [50/0] [50/0]                   the supplied MH-31 B8 Hand [DWN] Button      [UP] Button
   The decimal point after the “MHz” portion of the fre-        Microphone may also be used
   quency must be entered, but no decimal point is re-          for manually scanning upward or             DWN    FST     UP


   quired after the “kHz” portion.                              downward in frequency, respec-
3. Press the [ENT] button once more. A short “beep” will        tively.
   confirm that the frequency entry was successful, and
                                                                The microphone’s [UP ]/ [DWN ]
   the new operating frequency will appear on the Main                                                      DYNAMIC MICROPHONE


                                                                switches utilize the tuning steps of               MH-31


   (VFO-A) frequency display fields.
                                                                the Main Tuning Dial knob; moreover,
Example 2:                                                      when the microphone’s [FAST] key is
     Enter 7.100.000 MHz into the Sub band (VFO-B):             pressed, the tuning rate increases by a
1. Press the [B] button.                                        factor of ten, in a manner similar to the
2. Within five seconds (blinking the                            effect of the transceiver’s front-panel
   imbedded orange LED) of pressing                             [FAST] button.
   the [B] button, press the [ENT] but-
                                                                ADVICE:
   ton to engage the direct frequency entry process. Now,
                                                                In the AM and FM modes, you may independently set the
   beginning with the “10 MHz” digit of the frequency
                                                                tuning steps when using the [UP]/[DWN] switches. To set
   (the leftmost digit), we will enter the required digits of
                                                                new tuning steps, use Menu items “119 tun AM STEP”
   the frequency to be entered into the Sub band (VFO-
                                                                and “120 tun FM STEP.”
   B) register.
3. Press, in order, the digits of the operating frequency,
   using the [BAND] buttons (which have the frequency-
   entry digit or decimal point on the right side of the
   slash bar). In this example, enter
   [21/7] [GEN/.] [1.8/1]
          [50/0] [50/0] [50/0] [50/0] [50/0]
4. Press the [ENT] button once more. A short “beep” will
   confirm that the frequency entry was successful, and
   the new operating frequency will appear on the Sub
   (VFO-B) frequency display fields.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                           Page 49
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                           RECEIVER OPERATION (FRONT END BLOCK DIAGRAM)
The FT-2000D includes a wide range of special features to suppress the many types of interference that may be encoun-
tered on the HF bands. However, real world interference conditions are constantly changing, so optimum setting of the
controls is somewhat of an art, requiring familiarity with the types of interference and the subtle effects of some of the
controls. Therefore, the following information is provided as a general guideline for typical situations, and a starting point
for your own experimentation.
The FT-2000D’s interference-fighting circuitry begins in its “RF” stages, and continues throughout the entire receiver
section. FT-2000D allows configuration of the features described below. However, the Sub band (VFO-B) receiver does
not have the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) features.

VRF (SEE PAGE 53)                                                  IF NOTCH (SEE PAGE 58)
On the 1.9 - 28 MHz Amateur bands, Yaesu’s powerful                The IF Notch filter is a high-Q notch filter that can signifi-
VRF (Variable RF Filter) preselector circuit provides ex-          cantly reduce, if not eliminate, an interfering carrier. The
cellent suppression of out-of-band interference, with a            Q (sharpness) of the filter may be adjusted using the Menu.
passband much narrower than that provided by traditional
fixed bandpass filters.
                                                                   DNR (DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION) (SEE PAGE 59)
                                                                   The DSP’s Digital Noise Reduction (DNR) feature uti-
R. FLT (IF Roofing Filters) (SEE PAGE 54)                          lizes sixteen different mathematical algorithms to analyze
On the Main (VFO-A) receiver, three automatically-se-              and suppress different noise profiles encountered on the
lected Roofing filters, in bandwidths of 15 kHz, 6 kHz,            HF/50 MHz bands. Choose the selection that provides the
and 3 kHz, are provided in the 69 MHz First IF, right after        best noise suppression, which concurrently will allow the
the first mixer. These filters provide narrow-band selec-          signal to rise up out of the noise.
tivity to protect the following IF and DSP stages, and the
filters' automatically-selected bandwidths may be manu-
                                                                   DNF (DIGITAL NOTCH FILTER) (SEE PAGE 59)
ally changed by the operator, if desired, for special oper-        When multiple interfering carriers are encountered during
ating circumstances.                                               reception, the Digital Notch Filter can significantly reduce
                                                                   the level of these signals.
The Sub (VFO-B) receiver’s 40 MHz IF includes a fixed
Roofing filter, with a bandwidth of 15 kHz.                        AGC (SEE PAGE 62)
                                                                   The AGC system is highly adaptable to changing signal
CONTOUR Filter (SEE PAGE 55)                                       and fading characteristics, making reception possible un-
The DSP Contour filter is a unique capability on the Main          der the most difficult conditions.
(VFO-A) receiver, providing either nulling or peaking of
tunable segments of the receiver passband, so as to sup-           SLOPED AGC (SEE PAGE 63)
press interference or excessive frequency components on            The Sloped AGC system on the Main (VFO-A) receiver,
an incoming signal, or to peak those tunable frequency             instead of clamping a fixed upper bound on audio output
segments. The amount of nulling/peaking, and the band-             across a wide range of input signals, actually allows the
width over which it is applied, are adjustable via the Menu.       audio output to rise, very gently, with ever-increasing sig-
                                                                   nal strength. This capability allows you to separate sig-
IF SHIFT (SEE PAGE 56)                                             nals, using your brain, according to signal strength in ad-
The passband center frequency response of the IF DSP               dition to slight frequency differences.
filtering may be adjusted using this control.
                                                                   IF Filter Quality Adjustment (SEE PAGE 125)
IF WIDTH (SEE PAGE 57)                                             The “Q” (quality factor) of the IF DSP filters may be ad-
The width of the IF DSP filtering may be adjusted using            justed using the Menu.
this control.
                                                                   Variable IF Filter Shape Factor (SEE PAGE 125)
                                                                   You may adjust the shape factor of the receiver IF DSP
                                                                   filters using the Menu.
                                                                                                              Main Band (VFO-A)

                                         RF                                              1st IF                             2nd IF                     3rd IF (DSP)
                                                                                     69.450 MHz                             450 kHz                       30 kHz
                               THRU
                                                   IPO OFF                   ROOFING
                              OPTION                                          FILTER

                               µ-TUNE   BPF         RF AMP 1                                        1st                CF               2nd                DSP
                     ATT                                                                          IF AMP                              IF AMP               UNIT

          ANTENNA                                                            3k/6k/15k
          SELECTOR                                               1st Local                                 2nd Local                           3rd Local
                                VRF                 RF AMP 2



                                                                                                              Sub Band (VFO-B)

                                                                                        1st IF                               2nd IF
                                                                                     40.455 MHz                             455 kHz

                                                                             ROOFING
                                                                              FILTER
                                                                                                    1st                CF               2nd                DET
                                                                                                  IF AMP                              IF AMP
                                                                               15k
                                                                 1st Local                                 2nd Local



Page 50                                                                                             FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                IPO (INTERCEPT POINT OPTIMIZATION)
The IPO feature allows the operator to optimize the characteristics of the receiver front end, depending on the current noise
level and the strength of incoming signals.
Press the [IPO] button several times to set the                                          Receiver Configuration Indicator
desired characteristic of the receiver front end,
per the chart below.
    AMP1: Amplifies the incoming signal path using a
              low distortion RF preamplifier (gain: approx.
              10 dB).
    AMP2: Amplifies incoming signal path using a 2-
              stage low-distortion RF preamplifier (total
              gain: approx. 17 dB).                                             [IPO] Button
    ON:       Bypasses the RF preamplifier, yielding di-
              rect feed to the first mixer.                                        AMP1
                                                                                               AMP

The selected receiver RF preamplifier will be indicated in
the IPO column                                                                               AMP2         AMP


of the Receiver
Configuration                                                                       ON

Indicator on the display.

ADVICE:
On the 10 MHz and lower bands, it generally is not necessary to use any preamplifier at all; selecting the “ON” position
described above will increase the strong-signal-handling capability of the receiver, and generally will result in more pleas-
ant reception due to reduced noise. If you can hear band noise with the preamplifiers disengaged, then a preamplifier is
generally not needed.


                                                            ATT
Even with the IPO function on, extremely strong local signals or high noise can still degrade reception. In such situations,
you can use the [ATT] button to insert 6, 12, or 18-dB of RF attenuation in front of the RF amplifier.

1. Press the [ATT] button several times to set                                           Receiver Configuration Indicator
   the desired attenuation level, per the chart
   below.
   OFF:      Attenuator is Off
   –6 dB: The incoming signal power is reduced by 6
             dB (Signal voltage reduced by 1/2)
   –12 dB: The incoming signal power is reduced by 12
             dB (Signal voltage reduced by 1/4)
   –18 dB: The incoming signal power is reduced by 18                         [ATT] Button
             dB (Signal voltage reduced by 1/8)
   The selected
   attenuation
   level will be                                                   2. To restore full signal strength through the Attenuator
   indicated in the ATT column of the Receiver Configu-               circuit area, press the [ATT] button to restore the ATT
   ration Indicator on the display.                                   display to the “OFF” position.

ADVICE:
  The Attenuator affects both the Main (VFO-A) and Sub (VFO-B) bands.
  If background noise causes the S-meter to deflect on clear frequencies, press the [ATT] button until the S-meter drops to
  about “S-1.” This setting optimizes the trade-offs between sensitivity, noise, and interference immunity. Also, once you have
  tuned in a station you want to work, you may want to reduce sensitivity further (or add more attenuation) by pressing the
  [ATT] button to a more setting. This reduces the strength of all signals (and noise) and can make reception more comfort-
  able, important especially during long QSOs. When looking for weak signals on a quiet band, you will want maximum
  sensitivity, so the IPO should be disabled and the [ATT] button should be set to “OFF.” This situation is typical during quiet
  times on frequencies above 21 MHz, and when using a small or negative-gain receiving antenna on other bands.

FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                                   Page 51
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                         RF GAIN (SSB/CW/AM MODES)
The RF Gain controls provide manual adjustment of the gain levels for the receiver RF and IF stages, to account for noise
and/or signal strength conditions at the moment.

1. The Main [RF GAIN] knob should, initially, be ro-                             Main [RF GAIN] Knob
   tated to the fully clockwise position. This is the point
   of maximum sensitivity, and counter-clockwise rota-
   tion will gradually reduce the system gain.
2. The Sub [RF GAIN] knob operates identically to the
   Main [RF GAIN] knob. The fully clockwise position
   of the Sub [RF GAIN] knob should always be utilized
   as a starting point for operation.
ADVICE:                                                                      Sub [RF GAIN] Knob
   As the [RF GAIN] knob is rotated counterclockwise
   to reduce the gain, the S-meter reading will rise. This
   indicates that the AGC voltage being applied to the
   receiver is increasing (which causes a reduction in re-
   ceiver gain).
   Rotating the [RF GAIN] knob control to the fully
   counter-clockwise position will essentially disable the
   receiver, as the gain will be greatly reduced. In this
   case, as well, the S-meter will appear to be “pegged”
   against the right edge of the analog S-meter scale.
   The Sub [RF GAIN] knob operates identically to the
   Main [RF GAIN] knob. The effects of counter-clock-
   wise rotation of the Sub (VFO-B) receiver’s RF Gain
   control may be observed visually on the Sub band
   (VFO-B) S-meter.
QUICK POINT:
  Reception frequently can be optimized by rotating the
  [RF GAIN] knob slightly counter-clockwise to the
  point where the incoming noise level is just about the
  same as the “stationary” meter needle position as set
  by the adjustment of the [RF GAIN] knob. This set-
  ting ensures that excessive gain is not being utilized,
  without so much gain reduction that incoming signals
  cannot be heard.
  The RF Gain control, along with the IPO and Attenua-
  tor features, all affect the system receiver gain in dif-
  ferent ways. As a first step in dealing with high noise
  or a crowded, high-level signal environment, the IPO
  generally should be the first feature engaged, if the fre-
  quency is low enough to allow the preamplifier to be
  bypassed. Thereafter, the RF Gain and Attenuator fea-
  tures may be employed to provide precise, delicate
  adjustment of the receiver gain so as to optimize per-
  formance fully.




Page 52                                                                      FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
ADVANCED INTERFERENCE-SUPPRESSION FEATURES: RF FRONT END
The FT-2000D includes an unmatched array of RF selectivity-enhancing features. Please study the material below care-
fully, so as to understand the various features completely.

                    USING THE VRF (VARIABLE RF FRONT-END FILTER)
The VRF system is a high-performance RF front-end preselector that has high Q factor and low insertion loss. VRF pro-
vides outstanding rejection of out-of-band signals, and can significantly improve reception in tough co-location operations
such as a contest or DX-pedition. The FT-2000D’s VRF system affects the 1.8 - 28 MHz amateur bands only.
1. Press the [VRF] button momentarily. The “         ” icon                         Receiver Configuration Indicator    [VRF] Button

   will appear at the FLT column of the Receiver Con-
   figuration Indicator on the display, and the VRF sys-
   tem will be
   engaged,
   centered on
   your current Amateur band.
2. You may rotate the [VRF] knob to skew the position
   of the VRF system relative to your operating frequency.                                  Offset Tuning Indicator    [VRF] Knob
   Because the VRF system is relatively broad, although
   still much narrower than the fixed bandpass filter), you
   may not hear much difference in the background noise
   or signal quality when you make minor adjustments.
   However, if you have receiving problems associated
   by a very strong signal, rotation of the [VRF] knob
   may help reduce the strength of the interfering station,
   allowing improved reception of the desired signal if
   overload was degrading reception.
   ADVICE:                                                       ADVICE:
        You may observe the                                        The VRF filter affects both the Main (VFO-A) and Sub
        relative skew of the                                       (VFO-B) bands.
        VRF system in the Tun-                                     The VRF Filter operational status will be memorized
        ing Offset Indicator on                                    independently on each VFO in the VFO stack.
        the display while turning
                                                                 QUICK POINT:
        the [VRF] knob.
                                                                 The VRF filter, utilizing high-quality coils and capacitors
        After moving the passband of the VRF system
                                                                 that provide high Q, yields a passband that is approximately
        manually, you may re-center it on the current Ama-
                                                                 20% to 30% the width of a traditional, fixed bandpass fil-
        teur band by pressing and holding in the [VRF]
                                                                 ter. As a result, significantly more “unwanted” signal re-
        button for two seconds.
                                                                 jection is provided. Within each Amateur band, the fol-
3. To switch VRF off, press the [VRF] button until the
                                                                 lowing adjustment steps are provided, if you wish to skew
   “       ” icon shows “       ” in the FLT column of the
                                                                 the response in a particular direction so as to enhance in-
   Receiver Configuration Indicator on the display; this
                                                                 terference rejection even more. The actual “sound” of the
   confirms that the VRF circuit has been removed from
                                                                 signal you are listening to will remain unchanged, how-
   the incoming received signal path.
                                                                 ever.
                                                                         AMATEUR BAND                 VRF ADJUSTMENT STEPS
                                                                           1.8 MHz                         62 steps
                                                                           3.5 MHz                         62 steps
                                                                            5 MHz                          62 steps
                                                                            7 MHz                          62 steps
                                                                           10 MHz                          30 steps
                                                                           14 MHz                          30 steps
                                                                           18 MHz                          20 steps
                                                                           21 MHz                          20 steps
                                                                          24.5 MHz                         20 steps
                                                                           28 MHz                          20 steps




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                              Page 53
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS OFF FREQUENCY BY JUST A FEW KHZ)
                                          R.FLT (ROOFING FILTERS)
Narrow-band Roofing Filters of 15 kHz, 6 kHz, and 3 kHz bandwidths are provided in the first IF, right after the first mixer.
These filters provide protection fort the 2nd mixer, DSP, and other circuitry that follow and can dramatically improve
reception on a very crowded band (during a contest, etc.). Typically, the AUTO selection mode is satisfactory for most
operating situations, but in an extremely crowded phone band you may wish to select, for example, the 3 kHz roofing filter
for SSB operation.

Press the [R.FLT] button to toggle the Roofing                                       Receiver Configuration Indicator
Filter selection.
    AUTO 15 kHz 6 kHz 3 kHz AUTO
ADVICE:
  The Roofing filter selection affects the Main band
  (VFO-A) only. The Sub band’s (VFO-B) Roofing fil-
  ter is fixed at a bandwidth of 15 kHz.
  As you repeatedly press the [R.FLT] button, you will
                                                                               [R.FLT] Button
  observe changes in the notation in the R.FLT column
  of the Receiver Configuration Indicator on the display,
  denoting the
  Roofing Fil-
  ter currently
  in use.
  Typically, this selection will be set to “AUTO.”
  The Roofing Filter selection will be memorized inde-
  pendently on each VFO in the VFO stack.
QUICK POINT:
  The “AUTO” selection of the Roofing Filter is based
  on the operating mode. However, you may override
  the automatic selection, if band conditions warrant a
  different (usually, a tighter) selection.
  The AUTO mode Roofing Filter selections are shown
  below:
      AM/FM/FM-PKT: 15 kHz
      LSB/USB/PKT:           6 kHz
      CW/RTTY:               3 kHz
  When the Roofing filter mode is set to “AUTO” and
  the Noise Blanker is turned On, the Roofing Filter band-
  width will automatically be set to 15 kHz, as this set-
  ting provides the most effective noise blanking. How-
  ever, you still may override the automatic setting, and
  select a more narrow Roofing Filter. Noise blanking
  may be compromised, however, with a tighter Roofing
  Filter in the line.
TERMINOLOGY:
A “Roofing Filter,” as its name implies, places a “Roof”
over the receiver’s IF system bandwidth. This “Roof” pro-
tects the circuitry downstream from the first mixer from
interference, just as a roof on a house protects the contents
from rain and snow.




Page 54                                                                         FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
                                  CONTOUR CONTROL OPERATION
The Contour filtering system provides a gentle perturbation of the IF filter passband, so as to suppress or enhance certain
frequency components, thus enhancing the sound and/or readability of a received signal.
1. Press the [CONTOUR] button. The Contour notation                                   CONTOUR Indicator      [CONTOUR] Button

   will appear in the display to confirm that the Contour
   filter is engaged.
2. Rotate the [CONTOUR] knob to achieve the most
   natural-sounding audio reproduction on the incoming
   signal.
3. To cancel Contour tuning, press the [CONTOUR] but-
   ton once more.
                                                                                                              [CONTOUR] Knob
ADVICE:
  The Contour filter affects the Main band (VFO-A) only.
  You may observe the graphically-depicted peak posi-
  tion of the CONTOUR Filter in the CONTOUR indi-
  cator on the display.

         [CONTOUR] button            [CONTOUR] button
           Fully Clockwise             Fully Clockwise

         [CONTOUR] button            [CONTOUR] button
              Center                      Center                    With reference to Figure “B,” note the initial posi-
         [CONTOUR] button            [CONTOUR] button
                                                                    tion (12 o’clock) of the [CONTOUR] knob when
       Fully Counter-Clockwise     Fully Counter-Clockwise          the [CONTOUR] button is pushed. You may ob-
    CONTOUR GAIN “MINUS”         CONTOUR GAIN “PLUS”                serve the “indentation” in the receiver passband
                                                                    where the Contour filter is placing a low-Q “notch”
   The Contour filter’s level (either nulling or peaking)           (per the setting of Menu item “090,” referenced
   may be adjusted using Menu item “090 rdSP CNTR                   above). Counter-clockwise rotation (to the left) of
   LV.” The factory default setting is for a null of “–15”          the [CONTOUR] knob causes the indentation to
   (dB).                                                            move towered a lower frequency within the pass-
   The bandwidth over which the Contour filter effect is            band, while clockwise rotation (to the right) causes
   applied may be adjusted using Menu item “091 rdSP                the indentation to move toward a higher frequency
   CNTR WI.” The factory default setting is “10.”                   within the passband. By removing interference or
   When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit                  unwanted frequency components on the incoming
   is connected, the Audio Scope (on the “Oscilloscope”             signal, it is possible to make the desired signal rise
   page) is particularly useful when adjusting the Con-             out of the background noise/interference, enhanc-
   tour control. Not only can you see the effect of the             ing intelligibility.
   null/peak of the Contour system, but you also can see
   the position of the null/peak with respect to frequency                   A                 B              C
   components of interest on the incoming signal. You
   may then observe (on the Audio Scope) the effect of
   the Contour control while listening to the effect on the
   signal, and this will help build your intuition on how
   best to use Contour tuning in the future.                                  IF                IF             IF
                                                                          BANDWIDTH         BANDWIDTH      BANDWIDTH




QUICK POINT:
The steep slopes of the DSP filtering can, when adjusted aggressively, impart an unnatural sound to an incoming signal.
Oftentimes, though, a narrow bandwidth is not the key to improving copy; the incoming signal itself may have undesirable
or excessive frequency components, especially in the low-frequency range around 100-400 Hz. By judicious use of the
Contour filter, the “shoulder” of the passband response may be altered, or components removed from within the passband,
allowing the desired signal to rise above the background noise and interference in a manner not obtainable with other
filtering systems.

FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                         Page 55
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
                               IF SHIFT OPERATION (SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT/AM MODES)
IF Shift allows you to vary the DSP filter passband higher or lower, without changing the pitch of the incoming signal, so as
to reduce or eliminate interference. Because the carrier tuning frequency is not varied, there is no need to re-tune the
operating frequency when eliminating the interference. The total passband tuning range for the IF Shift system is ±1 kHz.

Rotate the [SHIFT] knob to the left or right to reduce the                            SHIFT Indicator            [SHIFT] knob

interference.
ADVICE:
    The [SHIFT] knob affects the Main band (VFO-A)
    only. However, you may shift the Sub band (VFO-B)
    filter passband via Menu items “042 S-iF LSB SET”
    through “049 S-iF PKT-USB.”
    The position of the passband set by the IF Shift can be
    observed on the display.


   Referring to Figure “A,” note the depiction of the
   IF DSP filter as the thick line, with the [SHIFT]
   knob in the 12 o’clock position. In Figure “B,” an
   interfering signal has appeared inside the original
   passband. In Figure “C,” you can see the effect of
   rotating the [SHIFT] knob so as to reduce the in-
   terference level by moving the filter passband so
   that the interference is outside of the passband.
            A                          B                      C
             Desired Signal            Desired Signal          Desired Signal




                              QRM                       QRM




             IF                         IF                        IF
         BANDWIDTH                  BANDWIDTH                 BANDWIDTH




Page 56                                                                         FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
           WIDTH (IF DSP BANDWIDTH) TUNING (SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT MODES)
The IF Width tuning system allows you to vary the width of the DSP IF passband, so as to eliminate interference. Moreover,
the bandwidth may actually be expanded from its default setting, should you wish to enhance incoming signal fidelity when
interference on the band is low.

Rotate the [ WIDTH ] knob to adjust the bandwidth.                                            WIDTH Indicator                         [WIDTH] Knob

Counter-clockwise rotation reduces the bandwidth, while
clockwise rotation increases the bandwidth.
ADVICE:
  The IF Width affects the Main band (VFO-A) only.
  The bandwidth of the IF can be observed on the dis-
  play.
CAUTION:
When rotating the [WIDTH] control fully counter-clock-
wise, the transition between 50 Hz and 25 Hz bandwidth
may be accompanied by a “ping” sound, depending on the
amount of noise present. This is a normal condition, and
you should turn down the volume, when wearing head-
phones, to minimize the amplitude of this momentary
sound.
                                                                     Using IF Shift and Width Together
                                                                    The IF Shift and Variable IF Width features together
                                                                    form a very effective interference-fighting filter-
   Referring to Figure B, you can see the default band-             ing system.
   width with the [WIDTH] knob set to the 12 o’clock
   position.                                                        For example, in Figure “A” you can see how inter-
                                                                    ference has appeared both on the high and low sides
   By rotating the [WIDTH] knob to the left, the band-              of the desired signal. By rotating the [WIDTH]
   width will narrow (see Figure “A”), while rotation               knob, as shown in Figure “B,” the interference from
   of the [WIDTH] knob to the right, as depicted in                 one side can be eliminated, and by re-positioning
   Figure “C,” will widen the bandwidth.                            the [SHIFT] knob (Figure “C”), the interference
            A                B                  C                   on the opposite side can be removed, without re-
                                                                    introducing the interference previously eliminated
                                                                    in Figure “B.”
                                                                    Advice: For best interference reduction, the Width
                                                                    and Shift features are the primary tools you should
             IF               IF                IF                  use. After narrowing the bandwidth (Width) and/or
         BANDWIDTH        BANDWIDTH         BANDWIDTH
                                                                    adjusting the center of the passband (Shift), the
                                                                    Contour control may also yield additional signal-
                                                                    enhancement benefits on the net residual bandwidth.
                                                                    What’s more, the IF Notch Filter (see the next sec-
                                                                    tion) may also be utilized, in conjunection with the
                                                                    three other filter systems, to significant advantage.
   The default bandwidths , and total bandwidth ad-
   justment range, will vary according to the operat-                          A                         B                        C
                                                                               Desired Signal            Desired Signal            Desired Signal
   ing mode:
                                                                                        QRM                       QRM                     QRM
   SSB Mode: 200 Hz ~ 4.0 kHz (2.4 kHz )                              QRM                       QRM                       QRM
   CW Mode: 25 Hz ~ 2.4 kHz (2.4 kHz )
   RTTY/PKT Modes: 25 Hz ~ 2.4 kHz (500 Hz )
         : bandwidth at 12 o’clock position of [WIDTH] knob.                    IF                        IF                        IF
                                                                            BANDWIDTH                 BANDWIDTH                 BANDWIDTH




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                                             Page 57
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
                 IF NOTCH FILTER OPERATION (SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT/AM MODES)
The IF Notch filter is a highly-effective system that allows you to slice out an interfering beat note or other carrier signal
from inside the receiver passband.
1. Press the [NOTCH] button. The Notch characteristic                                       NOTCH Indicator                      [NOTCH] Button

   will appear in the display to confirm that the Notch
   filter is engaged.
2. Initially, rough adjustment of the center frequency of
   the IF Notch Filter is adjusted using the outer
   [COARSE] knob; thereafter, fine tuning of the Notch
   frequency is adjusted using the inner [FINE] knob.
3. To switch the IF Notch filter off, press the [NOTCH]
   button once more. The Notch notation will turn off,                                                                            [NOTCH] Knob
   confirming that the IF Notch filter is no longer operat-
   ing.
ADVICE:
  The IF Notch filter affects the Main band (VFO-A)
  only.
  You may observe the graphically-depicted peak (maxi-
  mum null) position of the IF Notch Filter in the NOTCH
  indicator on the display.
  The width of the IF Notch null may be adjusted using
  Menu item “092 rdSP NOTCH W.” Both “Wide” and                       The performance of the IF Notch filter is shown in
  “Narrow” selections are available, with “Narrow” pro-               Figure “A,” where the effect of rotation of the
  viding the least disruption of the “desired” signal.                [NOTCH] knobs is depicted. In Figure “B,” you
  When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit                     can see the notching effect of the IF Notch filter as
  is connected, the effect of the IF Notch filter may be              you rotate the [NOTCH] knobs to eliminate the
  observed on the Audio Scope (on the “Oscilloscope”                  incoming interference.
  page). The Notch will be observed as a “dip” in the
                                                                                          A                                  B
  noise platform observed. What’s more, the “Waterfall”
                                                                                          Desired Signal                     Desired Signal
  display may be used to observe the effect of the IF
  Notch filter, which will appear as a white area in the
  colored background area. The tuning rate for the IF                          QRM                                QRM
                                                                        (Heterodyne)                       (Heterodyne)
  Notch is somewhat slow while you adjust the [FINE]
  knob, so the use of the Waterfall display to confirm
  proper adjustment is highly recommended.                                                 IF                                 IF
                                                                                       BANDWIDTH                          BANDWIDTH




Page 58                                                                                FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
                          DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION (DNR) OPERATION
The Digital Noise Reduction (DNR) system is designed to reduce the level of random noise found on the HF and 50 MHz
bands, and it is especially effective during SSB operation. By rotating the [DNR] knob, any of sixteen different noise-
reduction algorithms can be selected; each of these algorithms was created for dealing with a different noise profile, and
you will want to experiment with the DNR system to find the best setting according to the noise currently being experi-
enced.

1. Press the [DNR] button. The “        ” icon will appear                              NOTCH Indicator               [DNR] Knob
   in the display, confirming that the DNR system is en-
   gaged.
2. Rotate the [DNR] knob to select the setting that most
   effectively reduces the noise level.
3. To disable the DNR system, press the [DNR] button
   once more. The “       ” icon will turn off, confirming
   that the DNR system is not active.
ADVICE:                                                                                                              [DNR] Button

The Digital Noise Reduction affects the Main band (VFO-
A) only.




                             DIGITAL NOTCH FILTER (DNF) OPERATION
The Digital Notch Filter (DNF) is an effective beat-cancelling filter that can null out a number of interfering beat notes
inside the receiver passband. Because this is an Auto-Notch feature, there is no adjustment knob associated with this filter.
ADVICE:
If a very strong interfering carrier is encountered, we recommend you first use the IF Notch filter, as it is the most effective
notching tool in the receiver section.

1. Press the [DNF] button. The “       ” icon will                                                                   [DNF] Button

   appear in the display, confirming that the DNF
   system is engaged.
2. To cancel DNF operation, press the [DNF] button once
   more. The “       ” icon will turn off, confirming that
   the Digital Notch Filter is no longer in operation.
ADVICE:
The Digital Notch Filter affects the Main (VFO-A) band
only.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                          Page 59
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
                  NARROW (NAR) ONE-TOUCH IF FILTER SELECTION
Main band (VFO-A) “One-Touch Narrow” Operation
Pressing the [NAR] button provides one-touch, mode-spe-                            WIDTH Indicator            [WIDTH] Knob

cific selection of a narrow IF DSP filter set-
ting that does not depend on the setting of
the [WIDTH] knob. Pressing the [NAR] but-
ton once more returns the bandwidth control
to the Width/Shift system. The factory de-
fault bandwidths are:
                                   [NAR] SWITCH
    OPERATING MODE
                             “ON”              “OFF”                                  [NAR] Button
 SSB                        1.8 kHz
 CW                         500 Hz
 RTTY/PKT-L/PKT-U           300 Hz
 PKT-FM                      9 kHz            16 kHz
 AM                          6 kHz             9 kHz
 FM (28/50 MHz Bands)        9 kHz            16 kHz
                            : Depends on the [WIDTH] knob
                                                              Sub band (VFO-B)
ADVICE:
                                                                     “One-Touch Narrow” Operation
  When the narrow bandwidth is selected, the “            ”
                                                              1. Press the [B] button.
  icon will appear in the display and the bandwidth on
                                                              2. Within five seconds of pressing the [B] button (while
  the WIDTH indicator in the display will be reduced.
                                                                 the imbedded orange LED is blinking), press the [NAR]
  The bandwidth applied when the [NAR] button is
                                                                 button to toggle the bandwidth between “WIDE” and
  pressed may be adjusted using the Menu. This allows
                                                                 “Narrow.” When the narrow bandwidth is selected, the
  you to customize a quick-switch “Narrow” bandwidth
                                                                 “     ” icon will appear in the display.
  matching your operating needs. The default values for
  each mode below are underlined.                                                      [B] Button
  SSB mode: Menu item “104 rdsP SSB NAR”
         200/400/600/850/1100/1350/1500/1650/
         1800/1950/2100/2250 Hz
  CW mode: Menu item “095 rdsP CW NARR”
         25/50/100/200/300/400/500/800/1200/1400/
         1700/2000 Hz
  PSK mode: Menu item “098 rdsP PSK NAR”
         25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz                                                     [NAR] Button
  RTTY mode: Menu item “101 rdsP RTY NAR”
                                                                                                   [NAR] SWITCH
         25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz                                 OPERATING MODE
                                                                                             “ON”              “OFF”
  When the [NAR] button has been pushed so as to en-           SSB                          1.1 kHz           2.25 kHz
  gage the narrow filter, the [WIDTH] knob will be dis-        CW                           1.2 kHz            2.0 kHz
                                                                                       (300 Hz/500 Hz)
  abled, but IF Shift still is operational. For many appli-
                                                               RTTY/PKT-L/PKT-U             1.2 kHz            1.2 kHz
  cations, you may find that simple adjustment of the          PKT-FM                        9 kHz             16 kHz
  [WIDTH] knob, instead of engaging the Narrow filter,         AM                            6 kHz              9 kHz
  may be satisfactory for interference reduction.              FM (28/50 MHz bands)          9 kHz             16 kHz

  You may adjust the CW bandwidth using the [WIDTH]                                : Requires the optional CW Narrow Filter
                                                                                     300 Hz: YF-122CN, 500 Hz: YF-122C
  knob, even if the narrow filter is engaged. In this case,
  available bandwidth selections are 25 Hz ~ 2 kHz.
  When you press the [NAR] button in the FM mode,
  both the transmit and receive bandwidths are narrowed.
NOTE:
When the [NAR] button is pressed, the [WIDTH] knob no
longer functions (except the CW mode).




Page 60                                                                    FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
                                 IF NOISE BLANKER (NB) OPERATION
The FT-2000D includes an effective IF Noise Blanker, which can significantly reduce noise caused by automotive ignition
systems.

Main band (VFO-A) NB Operation                                                     Main Band (VFO-A) “NB” Icon
                                                                               [NB] Button           Sub Band (VFO-B) “NB” Icon
1. Press the [NB] button momentarily to reduce short-
   duration pulse noise such as from switching transients,
   automobile ignitions and power lines. The “        ” icon
   will appear in the display to confirm that the Narrow-
   NB is operating. Press and hold in the [NB] button for
   two seconds to reduce longer-duration man-made pulse
   noise. The “      ” icon will blink for five seconds, and
   thereafter will appear continuously, to confirm that the
                                                                                        [B] Button
   Wide-NB is operating.
                                                                                 [NB] Knob
2. Advance the [NB] knob to the point where the offend-
   ing noise is best reduced or eliminated.
3. To end Noise Blanker operation, press the [NB] but-
   ton once more. The “       ” icon will turn off, confirm-
   ing that the Noise Blanker is no longer in operation.
ADVICE:
  When the Roofing filter mode is set to “AUTO” and
  the Noise Blanker is turned On, the Roofing Filter band-
  width will automatically be set to 15 kHz. The Roof-
  ing Filter may be changed to a narrower selection, as
  described previously, although Noise Blanker opera-
  tion may be compromised somewhat when using a nar-
  rower Roofing Filter.                                        Sub band (VFO-B) NB Operation
  When you change the Noise Blanker level on the Main          1. Press the [B] button.
  (VFO-A) side, the Sub (VFO-B) band’s Noise Blanker           2. Within five seconds of pressing the [B] button (while
  level will automatically change to be the same as that          the imbedded orange LED is blinking), press the [NB]
  for VFO-A, if the Sub (VFO-B) band’s Noise Blanker              button momentarily to reduce short-duration pulse
  is engaged.                                                     noise such as from switching transients, automobile ig-
                                                                  nitions and power lines. The “      ” icon will appear in
                                                                  the display to confirm that the Narrow-NB is operat-
                                                                  ing.
                                                               3. Within five seconds of pressing the [B] button (while
                                                                  the imbedded orange LED is blinking), press and hold
                                                                  in the [NB] button for two seconds to reduce longer-
                                                                  duration man-made pulse noise. The “          ” icon will
                                                                  blink for five seconds, then appear continuously, to con-
                                                                  firm that the Wide-NB is operating.
                                                               4. To end Noise Blanker operation, press the [B] button,
                                                                  then press the [NB] button. The “        ” icon will turn
                                                                  off, confirming that the Noise Blanker is no longer in
                                                                  operation.
                                                               ADVICE:
                                                               When you change the Noise Blanker level on the Sub
                                                               (VFO-B) side, the Main (VFO-A) band’s Noise Blanker
                                                               level will automatically change to be the same as that for
                                                               VFO-B, if the Main (VFO-A) band’s Noise Blanker is
                                                               engaged.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                        Page 61
TOOLS FOR COMFORTABLE AND EFFECTIVE RECEPTION
                                    AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)
The AGC system is designed to help compensate for fading and other propagation effects, with characteristics that can be
of particular value on each operating mode. The basic objective of AGC is to maintain a constant audio output level once
a certain minimum threshold of signal strength is achieved.

Main Band (VFO-A) AGC Selection                                                   [AGC] Button

Press the [AGC] button repeatedly to select the desired
receiver-recovery time constant. You will observe the AGC
status notation in the AGC column of the Receiver Con-
figuration Indicator on the display, denoting the AGC re-
ceiver-recovery time currently in use. For most operation,
we recommend the “AUTO” mode. Additionally, you may
disable the AGC by pressing and holding in the [AGC]
button for two seconds.                                                                    [B] Button


Sub Band (VFO-B) AGC Selection
1. Press the [B] button.
2. Within five seconds of pressing the [B] button (while
   the imbedded orange LED is blinking), press the [AGC]
   button repeatedly to select the desired receiver-recov-
   ery time constant. You will observe the AGC notation
   below the Sub frequency on the display, denoting the
   Sub receiver’s current AGC receiver-recovery time. For
   most operation, we recommend the “AUTO” mode.
   Additionally, you may disable the AGC by pressing
                                                                  ADVICE:
   and holding in the [AGC] button for two seconds.
                                                                  If the AGC receiver-recovery time is set to “Off” by press-
NOTE:                                                             ing and holding in the [AGC] button, the S-meter will no
Pressing the [AGC] button allows selection of the desired         longer deflect. Additionally, you will likely encounter dis-
receiver-recovery time constant. Normally, the “AUTO”             tortion on stronger signals, as the IF amplifiers and the
selection is satisfactory for most situations, but in the event   following stages are probably being overloaded.
of operation on a crowded band where you wish to receive
                                                                  QUICK POINT
a weak signal, you may wish to change the setting (to FAST,
                                                                  Several aspects of AGC performance may be configured
for example). The “AUTO” mode selections are:
                                                                  via the Menu. However, because AGC can have such a
       OPERATING MODE               AUTO AGC SELECTION
                                                                  profound impact on overall receiver performance, we gen-
            LSB                          SLOW
            USB                          SLOW                     erally do not recommend any changes to the AGC Menu
            CW                            FAST                    selections until you are thoroughly familiar with the per-
            AM                            FAST                    formance of the FT-2000D.
            FM                            FAST
           RTTY                          SLOW                     TERMINOLOGY:
         PKT (FM)                         FAST
         PKT (LSB)                       SLOW
                                                                  Automatic Gain Control, or AGC, is a circuit that senses
                                                                  the incoming signal strength, and then limits the gains of
                                                                  the RF and IF stages so as to keep the output audio vol-
                                                                  ume at a more-or-less constant level. AGC also protects
                                                                  the RF, IF, Audio, and DSP stages from overload, as it
                                                                  limits the signal strength that is allowed to flow, irrespec-
                                                                  tive of the input signal level.




Page 62                                                                         FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
TOOLS FOR COMFORTABLE AND EFFECTIVE RECEPTION
                                 AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)
                                           SLOPED AGC Operation
   In traditional AGC systems, the audio output from the transceiver becomes essentially fixed once the threshold for
   AGC action is reached (usually several dozen dB above the no-signal noise                                 SLOPED
   floor). The FT-2000D, however, includes an innovative Sloped AGC sys-




                                                                               Audio Output
   tem on the Main band (VFO-A) receiver, that allows the audio volume to                                    NORMAL
   rise and fall slightly according to signal strength. Although the rise/fall slope
   is not dramatic, it is sufficient to allow you to use your ear to discern and
   separate signals according to signal strength, not just audio frequency.
                                                                                                             Input Signal
   Using Sloped AGC

   1. Press the [MENU] button momentarily to enter the
      Menu mode.                                                                                          [MENU] Button

   2. Use the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item
      “088 rout AGC SLP.”
   3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to change the set-
      ting to “SLP.”
   4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two sec-
      onds to save the new setting and exit to normal op-
      eration. You will now be using the Sloped AGC
      system.                                                                                 Main Tuning Dial Knob   [SUB VFO-B] Knob




                                  MUTE FEATURE (MAIN (VFO-A) BAND)
There may be occasions, during Dual Receive operation, when you want to silence the Main (VFO-A) receiver tempo-
rarily so as to concentrate on what’s being received on the Sub (VFO-B) receiver. The Mute feature makes this simple to
accomplish.

Press the Main [RX] LED/switch. The Main (VFO-A) re-                                           Main [RX] Switch
ceiver will be silenced, and the green LED in the [RX]
switch will blink.
To restore reception on the Main (VFO-A) receiver, just
press the blinking [RX] switch/LED once more.
ADVICE:
If you press the [POWER] switch momentarily while the
transceiver is turned on, the transceiver’s audio will be
muted for three seconds.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                                    Page 63
SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION
    [MOX] Button
          [METER] Switch                       [MODE] Button




                                                                                             CLAR   +




            [MIC] Knob                                   Main Tuning Dial knob
            [RF PWR] Knob



1. The operating mode is selected using the [MODE]               3. Press the microphone’s PTT (Push To Talk) switch to
   buttons to the left of the Main Tuning Dial knob, and            begin transmission; speak into the microphone in a
   the VFO (A or B) to which the selection is applied is            normal voice level.
   selected by the [A] or [B] button above the [MODE]               ADVICE:
   buttons. Usually, the [A] button glows Red, signifying               The “       ” indicator will light up in the frequency
   that the Main band (VFO-A) is be-                                    display area, confirming that transmission is in
   ing adjusted. Similarly, pressing the                                progress.
   [B] button will cause its indicator to                               When transmitting in the AM mode, rotate the [RF
   blink Orange for five seconds, sig-                                  PWR] knob so as to set a maximum (carrier) power
   nifying Sub band (VFO-B) adjust-                                     output of 50 Watts.
   ment. Therefore, press the [A] or [B]                         4. In the SSB mode, adjust the microphone amplifier gain
   button to select the desired VFO,                                to match the microphone and your
   then press the [LSB] or [USB] but-                               voice level, set the [METER ]
   ton to select one of the SSB modes.                              switch to the “ALC” position,
   For AM operation, press the [AM/                                 close the PTT switch, speak into
   FM] button repeatedly until the im-                              the microphone in a normal voice
   bedded LED glows red.                                            level, and adjust the [MIC] (gain) knob
   QUICK POINT:                                                     so that the ALC voltage (displayed on
       By convention, LSB is used in the 7 MHz and lower            the right meter) stays within the ALC
       Amateur bands for SSB communication, and USB                 zone of the meter (up to 2/3 of full scale
       is used on the 14 MHz and higher bands (the 10               deflection) on voice peaks.
       MHz band is used for CW and data modes only).                ADVICE:
       When the [AM/FM] button glows orange, it indi-               The microphone
       cates that FM operation is engaged.                          gain of the AM
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to adjust the oper-             mode has been pro-
   ating frequency. Alternatively, you may use the [UP]/            grammed, at the
   [DWN] scanning buttons on the MH-31B8 Hand Mi-                   factory, to a level
   crophone to sweep up or down the current band.                   that should be satisfactory for most situations. How-
                                                                    ever, using Menu item “050 A3E MICGAIN,” you may
                                                                    set a different fixed value, or choose the “Ur” option,
                                                                    which then lets you use the front panel [MIC] knob to
                                                                    set the microphone gain in the AM mode. In this case,
                                                                    the [MIC] knob should not be advanced to the point
                                                                    where the ALC meter deflects. In many cases, the same
                                                                    setting as used on SSB will be satisfactory.
                                                                 5. Release the PTT switch at the end of your transmis-
                                                                    sion. The transceiver will return to the receive mode.


Page 64                                                                          FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION
ADVICE:
  ALC meter deflection may be caused by excessive drive    When performing tests (such as the setup of the [MIC]
  power, but also by reflected power detected in the an-   or [RF PWR] knobs), be sure to check the frequency
  tenna system. If the impedance presented to the trans-   before transmitting, so as to avoid interference to oth-
  ceiver is different from 50 Ohms, ALC meter action       ers who may already be using the frequency.
  may be observed that is not related to the proper set-   Four techniques for exercising Transmit/Receive con-
  ting of the [MIC] (gain) knob. Therefore, we recom-      trol are provided on the FT-2000D, and you may
  mend that you make [MIC] knob adjustments into a         choose the technique(s) that best suit your operating
  dummy load or antenna system presenting an imped-        needs:
  ance very close to 50 Ohms.                                  Pressing the microphone’s PTT switch will engage
  Rotate the [RF PWR] knob to set the desired power            the transmitter.
  output. Clockwise rotation of the [RF PWR] knob will         The rear panel PTT jack may be connected to a
  increase the power. The adjustment                           foot switch or other manual switching device in
  range is between 10 Watts and 200                            order to engage the transmitter.
  Watts, and you should always use the                         Pressing the front panel [MOX] button will lock
  minimum power necessary for main-                            the transmitter on. Press the [MOX] button again
  taining reliable communications.                             to return to receive.
  The analog PO meter indicates the average power out-         The VOX (Voice Operated Xmit) circuit will en-
  put level. SSB transmit average talk power is normally       gage the transmitter automatically when you speak
  10% to 50% of the peak power output. Voice charac-           into the microphone. For details of VOX opera-
  teristics, microphone qualities, parametric equalizer        tion, see page 78.
  and compression settings affect actual talk power out-
  put.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                             Page 65
USING THE AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
The Automatic Antenna Tuner (hereinafter referred to as the “ATU”) built into each FT-2000D is crafted to ensure a 50-
Ohm load for the final amplifier stage of the transmitter. We recommend that the ATU be used whenever you operate on the
FT-2000D.
ADVICE:
  The ATU of the FT-2000D, being located inside the station, only adjusts the impedance presented to the transceiver at
  the station end of your coaxial cable feedline. It does not “tune” the SWR at the antenna feedpoint itself. When design-
  ing and building your antenna system, we recommend that every effort be made to ensure a low SWR at the antenna
  feedpoint.
  The ATU of the FT-2000D includes 100 memories for tuning data. Eleven of these memories are allocated, one per
  Amateur band, so that each band has at least one setting preset for use on that band. The remaining 89 memories are
  reserved for the 89 most-recent tuning points, for quick frequency change without the need to retune the ATU.
  The ATU in the FT-2000D is designed to match impedances within the range of 16.5 Ohms to 150 Ohms, correspond-
  ing to an SWR of 3:1 or less on the HF amateur bands (6 m amateur band: 25 Ohms to 100 Ohms, corresponding to an
  SWR of 2:1 or less). Accordingly, simple non-resonant whip antennas, along with random-length wires and the “G5RV”
  antenna (on most bands) may not be within the impedance matching range of the ATU.


                                                  ATU OPERATION
1. Rotate the [RF PWR] knob fully clockwise (to the             [TUNE] Button
   right).
2. Use the Main Tuning Dial knob to set the radio to the
   desired operating frequency within the Amateur band.
3. Press the [TUNE] button momentarily to place the ATU
   in the transmit line (no adjustment/tuning will occur
   yet). The “         ” icon will appear in the display.
   QUICK POINT:
   The momentary press of the [TUNE] button will turn             [RF PWR] Knob
   the tuner on, and the microprocessor will automatically
                                                                ADVICE:
   select the tuning point closest to the current operating
                                                                The ATU circuit is located between the final amplifier and
   frequency.
                                                                the rear-panel antenna jack; reception is not affected by
4. Press and hold in the [TUNE] button for two seconds
                                                                the ATU.
   to begin automatic tuning. The transmitter will be en-
   gaged, and the “         ” icon will blink while tuning is   QUICK POINT:
   in progress. When the optimum tuning point has been            As shipped from the factory, only one ATU alignment
   reached, the radio will return to receive, and the             point is saved on each Amateur band. This was memo-
   “         ” icon will again glow steadily (instead of          rized during the final alignment and performance veri-
   blinking).                                                     fication stages on the production line.
5. While tuning around the band using the Main Tuning             The momentary flickering of the “         ” icon occurs
   Dial knob, you will observe that the “             ” icon      whenever you cross over into a new 10 kHz ATU
   blinks momentarily every 10 kHz. This momentary                memory window.
   blinking indicates that a new tuning window has been
                                                                NOTE:
   entered. If you want to save tuning data associated with
                                                                Please check the operating frequency before beginning the
   this 10 kHz window, repeat step 4 (above) for each
                                                                tuning process, to be sure you are not interfering with oth-
   such window. On bands like 1.8 MHz where the im-
                                                                ers who may already be using the frequency.
   pedance may change rapidly, the storage of a number
   of tuning points is recommended.                             TERMINOLOGY:
6. To disconnect the ATU from the transmit line, press          Antenna Tuner Memories: The microprocessor of the ATU
   the [TUNE] button momentarily. The “               ” icon    makes a note of the positions of the tuning capacitors and
   will turn off, confirming that the ATU has been turned       the selected inductors, and stores the data for each 10 kHz
   off. In the “Off” mode, the transceiver will be directly     window in which tuning has occurred. This eliminates the
   connected to the coaxial cable connected to your an-         need to re-tune every time you return to a frequency on
   tenna, and will operate based on whatever impedance          which you already have completed the tuning process.
   is present at the station end of the coax.




Page 66                                                                         FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
USING THE AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
                                          ABOUT ATU OPERATION
Figure 1 depicts a situation where normal tuning via the ATU has been successfully completed, and the tuning data has been
stored in the ATU memory. The antenna system as seen by the transmitter is shown.
In Figure 2, the operator has changed frequency, and the “     ” icon has become appeared. The operator presses and
holds in the [TUNE] button for two seconds to begin impedance matching using the ATU.
If a high SWR conditions exists (above 3:1), corrective action must be taken in the antenna system to bring the impedance
closer to 50 Ohms. Besides the fact that the ATU will refuse to memorize settings on frequencies where the SWR exceeds
3:1, the high SWR may indicate a mechanical failure in the feed system, and such failures can lead to the generation of
spurious signals causing TVI, etc.


                SWR: 2.0



                                            Feed Point SWR

                SWR: 1.5




                SWR: 1.0
                           Frequency
                                                     SWR after ATU Tuning

                                                        FIGURE 1

                                                                        The “        ” icon appears on the display
                                                                        when you transmit on this frequency
                              Memorized ATU Tuning


                SWR: 3.0

                                                                                       SWR: 3.0



                SWR: 2.0




                                                                                                 Retuned Setting
                SWR: 1.0
                           Frequency

                                                        FIGURE 2




                                              About ATU Memories
   SWR (Post-tuning) Less than 1.5:1
   The tuning settings are committed to the ATU memory.
   SWR (Post-tuning) Greater than 1.5:1
   Tuning data will not be retained in memory. If you return to the same frequency, the tuning process must be repeated.
   SWR (Post-tuning) Greater than 3:1
   The “         ” icon will light up, and tuning settings, if achieved, will not be memorized. Please investigate and
   resolve the high SWR condition before attempting further operation using this antenna.



FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                            Page 67
USING THE AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
                                       LITHIUM BATTERY REPLACEMENT
The memories for the ATU are backed up by a common Lithium backup battery (type CR2032 or equivalent). After two or
more years of heavy use, you may notice that the tuner memories are not being maintained, and that you have to re-tune
when returning to a frequency on which you had previously stored tuning data.
In this case, please replace the ATU Backup Battery using the following procedure:

1. Turn the FT-2000D’s [POWER] switch “off,” then
    turn the FP-2000’s [POWER] switch “off.”
2. Unplug the AC cable from the AC jack on the FP-
    2000 rear panel, then disconnect both DC cables from
    the FT-2000D rear panel.
3. Referring to Figure 1, remove the three screws from each
    side of the transceiver and three screws from the top
    edge of the rear panel. Slide the top case toward to the
    rear about 1/2 inch (1 cm), then remove the top case.
4. Turn the transceiver up side down.
5. Remove the seven screws affixing the bottom case, and
    then remove the bottom case (Figure 2).
                                                                                     FIGURE 1
6. Locate the Lithium battery on the left side of the Con-
    trol Unit (Figure 3).
7. Turn the BACKUP switch “off.”
8. Follow the guidelines in Figure 4, and remove the old
    battery, replacing it with a new one of the identical type.
9. Connect both DC cables to the FT-2000D rear panel,
    then connect the AC cable to the AC jack on the FP-
    2000 rear panel.
10. Turn the FP-2000’s [POWER] switch “on,” then turn
    the FT-2000D’s [POWER] switch “on.” Use extreme
    caution, as high voltages are present inside the trans-
    ceiver!                                                                                                    FIGURE 2
11. Turn the BACKUP switch “on.”
12. Turn the FT-2000D’s [POWER] switch “off,” then
    turn the FP-2000’s [POWER] switch “off.”
13. Unplug the AC cable from the AC jack on the FP-
    2000 rear panel, then disconnect both DC cables from                   Backup Battery
    the FT-2000D rear panel connectors.
14. Replace bottom case and its seven screws removed in
    step 5, and then replace the top case and its nine screws           Backup Switch
    removed in step 3.
15. The ATU Backup Battery replacement is now com-
    plete.
CAUTION:                                                                         FIGURE 3
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.                             Removal of the                          Installing the
                                                                      Lithium Backup Battery                 Lithium Backup Battery
QUICK POINT:                                                      After pusing in the direction of the   Use your fingertip to push in the
                                                                  arrow, move your finger upward.        indicated direction
When the ATU Backup Battery is replaced, all tuner memo-
ries will be erased, and new sets of tuning data will have to
                                                                     +




                                                                                                            +




                                                                                                                             +
                                                                                        +




be stored.

                                                                                           FIGURE 4
NOTES:
  Use care in the handling and storage of the Lithium battery. It is small, and presents a choking hazard to small children;
  therefore keep such batteries out of the reach of children at all times. Do not dispose of Lithium batteries in fire, and do
  not attempt to re-charge them under any circumstances.
  When opening/closing the case, take care with your screwdriver not to short out internal components, or touch them in
  a way that will cause them to short out against other components.
  The exhaustion of the ATU backup battery of the FT-2000D is a normal “wear and tear” situation, and the loss of the
  backup voltage is not a “defect” or other condition covered by the Limited Warranty on this product. Accordingly, if you
  do not feel capable of replacing the battery, and ask a service shop to do so on your behalf, a service fee may apply.

Page 68                                                                              FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
                ADJUSTING THE SSB TRANSMITTED BANDWIDTH (SSB MODE)
For transmission on SSB, a default bandwidth of 2.4 kHz is provided. This bandwidth provides reasonable fidelity along
with good talk power, and is typical of the bandwidth used for decades during SSB transmission. However, the bandwidth
may be varied by the operator, so as to provide different levels of fidelity or talk power, according to your preferences.

Here’s how to adjust the transmitted bandwidth on SSB:                                             [MENU] Button

1. Press the [MENU] button to engage the Menu.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob so as to select Menu
   item “083 A3J TX BPF.”
3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the desired
   bandwidth. The available selections are 3000/
   50-3000/100-2900/200-2800/300-2700/400-
   2600, and the default is 300-2700 Hz. A wider band-
   width will provide greater fidelity, while a narrow band-                          Main Tuning Dial Knob   [SUB VFO-B] Knob
   width will compress the available transmitter power
   into less spectrum, resulting in more “talk power” for
   DX pile-ups.
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds
   to save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
ADVICE:                                                         QUICK POINTS:
  The Transmit Monitor is very helpful way of verifying           The higher fidelity associated with wide bandwidth will
  the effects on fidelity of changing the bandwidth. Press-       be particularly enjoyable on the low bands, during lo-
  ing the [MONI] button then adjusting the [MONI] knob            cal rag-chew QSOs.
  for a comfortable listening level while you are trans-          The “3000” setting is a special hi-fidelity setting,
  mitting, you will be able to hear the difference in sound       whereby the transmitted bandwidth is in excess of 3
  quality as you make changes.                                    kHz. This selection, in conjunction with judicious ad-
  When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit                 justment of the Parametric Microphone Equalizer (see
  is connected, you may verify the effect of your adjust-         next chapter) can provide truly outstanding fidelity and
  ments of the transmitted bandwidth by observing the             very natural-sounding audio.
  Audio Scope on the “Oscilloscope” page.                         When using the wider bandwidth selections (especially
                                                                  “3000”), the apparent power output from the transmit-
                                                                  ter may seem lower. This is because the available power
                                                                  from the transmitter is being distributed over a wider
                                                                  bandwidth, and the power detection circuitry does not
                                                                  compensate for the effect of the bandwidth selection
                                                                  (it is calibrated in the default 2.4 kHz bandwidth).




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                          Page 69
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
                   PARAMETRIC MICROPHONE EQUALIZER (SSB/AM/FM MODES)
The FT-2000D includes a unique Three-Band Parametric Microphone Equalizer that provides precise, independent con-
trol over the low, mid and treble ranges in your voice waveform. You may utilize one group of settings when the speech
processor is off, and an alternate group of settings when the speech processor is on. The speech processor feature is
described in the next chapter.
QUICK POINT:
The Parametric Equalizer is a unique technique for adjusting the signal quality. Because the three ranges may be adjusted
so precisely, it is possible to craft a response that provides a more natural and pleasant sound than you have ever experi-
enced before. Effective “talk power” can also be significantly enhanced.
The aspects of configuration that you may adjust on the Parametric Equalizer are:
   Center Frequency: The center frequency of each of the three bands may be adjusted.
   Gain: The amount of enhancement (or suppression) within each band may be adjusted.
   Q: The bandwidth over which the equalization is applied may be adjusted.
SETUP OF THE PARAMETRIC MICROPHONE EQUALIZER
1. Connect the microphone to the MIC jack.                         [MONI] Button        Main Tuning Dial Knob
2. Set the [RF PWR] knob to its minimum value, so as not
   to cause interference to other users during adjustment.
   ADVICE:
       We recommend you consider connecting a dummy
       load to one of the Antenna jacks, and monitor your
       signal on a separate receiver, so as to prevent inter-
       ference to other users.
       You will have the best chance of hearing the ef-
                                                                  [RF PWR] Knob                     [MENU] Button
       fects of adjustments if you wear headphones (con-
                                                                                                                [SUB VFO-B] Knob
       nected to the monitor receiver) while monitoring
       your transmitted signal.
3. To adjust the Parametric Microphone Equalizer while
   the speech processor is disabled, press the [PROC]
   button until the “         ” icon appears in the display.
   To adjust the Parametric Microphone Equalizer with
   the speech processor engaged, press the [PROC] but-
   ton until the “        ” and “        ” icons appear in the
   display.
4. Press the [MONI] button, if you want to listen on the
   FT-2000D’s internal monitor.
5. Press the [MENU] button momentarily. The Menu list
   will appear in the display.
6. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to find the “EQ”
   Menu area, containing Menu items “123” through
   “131;” these parameters apply to the adjustment of the        9. When you have completed all adjustments, press and
   Parametric Microphone Equalizer when the speech                  hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to save
   processor is disabled. Menu items “132” through “140”            the new settings and exit to normal operation. If you
   apply to the adjustment of the Parametric Microphone             only press the [MENU] button momentarily to exit,
   Equalizer when the speech processor is engaged.                  any changes you performed will not be stored.
7. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to perform adjustments
                                                                 ADVICE:
   to a particular Menu item.
                                                                 To roll off excessive bass response in a wide-range studio
8. Close the PTT switch, and speak into the microphone
                                                                 microphone, try putting a 10 dB null at 100 Hz with a
   while listening to the effects of the changes you are mak-
                                                                 bandwidth of “1” or “2,” do about a 3 dB null centered on
   ing (in step 6). Because the overall effect on the sound      800 Hz with a bandwidth of “3,” and then put an 8 dB
   will change with each adjustment you make, you should         peak centered on 2100 Hz with a bandwidth of “1.” These
   make several passes through each adjustment area, to          are starting recommendations; each microphone and user’s
   be sure that you are achieving the optimum setting.           voice will be different, often requiring different settings.




Page 70                                                                        FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
                 PARAMETRIC MICROPHONE EQUALIZER (SSB/AM/FM MODES)
ACTIVATING THE PARAMETRIC MICROPHONE EQUALIZER
1. Adjust the [MIC] (gain) knob for SSB use, as described                     [PROC] Button
   on page 64.
2. Press the [PROC] button momentarily. The “           ”
   icon will appear in the display, confirming that the
   Parametric Microphone Equalizer is engaged.
   ADVICE
   A blinking “        ” icon indicates the Parametric
   Microphone Equalizer menu settings have all been set
   to “OFF” (“123 tAUd EQ1 FRQ,” “126 tAUd EQ2                             [MIC] Knob
   FRQ,” “129 tAUd EQ3 FRQ”).
3. Press the PTT switch on the microphone, and speak
   into the microphone in a normal voice level.
4. To switch the Parametric Microphone Equalizer off,
   press the [PROC] button repeatedly until the “       ”
   icon disappears.




                                    3-STAGE PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER ADJUSTMENTS (SPEECH PROCESSOR: “OFF”)
                              Center Frequency “123 tAUd EQ1-FREQ” “100” (Hz) ~ “700” (Hz)
                                                “126 tAUd EQ2-FREQ” “700” (Hz) ~ “1500” (Hz)
                                                “129 tAUd EQ3-FREQ” “1500” (Hz) ~ “3200” (Hz)
                              Parametric Gain   “124 AUd EQ1-LVL”         (Low) “–10” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB)
                                                “127 tAUd EQ2-LVL”        (Mid) “–10” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB)
                                                “130 tAUd EQ3-LVL”        (High) “–10” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB)
                              Q (Bandwidth)     “125 tAUd EQ1-BW”         (Low) “1” ~ “10”
                                                “128 tAUd EQ2-BW”         (Mid) “1” ~ “10”
                                                “131 tAUd EQ3-BW”         (High) “1” ~ “10”

                                     3-STAGE PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER ADJUSTMENTS (SPEECH PROCESSOR: “ON”)
                              Center Frequency “132 tAUd PE1-FREQ”         “100” (Hz) ~ “700” (Hz)
                                                 “135 tAUd PE2-FREQ”       “700” (Hz) ~ “1500” (Hz)
                                                 “138 tAUd PE3-FREQ”       “1500” (Hz) ~ “3200” (Hz)
                              Parametric Gain    “133 tAUd PE1-LVL”        (Low) “–10” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB)
                                                 “136 tAUd PE2-LVL”        (Mid) “–10” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB)
                                                 “139 tAUd PE3-LVL”        (High) “–10” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB)
                              Q (Bandwidth)      “134 tAUd PE1-BW”         (Low) “1” ~ “10”
                                                 “137 tAUd PE2-BW”         (Mid) “1” ~ “10”
                                                 “140 tAUd PE3-BW”         (High) “1” ~ “10”



                              +10dB
                         Parametric Gain




                                                      f1              f2                f3


FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                   Page 71
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
                      USING THE SPEECH PROCESSOR (SSB/AM/FM MODES)
The FT-2000D’s Speech Processor is designed to increase “talk power” by increasing the average power output, (via a
sophisticated compression technique) and adjusting the audio quality to the menu settings (“132 tAUd PE1 FRQ,” “135
tAUd PE2 FRQ,” “138 tAUd PE3 FRQ”). The result is improved intelligibility when conditions are difficult.

1. Adjust the [MIC] (gain) knob for SSB use, as described      [MONI] Button

   on page 64.                                                     [PROC] Button

2. Rotate the [METER] switch fully to the left, so as to
   select “COMP” (Compression).
3. Press the [PROC] button repeatedly until the “         ”
   and “       ” icons will appear on the display, indicat-
   ing the Speech Processor is engaged.
4. Press the PTT switch on the microphone, and speak
   into the microphone in a normal voice level. Observe
   the deflection of the meter needle on the COMP meter             [METER] Switch

   scale.                                                       [MIC] Knob    [MONI] Knob
                                                                [RF PWR] Knob [PROC] Knob
5. Rotate the [PROC] knob so that the meter needle de-
   flects to not more than “10 dB” on the COMP scale.
6. To switch the Speech Processor off, press the [PROC]
   button once more. The “           ” and “       ” icons
   will turn off, confirming that the Speech processor is
   turned off.
ADVICE:
  Excessive advancement of the [PROC] knob will re-
  sult in a degradation of the transmitted signal’s signal-
  to-noise ratio, thereby reducing intelligibility at the
  other end of the circuit.
  The Transmit Monitor is very helpful way of verifying
  proper adjustment of the compression level. Pressing
  the [MONI] button then adjusting the [MONI] knob
  for a comfortable listening level while you are trans-
  mitting, you will be able to hear the difference in sound
  quality as you make adjustments.
  The [RF PWR] knob still controls the RF power out-
  put, whether or not the Speech Processor is engaged.
  You may adjust the Parametric Microphone Equalizer
  when the speech processor is engaged, using Menu
  items “132” through “140.” See page 70 for details.
  When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit
  is connected, you may observe the effect of your com-
  pression level adjustments by viewing the wave-form
  on the “Oscilloscope” page.




Page 72                                                                    FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
                            NOTE




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL             Page 73
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
                    LOW- DISTORTION CLASS-A OPERATION (SSB MODE)
Class-A operation of the FT-2000D transmitter is provided, yielding ultra-low distortion products during SSB operation.
Power output during Class-A operation is 75 Watts.

To engage Class-A operation as following:                                                         [MENU] Button
1. Press the [MENU] button; the Menu list will appear in
   the display.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item
   “141 tGEn BIAS.”
3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the desired
   BIAS level “0 - 100” to set the transceiver for opera-
   tion anywhere between Class-A and Class-AB (Class-
   AB has lower heat dissipation but higher distortion                               Main Tuning Dial Knob   [SUB VFO-B] Knob
   products).
   Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob clockwise to increases
   the BIAS. A menu setting of “100” will place the trans-
   mitter fully in Class-A operation. Counter-clockwise
   rotation of the [SUB VFO-B] knob will move the trans-
   mitter toward Class-AB operation. The menu setting
   “Ab” will place the transmitter fully in Class-AB op-
   eration.
   Advice:
   When the Class-A operation is engaged, “              ”
   icon will appear in the display.                              ADVICE
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds           We recommend that menu item “141 tGEn BIAS” be pro-
   to save the new setting and exit to normal operation.         grammed to the [C.S] button for easy access to Class-A
To exit from the Class-A mode, repeat the above proce-           operation.
dure, rotating the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select “Ab” in
step 3 above.




                                                    Id: Drain Current
                                                    VDS: Drain Voltage




                      CLASS-AB                                                        CLASS-A




Page 74                                                                       FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
                    LOW- DISTORTION CLASS-A OPERATION (SSB MODE)
ADVICE
  During Class-A operation, ten Amps of Bias current will be flowing, regardless of the modulation level that leads to
  actual power output. Therefore, if the ambient temperature in your operation location is high, the transceiver tempera-
  ture may rise as well, due to the high bias level (which must be dissipated as heat). Depending on the temperature, you
  may wish to reduce the BIAS level using menu item “141 tGEn BIAS,” to reduce the amount of heat being generated.
  When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit and a video monitor are connected, you can monitor the heat
  sink temperature on the video monitor; thus, you can always be aware of a rise in temperature during Class-A operation.
  Normally, the temperature is below 80 °C. If the temperature rises to near or above this value, however, we recommend
  you adjust the BIAS level toward Class-AB via menu item “141 tGEn BIAS” (decrease the numerical value to reduce
  the heat being dissipated).
  An innovative aspect of the “Class-A” mode is that the actual power output is always limited to 75 Watts. So even
  though you might adjust the BIAS in the direction of Class-AB operation, the power output will not rise; this eliminates
  the need to re-tune your linear amplifier, if used.
QUICK POINT
  Class-A operation provides a significant improvement in transmitter distortion suppression. During Class-A operation,
  the 3rd-order IMD products are typically suppressed 45 dB. The 5th- and higher-order IMD products that can cause
  “splatter” and interfere with others, will typically be suppressed 70 dB or more.
  If you are using a linear amplifier such as the VL-1000, the low distortion produced by the FT-2000D’s transmitter
  means these intermodulation distortion products will not exist to be amplified by your linear.




                   Class-A 75W PEP IMD                                        Class-AB 200W PEP IMD

   The High-Power 200-Watt Final Amplifier Stage of the FT-2000D utilizes a pair of ST Micro Electronics Corp. SD2931
   MOSFET devices operating at 50 Volts. The push-pull configuration provides low distortion along with high power
   output. The 92 mm thermostatically-controlled cooling fan directs forced air across the heat sink, when triggered by a
   rise in heat sink temperature.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                     Page 75
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                    VOICE MEMORY (SSB/AM/FM MODES)
You may utilize the Voice Memory capability of the FT-2000D for repetitive messages. The Voice Memory system in-
cludes four memories capable of storing up to 20 seconds of voice audio each. The maximum that any memory can hold is
20 seconds.

Recording Your Own Voice in Memory                                     Checking Your Recording
1. Select the LSB, USB, AM, or FM mode using the front                 1. Be sure that the front panel [MOX] button is “Off”
   panel [MODE] buttons.                                                  (the LED imbedded in the switch is must be off).
2. Press the [F5(MEM)] button. A blinking “          ” icon            2. Press the [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button (which-
   will appear in the display.                                            ever one you just recorded in), and you will hear the
3. Within five seconds of pressing the [F5(MEM)] but-                     contents of the voice memory you just recorded.
   ton, press any of the buttons numbered [F1(CH-1)]                   ADVICE:
   through [F4(CH-4)] to select that memory storage reg-               You may adjust the playback level of the recording via
   ister. If you do not press the PTT switch (see next step)           Menu item “015 dUS RX LVL.”
   within five seconds, the memory storage process will
                                                                       Transmitting the Recorded Message
   be cancelled.
                                                                       1. Select the LSB, USB, AM, or FM mode using the front
4. Press the microphone’s PTT switch momentarily, the
                                                                           panel [MODE] buttons.
   “        ” icon will glow steadily, and recording will
                                                                       2. Press the front panel’s [BK-IN] button.
   begin.
                                                                       3. Press the [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button, depend-
5. Speak into the microphone in a normal voice level to
                                                                           ing on which memory register’s message you wish to
   record the message (such as “CQ DX, CQ DX, this is
                                                                           transmit. If you hit the key again during playback, the
   W 6 Delta X-Ray Charlie, W 6 Delta X-Ray Charlie,
                                                                           message will be terminated.
   Over”). Remember that the time limit for recording
                                                                       ADVICE:
   any message is 20 seconds.
                                                                       You may adjust the transmit (audio) level of the recording
6. Press the [F5(MEM)] button to terminate the message
                                                                       via Menu item “016 dUS TX LVL.”
   storage process.

                                 [MOX] Button [BK-IN] Button




                                                [F5(MEM)] Button
                                      [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] Button




Page 76                                                                              FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                       VOICE MEMORY (SSB/AM/FM MODES)
Voice Memory Operation from the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad
You may also utilize the Voice Memory capability of the FT-2000D from the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad
which plugs into the rear panel’s REM jack.
When using the FH-2 Remote Control Keypad, you may record five memories with up to 20 seconds of voice audio each.

Recording Your Own Voice in Memory                          Checking Your Recording
1. Select the LSB, USB, AM, or FM mode using the front      1. Be sure that the front panel [MOX] button is “Off”
   panel [MODE] selector buttons.                              (the LED imbedded in the button must be off).
2. Press the [MEM] key on the FH-2.                         2. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key (whichever one you just
                                                               recorded in), and you will hear the contents of the voice
                                                               memory you just recorded.
                             LOCK
                            ON   OFF




                                                                                           LOCK
                                                                                          ON   OFF




3. Press any of the FH-2’s keys numbered [1] through
   [5] to select that memory storage register. If you do
   not press the PTT key (see next step) within five sec-   ADVICE:
   onds, the memory storage process will be cancelled.      You may adjust the playback level of the recording via
                                                            Menu item “015 dUS RX LVL.”
                                                            Transmitting the Recorded Message
                             LOCK
                            ON   OFF
                                                            1. Select the LSB, USB, AM, or FM mode using the front
                                                               panel [MODE] selector buttons.
                                                            2. Press the front panel’s [BK-IN] button.
                                                            3. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key, depending on which
                                                               memory register’s message you wish to transmit. If you
                                                               hit the key again during playback, the message will be
                                                               terminated.

4. Press the microphone’s PTT switch momentarily, the
                                                                                           LOCK
   “      ” icon will glow steadily, and recording will                                   ON   OFF




   begin.
5. Speak into the microphone in a normal voice level to
   record the message (such as “CQ DX, CQ DX, this is
   W 6 Delta X-Ray Charlie, W 6 Delta X-Ray Charlie,
   Over”). Remember that the time limit for recording
   any message is 20 seconds.
6. Press the FH-2’s [MEM] key to terminate the message
   storage process.                                         ADVICE:
                                                            You may adjust the transmit (audio) level of the recording
                                                            via Menu item “016 dUS TX LVL.”
                             LOCK
                            ON   OFF




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                  Page 77
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
             VOX (AUTOMATIC TX/RX SWITCHING USING VOICE CONTROL: SSB/AM/FM MODES)
Instead of using the microphone’s PTT switch or the front panel [MOX] switch to activate the transmitter, the VOX (Voice
Operated TX/RX Control) system provides hands-free, automatic activation of the transmitter, based on voice input into
the microphone. Setup of the VOX system takes only a few seconds.

1. To start, set the [VOX ] and [DELAY] knobs fully                 [VOX] Button

   counter-clockwise (to the left).
2. Press the [VOX] button to engage VOX operation.
3. Speak into the microphone in a normal voice level,
   and rotate the [VOX] knob clockwise (to the right) until
   the point where your voice input activates the trans-
   mitter.
   ADVICE:
   Do not advance the setting of the [VOX] knob too                     [VOX] Knob
                                                                        [DELAY] Knob
   much, because to do so will make the transmitter re-
   spond to minor background noises in your station.
4. Now stop speaking, and note the amount of time it takes       ADVICE:
   for the receiver to recover. If the hang time is too long       The Anti-Trip setting sets the negative feedback of re-
   or too short; rotate the [DELAY] knob, while speaking           ceiver audio to the microphone, to prevent receiver
   briefly into the microphone and then pausing, so as to          audio from activating the transmitter (via the micro-
   set the desired hang time. Clockwise rotation of the            phone) can be adjusts via Menu item “040 GEnE
   [DELAY] control will increase the hang time.                    ANTIVOX.”
5. To exit from VOX operation, press the [VOX] button              VOX operation may be engaged on either Voice modes
   once more. We recommend doing this if you are going             (SSB/AM/FM) and on AFSK-based Data modes. Use
   to leave your station, to prevent inadvertent activation        Menu item “137 tGEn VOX SEL” (the selections are
   of the VOX system by a ringing nearby telephone,                “niC (MIC)” and “dAtA (DATA)”).
   speaker audio from a TV, etc.




                                        MONITOR (SSB/AM/FM MODES)
You may listen to the quality of your transmitted signal using the Monitor feature.

1. Press the [MONI] button. The “            ” icon will ap-       [MONI] Button

   pear in the display, indicating that the Monitor is turned
   on.
2. During transmission, rotate the [MONI] knob to ad-
   just the audio level from the Monitor. Clockwise rota-
   tion of this knob will increase the volume level.
3. To switch the Monitor off again, press the [MONI]
   button once more. The “          ” icon will turn off, con-
   firming that the Monitor is now disengaged.                          [MONI] Knob

ADVICE:
  If you are using the speaker for monitoring, instead of
  headphones, excessive advancement of the [MONI]
  knob can cause feedback to occur. Additionally, this
  feedback can cause the VOX system to hang up in a
  loop, making it impossible to return to receive. There-
  fore, we recommend the use of headphones, if at all
  possible, or the minimum usable setting of the [MONI]
  knob, if the speaker must be used.
  Because the Monitor feature utilizes a sampling of the
  transmitter’s IF signal, it can be very useful for check-
  ing the adjustment of the Speech Processor or Para-
  metric Equalizer on SSB, and for checking the general
  signal quality on AM and FM.

Page 78                                                                            FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
               SPLIT OPERATION USING THE TX CLARIFIER (VFO-A OPERATION)
For split TX/RX operation in “casual” pile-ups, where the split is less than 10 kHz, the TX Clarifier (Offset Tuning) feature
may be utilized.

1. Press the [TX CLAR] button.                                                                                     [CLAR] Knob

   The “TX” icon will appear in the
   Multi-Display Window in the
   display.
   QUICK POINT:
   The Clarifier is frequently used for receiver offset tun-
   ing. However, for DX pile-ups where the DX station is
   using a split of less than 10 kHz, the TX Clarifier func-
   tion is usually the quickest way to set the transmitter to                                             [RX CLAR] Button
                                                                                                          [TX CLAR] Button
   the desired offset frequency.                                                                          [CLEAR] Button
2. Rotate the [CLAR] knob to set the desired transmitter
   offset. A maximum split of ±9.99 kHz may be set.                                                CLAR      +
3. To exit from TX Clarifier operation, press the [TX
   CLAR] button once more. The “TX” icon will disap-
   pear from the Multi-Display Window.
ADVICE:
  To listen to the pile-up calling the DX station, so as to
  find the station currently being worked, you may press
  the [RX CLAR] button. Once you have zeroed in on
  the station calling the DX (use the SPOT function on
  CW for precise alignment of your frequency), you may
  then press the [RX CLAR] button again to cancel the
  RX Clarifier, and return to reception on the DX station’s       QUICK POINT:
  frequency.                                                      When attempting to work a DX station on CW, in a split-
  Just as with receiver Clarifier operation, the amount of        frequency pile-up, remember that a large number of other
  offset from the original VFO frequency will appear in           stations may also be using Yaesu transceivers with capa-
  the small display window.                                       bility similar to that of your FT-2000D. On the DX side
  As with receiver Clarifier operation, when you turn the         of the pile-up, everyone calling precisely on the same CW
  TX Clarifier off the last-used offset is not lost, and will     frequency will sound like a single tone! So you may have
  be available if you turn the TX Clarifier back on. To           more success if you use the RX Clarifier to find a hole in
  clear the Clarifier offset, press the [CLEAR] button.           the pile-up, instead of trying to zero-beat the last station
                                                                  worked by the DX station.


                                          Clarifier Offset Bar Indicator
   A visual depiction of the relative offset of the Clarifier may be displayed, using the Bar Indicator.
   1. Press the [MENU] button; the Menu list will ap-                                             [MENU] button

      pear in the display.
   2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu
      item “010 diSP BAR SEL.”
   3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select “CLAr”
      from the available choices; the factory default is
      “C-tn.”
   4. Press and hold in
      the [MENU ] but-                                                               Main Tuning Dial knob       [SUB VFO-B] knob
                            (TX Frequency < RX Frequency)
      ton for two seconds
      to save the new set-
      ting and exit to nor- (TX Frequency = RX Frequency)
      mal operation.
                               (TX Frequency > RX Frequency)



FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                               Page 79
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                     SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION
A powerful capability of the FT-2000D is its flexibility in Split Frequency operation, using the Main (VFO-A) and Sub
(VFO-B) frequency registers. This makes the FT-2000D especially useful for high-level DX-pedition use, as the Split
operation capability is very advanced and easy to use.

1. Set the Main (VFO-A) frequency as desired.                                    MAIN [RX] Switch
                                                                                            MAIN [TX] Switch
2. Set the Sub (VFO-B) frequency.
3. Now press the [SPLIT] button. The
   front panel switch/LEDs will look like
   this:
   Main (VFO-A)
       [RX ] switch “ON” (LED glows
       Green)
       [TX] switch “OFF” (LED Off)
                                                                                  [SPLIT] Button           Sub [RX] Switch
   Sub (VFO-B)
                                                                                                                Sub [TX] Switch
       [RX] switch “OFF” (LED Off)
       [TX] switch “ON” (LED glows Red)
During Split operation, the Main (VFO-A) register will be
                                                             VFO Tracking Feature
used for reception, while the Sub (VFO-B) register will be   In the default setting, the Main Band (VFO-A) frequency
used for transmission. If you press the [SPLIT] button       and Sub Band (VFO-B) frequency are changed individu-
once more, Split operation will be cancelled.                ally using the Main Tuning Dial knob and the [SUB VFO-
                                                             B] knob.
You may also press the Main [TX] switch located above
and to the right of the Main Tuning Dial knob to return      If you want to tune the Main Band (VFO-A) frequency
transmit frequency control to the Main (VFO-A) side,         and Sub Band (VFO-B) frequency together, the VFO
thereby cancelling Split operation.                          Tracking feature is very useful.

ADVICE:                                                      Here is the procedure for activating the VFO Tracking fea-
  During normal (non-split) VFO-A operation, you may         ture:
  simply press the Sub (VFO-B) [TX] switch (located          1. Press the [MENU] button to engage the Menu mode.
  above and to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob) to         2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item
  engage Split operation. The Sub [TX] indicator will           “032 GEnE TRACK.”
  glow Red when you press the switch.                        3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the desired
  During Split operation, pressing the [A B] button will        Tracking mode.
  reverse the contents of the Main and Sub VFOs. Press          OFF: Disables the VFO Tracking feature.
  the [A B] button once more to return to the original          bAND: When you change bands on the Main (VFO-
  frequency alignment.                                                  A) side, the Sub (VFO-B) band’s VFO will au-
  During Split operation, if you press the [RX] switch                  tomatically change to be the same as that of
  above and to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob, you                   VFO-A.
  will engage Dual Receive operation, and now can lis-          FrEq: This function is the almost same as “bAND;”
  ten to both sides of the DX pile-up, while transmitting               that is, the Sub band’s (VFO-B) frequency
  on the Sub (VFO-B) frequency. This is very useful for                 changes together with the Main Band’s (VFO-
  maintaining the timing of your calls, while also moni-                A) frequency when turning the Main Dial Tun-
  toring both sides of the pile-up.                                     ing knob.
  During Split operation, you may also listen the TX fre-    4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds
  quency temporarily while pressing the [TXW] button            to lock in the new configuration and exit to normal
  (below and to the left of the Main Tuning Dial knob).         operation.
  It is possible to set different operating modes (for ex-                                         [MENU] Button
  ample, LSB and USB) on the two VFOs used during
  Split operation.
  During Split operation, it also is possible to set the
  Main and Sub VFOs to different Amateur bands. But
  remember that Dual Reception must be within the same
  band.

                                                                                   Main Tuning Dial Knob     [SUB VFO-B] Knob




Page 80                                                                    FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                    SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION
                                            Quick Split Operation
  The Quick Split feature allows you to set a one-touch offset of +5 kHz to be applied to your radio’s transmit
  frequency on the Sub (VFO-B), compared to the Main (VFO-A) frequency.

  1. Start with regular transceiver op-                                    MAIN [RX] Switch
                                                                                      MAIN [TX] Switch
     eration on the Main (VFO-A) band.
     MAIN (VFO-A)
         [RX] switch “ON” (LED glows
     Green)
         [TX] switch “ON” (LED glows
     Red)
     SUB (VFO-B)
         [RX] switch “OFF” (LED Off)
                                                                            [SPLIT] Button           Sub [RX] Switch
         [TX] switch “OFF” (LED Off)
                                                                                                          Sub [TX] Switch
  2. Press and hold in the [SPLIT] button for two sec-
     onds to engage the Quick Split feature, and apply a
     frequency 5 kHz above the Main (VFO-A) fre-
     quency to the Sub (VFO-B) frequency register.
     Press and hold in the [SPLIT] button for two sec-
     onds to increment the Main (VFO-A) frequency to
     +5 kHz.
     The VFO configuration will then be:
     MAIN (VFO-A)
         [RX] switch “ON” (LED glows Green)
         [TX] switch “OFF” (LED Off)
     SUB (VFO-B)
         [RX] switch “OFF” (LED Off)
         [TX] switch “ON” (LED glows Red)
  QUICK POINTS:
    The operating mode applied to the Sub (VFO-B)
    register will be the same as that in use on the Main
    (VFO-A) register.
    The offset of the Sub (VFO-B) from the Main VFO
    (VFO-A) is programmed via the Menu, and is set
    to +5 kHz at the factory. Other offsets may be se-
    lected, however, using the following procedure:

  1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode.                                         [MENU] Button
  2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu
     item “031 gene Q SPLIT.”
  3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the de-
     sired offset.
     The available selections are –20kHz ~ +20kHz
     (factory default: +5 kHz).
  4. When you have completed all adjustments, press
     and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to                        Main Tuning Dial Knob     [SUB VFO-B] Knob
     save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
     If you only press the [MENU] button momentarily
     to exit, any changes you performed will not be
     stored.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                      Page 81
CW MODE OPERATION
The powerful CW operating capabilities of the FT-2000D include operation using both an electronic keyer paddle and a
“straight key” or emulation thereof, as is provided by a computer-based keying device.

     SETUP FOR STRAIGHT KEY (AND STRAIGHT KEY EMULATION) OPERATION
Before starting, connect your key line(s) to the front and/or rear panel KEY jack(s), and be sure the [KEYER] button on the
front panel is turned off for now.

1. Press the [CW] mode button to en-                                                       [A] Button
   gage CW operation.                                                     [BK-IN] Button     [B] Button

   ADVICE:
       The operating mode is selected
       using the [MODE] buttons to the
       left of the Main Tuning Dial
       knob, and the VFO (A or B) to
       which the selection is applied is
       selected by the [A] or [B] button
       above the [MODE] buttons. Usu-                                                  [CW] Button

       ally, the [A] button glow Red, sig-
       nifying Main band (VFO-A) is
       being adjusted. Similarly, pressing the [B] button
       will cause its indicator to blink Orange for five sec-
       onds, signifying Sub band (VFO-B) adjustment.
       Therefore, press the [A] or [B] button to select the
       desired VFO, then press the [CW] button to select
       the CW mode.
       If you press the [CW] button once more, after ini-
       tially selecting CW, you will engage the “CW Re-
       verse” mode (see page 86), whereby the “oppo-
       site” sideband injection is used, compared to the         ADVICE:
       “normal” sideband. The CW LED will blink for                You can monitor your sending by pressing the [MONI]
       three seconds if you select CW Reverse.                     button, and adjusting the [MONI] knob for a comfort-
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the desired          able listening level on the CW sidetone.
   operating frequency.                                            If you set the [VOX] and [BK-IN] buttons to Off, you
3. Press the [BK-IN] button to engage automatic activa-            may practice your sending without having the signal
   tion of the transmitter when you close the CW                   go out over the air (sidetone only).
   key. The “         ” icon will appear in the dis-               If you reduce power using the [RF PWR] knob, the
   play.                                                           ALC meter reading will increase; this is normal and
   ADVICE:                                                         does not indicate any problem whatsoever (because
       When you close your CW key, the transmitter will            increased ALC voltage is being used to lower the
       automatically be activated, and the CW carrier will         power).
       be transmitted. When you release the key, trans-
       mission will cease after a brief delay; the delay time    TERMINOLOGY:
       is user-programmable, per the discussion on page          Semi-break-in
       83.                                                         This is a pseudo- “VOX” mode used on CW, whereby
       As shipped from the factory, the FT-2000D TX/               the closure of the CW key will engage the transmitter,
       RX system for CW is configured for “Semi-break-             and release of the key will allow the receiver to re-
       in” operation. However, using Menu item “058                cover after a short delay. No signals will be heard be-
       A1A BK-IN,” you may change this setup for full              tween the spaces between dots and dashes (unless the
       break-in (QSK) operation, whereby the switching             sending speed is extremely slow).
       is quick enough to hear incoming signals in the
       spaces between the dots and dashes of your trans-         Full break-in
       mission. This may prove very useful during con-              Full break-in (Also known as “Full QSK”) involves
       test and traffic-handling operations.                        very fast switching between transmit and receive, such
4. Operation using your CW key may now proceed.                     that incoming signals may be heard between the dots
                                                                    and dashes as you send them. This allows you to hear a
                                                                    station that suddenly starts transmitting on your fre-
                                                                    quency, while you are in the midst of a transmission.

Page 82                                                                        FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
CW MODE OPERATION
                              USING THE BUILT-IN ELECTRONIC KEYER
Connect the cable from your keyer paddle to the front or rear panel KEY jack.

1. Press the [CW] mode button to en-                                  [KEYER] Button    [A] Button

   gage CW operation.                                                     [BK-IN] Button   [B] Button

   ADVICE:
       The operating mode is selected
       using the [MODE] buttons to the
       left of the Main Tuning Dial
       knob, and the VFO (A or B) to
       which the selection is applied is
       selected by the [A] or [B] button
       above the [MODE] buttons. Usu-                                                  [CW] Button

       ally, the [A] button glow Red, sig-                                  [SPEED] Knob

       nifying Main band (VFO-A) is
       being adjusted. Similarly, pressing the [B] button
       will cause its indicator to blinks Orange for five
       second, signifying Sub band (VFO-B) adjustment.
       Therefore, press the [A] or [B] button to select the
       desired VFO, then press the [CW] button to select
       the CW mode.
       If you press the [CW] button once more, after ini-
       tially selecting CW, you will engage the “CW Re-
       verse” mode (see page 86), whereby the “oppo-
       site” sideband injection is used, compared to the
       “normal” sideband. The CW LED will blink for
       three seconds if you select CW Reverse.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the desired
   operating frequency.
3. Press the [KEYER] button. The “           ” icon will ap-
   pear in the display, confirming that the built-
                                                                ADVICE:
   in Electronic Keyer is now active.
                                                                If you reduce power using the [RF PWR] knob, the ALC
4. Rotate the [SPEED] knob to set the
                                                                meter reading will increase; this is normal and does not
   desired sending speed (4 ~ 60 WPM).
                                                                indicate any problem whatsoever (because increased ALC
   Clockwise rotation of the [SPEED]
                                                                voltage is being used to lower the power).
   knob will increase the keying speed.
   ADVICE:
       You may confirm the keying speed when turning
                                                                       Full Break-in (QSK) Operation
       the [SPEED] knob while pressing the [KEYER]
       button. The Sub (VFO-B) frequency display shows             As shipped from the factory, the FT-2000D TX/
       the keying speed.                                           RX system for CW is configured for “Semi-break-
       When you press either the “Dot” or “Dash” side of           in” operation. However, using Menu item “058
       your paddle, the transmitter will automatically be          A1A BK-IN,” you may change this setup for full
       activated.                                                  break-in (QSK) operation, whereby the switching
5. If you press the [BK-IN] button, “semi-break-in” op-            is quick enough to hear incoming signals in the
   eration (discussed previously) will be engaged.                 spaces between the dots and dashes of your trans-
6. CW operation utilizing your paddle may now                      mission.
   commence.                                                       1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu
   ADVICE:                                                            mode.
   When you utilize your keyer paddle, the transmitter             2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select
   will automatically be activated, and the CW charac-                Menu item “058 A1A BK-IN.”
   ters (or a strong of dots and dashes) will be transmit-         3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set this
   ted. When you release the keyer paddle contacts, trans-            Menu item to “FuLL.”
   mission will cease after a brief delay; the delay time is       4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two
   user-programmable, per the discussion on page 83.                  seconds to save the new setting and exit.



FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                   Page 83
CW MODE OPERATION
                              USING THE BUILT-IN ELECTRONIC KEYER
A number of interesting and useful features are available during Electronic Keyer operation.


                          Setting the Keyer Weight (Dot/Space:Dash) Ratio
   The Menu may be used to adjust the Weight for the built-in Electronic Keyer. The default weighting is 3:1 (a dash is
   three times longer than a dot or space).

   1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode.                                             [MENU] Button

   2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu
      item “060 AIA WEIGHT.”
   3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set the weight
      to the desired value. The available adjustment range
      is for a Dot/Space:Dash ratio of “2.5” ~ “4.5” (de-
      fault value: “3.0”).
   4. When you are finished, press and hold in the
      [MENU] button for two seconds to save the new                                Main Tuning Dial Knob     [SUB VFO-B] Knob
      setting and exit to normal operation.



                                   Selecting the Keyer Operating Mode
   The configuration of the Electronic Keyer may be customized independently for the front and rear KEY jacks of the
   FT-2000. This permits utilization of Automatic Character Spacing (ACS), if desired, as well as the use of the
   electronic keyer via the front jack and a straight key or computer-driven keying line via the rear panel.

   1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode.                                             [MENU] Button
   2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu
      item “052 A1A F-TYPE” (for the front KEY jack)
      or “054 A1A R-TYPE” (for the rear-panel’s KEY
      jack).
   3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set the keyer to
      the desired mode. The available selections are:
      OFF: The built-in Electronic Keyer is turned off
             (“straight key” mode).                                                Main Tuning Dial Knob     [SUB VFO-B] Knob
      buG: Dots will be generated automatically by the
             keyer, but dashes must be sent manually.
      ELE: Both dots and dashes will be generated au-          ACS “OFF”
             tomatically when you use your paddle.                          Morse
      ACS: Same as “ELE” except that the spacing be-                        “E” & “T”
                                                                                          Inter-character
             tween characters is precisely set by the keyer                               spacing to short
                                                               ACS “ON”
             to be the same length as a dash (three dots in                 Morse
                                                                            “E” & “T”
             length)
   4. When you are finished, press and hold in the
      [MENU] button for two seconds to save the new
      setting and exit to normal operation.




Page 84                                                                       FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                              CW SPOTTING (ZERO-BEATING)
“Spotting” (zeroing in on another CW station) is a handy technique for ensuring that you and the other station are precisely
on the same frequency.
For everyday operation, the (CW) [PITCH] knob allows you to set the center of the receiver passband, as well as the offset
pitch of your CW carrier signal, to the tone pitch you prefer to listen to.
The Tuning Offset Indicator in the display may also be moved so you can adjust your receiver frequency to center the
incoming station on the pitch corresponding to that of your transmitted signal.

Using the SPOT System
While pressing the front panel’s [SPOT] button, the Spot                         [PITCH] Knob    Tuning Offset Indicator
tone will be heard and the Sub (VFO-B) frequency dis-
play will show the Spot tone frequency. This tone corre-
sponds to the pitch of your transmitted signal, and if you
adjust the receiver frequency to match the pitch of the re-
ceived CW signal to that of the Spot tone, your transmit-
ted signal will be precisely matched to that of the other
station.
                                                                             [SPOT] Button
Release the [SPOT] button to turn the Spot tone off.
ADVICE:
  In a tough DX pile-up, you may actually want to use
  the SPOT system to find a “gap” in the spread of call-
  ing stations, instead of zeroing in precisely on the last
  station being worked by the DX station. From the DX
  side, if a dozen or more operators (also using Yaesu’s
  SPOT system) all call precisely on the same frequency,
  their dots and dashes merge into a single, long tone
                                                                    QUICK POINTS:
  that the DX station cannot decipher. In such situations,
                                                                      The CW Spotting process utilizes the Spot tone or the
  calling slightly higher or lower may get your call
                                                                      Tuning Offset Indicator, with the actual offset pitch
  through.
                                                                      being set by the [PITCH] knob on the front panel. The
  The Tuning Offset Indicator in the display may be uti-
                                                                      offset pitch may be set to any frequency between 300
  lized for CW frequency adjustment, as well. Its con-
                                                                      Hz and 1050 Hz, in 50 Hz steps, and you can either
  figuration is set via Menu item “010 diSP BAR SEL”
                                                                      match tones audibly (using the [SPOT] button) or align
  at the factory, and the Tuning Offset Indicator is al-
                                                                      the receiver frequency so that the central red LED on
  ready set to the “CW TUNE” selection.
                                                                      the Tuning Offset Indicator lights up. Note that there
                                                                      are 21 “dots” on the Tuning Offset Indicator, and de-
            Retune: Shift to Lower Frequency
                                                                      pending on the resolution selected, the incoming CW
                                                                      signal may fall outside the visible range of the bar in-
            Zero-In                                                   dicator, if you are not reasonably close to the proper
                                                                      alignment of tones.
                                                                      The displayed frequency, on CW, normally reflects the
            Retune: Shift to Higher Frequency
                                                                      “zero beat” frequency of your offset carrier. That is, if
                                                                      you were to listen on USB on 14.100.00 MHz to a
             : When the CW reversefeature is activated, the           signal with a 700 Hz offset, the “zero beat” frequency
               indicator of the Tuning Offset Indicator will also     of that CW carrier would be 14.000.70 MHz; the latter
               be reversed.
                                                                      frequency is what the FT-2000D displays, by default.
                                                                      However, you can change the display to be identical to
                                                                      what you would see on SSB by using Menu item “061
                                                                      A1A FRQDISP” and setting it to “dIr” instead of its
                                                                      default “OFSt” setting.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                              Page 85
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                              USING CW REVERSE
If you experience a difficult interference situation, where an interfering station cannot readily be eliminated, you may wish
to try receiving using the opposite sideband. This may throw the interfering station’s frequency in a direction that may lend
itself more readily to rejection.

1. To start, let’s use a typical example where you have set                               [B] Button

   the CW mode (using the default “USB” injection) onto
   the Main (VFO-A) receiver.
2. Now be sure your mode selection is
   still set for the Main (VFO-A) regis-
   ter, and press the [CW] mode button
   once more. The “LSB” LED will
   blink for three seconds, indicating
   that the “LSB” injection side has now                                               [CW] Button
   been selected.
3. When using Dual Receive, press the
   [B] button, then (within five seconds
   of pressing the [B] button) press the
   [CW] button to engage CW Reverse
   on the Sub (VFO-B) receiver, in ex-                               In the illustration, Figure A demonstrates the nor-
   actly the same way as for the Main (VFO-A) receiver.              mal CW injection setup, using the USB side. In
4. Press the [CW] mode button once more to return to                 Figure B, CW Reverse has been engaged, so as to
   the normal (USB) injection side and cancel CW Re-                 receive using LSB-side injection to eliminate in-
   verse operation (the “USB” LED will blink for three               terference.
   seconds).                                                         The beneficial effect of switching sidebands can
NOTES:                                                               clearly be seen in this example.
  When CW Reverse is engaged, the Tuning Offset In-
                                                                       A    Normal CW      Carrier
  dicator action will concurrently be reversed as to its                    ( USB )
  indication.
  When the incoming signal pitch tone is properly                                                    QRM
  aligned, the central red marker lights up whether or
  not CW Reverse is engaged.
                                                                                 RX Passband
          Retune: Shift to Lower Frequency

                                                                       B    CW Reverse                          Carrier
                                                                            ( LSB )
          Zero-In

                                                                                                     QRM

          Retune: Shift to Higher Frequency

                                                                                        RX Passband




Page 86                                                                         FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                          CW DELAY TIME SETTING
During semi-break-in (not QSK) operation, the hang time of the transmitter, after you have finished sending, may be
adjusted to a comfortable value consistent with your sending speed. This is the functional equivalent to the “VOX Delay”
adjustment used on voice modes, and the delay may be varied anywhere between 20 milli-seconds ([DELAY] knob set fully
counter-clockwise) and 5 seconds (fully clockwise).

1. Press the [BK-IN] button to enable CW transmission                    [BK-IN] Button

   (Menu item “058 A1A BK-IN” must be set to “SEni”).
2. Start sending, and adjust the [DELAY] knob so that
   the hang time is as you prefer for comfortable opera-
   tion.




                                                                     [DELAY] Knob




                                           CW PITCH ADJUSTMENT
Rotation of the front panel’s [PITCH] knob will allow                       [PITCH] Knob        Sub (VFO-B) frequency display
adjustment of the center frequency of the receiver pass-
band, as well as the pitch of your offset CW carrier, to the
tone you prefer. The tone may be varied between 300 Hz
and 1050 Hz, in 50 Hz steps.
ADVICE:
You may confirm the Spot tone frequency when turning
the [PITCH] knob while pressing the [SPOT] button. Sub
                                                                         [SPOT] Button
(VFO-B) frequency display will shows the Spot tone fre-
quency.
TERMINOLOGY:
CW Pitch: If you tuned to an exact “zero beat” on an
incoming CW signal, you could not copy it (“Zero beat”
implies a 0 Hz tone). Therefore, the receiver is offset sev-
eral hundreds of Hz (typically), so as to allow your ear to
detect the tone. The BFO offset associated with this tun-
ing (that produces the comfortable audio tone) is called
the CW Pitch.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                     Page 87
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                                CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
The FT-2000D in capable of the automatic sending of CW messages (as you might do in a contest). Two techniques for
message storage are available: you may either send the desired message contents using your keyer paddle (“Message
Memory”), or you may input the text characters using the Main Dial Tuning knob and [SUB VFO-B] knobs (“Text
Memory”).
Message Memory
Five memory channels capable of retaining 50 characters total are provided (using the PARIS standard for characters and
word length).
   Example: CQ CQ CQ DE W6DXC K (19 characters)
      -- • -- • -- -- • -- -- • -- • -- -- • -- -- • -- • -- -- • -- -- •• • • ----      -- ••••     -- ••      -- •• --   -- • -- •   -- • --
      (C) (Q)              (C)       (Q)         (C) (Q)             (D) (E) (W)          (6)         (D)       (X)        (C)         (K)


STORING A MESSAGE INTO MEMORY
                                                                                                                            [MENU] Button
1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the CW
   Memory Register into which you wish to store the
   message; for now, we are just selecting the message
   entry technique (Keyer entry).
   020 tEy CW MEM1
   021 tEy CW MEM2
   022 tEy CW MEM3
   023 tEy CW MEM4                                                                                            Main Tuning Dial Knob     [SUB VFO-B] Knob

   024 tEy CW MEM5
3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set the selected
   Memory Register to “tyP2.” If you want to use your
   keyer paddle for message entry on all memories, set
   all five Menu items (#020 ~ 024) to “tyP2.”
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds
   to save the new settings and exit.

MESSAGE MEMORY PROGRAMMING (USING YOUR PADDLE)
1. Set the operating mode to CW.                                                       [KEYER] Button
2. Set the [BK-IN] button to Off.                                                            [BK-IN] Button
3. Turn the internal Electronic Keyer On by pressing the
   [KEYER] button, if necessary.
4. Press the [F5(MEM)] button on the front panel.
5. Press the [F1(CH1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button to begin
   the memory storage process.
6. Send the desired message using your keyer paddle.
7. Press the [F5(MEM)] button once more at the end of
   your message. Up to 50 characters may be stored among                                        [F5(MEM)] Button
   the five memories.                                                                 [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] Button

NOTE:
You must exercise care in sending to ensure that the spaces
between letters and words are accurately done; if your tim-
ing is off, the spacing may not come out right in the stored
message.
For ease in setting up the keyer memories, we recommend                      TERMINOLOGY:
you set Menu item “051 A1A F-TYPE” and/or “053 A1A                           PARIS Word Length: By convention in the Amateur
R-TYPE” to “ACS” (Automatic Character Spacing) while                         industry (utilized by ARRL and others), the length of one
you are programming the keyer memories.                                      “word” of CW is defined as the length of the Morse Code
                                                                             characters spelling the word “PARIS.” This character (dot/
                                                                             dash/space) length is used for the rigorous definition of
                                                                             code speed in “words per minute.”

Page 88                                                                                            FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                          CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
CHECKING THE CW MEMORY CONTENTS                                            [BK-IN] Button
1. Be sure that Break-in is still turned Off by the [BK-IN]
   button.
2. Press the [MONI] button to enable the CW monitor.
3. Press the [F1(CH1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button to check
   your work. You will hear the results in the sidetone,
   but no RF energy will be transmitted.
NOTE:
Adjust the monitor level using the [MONI] knob.                     [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] Button


ON-THE-AIR CW MESSAGE PLAYBACK
                                                                           [BK-IN] Button
1. Press the [BK-IN] button to enable transmission. Ei-
   ther Full- or Semi-break-in will be engaged, depend-
   ing on the setting of Menu item “058 A1A BK-IN.”
2. Press the [F1(CH1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button to transmit
   the programmed message.
NOTE:
If you subsequently decide to use the “Text Memory” tech-
nique for memory storage, please note that the contents of          [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] Button
a message stored using keyer paddle input will not be trans-
ferred over when you select “Text Memory technique” on
a particular memory register (the Menu Mode Setting is
set to “tyP1”).



                                      Transmitting in the Beacon Mode
   It is possible to transmit, repetitively in a “Beacon” mode, any message programmed either via paddle input or via
   the “Text” input method. The time delay between message repeats may be set anywhere between 0 and 255 seconds
   via Menu item “017 tEy BEACON.” If you do not wish the message to repeat in a “Beacon” mode, please set this
   Menu item to “off.” Press the [F1(CH1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button, depending on the register into which the Beacon
   message is stored. Repetitive transmission of the Beacon message will begin. Press one of these keys once more to
   halt the Beacon transmissions.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                   Page 89
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                           CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
TEXT Memory
The four channels of CW message memory (up to 50 characters total) may also be programmed using a text-entry tech-
nique. This technique is somewhat slower than when you send the message directly from your keyer paddle, but accuracy
of character spacing is ensured.
    Example 1: CQ CQ CQ DE W6DXC K} (20 characters)
And we will utilize another powerful feature of the CW Memory Keyer, the sequential Contest Number (“Countup”)
feature.
    Example 2: 599 10 200 # K} (15 characters)


STORING A MESSAGE INTO MEMORY
1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode.                                                   [MENU] Button
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the CW
   Memory Register into which you wish to store the
   message; for now, we are just selecting the message
   entry technique (Keyer entry).
   020 tEy CW MEM1
   021 tEy CW MEM2
   022 tEy CW MEM3
   023 tEy CW MEM4                                                                      Main Tuning Dial Knob   [SUB VFO-B] Knob
   024 tEy CW MEM5
3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set the selected
   Memory Register to “tyP1.” If you want to text mes-
   sage entry on all memories, set all five Menu items
   (#020 ~ 024) to “tyP1.”
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button to save the new
   settings and exit.

TEXT MESSAGE PROGRAMMING
1. Press the [CW] mode button to set the operating mode                [BK-IN] Button          Main Tuning Dial Knob

   to CW.
2. Be sure that Break-in is Off by pressing the [BK-IN]
   button, if necessary.
3. Press the [F5(MEM)] button on the front panel.
4. Press the [F1(CH1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button to select
   the desired Message Memory Register into which you
   wish to program the text.
5. Use the Main Tuning Dial knob to set the cursor posi-                    [F5(MEM)] Button                    [SUB VFO-B] Knob
   tion and use the [SUB VFO-B] knob to choose the                [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] Button

   letter/number to be programmed in each slot of the                             Current Cursor Position              Cursor
   memory. In the case of the second example above, the
   “#” character designates the slot where the Contest
   Number will appear.
6. When the message is complete, add the “}” character
   at the end to signify the termination of the message.
                                                                  CW Memory Register Number                 Message
7. Press and hold in the [F5(MEM)] button for 2 seconds
   to exit, once all characters (including “}”) have been
   programmed.
ADVICE:
Deleting Previously-stored Characters
Use the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the last correct
letter in the message. Now rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob
to select the “}” character; everything after the “}” charac-
ter will be deleted.

Page 90                                                                     FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
                                           CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
CHECKING     THE    CW MEMORY CONTENTS
                                                                                [BK-IN] Button
1. Be sure that Break-in is still turned Off by the [BK-IN]
   button.
2. Press the [MONI] button to enable the CW monitor.
3. Press the [F1(CH1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button to check
   your work. You will hear the results in the sidetone,
   but no RF energy will be transmitted.
NOTE:
Adjust the monitor level using the [MONI] knob.
                                                                         [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] Button

ON-THE-AIR CW MESSAGE PLAYBACK
                                                                                [BK-IN] Button
1. Press the [BK-IN] button to enable transmission. Ei-
    ther Full- or Semi-break-in will be engaged, depend-
    ing on the setting of Menu item “058 A1A BK-IN.”
2. Press the [F1(CH1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button to transmit
    the programmed message.
NOTE:
If you subsequently decide to use the Message Memory
technique for memory storage, please note that the con-
tents of a message stored using text input will not be trans-            [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] Button

ferred over when you select Message Memory technique
on a particular memory register (the Menu Mode Setting
is set to “tyP2”).

         Contest Number Programming                                     Decrementing the Contest Number
   Use this process if you are starting a contest, or if                Use this process if the current contest number gets
   you somehow get out of sync with the proper num-                     slightly ahead of the actual number you want to
   ber in the middle of a contest.                                      send (in case of a duplicate QSO, for example).
   1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu                         Press the [F6(DEC)] button on the front panel. The
      mode.                                                             current Contest Number will be reduced by one.
   2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select                        Press the [F6(DEC)] button as many times as nec-
      Menu item “019 tEy CONTEST.”                                      essary to reach the desired number. If you go too
   3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set the Con-                       far, use the “Contest Number Programming” tech-
      test Number to the desired value.                                 nique desired above.
      Advice:
      Press the [CLEAR] button (located below and
      to the left of the [CLAR] knob) to reset the Con-
      test Number to “1.”
   4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two
      seconds to store the new number and exit to
      normal operation.

 TEXT     DISPLAY   CW CODE      TEXT    DISPLAY    CW CODE      TEXT    DISPLAY      CW CODE        TEXT       DISPLAY   CW CODE

   !                    SN          (                   KN        /                       DN              @                 @

  “””                   AF         “)”                  KK       “:”                      OS              “[”               ---

   #                    ---                                ---    ;                       KR                               AL
                                   *
   $                    SX         +                    AR        <                        ---             ]                ---

   %                    KA          ,                  MIM        =                       BT              ^                 ---

   &                    AS         ---                  DU        >                        ---            _                 IQ

   ‘’’                 WG           .                  AAA        ?                       IMI             ‘}’               ---


FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                                 Page 91
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
         CONTEST MEMORY KEYER (USING THE OPTIONAL FH-2 REMOTE CONTROL KEYPAD)
You may also utilize the CW message capability of the FT-2000D from the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad, which
plugs into the rear panel’s REM jack.

Message Memory
Five memory channels capable of retaining 50 characters total are provided (using the PARIS standard for characters and
word length).
   Example: CQ CQ CQ DE W6DXC K (19 characters)


STORING A MESSAGE INTO MEMORY
                                                                                                 [MENU] Button
1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the CW
   Memory Register into which you wish to store the
   message; for now, we are just selecting the message
   entry technique (Keyer entry).
   020 tEy CW MEM1
   021 tEy CW MEM2
   022 tEy CW MEM3
   023 tEy CW MEM4                                                                  Main Tuning Dial Knob   [SUB VFO-B] Knob

   024 tEy CW MEM5
3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set the selected
   Memory Register to “tyP2.” If you want to use your
   keyer paddle for message entry on all memories, set
   all five Menu items (#020 ~ 024) to “tyP2.”
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button to save the new
   settings and exit.




Page 92                                                                     FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
         CONTEST MEMORY KEYER (USING THE OPTIONAL FH-2 REMOTE CONTROL KEYPAD)
MESSAGE MEMORY PROGRAMMING (USING YOUR PADDLE)                 CHECKING     THE   CW MEMORY CONTENTS
1. Set the operating mode to CW.                               1. Be sure that Break-in is still turned Off.
2. Set the [BK-IN] button to Off.                              2. Press the [MONI] button to enable the CW monitor.
3. Turn the internal Electronic Keyer On by pressing the       3. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key to check your work.
   [KEYER] button, if necessary.                                  You will hear the results in the sidetone, but no RF
4. Press the FH-2’s [MEM] key.                                    energy will be transmitted.


                               LOCK
                              ON   OFF
                                                                                              LOCK
                                                                                             ON   OFF




5. Press the [1] ~ [5] key on the FH-2 to begin the memory     NOTE:
   storage process.                                            You may adjust the monitor level using the [MONI] knob.

                                                               ON-THE-AIR CW MESSAGE PLAYBACK
                               LOCK

                                                               1. Press the [BK-IN] button to enable transmission. Ei-
                              ON   OFF




                                                                  ther Full- or Semi-break-in will be engaged, depend-
                                                                  ing on the setting of Menu item “058 A1A BK-IN.”
                                                               2. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key to transmit the pro-
                                                                  grammed message.


                                                                                              LOCK
                                                                                             ON   OFF


6. Send the desired message using your keyer paddle.
7. Press the [MEM] key on the FH-2 once more at the
   end of your message. Up to 50 characters may be stored
   among the five memories.


                               LOCK
                              ON   OFF




                                                               NOTE:
                                                               If you subsequently decide to use the “Text Memory” tech-
                                                               nique for memory storage, please note that the contents of
                                                               a message stored using keyer paddle input will not be trans-
                                                               ferred over when you select “Text Memory technique” on
                                                               a particular memory register (the Menu Mode Setting is
                                                               set to “tyP1”).
NOTE:
You must exercise care in sending to ensure that the spaces
between letters and words are accurately done; if your tim-
ing is off, the spacing may not come out right in the stored
message.
For ease in setting up the keyer memories, we recommend
you set Menu item “052 A1A F-TYPE” and/or “054 A1A
R-TYPE” to “ACS” (Automatic Character Spacing) while
you are programming the keyer memories.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                     Page 93
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
         CONTEST MEMORY KEYER (USING THE OPTIONAL FH-2 REMOTE CONTROL KEYPAD)
TEXT Memory
The five channels of CW message memory (up to 50 characters total) may also be programmed using a text-entry tech-
nique. This technique is somewhat slower than when you send the message directly from your keyer paddle, but accuracy
of character spacing is ensured.
    Example 1: CQ CQ CQ DE W6DXC K} (20 characters)
And we will utilize another powerful feature of the CW Memory Keyer, the sequential Contest Number (“Countup”)
feature.
    Example 2: 599 10 200 # K} (15 characters)

TEXT MEMORY STORAGE
1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode.                                                    [MENU] Button
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the CW
   Memory Register into which you wish to store the
   message; we are now selecting the message entry tech-
   nique (Text entry).
   020 tEy CW MEM1
   021 tEy CW MEM2
   022 tEy CW MEM3
   023 tEy CW MEM4                                                                  Main Tuning Dial Knob      [SUB VFO-B] Knob
   024 tEy CW MEM5
3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set the selected
   Memory Register to “tyP1.”
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds
   to save the new settings and exit.

TEXT MESSAGE PROGRAMMING
1. Press the [CW] mode button to set the operating mode      5. Use the FH-2’s [ ] and [ ] keys to set the cursor
   to CW.                                                       position and use the [ ] and [ ] keys to choose the
2. Be sure that Break-in is Off by pressing the [BK-IN]         letter/number to be programmed in each slot of the
   button, if necessary.                                        memory. In the case of the second example above, the
3. Press the FH-2’s [MEM] key.                                  “#” character designates the slot where the Contest
                                                                Number will appear.

                                LOCK
                            ON     OFF



                                                                                            LOCK
                                                                                           ON   OFF




4. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key to select the desired
   Message Memory Register into which you wish to pro-                           Current Cursor Position              Cursor

   gram the text.


                            LOCK
                           ON     OFF




                                                                    CW Memory Register Number              Message

                                                                 ADVICE:
                                                                 You may also use the Main Tuning Dial knob and the
                                                                 [SUB VFO-B] knobs to program the message charac-
                                                                 ters.



Page 94                                                                    FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
         CONTEST MEMORY KEYER (USING THE OPTIONAL FH-2 REMOTE CONTROL KEYPAD)
6. When the message is complete, add the “}” character       CHECKING THE CW MEMORY CONTENTS
   at the end to signify the termination of the message.     1. Be sure that Break-in is still turned Off.
7. Press and hold in the FH-2’s [MEM] key for 2 sec-         2. Press the [MONI] button to enable CW monitor.
   onds to exit, once all characters (including “}”) have    3. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key to check your work.
   been programmed.                                             You will hear the results in the sidetone, but no RF
                                                                energy will be transmitted.

                                 LOCK
                                ON     OFF



                                                                                            LOCK
                                                                                           ON   OFF




ADVICE:
Deleting Previously-stored Characters                        NOTE:
Use the FH-2’s [ ] and [ ] keys or Main Tuning Dial          You may adjust the monitor level using the [MONI] knob.
knob to select the last correct letter in the message. Now
use the [ ] and [ ] keys or [SUB VFO-B] knob to se-
                                                             ON-THE-AIR CW MESSAGE PLAYBACK
lect the “}” character; everything after the “}” character   1. Press the [BK-IN] button to enable transmission. Ei-
will be deleted.                                                ther Full- or Semi-break-in will be engaged, depend-
                                                                ing on the setting of Menu item “058 A1A BK-IN.”
                                                             2. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key to transmit the pro-
                                                                grammed message.


                                                                                            LOCK
                                                                                           ON   OFF




                                                             NOTE:
                                                             If you subsequently decide to use the “Message Memory”
                                                             technique for memory storage, please note that the con-
                                                             tents of a message stored using text input will not be trans-
                                                             ferred over when you select “Message Memory technique”
   Decrementing the Contest Number
                                                             on a particular memory register (the Menu Mode Setting
   By pressing the FH-2’s [DEC] key momentarily,             is set to “tyP2”).
   you may reduce the current Contest Number by one.


                            LOCK
                           ON    OFF




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                    Page 95
FM MODE OPERATION
                                                BASIC OPERATION
1. Press the [AM/FM] button several                           [MOX] Button

   times, until the imbedded LED glows
   orange, to select the FM operating
   mode.
   QUICK POINT:
   When the [AM/FM] button glows
   red, it indicates AM operation.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob
   (in the case of Main (VFO-A) op-                                             [AM/FM] Button

   eration) to select the desired operat-
   i n g f r e q u e n c y. P r e s s i n g t h e
   microphone’s [UP] or [DWN] but-
   ton will cause frequency change in 5 kHz steps.
3. Press the microphone’s PTT switch (or press the front
   panel [MOX] button) to transmit. Speak into the mi-
   crophone in a normal voice level. Release the PTT or
   [MOX] switch to return to receive.
4. Adjustment of the microphone gain may be accom-
   plished in two ways. At the factory, a default level has
   been programmed that should be satisfactory for most
   situations. However, using Menu item “072 F3E
   MICGAIN,” you may set a different fixed value, or
   choose the “ur” option, which then lets you use the
   front panel [MIC] knob to set the microphone gain in
   the FM mode.
ADVICE:
  The Transmit Monitor is another helpful way of veri-
  fying proper adjustment of the FM MIC Gain. By press-
  ing the [MONI] button then adjusting the [MONI] knob
  for a comfortable listening level while you are trans-
  mitting, you will be able to hear the difference in de-
  viation as you make adjustments.
  FM is only used in the 28 MHz and 50 MHz Amateur
  bands covered in the FT-2000D. Please do not use
  FM on any other bands.




Page 96                                                                      FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
FM MODE OPERATION
                                            REPEATER OPERATION
The FT-2000D may be utilized on 29 MHz and 50 MHz repeaters.

1. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to the output fre-          [MOX] Button           [AM/FM] Button

   quency (downlink) from the repeater.
2. If CTCSS Tone operation is desired/needed, press and
   hold in the [AM/FM] button for two seconds to en-
   gage the CTCSS mode.
3. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the desired
   CTCSS mode. If you just need to send the uplink en-
   coding tone, select “tn.” For encode/decode operation,
   choose “ts” instead. The available choices are                                        Main Tuning Dial Knob    [SUB VFO-B] Knob
       “oFF” “tn” “ts” “oFF.”
4. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the desired                           CTCSS Operation       Repeater Shift Direction
                                                                                  tn: Tone Encoder     –: Minus Shift
   CTCSS Tone to be used. A total of 50 standard CTCSS                            tS: Tone Squelch     +: Plus Shift
   tones are provided (see the CTCSS Tone Chart).                                oFF: OFF               S: Simplex

5. Press the [AM/FM] Mode button to select the desired
   repeater shift direction. The selections are
       “S” “+” “–” “S”
   where “S” represents “Simplex” operation (not used
   on a repeater).                                                                                      CTCSS Tone Frequency
6. Press and hold in the [AM/FM] button for two seconds
   to exit from the repeater setup mode.                                          CTCSS TONE FREQUENCY (Hz)
                                                                  67.0    69.3     71.9  74.4   77.0    79.7         82.5        85.4
7. Close the microphone’s PTT switch (or press the
                                                                  88.5    91.5     94.8  97.4 100.0 103.5           107.2       110.9
   [MOX] button) to begin transmission. You will observe         114.8   118.8    123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5           141.3       146.2
   that the frequency has shifted to correspond to the pro-      151.4   156.7    159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9           171.3       173.8
   gramming you set up in the previous steps. Speak into         177.3   179.9    183.5 186.2 189.9 192.8           196.6       199.5
                                                                 203.5   206.5    210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1           233.6       241.8
   the microphone in a normal voice level, and release           250.3   251.4
   the PTT switch or [MOX] button to return to the re-
   ceive mode.

ADVICE:
The conventional repeater shift used on 29 MHz is 100 kHz, while on the 50 MHz band the shift may vary between 500 kHz
and 1.7 MHz (or more). To program the proper repeater shift, use Menu items “073 F3E 28 RPT” (28 MHz) and “074
F3E 50 RPT” (50 MHz), as appropriate.

   You may also use “Tone Squelch” whereby your receiver will be kept silent until an incoming signal bearing a
   matching CTCSS tone is receiver. Your receiver’s squelch will then open in response to the reception of the required
   tone.
   1. Rotate the Main tuning Dial to the output frequency
      (downlink) from the repeater.                                                [AM/FM] Button

   2. Press and hold in the [AM/FM] button for two sec-
      onds to engage the CTCSS mode.
   3. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial to choose “ts” from
      the available choices of
          “oFF” “tn” “ts” “oFF.”
   4. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the de-
      sired CTCSS Tone to be used. A total of 50 stan-
      dard CTCSS tones are provided (see the CTCSS                                   Main Tuning Dial Knob    [SUB VFO-B] Knob

      Tone Chart).
   5. Press and hold in the [AM/FM] button for two sec-
                                                                                                        Tone Decoder “ON”
      onds. On the display, just below the “10 Hz” fre-
      quency digit, a small “d” will indicate that the Tone
      Decoder is engaged.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                             Page 97
MEMORY OPERATION
                                        CONVENIENT MEMORY FUNCTIONS
The FT-2000D contains ninety-nine regular memories, labeled “01” through “99,” nine special programmed limit memory
pairs, labeled “P-1L/1U” through “P-9L/9U,” and five QMB (Quick Memory Bank) memories, labeled “C-1” through
“C-5.” Each stores various settings, not only the Main band’s (VFO-A) frequency and mode (See below). By default, the 99
regular memories are contained in one group; however, they can be arranged in up to six separate groups, if desired.
QUICK POINT:
The FT-2000D’s memory channels store the following data (not just the operating frequency):
      Frequency
      Mode
      Clarifier status and its Offset Frequency
      ANT status
      ATT status
      IPO status
      VRF status
      Roofing filter status and its Bandwidth
      Noise Blanker status
      CONTOUR status and its Peak Frequency
      DSP Noise Reduction (DNR) status and its Reduction algorithm selection.
      DSP Notch filter (NOTCH) status
      NAR bandwidth status
      DSP Auto Notch filter (DNF) status
      Repeater Shift Direction and Shift Frequency
      CTCSS status and Tone Frequency

             REGULAR MEMORY CHANNELS           PMS MEMORY CHANNELS

                                   99                                P-9L/9U
                              98                                 P-8L/8U
                         97                                   P-7L/7U
                                                          P-6L/6U
                                                       P-5L/5U
                                                   P-4L/4U
                 03                             P-3L/3U
            02                              P-2L/2U
       01                                P-1L/1U




                                                QMB MEMORY CHANNEL




Page 98                                                                        FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
MEMORY OPERATION
                                       QMB (QUICK MEMORY BANK)
The Quick Memory Bank consists of five memories (labeled “C-1” through “C-5.”) independent from the regular and PMS
memories. These can quickly store operating parameters for later recall.

QMB Channel Storage
1. Tune to the desired frequency on the Main (VFO-A)                             [QMB(STO)] Button

   band.
2. Press the blue [QMB(STO)] button. The
   “beep” will confirm that the contents of
   the Main (VFO-A) band have been writ-
   ten to the currently-available QMB
   memory.
If you repeatedly press the [QMB(STO)] button, the QMB
memories will be written in the following order:
    C-2 C-3        C-4     C-5   C-1 ......
Once all five QMB memories have data on them, previous
data (starting with channel “C-1”) will be over-written on
a first-in, first-out basis.

QMB Channel Recall
1. Press the [QMB (RCL )] button. The current QMB                                [QMB(RCL)] Button

   channel’s data will be shown on the Main
   (VFO-A) frequency display field and the
   QMB memory channel number will be
   shown in the Multi-Display Window.
2. Repeatedly pressing the [QMB(RCL)] button will
   toggle you through the QMB channels:
      C-2 C-3         C-4     C-5     C-1 ......
3. Press the [V/M] button to return to the VFO or Memory                                       [V/M] Button

   mode.
ADVICE:
Rotating the Main Tuning Dial knob, or changing the op-
erating mode, will place the transceiver in the “Memory
Tune” mode, which is a temporary “pseudo-VFO” method
of tuning off of a stored memory channel. If you do not
over-write the contents of the current memory channel,
the original contents will not be disturbed by the initiation
of Memory Tune operation.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                     Page 99
MEMORY OPERATION
                                      STANDARD MEMORY OPERATION
The Standard Memory of the FT-2000D allows storage and recall of up to 99 memories, each storing frequency, mode, and
a wide variety of status information detailed previously. Memories may be grouped into as many as six Memory Groups,
and additionally you get nine pairs of band-limit (PMS) memories along with five QMB (Quick Memory Bank) memories.

Memory Storage
1. Set the Main band (VFO-A) up with all frequency,                                           [A   M] Button
   mode, and status the way you want to have it stored.
2. Press the [A M] button momentarily (the current chan-
   nel number will start blinking in the multi-panel win-
   dow); the contents of the current memory channel will
   be shown on the Sub band (VFO-B) display field.
3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the memory
   channel onto which you wish to store the data. If you
   have selected a channel on which data is already stored,                                             [SUB VFO-B] Knob
   that frequency will appear on the Sub band’s (VFO-B)
   frequency display field.
4. Press and hold in the [A M] button for two seconds
   to store the frequency and other data into the selected
   memory channel. A double beep will confirm that you
   have held the [A M] button in long enough.


Memory Channel Recall
                                                                                               [V/M] Button      [A/B] Button
1. Press the [V/M ] button, if necessary, to enter the
                                                                                                    [SUB VFO-B] Knob
   Memory mode. A memory channel number will ap-
   pear in the multi-panel window.
2. Press the [M CH] button. The Red LED inside the but-
   ton will light up, indicating that you are ready to recall
   a memory channel.
   ADVICE:
   If the Red LED imbedded in the [M CH] button does
   not light up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to
                                                                                                              [GRP] Button
   the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob is not illuminated.                                                      [M CH] Button
   If it is, press the [A/B] switch to make it go out, then
   press the [M CH] button again.
3. After pressing the [M CH] button, you may rotate the
   [M CH] knob to select the desired memory channel.
ADVICE:
To work within a particular Memory Group, press the
[GRP] button (the imbedded LED will glow Red), then
rotate the [SUB VFO-B ] knob to select the desired
Memory Group. Now press the [M CH] button (the im-
bedded LED will glow Red); you may now choose the
memory channel within the selected Memory Group.




Page 100                                                                   FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
MEMORY OPERATION
                                     STANDARD MEMORY OPERATION
Checking a Memory Channel’s Status
Before programming a channel into memory, you can check the current contents of that channel without the danger of over-
writing the channel accidentally.

1. Press the [A M] button momentarily.                                                           [A   M] Button
   The data stored in the currently-selected memory chan-
   nel will be displayed in the Sub band (VFO-B) fre-
   quency field. However, since you are only checking
   the contents of the memory channel, your radio will
   not have moved to the memory channel’s frequency.
2. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select a different
   memory channel. To exit from the Memory Check
   mode, press the [A M] button momentarily once                                                           [SUB VFO-B] Knob
   more.
ADVICE:
  While the Memory Check function is engaged, the
  memory channel number will blink in the multi-panel
  window.
  While operating in the VFO mode, using Memory
  Check, you may store the current contents of the Main
  (VFO-A) register into the selected memory by press-
  ing and holding in the [A M] button for two seconds
  (until the double beep). Conversely, if you wish to write
  the contents of the current memory into the Main (VFO-
  A) register, press and hold in the [M A] button for
  two seconds.

Erasing Memory Channel Data
1. Press the [A M] button.                                                                        [LOCK] Button
   The data stored in the currently-selected memory chan-
   nel will be displayed in the Sub (VFO-B) band fre-
   quency field.
2. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the memory
   channel that you would like to erase.
3. Press the [LOCK] button to erase the contents of the
   selected memory channel.
ADVICE:                                                                                                    [SUB VFO-B] Knob
                                                                                                 [A   M] Button
  After erasure, only the memory channel number will
  remain; the frequency data will disappear from the dis-
  play.
  If you make a mistake and wish to restore the memory’s
  contents, just repeat steps (1) through (3) above.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                    Page 101
MEMORY OPERATION
                                     STANDARD MEMORY OPERATION
Moving Memory Data to the Main Band (VFO-A)
You may transfer the contents of the currently-selected memory channel into the Main band (VFO-A) register, if you like.

1. Press the [V/M] button, as necessary, to go to the                                               [V/M] Button
   Memory mode. The memory channel number will ap-                                                           [SUB VFO-B] Knob
   pear in the multi-panel window.
2. Press the [M CH] button. The Red LED inside the
   switch will light up, indicating that you are ready to
   recall a memory channel.
   ADVICE:
   If the Red LED imbedded in the [M CH] button does
   not light up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to
   the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob is not illuminated.                                                            [M CH] Button
   If it is, press the [A/B] switch to make it go out, then                                        [M   A] Button
   press the [M CH] button again.
3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the memory
   channel the contents of which you wish to transfer to
   the Main band (VFO-A).
4. Press and hold in the [M A] button for two seconds,
   until you hear the double beep. The data in the selected
   memory channel will now be transferred to the Main
   band (VFO-A).
ADVICE:
This transfer of data to the Main band (VFO-A) does not
affect the original contents of the memory channel; this is
a “copy” function that leaves the memory contents un-
changed.


Memory Tune Operation
You may freely tune off of any memory channel in a “Memory Tune” mode that is similar to VFO operation. So long as
you do not over-write the contents of the current memory, Memory Tune operation will not alter the contents of the
memory channel.

1. Press the [V/M] button to recall any memory channel.                                             [V/M] Button

2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob; you will now ob-
   serve that the memory channel’s frequency is chang-
   ing.
   ADVICE:
       The “     ” icon will replace the “   ” icon in the
       multi-panel window, indicating you are in the
       “Memory Tune” mode.
       During Memory Tune operation, you may change                                  Main Tuning Dial Knob
       operating modes, and engage the Clarifier, if de-
       sired.
                                                               NOTE:
3. Press the [V/M] button momentarily to return to the
                                                               Computer software programs utilizing the CAT system
   originally-memorized frequency of the current memory
                                                               interface port may presume that the transceiver is operat-
   channel. One more press of the [V/M] button will re-
                                                               ing in the VFO mode for certain features like “band map-
   turn you to VFO operation.
                                                               ping” and/or frequency logging. Because the “Memory
                                                               Tune” mode so closely resembles the VFO mode, be sure
                                                               that you have the FT-2000D operating in a control mode
                                                               compatible with your software’s requirements. Use the
                                                               VFO mode if you’re not sure.




Page 102                                                                     FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
MEMORY OPERATION
                                                MEMORY GROUPS
Memory channels may be grouped into as many as six convenient batches, for easy identification and selection. For ex-
ample, you might want to set aside memory groups for AM BC stations, shortwave broadcast stations, contest frequencies,
repeater frequencies, and PMS limits, or any other groupings you like.
Each memory group is capable of holding up to 22 memory channels (the Group size is fixed). When a memory channel is
grouped, the channel numbers change to correspond to the chart below:

Memory Group Assignment
                                                                                                 [MENU] Button
1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item
   “030 GEnE MEM GRP.”
3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set this Menu item
   to “On” (the default setting is “OFF”).
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds
   to save the new setting and exit. Operation will now be
   restricted to the six Memory Groups.
                                                                                    Main Tuning Dial Knob   [SUB VFO-B] Knob
To cancel Memory Group operation, repeat steps (1)
                                                                                MEMORY CHANNEL NUMBER
through (4) above, choosing “OFF” in step (3).                     GROUP MEMORY “OFF”          GROUP MEMORY “ON”
ADVICE                                                                   01 ~ 19                   1-01 ~ 1-19
                                                                         20 ~ 39                   2-01 ~ 2-20
Note that for the PMS memory group, the PMS memories                     40 ~ 59                   3-01 ~ 3-20
“P-1L” through “P-9U” will be so designated, so as to avoid              60 ~ 79                   4-01 ~ 4-20
confusion.                                                               80 ~ 99                   5-01 ~ 5-20
                                                                    P-1L/1U ~ P-9L/9U           P-1L/1U ~ P-9L/9U




Choosing the Desired Memory Group
                                                                                                   [V/M] Button      [A/B] Button
You may recall memories just within a particular Memory                                                [SUB VFO-B] Knob
Group, if desired.
1. Press the [V/M ] button, if necessary, to enter the
   Memory mode.
2. Press the [GRP] button (below and to the left of the
   [SUB VFO-B] knob). The imbedded LED inside the
   switch will light up.
3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the desired
   Memory Group.                                                                                                  [GRP] Button
                                                                                                                  [M CH] Button
4. Press the [M CH] button (just below the [GRP] but-
   ton). The imbedded LED inside the switch will light
   up.
5. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the desired
   Memory Channel within the Selected Memory Group.
ADVICE:
  If the Red LED imbedded in the [GRP] and [M CH]
  buttons does not light up, check to be sure that the or-
  ange lamp to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob is
  not illuminated. If it is, press the [A/B] button to make
  it go out, then press the [GRP] or [M CH] button again.
  If no channels have been assigned to a particular
  Memory Group, you will not have access to that Group.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                    Page 103
OPERATION ON ALASKA EMERGENCY FREQUENCY: 5167.5 KH (U.S. VERSION ONLY)                     Z

Section 97.401(d) of the regulations governing amateur radio in the United States permit emergency amateur communica-
tions on the spot frequency of 5167.5 kHz by stations in (or within 92.6 km of) the state of Alaska. This frequency is only
to be used when the immediate safety of human life and/or property are threatened, and is never to be used for routine
communications.
The FT-2000D includes the capability for transmission and reception on 5167.5 kHz under such emergency conditions via
the Menu system. To activate this feature:

1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode.                                                  [MENU] Button

2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select “147 tGEn
   EMERGENCY.”
3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select “EnA (En-
   able).”
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for 2 seconds to
   save the new setting and exit to normal operation. Emer-
   gency communication on this spot frequency is now
   possible.                                                                           Main Tuning Dial Knob   [SUB VFO-B] Knob
5. Press the [V/M ] button, as necessary, to enter the
   Memory mode. Press the [M CH] button, then rotate                                                  [V/M] Button      [A/B] Button
   the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the emergency chan-                                                     [SUB VFO-B] Knob

   nel (“EUS”), which is found between channels “P-9U”
   and “01.”
   ADVICE:
   If the Red LED imbedded in the [M CH] button does
   not light up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to
   the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob is not illuminated.
   If it is, press the [A/B] switch to make it go out, then
   press the [M CH] button again.                                                                                    [M CH] Button

NOTE:
  The receive-mode CLARIFIER functions normally
  while using this frequency, but variation of the trans-
  mit frequency is not possible. Activation of “147 tGEn
  EMERGENCY” does not enable any other out-of-ama-
  teur-band capability on the transceiver. The full speci-
  fications of the FT-2000D are not necessarily guaran-
  teed on this frequency, but power output and receiver
  sensitivity should be fully satisfactory for the purpose
  of emergency communication.
  If you wish to disable operation capability on the Alaska
  Emergency Frequency, repeat the above procedures,
  but set “147 tGEn EMERGENCY” to “diS” in step 3.
  In an emergency, note that a half-wave dipole cut for
  this frequency should be approximately 45’3” on each
  leg (90’6” total length). Emergency operation on
  5167.5 kHz is shared with the Alaska-Fixed Service.
  This transceiver is not authorized for operation, under
  the FCC’s Part 87, for aeronautical communications.




Page 104                                                                       FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
VFO AND MEMORY SCANNING
You may scan wither the VFO or the memories of the FT-2000D, and the radio will halt the scan on any station with a signal
strong enough to open the receiver’s squelch.

                                                  VFO SCANNING
1. Set the VFO to the frequency on which you would like
   to begin scanning.
2. Rotate the Main [SQL] knob so that the background
   noise is just silenced.
   ADVICE:
   Rotate the Sub [SQL] knob so that the background
   noise is just silenced, if you would like to begin scan-
   ning on the Sub band (VFO-B).
3. Press and hold in the microphone’s [UP] or [DWN]                      Main [SQL] Knob
   key for 1/2 second to start scanning in the specified                     MAIN BAND (VFO-A) SCANNING
   direction on the Main (VFO-A) band.
   ADVICE:
                                                                                           [B] Button
   If you would like to begin scanning on the Sub band
   (VFO-B), press the [B] button first, then (within five
   seconds of pressing the [B] button, while the orange
   imbedded LED is blinking), press and hold in the
   microphone’s [UP] or [DWN] key for 1/2 second.
4. If the scanner halts on an incoming signal, the decimal
   point between the “MHz” and “kHz” digits of the fre-
   quency display will blink.
                                                                      SUB [SQL] Knob
   ADVICE:
       If the incoming signal disappears, scanning will re-                  SUB BAND (VFO-B) SCANNING
        sume in about five seconds.
       On the SSB/CW and SSB-based Data modes, the
        scanner will pause on a received signal, then will
        step across the signal very slowly, giving you time
        to stop the scan, if you like. In these modes on the
        VFO, the scanner does not stop, however.
5. To cancel the scanning, press the microphone’s [UP]
   or [DWN] key momentarily.
ADVICE:
You may select the manner in which the scanner resumes
while it has paused on a signal, using Menu item “039
GEnE SCN RSM.” The default “5Sec” setting will cause
the scanner to resume scanning after five seconds; you may
change it, however, to resume only after the carrier has
dropped out, if you like See page 119.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                   Page 105
VFO AND MEMORY SCANNING
                                                    MEMORY SCAN
1. Set the transceiver up in the memory mode by pressing                                          [V/M] Button      [A/B] Button

   the [V/M] button, if necessary.                                                                    [SUB VFO-B] Knob

2. Rotate the Main [SQL] knob so that the background
   noise is just silenced.
3. Press the [M CH] button momentarily.
   When you press the [M CH] button, the Red LED im-
   bedded within the switch should light up, indicating
   that you are ready to choose a channel into which to
   store the data.
   ADVICE:                                                               Main [SQL] Knob                         [M CH] Button

   If the Red LED imbedded in the [M CH] button does
   not light up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to
   the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob is not illuminated.
   If it is, press the [A/B] button to make it go out, then
   press the [M CH] button again.
4. Press and hold in the microphone’s [UP] or [DWN]
   key for 1/2 second to start scanning in the specified
   direction.
   ADVICE:
        If the scanner halts on an incoming signal, the deci-
        mal point between the “MHz” and “kHz” digits of
        the frequency display will blink.
        If the incoming signal disappears, scanning will re-
        sume in about five seconds.
5. To cancel the scanning, press the microphone’s [UP]
   or [DWN] key momentarily.

ADVICE:                                                         QUICK POINT:
  During Memory Group operation, only the channels              If you have no interest in scanning, and wish to prohibit
  within the current Memory Group will be scanned.              the microphone’s [UP]/[DWN] keys from initiating scan-
  If the scan has paused on a signal, pressing the              ning, you may disable scanning control from the micro-
  microphone’s [UP] or [DWN] key will cause scanning            phone using Menu item “038 GEnE MIC SCN” (set it to
  to resume instantly.                                          “Off”).
  If you press the microphone’s PTT switch during scan-
  ning, the scanner will halt at once. Pressing the PTT
  switch during scanning will not cause transmission,
  however.
  You may select the manner in which the scanner re-
  sumes while it has paused on a signal, using Menu item
  “039 GEnE SCN RSM.” The default “5Sec” setting
  will cause the scanner to resume scanning after five
  seconds; you may change it, however, to resume only
  after the carrier has dropped out, if you like See page
  119.




Page 106                                                                      FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
PMS (PROGRAMMABLE MEMORY SCANNING)
To limit scanning (and manual tuning) within a particular frequency range, you can use the Programmable Memory Scan-
ning (PMS) feature, which utilizes nine special-purpose memory pairs (“P-1L/P-1U” through “P-9L/P-9U”). The PMS
feature is especially useful in helping you to observe any operating sub-band limits which apply to your Amateur license
class.

1. Store the Lower and Upper tuning/scanning limit fre-                                           [V/M] Button      [A/B] Button
   quencies into the memory pair “P-1L” and “P-1U,” re-                                               [SUB VFO-B] Knob

   spectively, or any other “L/U” pair of memories in the
   special PMS memory area. See page 97 for details re-
   garding memory storage.
2. Press the [V/M] button to enter the Memory mode.
3. Press the [M CH] button momentarily.
   When you press the [M CH] button, the Red LED im-
   bedded within the switch should light up, indicating
   that you are ready to choose a channel into which to                 Main [SQL] Knob                          [M CH] Button

   store the data.
   ADVICE:
   If the Red LED imbedded in the [M CH] button does
   not light up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to
   the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob is not illuminated.
   If it is, press the [A/B] button to make it go out, then
   press the [M CH] button again.
4. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select memory chan-
   nel “P-1L” or “P-1U.”
5. Rotate the Main [SQL] knob so that the background
   noise is just silenced.
6. Turn the Main Tuning Dial knob slightly (to activate
   memory tuning). Tuning and scanning are now limited
   to the range within the P-1L/P-1U limits until you press
   the [V/M] button to return to memory channel or Main
   band (VFO-A) operation.
7. Press and hold in the microphone’s [UP] or [DWN]
   key for 1/2 second to start scanning in the specified
   direction.
   ADVICE:
        If the scanner halts on an incoming signal, the deci-
        mal point between the “MHz” and “kHz” digits of
        the frequency display will blink.
        If the incoming signal disappears, scanning will re-
        sume in about five seconds.
        On the SSB/CW and SSB-based Data modes, the
        scanner will pause on a received signal, then will
        step across the signal very slowly, giving you time
        to stop the scan, if you like. In these modes on the
        VFO, the scanner does not stop, however.
        If the scan has paused on a signal, pressing the
        microphone’s [UP] or [DWN] key will cause scan-
        ning to resume instantly.
8. If you rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob in the oppo-
   site direction from the current scanning direction (in
   other words, you rotate the dial to the left when scan-
   ning toward a higher frequency), the direction of the
   scan will reverse.
9. If you press the microphone’s PTT switch during scan-
   ning, the scanner will halt at once. Pressing the PTT
   switch during scanning will not cause transmission,
   however.


FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                   Page 107
PACKET OPERATION
Packet operation is easily accomplished on the FT-2000D by connecting your TNC (Terminal Node Controller) to the
transceiver, per the illustration. “Packet” operation also applies to SSB-based AFSK data modes, such as PSK31, etc.




                                                                                                                            DATA   DATA
                                                                                                                      PTT   OUT     IN



         PACKET        ②
                      ④ ⑤                           PACKET JACK                  TNC
                      ① ③
                                                        Pin 1 (DATA IN)          DATA OUT
                                                            Pin 2 (GND)          GND
                                                   Pin 3 (PACKET PTT)            PTT
                                                      Pin 4 (DATA OUT)           DATA IN
                                                           Pin 5 (BUSY)          (SQL Control)




                   PACKET SETUP (INCLUDING SUBCARRIER FREQUENCY)
Before operation can commence,             MENU ITEM       AVAILABLE VALUES                            MENU ITEM        AVAILABLE VALUES
some basic setup procedures must     064   dAtA DATA IN dAtA (DATA) / PC (PC)                    068   dAtA VOX DLY     30 ~ 3000 msec
be performed, using the Menu, to     065   dAtA DT GAIN        0 ~ 100                           069   dAtA V GAIN          0 ~ 100
                                     066   dAtA DT OUT nAin (Main) / Sub (Sub)                   070   dAtA PKTDISP    –3000 ~ +3000 Hz
configure your radio for the data    067   dAtA OUT LVL        0 ~ 100                           071   dAtA PKT SFT    –3000 ~ +3000 Hz
mode to be used.



                                                   BASIC SETUP
                                                                             During Packet operation via the rear panel’s PACKET
1. Press the [PKT] button.
                                                                             jack, the front panel MIC jack is cut off, so you won’t
   ADVICE:
                                                                             have a “live microphone” problem during data opera-
       For HF operation, SSB-based Data operation is gen-
                                                                             tion.
       erally used. One press of the [PKT] button will
       engage Packet operation in the “LSB” mode (by                      NOTE:
       default). Both the “PKT” and “LSB” LEDs will                       If you anticipate making data transmissions of longer than
       become illuminated.                                                a few minutes, we recommend that you use the [RF PWR]
       If you need to do FM-based 1200-baud packet on                     knob to reduce the transmitter power to 1/3 ~ 1/2 of its
       the 29/50 MHz bands, press the [PKT] button re-                    normal maximum.
       peatedly to illuminate the “PKT” LED to orange,
                                                                          QUICK POINT:
       to engage the “PKT-FM” mode.
                                                                          PACKET Jack Specifications
       When both the “PKT” and “USB” LEDs are illu-
                                                                            DATA IN (Pin 1)
       minated, the FT-2000D has engaged Packet op-
                                                                                Input Level: 50 mVp-p
       eration in the “USB” mode.
                                                                                Input Impedance: 10 k-Ohms
2. When the “transmit” command is received from the
                                                                            DATA OUT (Pin 4)
   TNC, the transmitter of the FT-2000D will automati-
                                                                            Fixed level, does not respond to setting of [AF GAIN]
   cally be engaged. Likewise, the command to return to
                                                                            or [SQL] knob.
   receive will cause the radio to revert to the receive
                                                                                Output Level: 100 mVp-p max.
   mode.
                                                                                Output Impedance: 10 k-Ohms
ADVICE:
  If you need to adjust the output level from the “DATA
  OUT” pin of the PACKET jack (pin 4) on the radio,
  please use Menu item “067 dAtA OUT LVL.” For the
  input level from the TNC, as applied to the DATA IN
  pin of the PACKET jack (pin 1), please do so at the
  TNC side.


Page 108                                                                                   FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
RTTY (RADIO TELETYPE) OPERATION
Most RTTY operation today is accomplished using a TNC or other computer-based system that utilizes AFSK tones. As
such, the previous discussion on LSB-mode “Packet” operation will apply for Baudot operation, as well. For RTTY opera-
tion using a Terminal Unit (TU) or the “FSK” output from a TNC, please see the discussion below. See also the illustration
for details regarding connection to your TU.




                                                                                                                  FSK     FSK
                                                                                                           PTT    OUT      IN



                   RTTY      ② ③
                             ① ④                    RTTY JACK            RTTY Machine
                                                      Pin 1 (SHIFT)      FSK OUT
                                                    Pin 2 (RX OUT)       AF IN
                                                        Pin 3 (PTT)      PTT
                                                       Pin 4 (GND)       GND




                                   SETTING UP FOR RTTY OPERATION
Before commencing RTTY operation, please direct your                               MENU ITEM               AVAILABLE VALUES
attention to the setup steps shown in the chart to the right.               076    rtty R PLRTY      nor (normal) / rEU (reverse)
                                                                            077    rtty T PLRTY      nor (normal) / rEU (reverse)
                                                                            078    rtty RTY OUT        nAin (Main) / Sub (Sub)
                                                                            079    rtty OUT LEL                0 ~ 100
                                                                            080    rtty SHIFT            170/200/425/850 Hz
                                                                            081    rtty TONE                1275/2125 Hz



                                                      BASIC SETUP
1. Press the [RTTY] button to enter the RTTY mode.                       The Mark/Space Shift utilized in most Amateur RTTY
   One press of the [RTTY] button will engage RTTY                       operation is 170 Hz. Other shifts may be configured,
   operation using “LSB” injection, which is generally                   however, using Menu item “080 rtty SHIFT.”
   used in the Amateur service. In this mode, both the                   The FT-2000D is set up for “high tone” operation (cen-
   “RTTY” and “LSB” LEDs will light up.                                  tered on 2125 Hz) by default, but you may configure it
   To switch to USB-side injection in RTTY, press the                    for low tone (1275 Hz) operation using Menu item
   [RTTY ] button once more. Both the “RTTY” and                         “081 rtty TONE.”
   “USB” LEDs will now be illuminated. Repeatedly                        You may find that you are unable to decode some RTTY
   pressing the [RTTY] button will toggle between LSB                    stations, even if they are of sufficient signal strength.
   and USB injection on RTTY.                                            If this is observed, there may be a Mark/Space polarity
2. When you begin typing on your TU or computer key-                     problem between your station and the other station. If
   board, the command to transmit should automatically                   so, try setting Menu item “076 rtty R PLRTY” to “rEU”
   be sent to the transceiver, causing it to enter the trans-            (“Reverse”) to see if that permits copy. A separate Menu
   mit mode.                                                             item permits reversal of your transmitter’s Mark/Space
                                                                         polarity: “077 rtty T PLRTY.”
NOTE:
If you anticipate making data transmissions of longer than            QUICK POINT:
a few minutes, we recommend that you use the [RF PWR]                 In the FT-2000D, “RTTY” is a mode defined as being an
knob to reduce the transmitter power to 1/2 ~ 1/3 of its              “FSK” mode, whereby the closing and opening of a key-
normal maximum.                                                       ing line (to ground) causes the Mark/Space tones to alter-
                                                                      nate. The RTTY mode is not an AFSK based mode in this
ADVICE:
                                                                      transceiver, and the AFSK output tones from a TNC will
  There is no adjustment of the DATA input level (Pin 1
                                                                      not cause Mark/Space shifting to occur. Use the “Packet”
  (“DATA IN”) of the RTTY jack) on the rear panel;
                                                                      mode for AFSK-based Baudot and other data modes.
  please make any needed level adjustments at the TU
  side.


FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                          Page 109
MISCELLANEOUS AFSK-BASED DATA MODES
The FT-2000D may also be used for a host of other SSB-based Data modes. Please set up your system using the illustration
as a guideline.




                                                                                                LINE IN or MIC IN
                                                                                                LINE OUT or MIC OUT
                                                                                                COM PORT
          PACKET       ②
                      ④ ⑤
                             PACKET JACK           Interface
                      ① ③
                                 Pin 1 (DATA IN)   DATA OUT
                                     Pin 2 (GND)   GND
                            Pin 3 (PACKET PTT)     PACKET PTT
                               Pin 4 (DATA OUT)    DATA IN
                                    Pin 5 (BUSY)


                                                                Interface




QUICK POINT:
When you have configured Menu item “146 tGEn VOX
SEL” to “dAtA,” the transceiver will operate in a “VOX”
mode, and it is not necessary to connect a PTT line. This
makes for very convenient interfacing to computer Sound
Cards, etc.




Page 110                                                                     FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
ABOUT THE TRANSVERTER OUTPUT TERMINAL
You may connect an after-market transverter to the rear panel’s TRV (Transverter) jack. The output, at 28 MHz, is approxi-
mately –10 dBm (0.1 mW) at 50 Ohms.




                                                                                                                          VHF/UHF Antenna
                                                                                                    Transceiver    V/U ANT




                                                                                                        TX GND    RF IN



                                             TX GND
                                       TRV




                       SETUP                                                         OPERATION
1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode.               1. Set up the frequency offset for transverter use, as de-
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item             scribed previously.
   “122 tun MY BAND.”                                            2. Choose the “Transverter” Band with the “MY Bands”
3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to find the Menu pa-                 procedures, as described on page 46.
   rameter “AU d” (this is the factory default setting).         3. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to set the desired
4. Press the [ENT] button to change the parameter to                operating frequency. Operation is basically unchanged
   “ON” (a “d” notation will replace the “E” notation).             from normal transceiver operation.
5. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item
                                                                 ADVICE:
   “144 tGEn ETX-GND.”
                                                                 When the “TRV” mode is turned on, power output will
6. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set this Menu item
                                                                 not be allowed to pass to the “ANT 1” or “ANT 2” main
   to “EnA” to enabling the rear panel’s TX GND jack
                                                                 antenna jacks. So one of these may be connected to your
7. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for at least two
                                                                 transverter’s “RX” jack. Just be certain to disconnect the
   seconds to save the new setting and exit to normal op-
                                                                 transverter when returning to HF operation, as the selected
   eration.
                                                                 Antenna jack will now be capable of passing RF power.



                               Setting the Transverter Frequency Offset
   You may set up the frequency display so that it shows the actual band on which your transverter is operating (instead
   of the “IF” used by the transverter, which is the 28 MHz band on your FT-2000D).
   Example: Setting up the FT-2000D display for use with a 144 MHz Transverter
   1. Connect the 144 MHz transverter to the FT-2000D.
   2. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode.
   3. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item “034 GEnE TRV SET” is set to “44” (the factory
      default setting).
   4. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob so as to select “44” on the display.
   5. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for at least two seconds to save the new setting and exit.
   The “100 MHz” digit of the frequency is not displayed, so when you are operating on 2 meters and see “45 MHz” on
   the frequency readout, this indicates “145 MHz” instead.
   Advice:
   With the setup described above, tuning the operating range 28-29 MHz will correspond to an actual operating
   frequency of 144-145 MHz, with “44-45” being displayed on the front panel of the transceiver.



FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                          Page 111
MENU MODE
The Menu system of the FT-2000D provides extensive customization capability, so you can set up your transceiver just the
way you want to operate it. The Menu items are grouped by general utilization category, and are numbered from “001 AGc
FST DLY” to “147 tGEn EMRGNCY.”

                                                USING THE MENU
1. Press the [MENU] button momentarily, to engage the
   Menu mode.
   The Main (VFO-A) frequency display will show the
   Menu Number and Menu Group name, while the Sub
   (VFO-B) frequency display will show the Menu item;
   the Multi-Display window shows the current setting of
   the currently-selected Menu item.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the Menu                                            [MENU] Button
   item you wish to work on.                                                         Main Tuning Dial Knob   [SUB VFO-B] Knob

3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to change the current
   setting of the selected Menu item.
4. When you have finished making your adjustments,               Menu Number    Menu Group Name              Menu Item

   press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds
   to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. If
   you only momentarily press the [MENU] button, the
   new settings will not be retained.
                                                                                   Menu Setting



                                                 Menu Mode Reset
  You may reset all the Menu settings to their original factory defaults, if desired.
  1. Turn the front panel [POWER] switch off.
  2. Press and hold in the [MENU] button, and while holding it in, press the [POWER] switch to turn the transceiver
     back on. Now release the [MENU] button.




Page 112                                                                       FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
GROUP        NO.   MENU FUNCTION      AVAILABLE VALUES                         DEFAULT SETTING
AGC          001   AGc FST DLY        20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step)            300 msec
AGC          002   AGc FST HLD        0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)             0 msec
AGC          003   AGc MID DLY        20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step)            700 msec
AGC          004   AGc MID HLD        0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)             0 msec
AGC          005   AGc SLW DLY        20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step)            2000 msec
AGC          006   AGc SLW HLD        0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)             0 msec
DISPLAY      007   diSP COLOR         bL1/bL2/bL3/ub1/ub2                      bL1
DISPLAY      008   diSP DIM MTR       0 ~ 15                                   7
DISPLAY      009   diSP DIM VFD       0~7                                      4
DISPLAY      010   diSP BAR SEL       CLAr/C-tn/u-tn                           C-tn
DISPLAY      011   diSP PK HLD        OFF/0.5/1.0/2.0 sec                      OFF
DISPLAY      012   diSP RTR STU       0/90/180/270 °                           0°
DISPLAY      013   diSP RTR ADJ       –30 ~ 0                                  0
DISPLAY      014   diSP QMB MKR       On/OFF                                   On 1
DVS          015   dUS RX LVL         0 ~ 100                                  50
DVS          016   dUS TX LVL         0 ~ 100                                  50
KEYER        017   tEy BEACON         OFF/1 ~ 255 sec                          OFF
KEYER        018   tEy NUM STL        1290/AunO/Aunt/A2nO/A2nt/12nO/12nt       1290
KEYER        019   tEy CONTEST        1 ~ 9999                                 1
KEYER        020   tEy CW MEM1        tyP1/tyP2                                tyP2
KEYER        021   tEy CW MEM2        tyP1/tyP2                                tyP2
KEYER        022   tEy CW MEM3        tyP1/tyP2                                tyP2
KEYER        023   tEy CW MEM4        tyP1/tyP2                                tyP2
KEYER        024   tEy CW MEM5        tyP1/tyP2                                tyP2
GENERAL      025   GEnE ANT SEL       bAnd/rEG                                 bAnd
GENERAL      026   GEnE BEP LVL       0 ~ 255                                  50
GENERAL      027   GEnE CAT BPS       4800/9600/192H(19200)/384H (38400) bps   4800 bps
GENERAL      028   GEnE CAT TOT       10/100/1000/3000 msec                    10 msec
GENERAL      029   GEnE CAT RTS       On/OFF                                   On
GENERAL      030   GEnE MEM GRP       On/OFF                                   OFF
GENERAL      031   GEnE Q SPLIT       –20 ~ 0 ~ +20 kHz (1 kHz Step)           +5 kHz
GENERAL      032   GEnE TRACK         OFF/bAnd/FrEq                            OFF
GENERAL      033   GEnE TX TOT        OFF/5/10/15/20/25/30 min                 OFF
GENERAL      034   GEnE TRV SET       30 ~ 49 MHz                              44 MHz
GENERAL      035   GEnE µT DIAL       StP1/ StP2/OFF                           StP1
GENERAL      036   GEnE SNB LVL       nAin(MAIN)/0~100                         nAin(MAIN)
GENERAL      037   GEnE SUB FIL       1200/300/500 Hz                          1200 Hz
GENERAL      038   GEnE MIC SCN       On/OFF                                   On
GENERAL      039   GEnE SCN RSM       CAr/5Sec                                 5SEc
GENERAL      040   GEnE ANTIVOX       0 ~ 100                                  50
GENERAL      041   GEnE FRQ ADJ       –25 ~ 0 ~ +25                            0
S IF SFT     042   S-iF LSB SFT       –1000 ~ +1000 Hz                         0 Hz
S IF SFT     043   S-iF USB SFT       –1000 ~ +1000 Hz                         0 Hz
S IF SFT     044   S-iF CWL SFT       –1000 ~ +1000 Hz                         0 Hz
S IF SFT     045   S-iF CWU SFT       –1000 ~ +1000 Hz                         0 Hz
S IF SFT     046   S-iF RTTY          –1000 ~ +1000 Hz                         0 Hz
S IF SFT     047   S-iF RTTY-R        –1000 ~ +1000 Hz                         0 Hz
S IF SFT     048   S-iF PKT-LSB       –1000 ~ +1000 Hz                         0 Hz
S IF SFT     049   S-iF PKT-USB       –1000 ~ +1000 Hz                         0 Hz
MODE-AM      050   A3E MICGAIN        Ur/0 ~ 100                               30
MODE-AM      051   A3E MIC SEL        Frnt/dAtA/PC                             Frnt
MODE-CW      052   A1A F-TYPE         OFF/buG/ELE/ACS                          ELE
MODE-CW      053   A1A F-REV          nor/rEU                                  nor
MODE-CW      054   A1A R-TYPE         OFF/buG/ELE/ACS                          ELE
 : Requires optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit.


FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                           Page 113
MENU MODE
GROUP        NO.   MENU FUNCTION      AVAILABLE VALUES                            DEFAULT SETTING
MODE-CW      055   A1A R-REV          nor/rEU                                     nor
MODE-CW      056   A1A CW AUTO        OFF/50/On                                   OFF
MODE-CW      057   A1A BFO            USb/LSb/Auto                                USb
MODE-CW      058   A1A BK-IN          SEni/FuLL                                   SEni
MODE-CW      059   A1A SHAPE          1/2/4/6 msec                                4 msec
MODE-CW      060   A1A WEIGHT         (1:) 2.5 ~ 4.5                              3.0
MODE-CW      061   A1A FRQDISP        dir/OFSt                                    OFSt
MODE-CW      062   A1A PC KYNG        EnA (Enable)/diS (Disable)                  diS (Disable)
MODE-CW      063   A1A QSKTIME        15/20/25/30 msec                            15 msec
MODE-DAT     064   dAtA DATA IN       dAtA/PC                                     dAtA
MODE-DAT     065   dAtA DT GAIN       0 ~ 100                                     50
MODE-DAT     066   dAtA DT OUT        nAin (Main)/Sub (Sub)                       nAin (Main)
MODE-DAT     067   dAtA OUT LVL       0 ~ 100                                     50
MODE-DAT     068   dAtA VOX DLY       30 ~ 3000 msec                              300 msec
MODE-DAT     069   dAtA V GAIN        0 ~ 100                                     50
MODE-DAT     070   dAtA PKTDISP       –3000 ~ +3000 Hz (10 Hz/step)               0 Hz
MODE-DAT     071   dAtA PKT SFT       –3000 ~ +3000 Hz (10 Hz/step)               1000 Hz
MODE-FM      072   F3E MICGAIN        Ur/0 ~ 100                                  50
MODE-FM      073   F3E MIC SEL        Frnt/dAtA/PC                                Frnt
MODE-FM      074   F3E 28 RPT         0 ~ 1000 kHz (10 kHz/step)                  100 kHz
MODE-FM      075   F3E 50 RPT         0 ~ 4000 kHz (10 kHz/step)                  1000 kHz
MODE-RTY     076   rtty R PLRTY       nor/rEU                                     nor
MODE-RTY     077   rtty T PLRTY       nor/rEU                                     nor
MODE-RTY     078   rtty RTY OUT       nAin (Main)/Sub (Sub)                       nAin (Main)
MODE-RTY     079   rtty OUT LEL       0 ~ 100                                     50
MODE-RTY     080   rtty SHIFT         170/200/425/850 Hz                          170 Hz
MODE-RTY     081   rtty TONE          1275/2125 Hz                                2125 Hz
MODE-SSB     082   J3E MIC SEL        Frnt/dAtA/PC                                Frnt
MODE-SSB     083   J3E TX BPF         1-30/1-29/2-28/3-27/4-26/3000               3-27
MODE-SSB     084   J3E LSB CAR        –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz/step)              0 Hz
MODE-SSB     085   J3E USB CAR        –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz/step)              0 Hz
MODE-SSB     086   J3E SLSB CR        –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz/step)              0 Hz
MODE-SSB     087   J3E SUSB CR        –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz/step)              0 Hz
RX AUDIO     088   rout AGC SLP       nor/SLP                                     nor
RX AUDIO     089   rout HEADPHN       SEP/Con1/Con2                               SEP
RX DSP       090   rdSP CNTR LV       –40 ~ +20 dB                                –15 dB
RX DSP       091   rdSP CNTR WI       1 – 11                                      10
RX DSP       092   rdSP NOTCH W       nArr (Narrow)/uuid (Wide)                   uuid (Wide)
RX DSP       093   rdSP CW SHAP       SOFt/ShAP                                   ShAP
RX DSP       094   rdSP CW SLP        StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/GEnt(GENTLE)         nEd (MEDIUM)
RX DSP       095   rdSP CW NARR       25/50/100/200/300/400/500/800/1200/1400/    500 Hz
                                      1700/2000 Hz
RX DSP       096   rdSP PKT SHP       SOFt/ShAP                                   ShAP
RX DSP       097   rdSP PKT SLP       StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/GEnt(GENTLE)         nEd (MEDIUM)
RX DSP       098   rdSP PKT NAR       25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz                    300 Hz
RX DSP       099   rdSP RTY SHP       SOFt/ShAP                                   ShAP
RX DSP       100   rdSP RTY SLP       StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/GEnt(GENTLE)         nEd (MEDIUM)
RX DSP       101   rdSP RTY NAR       25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz                    300 Hz
RX DSP       102   rdSP SSB SHP       SOFt/ShAP                                   ShAP
RX DSP       103   rdSP SSB SLP       StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/GEnt(GENTLE)         nEd (MEDIUM)
RX DSP       104   rdSP SSB NAR       200/400/600/850/1100/1350/1500/1650/1800/   1800 Hz
                                      950/2100/2250 Hz
SCOPE        105 SCP 1.8 FI           1.800 - 1.999 MHz (1 kHz/step)              1.800 MHz
SCOPE        106 SCP 3.5 FI           3.500 - 3.999 MHz (1 kHz/step)              3.500 MHz
 : Requires optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit.


Page 114                                                      FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
GROUP        NO.   MENU FUNCTION      AVAILABLE VALUES                       DEFAULT SETTING
SCOPE        107   SCP 5.0 FI         5.250 - 5.499 MHz (1 kHz/step)         5.250 MHz
SCOPE        108   SCP 7.0 FI         7.000 - 7.299 MHz (1 kHz/step)         7.000 MHz
SCOPE        109   SCP 10.1 FI        (1)0.100 - (1)0.149 MHz (1 kHz/step)   (1)0.100 MHz
SCOPE        110   SCP 14.0 FI        (1)4.000 - (1)4.349 MHz (1 kHz/step)   (1)4.000 MHz
SCOPE        111   SCP 18.0 FI        (1)8.000 - (1)8.199 MHz (1 kHz/step)   (1)8.068 MHz
SCOPE        112   SCP 21.0 FI        (2)1.000 - (2)1.449 MHz (1 kHz/step)   (2)1.000 MHz
SCOPE        113   SCP 24.8 FI        (2)4.800 - (2)4.989 MHz (1 kHz/step)   (2)4.890 MHz
SCOPE        114   SCP 28.0 FI        (2)8.000 - (2)9.699 MHz (1 kHz/step)   (2)8.000 MHz
SCOPE        115   SCP 50.0 FI        (5)0.000 - (5)3.999 MHz (1 kHz/step)   (5)0.000 MHz
TUNING       116   tun DIALSTEP       1 or 10 Hz                             10 Hz
TUNING       117   tun CW FINE        EnA/diS                                diS
TUNING       118   tun MHz SEL        1/0.1 MHz                              1 MHz
TUNING       119   tun AM STEP        2.5/5/9/10/12.5 kHz                    5 kHz
TUNING       120   tun FM STEP        5/6.25/10/12.5/25 kHz                  5 kHz
TUNING       121   tun FM DIAL        10/100 Hz                              100 Hz
TUNING       122   tun MY BAND        1.8 ~ 50/GE/AU                         ––
TX AUDIO     123   tAUd EQ1 FRQ       OFF/100 ~ 700 Hz (100 Hz/step)         OFF
TX AUDIO     124   tAUd EQ1 LVL       –10 ~ +10                              +5
TX AUDIO     125   tAUd EQ1 BW        1 ~ 10                                 10
TX AUDIO     126   tAUd EQ2 FRQ       OFF/700 ~ 1500 Hz (100 Hz/step)        OFF
TX AUDIO     127   tAUd EQ2 LVL       –10 ~ +10                              +5
TX AUDIO     128   tAUd EQ2 BW        1 ~ 10                                 10
TX AUDIO     129   tUAd EQ3 FRQ       OFF/1500 ~ 3200 Hz (100 Hz/step)       OFF
TX AUDIO     130   tUAd EQ3 LVL       –10 ~ +10                              +5
TX AUDIO     131   tUAd EQ3 BW        1 ~ 10                                 10
TX AUDIO     132   tAUd PE1 FRQ       OFF/100 ~ 700 Hz (100 Hz/step)         200 Hz
TX AUDIO     133   tAUd PE1 LVL       –10 ~ +10                              –10
TX AUDIO     134   tAUd PE1 BW        1 ~ 10                                 2
TX AUDIO     135   tAUd PE2 FRQ       OFF/700 ~ 1500 Hz (100 Hz/step)        800 Hz
TX AUDIO     136   tAUd PE2 LVL       –10 ~ +10                              –3
TX AUDIO     137   tAUd PE2 BW        1 ~ 10                                 1
TX AUDIO     138   tUAd PE3 FRQ       OFF/1500 ~ 3200 Hz (100 Hz/step)       2100 Hz
TX AUDIO     139   tUAd PE3 LVL       –10 ~ +10                              +6
TX AUDIO     140   tUAd PE3 BW        1 ~ 10                                 1
TX GNRL      141   tGEn BIAS          Ab/0 ~ 100                             Ab
TX GNRL      142   tGEn MAX PWR       20/50/100/200 W                        200 W
TX GNRL      143   tGEn PWRCTRL       ALL/Car                                ALL
TX GNRL      144   tGEn ETX-GND       EnA(ENABLE)/diS(DISABLE)               diS(DISABLE)
TX GNRL      145   tGEn TUN PWR       20/50/100/200 W                        100 W
TX GNRL      146   tGEn VOX SEL       nic/dAtA                               nic
TX GNRL      147   tGEn EMRGNCY       EnA(ENABLE)/diS(DISABLE)               diS(DISABLE)
 : Requires optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                         Page 115
MENU MODE
                 AGC GROUP                                               DISPLAY GROUP
001 AGc FST DLY                                            007 diSP COLOR
Function: Sets the delay time for the AGC FAST mode of     Function: Selects the Display color when the optional Data
the Main band (VFO-A) receiver.                            Management Unit (DMU-2000) is connected.
Available Values: 20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step)            Available Values: bL1/bL2/bL3/ub1/ub2
Default Setting: 300 msec                                      bL1: COOL BLUE
                                                               bL2: CONTRAST BLUE
002 AGc FST HLD
                                                               bL3: FLASH WHITE
Function: Sets the hang time of the AGC peak voltage for
                                                               ub1: CONTRAST UMBER
the AGC FAST mode of the Main band (VFO-A) receiver.
                                                               ub2: UMBER
Available Values: 0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)
                                                           Default Setting: bL1 (COOL BLUE)
Default Setting: 0 msec
                                                           ADVICE:
003 AGc MID DLY                                            If the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit is not
Function: Sets the delay time for the AGC MID mode of      connected, this adjustment has no effect.
the Main band (VFO-A) receiver.
                                                           008 diSP DIM MTR
Available Values: 20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step)
                                                           Function: Setting of the meter brightness level when
Default Setting: 700 msec
                                                           “DIM” is selected.
004 AGc MID HLD                                            Available Values: 0 ~ 15
Function: Sets the hang time of the AGC peak voltage for   Default Setting: 4
the AGC MID mode of the Main band (VFO-A) receiver.
                                                           009 diSP DIM VFD
Available Values: 0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)
                                                           Function: Setting of the frequency display brightness level
Default Setting: 0 msec
                                                           when “DIM” is selected.
005 AGc SLW DLY                                            Available Values: 0 ~ 15
Function: Sets the delay time for the AGC SLOW mode of     Default Setting: 8
the Main band (VFO-A) receiver.
                                                           010 diSP BAR SEL
Available Values: 20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step)
                                                           Function: Selects one of three parameters to be viewed
Default Setting: 2000 msec
                                                           on the Tuning Offset Indicator.
006 AGc SLW HLD                                            Available Values: CLAr/C-tn/u-tn
Function: Sets the hang time of the AGC peak voltage for   Default Setting: C-tn
the AGC SLOW mode of the Main band (VFO-A) receiver.           CLAr: Displays relative clarifier offset.
Available Values: 0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)                 C-tu: Displays relative tuning offset between the in-
Default Setting: 0 msec                                              coming signal and transmitted frequency.
                                                               u-tn: Displays the peak position of the VRF or µ-
                                                                     TUNE filter.
                                                           NOTE:
                                                           The µ-TUNE filter is an option.
                                                           011 diSP PK HLD
                                                           Function: Selects the peak hold time of the Sub (VFO-B)
                                                           receiver’s S-meter.
                                                           Available Values: OFF/0.5/1.0/2.0 sec
                                                           Default Setting: OFF
                                                           012 diSP RTR STU
                                                           Function: Selects the starting point of your rotator
                                                           controller’s indicator needle.
                                                           Available Values: 0/90/180/270 °
                                                           Default Setting: 0 °
                                                           013 diSP RTR ADJ
                                                           Function: Adjusts the indicator needle precisely to the
                                                           starting point set in menu item “012 diSP RTR STU.”
                                                           Available Values: –30 ~ 0
                                                           Default Setting: 0



Page 116                                                                 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
             DISPLAY GROUP                                              KEYER GROUP
014 diSP QMB MKR                                         017 tEy BEACON
Function: Enables/Disables the QMB Marker (White ar-     Function: Sets the interval time between repeats of the
row “ ”) to display on the Spectrum Band Scope when      beacon message.
the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit is con-       Available Values: OFF/1 ~ 255 sec
nected.                                                  Default Setting: OFF
Available Values: On/OFF
Default Setting: On                                      018 tEy NUM STL
ADVICE:                                                  Function: Selects the Contest Number “Cut” format for
If the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit is not     an imbedded contest number.
connected, this adjustment has no effect.                Available Values: 1290/AunO/Aunt/A2nO/A2nt/12nO/
                                                         12nt
                                                         Default Setting: 1290
                 DVS GROUP                                   1290: Does not abbreviate the Contest Number
                                                             AunO: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “U” for “Two,”
015 dUS RX LVL
                                                                   “N” for “Nine,” and “O” for “Zero.”
Function: Sets the audio output level from the voice
                                                             Aunt: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “U” for “Two,”
memory.
                                                                   “N” for “Nine,” and “T” for “Zero.”
Available Values: 0 ~ 100
                                                             A2nO: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “N” for “Nine,”
Default: 50
                                                                   and “O” for “Zero.”
016 dUS TX LVL                                               A2nt: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “N” for “Nine,”
Function: Sets the microphone input level to the voice             and “T” for “Zero.”
memory                                                       12nO: Abbreviates to “N” for “Nine,” and “O” for
Available Values: 0 ~ 100                                          “Zero.”
Default: 50                                                  12nt: Abbreviates to “N” for “Nine,” and “T” for
                                                                   “Zero.”
                                                         019 tEy CONTEST
                                                         Function: Enters the initial contest number that will in-
                                                         crement/decrement after sending during contest QSOs.
                                                         Available Values: 1 ~ 9999
                                                         Default Setting: 1
                                                         ADVICE:
                                                         Press the [CLEAR] button to reset the contest number to
                                                         “1.”
                                                         020 tEy CW MEM1
                                                         Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message
                                                         register 1.
                                                         Available Values: tyP1/tyP2
                                                         Default Setting: tyP2
                                                             tyP1: You may enter the CW message from the front
                                                                   panel’s Function Keys.
                                                             tyP2: You may enter the CW message from the CW
                                                                   keyer.
                                                         021 tEy CW MEM2
                                                         Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message
                                                         register 2.
                                                         Available Values: tyP1/tyP2
                                                         Default Setting: tyP2
                                                             tyP1: You may enter the CW message from the front
                                                                   panel’s Function Keys.
                                                             tyP2: You may enter the CW message from the CW
                                                                   keyer.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                           Page 117
MENU MODE
              KEYER GROUP                                             GENERAL GROUP
022 tEy CW MEM3                                          025 GEnE ANT SEL
Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message    Function: Sets the method of antenna selection.
register 3.                                              Available Values: bAnd/rEG
Available Values: tyP1/tyP2                              Default Setting: bAnd
Default Setting: tyP2                                       bAnd:The antenna is selected in accordance with the
    tyP1: You may enter the CW message from the front              operating band.
          panel’s Function Keys.                            rEG: The antenna is selected in accordance with the
    tyP2: You may enter the CW message from the CW                 band stack (different antennas may be utilized
          keyer.                                                   on the same band, if so selected in the band
023 tEy CW MEM4                                                    stack).
Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message    026 GEnE BEP LVL
register 4.                                              Function: Sets the beep level.
Available Values: tyP1/tyP2                              Available Values: 0 ~ 255
Default Setting: tyP2                                    Default Setting: 50
    tyP1: You may enter the CW message from the front
          panel’s Function Keys.                         027 GEnE CAT BPS
    tyP2: You may enter the CW message from the CW       Function: Sets the transceiver’s computer-interface cir-
          keyer.                                         cuitry for the CAT baud rate to be used.
                                                         Available Values: 4800/9600/192H(19200)/384H (38400)
024 tEy CW MEM5                                          bps
Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message    Default Setting: 4800 bps
register 5.
Available Values: tyP1/tyP2                              028 GEnE CAT TOT
Default Setting: tyP2                                    Function: Sets the Time-Out Timer countdown time for a
    tyP1: You may enter the CW message from the front    CAT command input.
          panel’s Function Keys.                         Available Values: 10/100/1000/3000 msec
    tyP2: You may enter the CW message from the CW       Default Setting: 10 msec
          keyer.                                         The Time-Out Timer shuts off the CAT data input after the
ADVICE:                                                  continuous transmission of the programmed time.
If the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad is not con-   029 GEnE CAT RTS
nected, this adjustment has no effect.                   Function: Enables/Disables the RTS port of the CAT jack.
                                                         Available Values: On/OFF
                                                         Default Setting: On
                                                         030 GEnE MEM GRP
                                                         Function: Enables/Disables Memory Group Operation.
                                                         Available Values: On/OFF
                                                         Default Setting: OFF
                                                         031 GEnE Q SPLIT
                                                         Function: Selects the tuning offset for the Quick Split fea-
                                                         ture.
                                                         Available Values: –20 ~ 0 ~ +20 kHz (1 kHz Step)
                                                         Default Setting: +5 kHz




Page 118                                                               FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
                                            GENERAL GROUP
032 GEnE TRACK                                              036 GEnE SNB LVL
Function: Sets the VFO Tracking feature.                    Function: Adjusts the Sub band (VFO-B) receiver’s IF
Available Values: OFF/bAND/FrEq                             Noise Blanker level, when the Noise Blanker is engaged.
Default Setting: OFF                                        Available Values: nAin(MAIN)/0~100
   OFF: Disables the VFO Tracking feature.                  Default Setting: nAin(MAIN)
   bAND: When you change bands on the Main (VFO-            When this menu is set to “nAin(MAIN),” you may adjust
           A) side, the Sub (VFO-B) band’s VFO will         the Noise Blanker level using the front panel’s [NB] knob.
           automatically change to be the same as that of
                                                            037 GEnE SUB FIL
           VFO-A.
                                                            Function: Defines the Sub band (VFO-B) receiver’s CW
   FrEq: This function is almost the same as “bAND,”
                                                            narrow filter.
           however, furthermore, the Sub band’s (VFO-
                                                            Available Values: 1200/300/500 Hz
           B) frequency changes together with the Main
                                                            Default Setting: 1200 Hz
           Band’s (VFO-A) frequency when turning the
                                                            ADVICE:
           Main Dial Tuning knob.
                                                            This Menu item tells the microprocessor which (if any)
033 GEnE TX TOT                                             optional filter has been installed.
Function: Sets the Time-Out Timer countdown time.
                                                            038 GEnE MIC SCN
Available Values: OFF/5/10/15/20/25/30 min
                                                            Function: Enables/disables scanning access via the
Default Setting: OFF
                                                            microphone’s [UP]/[DWN] keys.
The Time-Out Timer shuts off the transmitter after con-
                                                            Available Values: On/OFF
tinuous transmission of the programmed time.
                                                            Default Setting: On
034 GEnE TRV SET
                                                            039 GEnE SCN RSM
Function: Sets the 10’s and 1’s of the MHz digits display
                                                            Function: Selects the Scan Resume mode.
for operation with a transverter.
                                                            Available Values: CAr/5SEc
Available Values: 30 ~ 49 MHz
                                                            Default Setting: 5SEc
Default Setting: 44 MHz
                                                               CAr: The scanner will hold until the signal disappears,
The default setting would be used with a 144 MHz
                                                                      then will resume after one second.
transverter. If you connect a 430 MHz transverter to the
                                                               5SEc: The scanner will hold for five seconds, then re-
radio, set this menu to “30” (the “100 MHz” digits are
                                                                      sume whether or not the other station is still
hidden on this radio).
                                                                      transmitting.
035 GEnE µT DIAL
                                                            040 GEnE ANTIVOX
Function: Selects the µ-TUNE mode.
                                                            Function: Adjusts the Anti-VOX Trip Gain which is the
Available Values: StP1/ StP2/OFF
                                                            level of negative feedback of receiver audio to the micro-
Default Setting: StP1
                                                            phone, to prevent receiver audio from activating the trans-
    StP-1: Activates the µ-TUNE system using
                                                            mitter (via the microphone) during VOX operation.
            “COARSE” steps of the [VRF] knob (2 steps/
                                                            Available Values: 0 ~ 100
            click) on the 7 MHz and lower amateur bands.
                                                            Default Setting: 50
            On the 10/14 MHz bands, “FINE” [VRF] knob
            steps (1 step/click) will be used.              041 GEnE FRQ ADJ
    StP2: Activates the µ-TUNE system using “FINE”          Function: Adjusts the reference oscillator.
            steps of the [VRF] knob (1 step/click) on the   Available Values: –25 ~ 0 ~ +25
            14 MHz and lower amateur bands on the Main      Default Setting: 0
            band (VFO-A).                                   Connect a 50-Ohm dummy load and frequency counter to
    OFF: Disables the µ-TUNE system. Activates the          the antenna jack; adjust the [SUB VFO-B] knob so that
            VRF feature on the 14 MHz and lower amateur     the frequency counter reading is same as the VFO fre-
            bands on the main band (VFO-A).                 quency while pressing the PTT switch.
ADVICE:                                                     ADVICE:
If the optional RF µTuning Kit is not connected, this ad-   Do not perform this Menu item unless you have a high-
justment has no effect.                                     performance frequency counter. Perform this Menu item
                                                            after the transceiver and frequency counter have been
                                                            turned on and brought up to operating temperature (at least
                                                            30 minutes).




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                Page 119
MENU MODE
 S IF SFT (SUB BAND IF SHIFT) GROUP                                      MODE-AM GROUP
042 S-iF LSB SFT                                            050 A3E MICGAIN
Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO-   Function: Sets the microphone gain for the AM mode.
B) receiver’s IF filter in the LSB mode.                    Available Values: Ur/0 ~ 100
Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz                          Default Setting: 30
Default Setting: 0 Hz                                       When this menu is set to “Ur,” you may adjust the micro-
                                                            phone gain using the front panel’s [MIC] knob.
043 S-iF USB SFT
Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO-   051 A3E MIC SEL
B) receiver’s IF filter in the USB mode.                    Function: Selects the microphone to be used on the AM
Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz                          mode.
Default Setting: 0 Hz                                       Available Values: Frnt/dAtA/PC
                                                            Default Setting: Frnt
044 S-iF CWL SFT
                                                               Frnt: Selects the microphone connected to the front
Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO-
                                                                     panel’s MIC jack while using the AM mode.
B) receiver’s IF filter in the CW (LSB) mode.
                                                               dAtA:Selects the microphone connected to pin 1 of
Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz
                                                                     the PACKET Jack while using the AM mode.
Default Setting: 0 Hz
                                                               PC: This parameter is for future expansion of this
045 S-iF CWU SFT                                                     transceiver’s capabilities, but at this time is not
Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO-            supported.
B) receiver’s IF filter in the CW (USB) mode.
Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz
Default Setting: 0 Hz
046 S-iF RTTY
Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO-
B) receiver’s IF filter in the RTTY mode.
Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz
Default Setting: 0 Hz
047 S-iF RTTY-R
Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO-
B) receiver’s IF filter in the RTTY reverse mode.
Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz
Default Setting: 0 Hz
048 S-iF PKT-LSB
Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO-
B) receiver’s IF filter in the Packet (LSB) mode.
Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz
Default Setting: 0 Hz
049 S-iF PKT-USB
Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO-
B) receiver’s IF filter in the Packet (USB) mode.
Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz
Default Setting: 0 Hz




Page 120                                                                  FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
                                            MODE-CW GROUP
052 A1A F-TYPE                                              056 A1A CW AUTO
Function: Selects the desired keyer operation mode for      Function: Enables/disables CW keying while operating
the device connected to the front panel’s KEY jack.         on SSB.
Available Values: OFF/buG/ELE/ACS                           Available Values: OFF/50/On
Default Setting: ELE                                        Default Setting: OFF
    OFF: Disables the front panel’s keyer (“straight key”      OFF: Disables CW keying while operating on SSB.
          mode for use with external keyer or computer-        50: Enables CW keying only while operating SSB
          driven keying interface).                                   on 50 MHz (but not HF).
    buG: Mechanical “bug” keyer emulation. One paddle          On: Enables CW keying while operating on SSB (all
          produces “dits” automatically, while the other              TX bands).
          paddle manually produces “dahs.”                  NOTE:
    ELE: Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character         This feature allows you to move someone from SSB to
          Spacing) disabled.                                CW without having to change modes on the front panel.
    ACS: Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character
                                                            057 A1A BFO
          Spacing) enabled.
                                                            Function: Sets the CW carrier oscillator injection side for
053 A1A F-REV                                               the CW mode.
Function: Selects the keyer paddle’s wiring configuration   Available Values: USb/LSb/Auto
for the KEY jack on the front panel.                        Default Setting: USb
Available Values: nor/rEU                                       USb: Injects the CW carrier oscillator on the USB side.
Default Setting: nor                                            LSb: Injects the CW carrier oscillator on the LSB side.
    nor: Tip = Dot, Ring = Dash, Shaft = Ground                 Auto: Injects the CW carrier oscillator on the LSB side
    rEU: Tip = Dash, Ring = Dot, Shaft = Ground                       while operating on the 7 MHz band and below,
                                                                      and the USB side while operating on the 10 MHz
054 A1A R-TYPE
                                                                      band and up.
Function: Selects the desired keyer operation mode for
the device connected to the rear panel’s KEY jack.          058 A1A BK-IN
Available Values: OFF/buG/ELE/ACS                           Function: Sets the CW “break-in” mode.
Default Setting: ELE                                        Available Values: SEni/FuLL
    OFF: Disables the rear panel’s keyer (“straight key”    Default Setting: SEni
          mode for use with external keyer or computer-        SEni (SEMI): The transceiver will operate in the semi
          driven keying interface).                                           break-in mode. The delay (receiver re-
    buG: Mechanical “bug” keyer emulation. One paddle                         covery) time is set by the front panel’s
          produces “dits” automatically, while the other                      [DELAY] knob.
          paddle manually produces “dahs.”                     FuLL:          The transceiver will operate in the full
    ELE: Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character                           break-in (QSK) mode.
          Spacing) disabled.
                                                            059 A1A SHAPE
    ACS: Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character
                                                            Function: Selects the CW carrier wave-form shape (rise/
          Spacing) enabled.
                                                            fall times).
055 A1A R-REV                                               Available Values: 1/2/4/6 msec
Function: Selects the keyer paddle’s wiring configuration   Default Setting: 4 msec
for the KEY jack on the rear panel.
                                                            060 A1A WEIGHT
Available Values: nor/rEU
                                                            Function: Sets the Dot:Dash ratio for the built-in elec-
Default Setting: nor
                                                            tronic keyer.
    nor: Tip = Dot, Ring = Dash, Shaft = Ground
                                                            Available Values: (1:) 2.5 ~ 4.5
    rEU: Tip = Dash, Ring = Dot, Shaft = Ground
                                                            Default Setting: 3.0




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                Page 121
MENU MODE
            MODE-CW GROUP                                               MODE-DAT GROUP
061 A1A FRQDISP                                             064 dAtA DATA IN
Function: Selects the frequency Display Format for the      Function: Selects the data input path to be used on the
CW mode.                                                    PKT mode.
Available Values: dir/OFSt                                  Available Values: dAtA/PC
Default Setting: OFSt                                       Default Setting: dAtA
   dir (Direct Frequency): Displays the receiver carrier       dAtA:Uses the data input line connected to pin 1 of
                           frequency, without any offset             the PACKET jack while using the PKT mode.
                           added. When changing                PC: This parameter is for future expansion of this
                           modes between SSB and CW,                 transceiver’s capabilities, but at this time is not
                           the frequency display re-                 supported.
                           mains constant.
                                                            065 dAtA DT GAIN
   OFSt (Pitch Offset):    This frequency display re-
                                                            Function: Sets the data input level from the TNC to the
                           flects the added BFO offset.
                                                            AFSK modulator.
062 A1A PC KYNG                                             Available Values: 0 ~ 100
Function: Enables/disables CW keying from the “DATA         Default Setting: 50
IN” terminal on the rear panel’s PACKET jack while op-
                                                            066 dAtA DT OUT
erating on the CW mode.
                                                            Function: Selects the receiver to be connected to the data
Available Values: EnA (Enable)/diS (Disable)
                                                            output port (pin 4) of the PACKET jack.
Default Setting: diS (Disable)
                                                            Available Values: nAin (Main)/Sub (Sub)
063 A1A QSKTIME                                             Default Setting: nAin (Main)
Function: Selects the time delay between when the PTT
                                                            067 dAtA OUT LVL
is keyed and the carrier is transmitted during QSK opera-
                                                            Function: Sets the AFSK data output level at the output
tion when using the internal keyer.
                                                            port (pin 4) of the PACKET jack.
Available Values: 15/20/25/30 msec
                                                            Available Values: 0 ~ 100
Default Setting: 15 msec
                                                            Default Setting: 50
                                                            068 dAtA VOX DLY
                                                            Function: Adjusts the “VOX” delay (receiver recovery)
                                                            time on the PKT mode.
                                                            Available Values: 30 ~ 3000 msec
                                                            Default Setting: 300 msec
                                                            069 dAtA V GAIN
                                                            Function: Adjusts the “VOX” gain on the PKT mode.
                                                            Available Values: 0 ~ 100
                                                            Default Setting: 50
                                                            070 dAtA PKTDISP
                                                            Function: Sets the packet frequency display offset.
                                                            Available: –3000 ~ +3000 Hz (10 Hz/step)
                                                            Default: 0 Hz
                                                            071 dAtA PKT SFT
                                                            Function: Sets the carrier point during the SSB packet
                                                            operation.
                                                            Available: –3000 ~ +3000 Hz (10 Hz/step)
                                                            Default: 1000 Hz (typical center frequency for PSK31,
                                                            etc.)




Page 122                                                                  FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
             MODE-FM GROUP                                              MODE-RTY GROUP
072 F3E MICGAIN                                              076 rtty R PLRTY
Function: Sets the microphone gain for the FM mode.          Function: Selects normal or reverse Mark/Space polarity
Available Values: Ur/0 ~ 100                                 for RTTY receive operation.
Default Setting: 50                                          Available Values: nor/rEU
When this menu is set to “Ur,” you may adjust the micro-     Default Setting: nor
phone gain using the front panel’s [MIC] knob.
                                                             077 rtty T PLRTY
073 F3E MIC SEL                                              Function: Selects normal or reverse Mark/Space polarity
Function: Selects the microphone to be used on the FM        for RTTY transmit operation.
mode.                                                        Available Values: nor/rEU
Available Values: Frnt/dAtA/PC                               Default Setting: nor
Default Setting: Frnt
                                                             078 rtty RTY OUT
   Frnt (FRONT): Selects the microphone connected to
                                                             Function: Selects the receiver to be connected to the data
                   the front panel’s MIC jack while us-
                                                             output port (pin 1) of the RTTY jack.
                   ing the FM mode.
                                                             Available Values: nAin (Main)/Sub (Sub)
   dAtA:           Selects the microphone connected to
                                                             Default Setting: nAin (Main)
                   pin 1 of the PACKET Jack while us-
                   ing the FM mode.                          079 rtty OUT LEL
   PC:             This parameter is for future expansion    Function: Sets the FSK RTTY data output level at the
                   of this transceiver’s capabilities, but   output port (pin 1) of the RTTY jack.
                   at this time is not supported.            Available Values: 0 ~ 100
                                                             Default Setting: 50
074 F3E 28 RPT
Function: Sets the magnitude of the repeater shift on the    080 rtty SHIFT
28 MHz band.                                                 Function: Selects the frequency shift for FSK RTTY op-
Available Values: 0 ~ 1000 kHz (10 kHz/step)                 eration.
Default Setting: 100 kHz                                     Available Values:170/200/425/850 Hz
                                                             Default Setting: 170 Hz
075 F3E 50 RPT
Function: Sets the magnitude of the repeater shift on the    081 rtty TONE
50 MHz band.                                                 Function: Selects the Mark tone for RTTY operation.
Available Values: 0 ~ 4000 kHz (10 kHz/step)                 Available Values: 1275/2125 Hz
Default Setting: 1000 kHz                                    Default Setting: 2125 Hz




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                Page 123
MENU MODE
            MODE-SSB GROUP                                                   RX AUDIO GROUP
082 J3E MIC SEL                                                 088 rout AGC SLP
Function: Selects the microphone to be used on the SSB          Function: Selects the gain curve of the AGC amplifier.
modes (LSB and USB).                                            Available Values: nor/SLP
Available Values: Frnt/dAtA/PC                                  Default Setting: nor
Default Setting: Frnt                                              nor (NORMAL): The AGC output level will follow a
   Frnt (FRONT): Selects the microphone connected to                                 linear response to the antenna input
                   the front panel’s MIC jack while using                            level, while AGC is activated.
                   the SSB modes.                                  SLP (SLOPED): The AGC output level will increase
   dAtA:           Selects the microphone connected to                               at 1/10 the rate of the antenna input
                   pin 1 of the PACKET Jack while us-                                level, while AGC is activated.
                   ing the SSB modes.                                                                                SLOPE
   PC:             This parameter is for future expansion




                                                                                    Audio Output
                   of this transceiver’s capabilities, but at
                                                                                                                   NORMAL
                   this time is not supported.
083 J3E TX BPF
Function: Selects the audio passband of the DSP modula-
                                                                                                    Input Signal
tor on the SSB mode.
Available Values: 1-30/1-29/2-28/3-27/4-26/3000
                                                                089 rout HEADPHN
    1-30: 50-3000(Hz)
                                                                Function: Selects one of three audio mixing modes when
    1-29: 100-2900(Hz)
    2-28: 200-2800(Hz)                                          using headphones during Dual Receive operation.
    3-27: 300-2700(Hz)                                          Available Values: SEP/Con1/Con2
    4-26: 400-2600(Hz)                                          Default Setting: SEP
    3000: 3000WB                                                    SEP (SEPARATE): Audio from the Main (VFO-A)
Default Setting: 3-27 (300-2700 Hz)                                                       receiver is heard only in the left
NOTE:                                                                                     ear, and Sub (VFO-B) receiver
The apparent power output, when using the widest band-                                    audio solely in the right ear.
widths, may seem lower. This is normal, and it occurs be-           Con1 (COMBINE 1): Audio from both Main (VFO-
cause the available transmitter power is distributed over a                               A) and Sub (VFO-B) receivers
wider bandwidth. The greatest compression of power out-                                   can be heard in both ears, but
put, conversely, occurs when using the “4-26” setting (400-                               Sub (VFO-B) audio is attenu-
2600 Hz), and this setting is highly recommended for con-                                 ated in the left ear and Main
test or DX pile-up work.                                                                  (VFO-A) audio is attenuated in
                                                                                          the right ear.
084 J3E LSB CAR                                                     Con2 (COMBINE 2): Audio from both Main (VFO-
Function: Adjusts the receiver carrier point for the Main
                                                                                          A) and Sub (VFO-B) receivers
band’s (VFO-A) LSB mode.
                                                                                          is combined and heard equally
Available Values: –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz steps)
                                                                                          in both ears.
Default Setting: 0 Hz
085 J3E USB CAR
Function: Adjusts the receiver carrier point for Main
band’s (VFO-A) USB mode.
Available Values: –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 0 Hz
086 J3E SLSB CR
Function: Adjusts the receiver carrier point for the Sub
band’s (VFO-B) LSB mode.
Available Values: –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 0 Hz
087 J3E SUSB CR
Function: Adjusts the receiver carrier point for Sub band’s
(VFO-B) USB mode.
Available Values: –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 0 Hz

Page 124                                                                      FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
                                                RX DSP GROUP
090 rdSP CNTR LV                                            096 rdSP PKT SHP
Function: Adjusts the parametric equalizer gain of the      Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP
Contour filter.                                             filter for the PKT mode.
Available Values: –40 ~ +20 dB                              Available Values: SOFt/ShAP
Default Setting: –15 dB                                     Default Setting: ShAP
                                                                 SOFt (SOFT): Primary importance is attached to the
091 rdSP CNTR WI
                                                                                 amplitude of the filter factor.
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the Contour filter.
                                                                 ShAP (SHARP): Primary importance is attached to the
Available Values: 1 - 11
                                                                                 phase of the filter factor.
Default Setting: 10
                        “Q”                                 097 rdSP PKT SLP
                                                            Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for
                                   “+” Gain
                                                            the PKT mode.
                                   “-- ” Gain
                                                            Available Values: StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/
                                                            GEnt(GENTLE)
                                                            Default Setting: nEd (MEDIUM)
                                                            098 rdSP PKT NAR
                                                            Function: Selects the passband of the DSP filter for the
                        IF                                  PKT “Narrow” mode.
                    BANDWIDTH
                                                            Available Values: 25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz
             CONTOUR “GAIN” AND “Q”                         Default Setting: 300 Hz
                                                            099 rdSP RTY SHP
092 rdSP NOTCH W                                            Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP
Function: Selects the bandwidth of the DSP NOTCH fil-       filter for the RTTY mode.
ter                                                         Available Values: SOFt/ShAP
Available Values: nArr (Narrow)/uuid (Wide)                 Default Setting: ShAP
Default Setting: uuid (Wide)                                     SOFt (SOFT): Primary importance is attached to the
093 rdSP CW SHAP                                                                amplitude of the filter factor.
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP        ShAP (SHARP): Primary importance is attached to the
filter for the CW mode.                                                         phase of the filter factor.
Available Values: SOFt/ShAP                                 100 rdSP RTY SLP
Default Setting: ShAP                                       Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for
     SOFt (SOFT): Primary importance is attached to the     the RTTY mode.
                    amplitude of the filter factor.         Available Values: StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/
     ShAP (SHARP): Primary importance is attached to the    GEnt(GENTLE)
                    phase of the filter factor.             Default Setting: nEd (MEDIUM)
094 rdSP CW SLP                                             101 rdSP RTY NAR
Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for    Function: Selects the passband of the DSP filter for the
the CW mode.                                                RTTY “Narrow” mode.
Available Values: StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/                   Available Values: 25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz
GEnt(GENTLE)                                                Default Setting: 300 Hz
Default Setting: nEd (MEDIUM)
095 rdSP CW NARR
Function: Selects the passband of the DSP filter for the
CW “Narrow” mode.
Available Values: 25/50/100/200/300/400/500/800/1200/
1400/1700/2000 Hz
Default Setting: 500 Hz




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                              Page 125
MENU MODE
              RX DSP GROUP                                                 SCOPE GROUP
                                                            ADVICE:
102 rdSP SSB SHP
                                                            This group’s adjustment has no effect, if the optional
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP
                                                            DMU-2000 Data Management Unit is not connected.
filter for the SSB modes (LSB and USB).
Available Values: SOFt/ShAP                                 105 SCP 1.8 FI
Default Setting: ShAP                                       Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
     SOFt (SOFT): Primary importance is attached to the     Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 160 m amateur
                     amplitude of the filter factor.        band.
     ShAP (SHARP): Primary importance is attached to the    Available Values: 1.800 - 1.999 MHz (1 kHz/step)
                     phase of the filter factor.            Default Setting: 1.800 MHz
103 rdSP SSB SLP                                            106 SCP 3.5 FI
Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for    Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
the SSB modes (LSB and USB).                                Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 80 m amateur
Available Values: StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/                   band.
GEnt(GENTLE)                                                Available Values: 3.500 - 3.999 MHz (1 kHz/step)
Default Setting: nEd (MEDIUM)                               Default Setting: 3.500 MHz
104 rdSP SSB NAR                                            107 SCP 5.0 FI
Function: Selects the passband of the DSP filter for the    Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
“Narrow” SSB mode.                                          Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 60 m amateur
Available Values: 200/400/600/850/1100/1350/1500/           band.
1650/1800/1950/2100/2250 Hz                                 Available Values: 5.250 - 5.499 MHz (1 kHz/step)
Default Setting: 1800 Hz                                    Default Setting: 5.250 MHz
                                                            108 SCP 7.0 FI
                                                            Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
                                                            Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 40 m amateur
                                                            band.
                                                            Available Values: 7.000 - 7.299 MHz (1 kHz/step)
                                                            Default Setting: 7.000 MHz

                         STEEP                              109 SCP 10.1 FI
                        MEDIUM                              Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
                        GENTLE                              Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 30 m amateur
                DSP FILTER PASSBAND                         band.
                                                            Available Values: (1)0.100 - (1)0.149 MHz (1 kHz steps)
                                                            Default Setting: (1)0.100 MHz
              SHARP                SOFT




                  DSP FILTER SHAPE




Page 126                                                                  FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
               SCOPE GROUP                                                 TUNING GROUP
110 SCP 14.0 FI                                              116 tun DIALSTEP
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode   Function: Setting of the Main Tuning Dial knob’s tuning
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 20 m amateur          speed on the SSB, CW, and AM modes.
band.                                                        Available Values: 1 or 10 Hz
Available Values: (1)4.000 - (1)4.349 MHz (1 kHz/step)       Default Setting: 10 Hz
Default Setting: (1)4.000 MHz
                                                             117 tun CW FINE
111 SCP 18.0 FI                                              Function: Enabling/disabling of the “Fine” tuning speed
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode   in the CW mode.
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 17 m amateur          Available Values: EnA (ENABLE) / diS (DISABLE)
band.                                                        Default Setting: diS (DISABLE)
Available Values: (1)8.000 - (1)8.199 MHz (1 kHz/step)           EnA (ENABLE): Tuning in 1 Hz steps on the CW
Default Setting: (1)8.068 MHz                                                     mode.
                                                                 diS (DISABLE): Tuning according to the steps deter-
112 SCP 21.0 FI
                                                                                  mined via menu item “116 tun
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
                                                                                  DIALSTEP.”
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 15 m amateur
band.                                                        118 tun MHz SEL
Available Values: (2)1.000 - (2)1.449 MHz (1 kHz/step)       Function: Selects the tuning steps for the [SUB VFO-B]
Default Setting: (2)1.000 MHz                                knob when the [MHz] button is pressed.
                                                             Available Values: 1/0.1 MHz
113 SCP 24.8 FI
                                                             Default Setting: 1 MHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 12 m amateur          119 tun AM STEP
band.                                                        Function: Selects the tuning steps for the microphone’s
Available Values: (2)4.800 - (2)4.989 MHz (1 kHz/step)       [UP]/[DWN] keys in the AM mode.
Default Setting: (2)4.890 MHz                                Available Values: 2.5/5/9/10/12.5 kHz
                                                             Default Setting: 5 kHz
114 SCP 28.0 FI
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode   120 tun FM STEP
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 10 m amateur          Function: Selects the tuning steps for the microphone’s
band.                                                        [UP]/[DWN] keys in the FM mode.
Available Values: (2)8.000 - (2)9.699 MHz (1 kHz/step)       Available Values: 5/6.25/10/12.5/25 kHz
Default Setting: (2)8.000 MHz                                Default Setting: 5 kHz
115 SCP 50.0 FI                                              121 tun FM DIAL
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode   Function: Setting of the Main Tuning Dial knob’s tuning
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 6 m amateur band.     speed in the FM mode.
Available Values: (5)0.000 - (5)3.999 MHz (1 kHz/step)       Available Values: 10/100 Hz per step
Default Setting: (5)0.000 MHz                                Default Setting: 100 Hz per step
                                                             122 tun MY BAND
                                                             Function: Programs a band to be skipped while selecting
                                                             bands using the [SUB VFO-B] knob.
                                                             Available Values: 1.8 ~ 50/GE/AU
                                                             Default Setting: ---
                                                             To program the band to be skipped, rotate the [SUB VFO-
                                                             B] knob to recall the band to be skipped while selecting
                                                             bands via the [SUB VFO-B] knob, then press the [ENT]
                                                             button to change this setting to “ON” (a “d” notation will
                                                             replace the “E” notation). Repeat the same procedures to
                                                             cancel the setting (skipped “Off”: “d” notation appears).




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                Page 127
MENU MODE
                                             TX AUDIO GROUP
123 tAUd EQ1 FRQ                                             129 tUAd EQ3 FRQ
Function: Selects the center frequency of the lower range    Function: Selects the center frequency of the high range
for the parametric microphone equalizer.                     for the parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: OFF/100 ~ 700 Hz (100 Hz/step)             Available Values: OFF/1500 ~ 3200 Hz (100 Hz/step)
Default Setting: OFF                                         Default Setting: OFF
    OFF:       The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set to        OFF:           The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set
               factory defaults (flat).                                         to factory defaults (flat).
    100 ~ 700: Center frequencies of 100 Hz ~ 700 Hz.            1500 ~ 3200: Center frequencies of 1500 Hz ~ 3200 Hz.
               You may adjust the equalizer gain and Q-                         You may adjust the equalizer gain and
               factor at this selected audio frequency via                      Q-factor in this selected audio fre-
               menu items “124 tAUd EQ1 LVL” and                                quency via menu items “130 tUAd EQ3
               “125 tAUd EQ1 BW.”                                               LVL” and “131 tUAd EQ3 BW.”
124 tAUd EQ1 LVL                                             130 tUAd EQ3 LVL
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the low range of     Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the high range of
the parametric microphone equalizer.                         the parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: –10 ~ +10                                  Available Values: –10 ~ +10
Default Setting: +5                                          Default Setting: +5
125 tAUd EQ1 BW                                              131 tUAd EQ3 BW
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the low range of the       Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the high range of the
parametric microphone equalizer.                             parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: 1 ~ 10                                     Available Values: 1 ~ 10
Default Setting: 10                                          Default Setting: 10
126 tAUd EQ2 FRQ                                             132 tAUd PE1 FRQ
Function: Selects the center frequency of the middle range   Function: Selects the center frequency of the lower range
for the parametric microphone equalizer.                     for the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech
Available Values: OFF/700 ~ 1500 Hz (100 Hz/step)            processor is activated.
Default Setting: OFF                                         Available Values: OFF/100 ~ 700 Hz (100 Hz/step)
    OFF:         The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set     Default Setting: 200 Hz
                 to factory defaults (flat).                     OFF:        The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set to
    700 ~ 1500: Center frequencies of 700 Hz ~ 1500 Hz.                      factory defaults (flat).
                 You may adjust the equalizer gain and           100 ~ 700: Center frequencies of 100 Hz ~ 700 Hz.
                 Q-factor at this selected audio frequency                   You may adjust the equalizer gain and Q-
                 via menu items “127 tAUd EQ2 LVL”                           factor at this selected audio frequency via
                 and “128 EQ2 BW.”                                           menu items “133 tAUd PE1 LVL” and
                                                                             “134 tAUd PE1 BW.”
127 tAUd EQ2 LVL
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the middle range     133 tAUd PE1 LVL
of the parametric microphone equalizer.                      Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the low range of
Available Values: –10 ~ +10                                  the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech pro-
Default Setting: +5                                          cessor is activated.
                                                             Available Values: –10 ~ +10
128 tAUd EQ2 BW
                                                             Default Setting: –10
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the middle range of the
parametric microphone equalizer.                             134 tAUd PE1 BW
Available Values: 1 ~ 10                                     Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the low range of the
Default Setting: 10                                          parametric microphone equalizer when the speech proces-
                                                             sor is activated.
                                                             Available Values: 1 ~ 10
                                                             Default Setting: 2




Page 128                                                                   FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
             TX AUDIO GROUP                                                TX GNRL GROUP
135 tAUd PE2 FRQ                                              141 tGEn BIAS
Function: Selects the center frequency of the middle range    Function: Selects the Final Amplifier’s operation between
for the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech       the “Class-A” and “Class-AB” mode, and adjusts the Bias
processor is activated.                                       level while in “Class-A” operation.
Available Values: OFF/700 ~ 1500 Hz (100 Hz/step)             Available Values: Ab “Class-AB”/0 ~ 100 “Class-A”
Default Setting: 800 Hz                                       Default Setting: Ab
    OFF:          The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set
                                                              142 tGEn MAX PWR
                  to factory defaults (flat).
                                                              Function: Selects a maximum output power limit.
    700 ~ 1500: Center frequencies of 700 Hz ~ 1500 Hz.
                                                              Available Values: 20/50/100/200 W
                  You may adjust the equalizer gain and
                                                              Default Setting: 200 W
                  Q-factor at this selected audio frequency
                  via menu items “136 tAUd PE2 LVL”           143 tGEn PWRCTRL
                  and “137 PE2 BW.”                           Function: Configures the [RF PWR] knob.
                                                              Available Values: ALL/CAr
136 tAUd PE2 LVL
                                                              Default Setting: ALL
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the middle range
                                                                 ALL:The [RF PWR] knob is enabled on all modes.
of the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech
                                                                 CAr: The [RF PWR] knob is enabled in all modes
processor is activated.
                                                                       except SSB. In this configuration, the SSB out-
Available Values: –10 ~ +10
                                                                       put power will be set to maximum, regardless
Default Setting: –3
                                                                       of the [RF PWR] knob’s position.
137 tAUd PE2 BW
                                                              144 tGEn ETX-GND
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the middle range of the
                                                              Function: Enables/Disables the TX GND jack on the rear
parametric microphone equalizer when the speech proces-
                                                              panel.
sor is activated.
                                                              Available Values: EnA(ENABLE)/diS(DISABLE)
Available Values: 1 ~ 10
                                                              Default Setting: diS(DISABLE)
Default Setting: 1
                                                              145 tGEn TUN PWR
138 tUAd PE3 FRQ
                                                              Function: Selects a maximum output power limit for driv-
Function: Selects the center frequency of the high range
                                                              ing the input circuit of an external linear RF amplifier
for the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech
                                                              while tuning (while using the Remote Control function
processor is activated.
                                                              of the linear RF amplifier).
Available Values: OFF/1500 ~ 3200 Hz (100 Hz/step)
                                                              Available Values: 20/50/100/200 W
Default Setting: 2100 Hz
                                                              Default Setting: 100 W
    OFF:           The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set
                   to factory defaults (flat).                146 tGEn VOX SEL
    1500 ~ 3200: Center frequencies of 1500 Hz ~ 3200 Hz.     Function: Selects the audio input source for triggering
                   You may adjust the equalizer gain and      TX during VOX operation.
                   Q-factor in this selected audio fre-       Available Values: nic/dAtA
                   quency via menu items “139 tUAd PE3        Default Setting: nic
                   LVL” and “140 tUAd PE3 BW.”                   nic(MIC):       The VOX function will be activated
                                                                                 by microphone audio input.
139 tUAd PE3 LVL
                                                                 dAtA(DATA): The VOX function will be activated
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the high range of
                                                                                 by data audio input.
the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech pro-
cessor is activated.
Available Values: –10 ~ +10
Default Setting: +6
140 tUAd PE3 BW
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the high range of the
parametric microphone equalizer when the speech proces-
sor is activated.
Available Values: 1 ~ 10
Default Setting: 1




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                                Page 129
MENU MODE
                                               TX GNRL GROUP
147 tGEn EMRGNCY
Function: Enables Tx/Rx operation on the Alaska Emer-
gency Channel, 5167.5 kHz.
Available Values: EnA(ENABLE)/diS(DISABLE)
Default Setting: diS(DISABLE)
When this Menu Item is set to “EnA(ENABLE),” the spot
frequency of 5167.5 kHz will be enabled. The Alaska
Emergency Channel will be found between the Memory
channels “P-1” and “01 (or 1-01).”
IMPORTANT:
The use of this frequency is restricted to stations operat-
ing in or near Alaska, and only for emergency purposes
(never for routine operations). See §97.401(c) of the FCC’s
regulations for details.




Page 130                                                       FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
                            NOTE




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL               Page 131
SPECIFICATIONS
General
Rx Frequency Range:               30 kHz - 60 MHz (operating)
                                  160 - 6 m (specified performance, Amateur bands only)
Tx Frequency Ranges:              160 - 6 m (Amateur bands only)
Frequency Stability:              ±0.5 ppm (after 1 minute @+77 °F [+25 °C])
                                  ±1.0 ppm (after 1 minute @+14 °F ~ +122 °F [–10 °C ~ +50 °C])
Operating Temperature Range:      14 °F ~ +122 °F (–10 °C ~ +50 °C)
Emission Modes:                   A1A (CW), A3E (AM), J3E (LSB, USB), F3E (FM),
                                  F1B (RTTY), F1D (PACKET), F2D (PACKET)
Frequency Steps:                  1/10 Hz (SSB,CW, & AM), 100 Hz (FM)
Antenna Impedance:                50 Ohms, unbalanced
                                  16.7 - 150 Ohms, unbalanced (Tuner ON, 160 - 10 m Amateur bands)
                                  25 - 100 Ohms, unbalanced (Tuner ON, 6 m Amateur band)
Power Consumption:                Rx (no signal)        70 VA
                                  Rx (signal present) 80 VA
                                  Tx (200 W)           720 VA
Supply Voltage:                   AC: 90 VAC - 132 VAC or 180 VAC- 264 VAC
Dimensions (WxHxD):               16.1” x 5.3” x 13.8” (410 x 135 x 350 mm)
Weight (approx.):                 34.1 lbs (15.5 kg)

Transmitter
Power Output:                     10 - 200 watts
                                  10 - 75 watts (Class-A, SSB)
                                  5 - 50 watts (AM carrier)
Modulation Types:                 J3E (SSB): Balanced,
                                  A3E (AM): Low-Level (Early Stage),
                                  F3E (FM): Variable Reactance
Maximum FM Deviation:             ±5.0 kHz/±2.5 kHz
Harmonic Radiation:               Better than –60 dB
SSB Carrier Suppression:          At least 60 dB below peak output
Undesired Sideband Suppression:   At least 60 dB below peak output
Audio Response (SSB):             Not more than –6 dB from 300 to 2700 Hz
3rd-order IMD:                    –31 dB @14 MHz, 200 watts PEP
                                  –45 dB @14 MHz, 75 watts Class-A
Microphone Impedance:             600 Ohms (200 to 10 kOhms)




FP-2000 Power Supply
Input Voltage:                          90 VAC - 264 VAC, 50/60 Hz (Universal)
Output Voltage:                         50 VDC , 13.8 VDC
Maximum Power Consumption (approx.):    720 VA
Maximum Output Current:                 50 V: 12 A, 13.8 V: 6 A
Case Size (WxHxD):                      3.9” x 5.3” x 13.8” (100 x 135 x 350 mm)
Weight (approx.):                       7.9 lb (3.6 kg)




Page 132                                                          FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Receiver
Circuit Type:                            Main (VFO-A); Triple-conversion superheterodyne
                                         Sub (VFO-B); Double-conversion superheterodyne
Intermediate Frequencies:                Main (VFO-A); 69.450 MHz/450 kHz/30 kHz (24 kHz for AM/FM),
                                         Sub (VFO-B); 40.455 MHz/455 kHz
Sensitivity (RF AMP 2 “ON”):             SSB (2.4 kHz, 10 dB S+N/N)
                                                2 µV (0.1 - 1.8 MHz)
                                                0.2 µV (1.8 - 30 MHz)
                                                0.125 µV (50 - 54 MHz)
                                         AM (6 kHz, 10 dB S+N/N, 30 % modulation @400 Hz)
                                                6 µV (0.1 - 1.8 MHz)
                                                2 µV (1.8 - 30 MHz)
                                                1 µV (50 - 54 MHz)
                                         FM (BW: 15 kHz, 12 dB SINAD)
                                                0.5 µV (28 - 30 MHz)
                                                0.35 µV (50 - 54 MHz)
                                         There is no specification in frequency ranges not listed.
Squelch Sensitivity:                     SSB/CW/AM
(RF AMP 2 “ON”)                                 2 µV (0.1 - 30 MHz)
                                                2 µV (50 - 54 MHz)
                                         FM
                                                1 µV (28 - 30 MHz)
                                                1 µV (50 - 54 MHz)
                                         There is no specification in frequency ranges not listed.
Selectivity (–6/–60 dB):                 Main (VFO-A)
                                                Mode                   –6 dB                –60 dB
                                                CW/RTTY/PKT            0.5 kHz or better    750 Hz or less
                                                SSB                    2.4 kHz or better    3.6 kHz or less
                                                AM                     6 kHz or better      15 kHz or less
                                                FM                     15 kHz or better     25 kHz or less
                                                (WIDTH: Center, VRF: OFF)
                                         Sub (VFO-B)
                                                Mode                   –6 dB                –60 dB
                                                CW/RTTY/PKT            1.1 kHz or better    3.0 kHz or less
                                                SSB                    2.2 kHz or better    4.5 kHz or less
                                                AM                     6 kHz or better      25 kHz or less
                                                FM                     12 kHz or better     30 kHz or less
Image Rejection:                         70 dB or better (160 - 10m Amateur bands)
                                         60 dB or better (6m Amateur band)
Maximum Audio Output:                    2.5 W into 4 Ohms with 10% THD
Audio Output Impedance:                  4 to 8 Ohms (4 Ohms: nominal)
Conducted Radiation:                     Less than 4000 µµW

Specifications are subject to change, in the interest of technical improvement, without notice or obligation, and are
guaranteed only within the amateur bands.




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL                                                                              Page 133
INSTALLATION OF THE OPTIONAL FILTER (YF-122C OR YF-122CN)
1. Turn the FT-2000D’s [POWER] switch “off,” then
    turn the FP-2000’s [POWER] switch “off.”
2. Unplug the AC cable from the AC jack on the FP-
    2000 rear panel.
3. Disconnect the all of the cables from the transceiver.
4. Referring to Figure 1, remove the three screws from
    each side of the transceiver, and three screws from the
    top edge of the rear panel. Slide the top cover toward
    to the rear about 1/2 inch (1 cm), then remove the top
    cover.
5. Refer to Figure 2 for the mounting location for the
    optional filter. Position the filter so that its connectors
    are aligned with the mounting pins on the board, and
    push it into place.
6. Replace the top cover and its nine screws.
7. Filter installation is now complete. Now you must en-
    able the newly-installed filter, using the Menu.
8. Connect the two DC cables to the FT-2000D rear panel,               FIGURE 1
    and then connect the AC cable to the AC jack on the
    FP-2000 rear panel.                                                              Optional Filter
9. Turn the FP-2000’s [POWER] switch “on,” then turn
    the FT-2000D’s [POWER] switch “on.”
10. Press the [MENU] button momentarily to engage the                                  RX-2 UNIT
    Menu mode.
11. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the Menu
    item “037 GEnE SUB FIL.”                                                      RX-2 UNIT
12. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to choose the selec-
    tion appropriate for the filter you have just installed
    (“300” for YF-122CN, “500” for YF-122C).
13. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds                FIGURE 2
    to save the new setting and exit to normal operation.




Page 134                                                          FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
NOTE




FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL   Page 135
NOTE




Page 136   FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
   -- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
   -- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
   -- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
      receiver is connected.
   -- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.


1. Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by VERTEX
   STANDARD could void the user’s authorization to operate this device.
2. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
   following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
   this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause
   undesired operation.
3. The scanning receiver in this equipment is incapable of tuning, or readily being
   altered, by the User to operate within the frequency bands allocated to the Domestic
   public Cellular Telecommunications Service in Part 22.

                        DECLARATION BY MANUFACTURER
The scanner receiver is not a digital scanner and is incapable of being converted or
modified a digital scanner receiver by any user.


WARNING: MODIFICATION OF THIS DEVICE TO RECEIVE CELLULAR
RADIOTELEPHONE SERVICE SIGNALS IS PROHIBITED UNDER FCC RULES AND
FEDERAL LAW.
Copyright 2006                              Printed in Japan
VERTEX STANDARD CO., LTD.
                                                 0612X-0Y
All rights reserved
No portion of this manual
may be reproduced without
the permission of
VERTEX STANDARD CO., LTD.   E   H   0   2    5   H   1   4   0

More Related Content

PDF
A complete guide for pcb 2.4G antenna design
PPTX
Bios, cmos and post
PDF
Manuel diagbox
PPTX
Motherboard
PPTX
BIOS basic input output system
PPSX
Impresoras....!
PDF
Icom 2200 h service manual
PDF
Kenwood Catalogue
A complete guide for pcb 2.4G antenna design
Bios, cmos and post
Manuel diagbox
Motherboard
BIOS basic input output system
Impresoras....!
Icom 2200 h service manual
Kenwood Catalogue

Similar to Ft 2000d Operating Manual (20)

PDF
Innovator cx brochure
PDF
Subway PA system catalog
PPT
synathesized function generator
PPT
PDF
Ft 50 manual
PDF
21801512503546139detAgrt45657thtytyr.pdf
PDF
American Fibertek RR-86-2F13-S Data Sheet
PDF
Datavideo ITC-100
PDF
Adf7021 00004
PPT
RF to IF Mixers by IDT: Low-power Downconversion Mixers with Zero-Distortion
DOCX
Multimedia equipments - Adgeco Group, UAE
PDF
Cad100200 2007 05-18-pc_2003-06-20
PDF
ComNet FVT4014M1 Data Sheet
PDF
Krypto1000
PDF
Krypto1000
PDF
Wellgate 26xx Series VoIP Gateway
PDF
Cfs0065 ccat-r1-4 part7
Innovator cx brochure
Subway PA system catalog
synathesized function generator
Ft 50 manual
21801512503546139detAgrt45657thtytyr.pdf
American Fibertek RR-86-2F13-S Data Sheet
Datavideo ITC-100
Adf7021 00004
RF to IF Mixers by IDT: Low-power Downconversion Mixers with Zero-Distortion
Multimedia equipments - Adgeco Group, UAE
Cad100200 2007 05-18-pc_2003-06-20
ComNet FVT4014M1 Data Sheet
Krypto1000
Krypto1000
Wellgate 26xx Series VoIP Gateway
Cfs0065 ccat-r1-4 part7
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
Dropbox Q2 2025 Financial Results & Investor Presentation
PDF
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25-Week II
PDF
MIND Revenue Release Quarter 2 2025 Press Release
PPTX
Tartificialntelligence_presentation.pptx
PDF
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
PDF
Encapsulation_ Review paper, used for researhc scholars
PDF
Optimiser vos workloads AI/ML sur Amazon EC2 et AWS Graviton
PDF
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
PPTX
Machine Learning_overview_presentation.pptx
PDF
Diabetes mellitus diagnosis method based random forest with bat algorithm
PDF
Getting Started with Data Integration: FME Form 101
PDF
Encapsulation theory and applications.pdf
PDF
Building Integrated photovoltaic BIPV_UPV.pdf
PPTX
Programs and apps: productivity, graphics, security and other tools
PPTX
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
PDF
Mobile App Security Testing_ A Comprehensive Guide.pdf
PPTX
SOPHOS-XG Firewall Administrator PPT.pptx
PPTX
Group 1 Presentation -Planning and Decision Making .pptx
PDF
7 ChatGPT Prompts to Help You Define Your Ideal Customer Profile.pdf
PDF
gpt5_lecture_notes_comprehensive_20250812015547.pdf
Dropbox Q2 2025 Financial Results & Investor Presentation
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25-Week II
MIND Revenue Release Quarter 2 2025 Press Release
Tartificialntelligence_presentation.pptx
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
Encapsulation_ Review paper, used for researhc scholars
Optimiser vos workloads AI/ML sur Amazon EC2 et AWS Graviton
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
Machine Learning_overview_presentation.pptx
Diabetes mellitus diagnosis method based random forest with bat algorithm
Getting Started with Data Integration: FME Form 101
Encapsulation theory and applications.pdf
Building Integrated photovoltaic BIPV_UPV.pdf
Programs and apps: productivity, graphics, security and other tools
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
Mobile App Security Testing_ A Comprehensive Guide.pdf
SOPHOS-XG Firewall Administrator PPT.pptx
Group 1 Presentation -Planning and Decision Making .pptx
7 ChatGPT Prompts to Help You Define Your Ideal Customer Profile.pdf
gpt5_lecture_notes_comprehensive_20250812015547.pdf
Ad

Ft 2000d Operating Manual

  • 1. HF/50 MHZ TRANSCEIVER FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL VERTEX STANDARD CO., LTD. 4-8-8 Nakameguro, Meguro-Ku, Tokyo 153-8644, Japan VERTEX STANDARD US Headquarters 10900 Walker Street, Cypress, CA 90630, U.S.A. YAESU EUROPE B.V. P.O. Box 75525, 1118 ZN Schiphol, The Netherlands YAESU UK LTD. Unit 12, Sun Valley Business Park, Winnall Close Winchester, Hampshire, SO23 0LB, U.K. VERTEX STANDARD HK LTD. Unit 5, 20/F., Seaview Centre, 139-141 Hoi Bun Road, Kwun Tong, Kowloon, Hong Kong VERTEX STANDARD (AUSTRALIA) PTY., LTD. Normanby Business Park, Unit 14/45 Normanby Road Notting Hill 3168, Victoria, Australia
  • 2. ABOUT THIS MANUAL . . . The FT-2000D is a leading-edge transceiver with a number of new and exciting features, some of which may be unfamiliar to you. In order to gain the most enjoyment and operating efficiency from your FT-2000D, we recommend that you read this manual in its entirety, and keep it handy for reference as you explore the many capabilities of your new transceiver. Before using your FT-2000D, be sure to read and follow the instructions in the “Before You Begin” section of this manual.
  • 3. GENERAL DESCRIPTION Congratulations on the purchase of your Yaesu amateur trans- Advanced features include Direct Keyboard Frequency En- ceiver! Whether this is your first rig, or if Yaesu equipment is try and Band Change, Speech Processor, IF Monitor for Voice already the backbone of your station, rest assured that your modes, CW Pitch control, CW Spot switch, Full CW QSK, transceiver will provide many hours of operating pleasure adjustable IF Noise Blanker, and all-mode Squelch. Two TX/ for years to come. RX antenna ports, plus a receive-only antenna port, are pro- vided on the rear panel. Two key jacks are provided (one The FT-2000D is an elite-class HF transceiver providing ex- each on the front and rear panels), and they may be config- ceptional performance both on transmit and receive. The FT- ured independently for paddle input or connection to a straight 2000D is designed for the most competitive operating situa- key or computer-driven keying interface. Both Digital Voice tions, whether you primarily operate in contest, DX, or digi- Recording and CW Message Memory are provided. tal-mode environments. Frequency setup is extraordinarily simple on the FT-2000D. Built on the foundation of the popular FTDX9000 transceiver, Besides direct frequency entry for both the Main and Sub and carrying the proud tradition of the FT-1000 series, the VFOs, separate keys are provided for band selection, and FT-2000D provides up to 200 Watts of power output on SSB, each band key accesses three independent VFO frequency/ CW, and FM (50 Watts AM carrier). Digital Signal Process- mode/filter settings per band, so you can establish separate ing (DSP) is utilized throughout the design, providing lead- VFO settings for three different parts of each band. The two ing-edge performance on both transmit and receive. (Main and Sub) VFOs allow simultaneous reception and dis- Available as an option for the FT-2000D is the Data Man- play of two different frequencies, even in different modes agement Unit (DMU-2000), which provides extensive dis- and with different IF bandwidths. Receiver audio can be com- play capabilities via a user-supplied computer monitor. In- pletely or partially mixed, or monitored separately in each cluded are Band Scope, Audio Scope, X-Y Oscilloscope, ear. World Clock, Rotator Control, and extensive transceiver sta- In addition, 99 memories are provided, each of which stores tus displays, in addition to station logging capability. its own mode and IF filter selection, in addition to frequency, For exceptional protection from strong nearby incoming sig- Clarifier offset, and scan-skip status. What's more, five quick- nals, the Yaesu-exclusive VRF (Variable RF Front-End Fil- recall (“QMB”) memories can instantly store operational set- ter) serves as a high-performance Preselector-ideal for multi- tings at the push of a button. operator contest environments. This filter is manually tuned, The built-in automatic antenna tuner includes 100 memories allowing the operator to optimize sensitivity or signal rejec- of its own, automatically storing antenna matching settings tion with the twist of a knob. And for then ultimate in re- for quick automatic recall later. ceiver RF selectivity, the optional RF µTuning Kits may be connected via the rear panel, providing extraordinarily sharp Interfacing for digital modes is extremely simple with the selectivity to protect your receiver from close-in interference FT-2000D, thanks to dedicated AFSK and FSK connection on a crowded band. jacks on the rear panel. Optimization of the filter passbands, DSP settings, carrier insertion point, and display offset are In addition to the contribution of the VRF Preselector, su- all possible via the Menu programming system. perb receiver performance is a result of direct lineage from the legendary FTDX9000, FT-1000D, and FT-1000MP. You The Yaesu CAT system provides a direct link to the trans- may select, in the front end, one of two RF preamplifiers, or ceiver CPU for computer control and customization of tun- IPO (Intercept Point Optimization) utilizing direct feed to ing, scanning, and other operating functions. The FT-2000D the first mixer, and/or three levels of RF attenuation in 6-dB includes a built-in data level converter for direct connection steps. to a personal computer serial port. Yaesu products are sup- ported by most of the leading contest and DX logging pro- Dual Receive is built into every FT-2000D. The Main re- grams. The extensive programming protocol is described in ceiver utilizes DSP filtering, incorporating many of the fea- the CAT System Manual, supplied with this transceiver, if tures of the FTDX9000, such as Variable Bandwidth, IF Shift, you wish to write your own software! and Passband Contour tuning. Digital Noise Reduction and Digital Auto-Notch Filtering are also provided, along with a Advanced technology is only part of the FT-2000D story. manually-tuned IF Notch filter. The Sub receiver, used for Vertex Standard stands behind our products with a world- monitoring within the same band as the Main band, is an wide network of dealers and service centers. We greatly ap- analog type ideal for watching both sides of a pile-up, or preciate your investment in the FT-2000D, and we look for- keeping an ear on a DX station working stations by call area, ward to helping you get the most out of your new transceiver. etc. Please feel free to contact your nearest dealer, or one of Ver- tex Standard's national headquarters offices, for technical ad- On the transmit side, the Yaesu-exclusive Three-Band Para- vice, interfacing assistance, or accessory recommendation. metric Microphone Equalizer allows precise and flexible ad- And watch Vertex Standard U.S.A.’s Home Page for late- justment of the wave-form created by your voice and micro- breaking information about Vertex, Standard Horizon, and phone. The Amplitude, Center Frequency, and Bandwidth of Yaesu products: http://www.vertexstandard.com. equalization may be adjusted independently for the low-fre- quency, mid-range, and high-audio-frequency spectra, and Please read this manual thoroughly to gain maximum under- the transmitted bandwidth may also be adjusted, as well. standing of the full capability of the FT-2000D. We thank you again for your purchase! FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 1
  • 4. TABLE OF CONTENTS General Description ..................................................... 1 Advanced Interference-Suppression Features: Accessories & Options ................................................. 4 RF Front End ............................................................. 53 Supplied Accessories ............................................... 4 Using the VRF (Variable RF Front-end Filter) ...... 53 Available Options ..................................................... 4 Interference Rejection Before You Begin ......................................................... 6 (Signals Off Frequency by Just a Few kHz) ............ 54 Extending the Front Feet .......................................... 6 R.FLT (Roofing Filters) ......................................... 54 Adjusting the Main Tuning Dial Torque .................. 6 Interference Rejection (Signals within 3 kHz) ........ 55 Resetting the Microprocessor .................................. 7 CONTOUR Control Operation .............................. 55 Resetting Memories (Only) ................................ 7 IF SHIFT Operation ............................................... 56 Menu Resetting ................................................... 7 WIDTH (IF DSP Bandwidth) Tuning .................... 57 Full Reset ............................................................ 7 Using IF Shift and Width Together ................... 57 Installation and Interconnections ............................... 8 IF Notch Filter Operation ....................................... 58 Antenna Considerations ........................................... 8 Digital Noise Reduction (DNR) Operation ............ 59 About Coaxial Cable ................................................ 8 Digital Notch Filter (DNF) Operation ................... 59 Grounding ................................................................ 9 NARROW (NAR) One-Touch IF Filter Selection . 60 Connection of Antenna and IF Noise Blanker (NB) Operation .......................... 61 FP-2000 Power Supply .......................................... 10 Tools for Comfortable and Effective Reception ...... 62 Connection of Microphone and Headphone .......... 11 AGC (Automatic Gain Control) ............................. 62 Key, Keyer, and Computer-Driven Keying SLOPED AGC Operation ................................. 63 Interconnections ..................................................... 12 Mute Feature (Main (VFO-A) Band) ..................... 63 VL-1000 Linear Amplifier Interconnections .......... 13 SSB/AM Mode Transmission .................................... 64 Interfacing to Other Linear Amplifiers ................... 14 Using the Automatic Antenna Tuner ........................ 66 Plug/Connector Pinout Diagrams ............................ 15 ATU Operation ....................................................... 66 Front Panel Controls & Switches ............................. 16 About ATU Operation ...................................... 67 Display Indications .................................................... 28 Lithium Battery Replacement ................................ 68 Rear Panel .................................................................. 31 Enhancing Transmit Signal Quality ......................... 69 FP-2000 Switches & Jacks ........................................ 34 Adjusting the SSB Transmitted Bandwidth ........... 69 Basic Operation: Receiving on Amateur Bands ...... 35 Parametric Microphone Equalizer ......................... 70 Operation on 60-Meter (5 MHz) Band Using the Speech Processor ................................... 72 (U.S. version only) ................................................. 38 Low- Distortion CLASS-A Operation .................... 74 CLAR (Clarifier) Operation on Main (VFO-A) ..... 39 Transmitter Convenience Features .......................... 76 LOCK ..................................................................... 40 Voice Memory ........................................................ 76 DIM ........................................................................ 40 Voice Memory Operation from Convenience Features ................................................ 42 the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad ..... 77 Dual Receive .......................................................... 42 VOX (Automatic TX/RX Switching using Voice Control) ............. 78 Using Headphones for Dual Receive ............... 43 MONITOR ............................................................. 78 Sideband Diversity Reception .......................... 43 Split Operation Using the TX Clarifier .................. 79 Bandwidth Diversity Reception ....................... 44 Split-Frequency Operation ..................................... 80 P.BACK (Audio Playback) from VFO Tracking Feature ...................................... 80 Main (VFO-A) Receiver ........................................ 45 Quick Split Operation ....................................... 81 P.BACK feature from CW Mode Operation ................................................. 82 the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad ..... 45 Setup for Straight Key “MY Bands” Operation .......................................... 46 (and Straight Key emulation) Operation ................ 82 Band Stack Operation ............................................ 47 Using the Built-in Electronic Keyer ....................... 83 C.S (Custom Switch) .............................................. 47 Full Break-in (QSK) Operation ........................ 83 Rotator Control Functions ...................................... 48 Setting the Keyer Weight More Frequency Navigation Techniques ............... 49 (Dot/Space:Dash) Ratio .................................... 84 Keyboard Frequency Entry .............................. 49 Selecting the Keyer Operating Mode ............... 84 Using the [SUB VFO-B] knob ......................... 49 Using the UP/DOWN switches of the supplied MH-31B8 Hand Microphone ........ 49 Receiver Operation (Front End Block Diagram) ... 50 IPO (Intercept Point Optimization) ........................ 51 ATT ........................................................................ 51 RF Gain (SSB/CW/AM Modes) ............................ 52 Page 2 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 5. TABLE OF CONTENTS CW Convenience Features ........................................ 85 VFO and Memory Scanning ................................... 105 CW Spotting (Zero-Beating) .................................. 85 VFO Scanning ...................................................... 105 Using CW Reverse ................................................. 86 Memory Scan ....................................................... 106 CW Delay Time Setting ......................................... 87 PMS ........................................................................... 107 CW Pitch Adjustment ............................................. 87 Packet Operation ..................................................... 108 Contest Memory Keyer .......................................... 88 Packet Setup (Including Subcarrier Frequency) .. 108 Message Memory ............................................. 88 Basic Setup .......................................................... 108 Transmitting in the Beacon Mode .............. 89 RTTY (Radio Teletype) Operation ......................... 109 TEXT Memory ................................................. 90 Setting Up for RTTY Operation ........................... 109 Contest Number Programming ................... 91 Basic Setup .......................................................... 109 Decrementing the Contest Number ............. 92 Miscellaneous AFSK-Based Data Modes .............. 110 Contest Memory Keyer About the Transverter Output Terminal ............... 111 (Using the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad) ...... 92 Menu Mode .............................................................. 112 Message Memory ............................................. 92 Using the Menu .................................................... 112 TEXT Memory ................................................. 94 Menu Mode Reset .......................................... 112 FM Mode Operation ................................................. 96 AGC Group .......................................................... 116 Basic Operation ...................................................... 96 DISPLAY Group .................................................. 116 Repeater Operation ................................................ 97 DVS Group .......................................................... 117 Memory Operation .................................................... 98 KEYER Group ..................................................... 117 Convenient Memory functions ............................... 98 GENERAL Group ................................................ 118 QMB (Quick Memory Bank) ................................. 99 S IF SFT Group .................................................... 120 Standard Memory Operation ................................ 100 MODE-AM Group ............................................... 120 Memory Storage ............................................. 100 MODE-CW Group ............................................... 121 Memory Channel Recall ................................. 100 MODE-DAT Group ............................................. 122 Checking a Memory Channel's Status ............ 101 MODE-FM Group ............................................... 123 Erasing Memory Channel Data ...................... 101 MODE-RTY Group .............................................. 123 Moving Memory Data to MODE-SSB Group .............................................. 124 the Main Band (VFO-A) ................................ 102 RX AUDIO Group ............................................... 124 Memory Tune Operation ................................ 102 RX DSP Group .................................................... 125 Memory Groups ................................................... 103 SCOPE Group ...................................................... 126 Memory Group Assignment ........................... 103 TUNING Group ................................................... 127 Choosing the Desired Memory Group ........... 103 TX AUDIO Group ............................................... 128 Operation on Alaska Emergency Frequency: TX GNRL Group ................................................. 129 5167.5 kHz (U.S. Version Only) .............................. 104 Specifications ............................................................ 132 Installation of the Optional Filter (YF-122C & YF-122CN) ......................................... 134 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 3
  • 6. ACCESSORIES & OPTIONS SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES External Power Supply (FP-2000) 1 pc Hand Microphone (MH-31B8) 1 pc A07890001 AC Power Cord 1 pc T9017882: USA T29013285: Europe T9013283A: Australia DC Power Cord 1 pc T9207392 Spare Fuse (15 A) 1 pc Q0000136 4-pin DIN Plug 1 pc P0091004 5-pin DIN Plug 1 pc P0091006 1/4-inch 3-contact Plug 1 pcs P0090008 3.5 mm 3-contact Plug 1 pcs P0091046 3.5 mm 2-contact Plug 1 pcs P0090034 RCA Plug 2 pcs P0091365 Operating Manual 1 pc CAT Reference Book 1 pc Warranty Card 1 pc AVAILABLE OPTIONS MD-200A8X Ultra-High-Fidelity Desk-Top Microphone YH-77STA Lightweight Stereo Headphone SP-2000 External Speaker with Audio Filter VL-1000/VP-1000 Linear Amplifier/AC Power Supply DMU-2000 Data Management Unit RF µTuning Kit A For 160 m Band RF µTuning Kit B For 80/40 m Bands RF µTuning Kit C For 30/20 m Bands FH-2 Remote Control Keypad YF-122C Collins® CW Filter (500 Hz/2 kHz: –6 dB/–60 dB) YF-122CN Collins® CW Filter (300 Hz/1 kHz: –6 dB/–60 dB) T9101556 Rotator Connection Cable Page 4 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 8. BEFORE YOU BEGIN EXTENDING THE FRONT FEET In order to elevate the front panel for easy viewing, the front left and right feet of the bottom case may be extended. Pull the front legs outward from the bottom panel. Rotate the legs counter-clockwise to lock them in the extended position. Be sure the legs have locked se- curely in place, because the transceiver is quite heavy and an unlocked leg could result in damage, should the transceiver move suddenly. Retracting the Front Feet Rotate the legs clockwise, and push them inward while rotating to the right. The front feel should now be locked in the retracted position. ADJUSTING THE MAIN TUNING DIAL TORQUE The torque (drag) of the Main Tuning Dial knob may be adjusted according to your preferences. Simply hold down the rear skirt of the knob, and while holding it in place rotate the knob itself to the right to reduce the drag or to the left to increase the drag. Available adjustment range is 120°. Hold the Skirt TIGHTEN LOOSEN Page 6 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 9. BEFORE YOU BEGIN RESETTING THE MICROPROCESSOR RESETTING MEMORIES (ONLY) Use this procedure to reset (clear out) the Memory chan- nels previously stored, without affecting any configura- tion changes you may have made to the Menu settings. 1. Press the front panel’s [POWER] switch to turn the transceiver off. 2. Press and hold in the [A M] button; while holding it in, press and hold in the front panel’s [POWER] switch [POWER] button [A M] button to turn the transceiver on. Once the transceiver comes on, you may release the [A M] button. MENU RESETTING Use this procedure to restore the Menu settings to their factory defaults, without affecting the memories you have programmed. 1. Press the front panel’s [POWER] switch to turn the transceiver off. 2. Press and hold in the [MENU] button; while holding it in, press and hold in the front panel’s [POWER] switch [POWER] button [MENU] button to turn the transceiver on. Once the transceiver comes on, you may release the [MENU] button. FULL RESET Use this procedure to restore all Menu and Memory set- [FAST] button tings to their original factory defaults. All Memories will be cleared out by this procedure. 1. Press the front panel’s [POWER] switch to turn the transceiver off. 2. Press and hold in the [FAST] and [LOCK] buttons; while holding them in, press and hold in the front panel’s [POWER] switch to turn the transceiver on. Once the transceiver comes on, you may release the [POWER] button [LOCK] button other two switches. IMPORTANT NOTE When the optional DMU-2000 is connected and is turned on the [POWER] switch, the DMU-2000’s data is also reset when perform the full reset of the FT- 2000D. When the optional RF uTUNE Kit is used, perform the full reset of the FT-2000D after taking the optional RF µTUNE Kit off. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 7
  • 10. INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS ANTENNA CONSIDERATIONS The FT-2000D is designed for use with any antenna system providing a 50 Ohm resistive impedance at the desired oper- ating frequency. While minor excursions from the 50-Ohm specification are of no consequence, the transceiver’s Auto- matic Antenna Tuner may not be able to reduce the impedance mismatch to an acceptable value if the Standing Wave Ratio (SWR) present at the Antenna jack is greater than 3:1. Every effort should, therefore, be made to ensure that the impedance of the antenna system utilized with the FT-2000D be as close as possible to the specified 50-Ohm value. Note that the “G5RV” type antenna does not provide a 50-Ohm impedance on all HF Amateur bands, and an external wide- range antenna coupler must be used with this antenna type. Any antenna to be used with the FT-2000D must, ultimately, be fed with 50 Ohm coaxial cable. Therefore, when using a “balanced” antenna such as a dipole, remember that a balun or other matching/balancing device must be used so as to ensure proper antenna performance. The same precautions apply to any additional (receive-only) antennas connected to the RX ANT jack; if your receive-only antennas do not have an impedance near 50 Ohms at the operating frequency, you may need to install an external antenna tuner to obtain optimum performance. ABOUT COAXIAL CABLE Use high-quality 50-Ohm coaxial cable for the lead-in to your FT-2000D transceiver. All efforts at providing an efficient antenna system will be wasted if poor quality, lossy coaxial cable is used. This transceiver utilizes standard “M” (“PL-259”) type connectors, except for the “RX OUT” BNC connector. 1/16'' Adapter 3/4'' 3/4'' 1 1/8'' 1/8'' 3/8'' 5/8'' TYPICAL PL-259 INSTALLATION Page 8 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 11. INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS GROUNDING The FT-2000D transceiver, like any other HF communications apparatus, requires an effective ground system for maxi- mum electrical safety and best communications effectiveness. A good ground system can contribute to station efficiency in a number of ways: It can minimize the possibility of electrical shock to the operator. It can minimize RF currents flowing on the shield of the coaxial cable and the chassis of the transceiver; such currents may lead to radiation which can cause interference to home entertainment devices or laboratory test equipment. It can minimize the possibility of erratic transceiver/accessory operation caused by RF feedback and/or improper cur- rent flow through logic devices. An effective earth ground system may take several forms; for a more complete discussion, see an appropriate RF engineer- ing text. The information below is intended only as a guideline. Typically, the ground connection consists of one or more copper-clad steel rods, driven into the ground. If multiple ground rods are used, they should be positioned in a “V” configuration, and bonded together at the apex of the “V” which is nearest the station location. Use a heavy, braided cable (such as the discarded shield from type RG-213 coaxial cable) and strong cable clamps to secure the braided cable(s) to the ground rods. Be sure to weatherproof the connections to ensure many years of reliable service. Use the same type of heavy, braided cable for the connections to the station ground bus (described below). Inside the station, a common ground bus consisting of a copper pipe of at least 25 mm (1”) diameter should be used. An alternative station ground bus may consist of a wide copper plate (single-sided circuit board material is ideal) secured to the bottom of the operating desk. Grounding connections from individual devices such as transceivers, power supplies, and data communications devices (TNCs, etc.) should be made directly to the ground bus using a heavy, braided cable. Do not make ground connections from one electrical device to another, and thence to the ground bus. This so-called “Daisy- Chain” grounding technique may nullify any attempt at effective radio frequency grounding. See the drawing below for examples of proper grounding techniques. Inspect the ground system - inside the station as well as outside - on a regular basis so as to ensure maximum performance and safety. Besides following the above guidelines carefully, note that household or industrial gas lines must never be used in an attempt to establish an electrical ground. Cold water pipes may, in some instances, help in the grounding effort, but gas lines represent a significant explosion hazard, and must never be used. Transceiver Linear TNC Transceiver Linear TNC Amplifier Amplifier "Daisy Chain" PROPER GROUND CONNECTION IMPROPER GROUND CONNECTION FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 9
  • 12. INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS CONNECTION OF ANTENNA AND FP-2000 POWER SUPPLY Please refer to the illustration for the proper connection of the antenna coaxial cables and the FP-2000 Power Supply. ANTENNA "1” ANTENNA "2” Use a short, thick, braided cable NOTE to connect your station equipment Be sure that the FT-2000D’s [POWER] switch and to the buried ground rod (or alter- the FP-2000’s [POWER] switch are both turned native earth ground system). off before you plug or unplug any power cable to/ from the FP-2000. This will avoid the possibility of potentially-damaging spikes or electrical shock. IMPORTANT NOTE: Do not position this apparatus in a location with direct exposure to sunshine. Do not position this apparatus in a location exposed to dust and/or high humidity. Do not place equipment, books, or papers on top of the transceiver. Also, provide a few centimeters of space on either side of the transceiver. Ensure adequate ventilation around this apparatus, so as to prevent heat build-up and possible reduction of performance due to high heat. Do not install this apparatus in a mechanically-unstable location, or where objects may fall onto this product from above. To minimize the possibility of interference to home entertainment devices, take all precautionary steps including sepa- ration of TV/FM antennas from Amateur transmitting antennas to the greatest extent possible, and keep transmitting coaxial cables separated from cables connected to home entertainment devices. Ensure that the AC power cord is not subject to undue stress or bending, which could damage the cable or cause it to be accidentally unplugged from the rear panel AC input jack. Be absolutely certain to install your transmitting antenna(s) such that they cannot possibly come in contact with TV/FM radio or other antennas, nor with outside power or telephone lines. Page 10 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 13. INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS CONNECTION OF MICROPHONE AND HEADPHONE FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 11
  • 14. INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS KEY, KEYER, AND COMPUTER-DRIVEN KEYING INTERCONNECTIONS The FT-2000D includes a host of features for the CW operator, the functions of which will be detailed in the “Operation” section later. Besides the built-in Electronic Keyer, two key jacks are provided, one each on the front and rear panels, for convenient connection to keying devices. The Menu system allows you to configure the front and rear panel KEY jacks according to the device you wish to connect. For example, you may connect your keyer paddle to the front panel KEY jack, and use Menu item “052 A1A F-TYPE” for paddle input, while connecting the rear panel’s KEY jack to the keying line from your personal computer (which emulates a “straight key” for connection purposes), and configure the rear panel jack using Menu item “054 A1A R-TYPE.” Both KEY jacks on the FT-2000D utilize “Positive” keying voltage. Key-up voltage is approximately +5V DC, and key- down current is approximately 1 mA. When connecting a key or other device to the KEY jacks, use only a 3-pin (“stereo”) 1/4” phone plug; a 2-pin plug will place a short between the ring and (grounded) shaft of the plug, resulting in a constant “key-down” condition in some circumstances. Page 12 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 15. INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS VL-1000 LINEAR AMPLIFIER INTERCONNECTIONS Be sure that both the FT-2000D and VL-1000 are turned off, then follow the installation recommendations contained in the illustration. Set the “ATT” switch to the “ON” position on the front panel of the VL-1000. The 200-Watt power output from the FT-2000D is far in excess of that which is required to drive the VL-1000 to its full rated output. NOTE: Refer to the VL-1000 Operating Manual for details regarding amplifier operation. Do not attempt to connect or disconnect coaxial cables when your hands are wet. About the CONTROL Cable The VL-1000 may be operated with the FT- 2000D whether or not the CONTROL Cable is connected; however, the CONTROL Cable al- lows you to tune up the amplifier automatically by just pressing the [F SET] or [TUNE] key on To link the FT-2000D and VL-1000 Power the VL-1000 to transmit a carrier for tuning pur- switches, set the VL-1000 REMOTE switch to poses. the “ON” position. ANTENNA CABLE (Not Supplied) HF Vertical Antenna HF Dipole Antenna HF Beam Antenna 50 MHz Antenna INPUT 1 ~AC IN ANT 1 ANT 2 ANT 3 ANT 1 ANT 2 ANT 1 INPUT 1 REMOTE PTT 1 ON OFF ANT 2 BAND DATA 1 PTT 2 INPUT 2 ALC 1 ANT 3 CONTROL ALC 2 ANT 4 DC48V IN GND BAND DATA 2 BAND-DATA 1 ALC 1 DC 48V IN BAND-DATA 2 EXT ALC GND CONTROL BAND DATA TX REQ BAND DATA CABLE (Supplied w/VL-1000) VP-1000 VP-1000 CONTROL CABLE (Supplied w/VL-1000) ALC CABLE (Supplied w/VL-1000) FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 13
  • 16. INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS INTERFACING TO OTHER LINEAR AMPLIFIERS 50 MHz Antenna HF Antenna INPUT 1 ~AC IN ANT 1 ANT 1 ANT 2 RF OUT RF IN GND FUSE AC E ALC E RY GND EXT ALC TX GND NOTE GND The TX/RX switching in the linear amplifier is con- trolled by switching components in the transceiver. The relay circuit of the FT-2000D used for this switching is capable of switching AC voltage of 100 Volts at up to 300 mA, or DC voltages or 60 V at 200 mA or 30 V at up to 1 Amp. In order to engage the switching relay, use Menu item “144 tGEn ETX-GND;” set this Menu item to “EnA (Enable)” to activate the amplifier switch- ing relay. The specified range for ALC voltage to be used with the FT-2000D is 0 to –4 Volts DC. Amplifier systems utilizing different ALC voltages will not work correctly with the FT-2000D, and their ALC lines must not be connected if this is the case. Page 14 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 17. PLUG /CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS MIC CAT DC IN 13. 8 V UP N/A +5V SERIAL OUT DOWN SERIAL IN N/A FAST GND GND N/A PTT RTS MIC GND CTS MIC NC (as viewed from front panel) (as viewed from rear panel) (as viewed from rear panel) DC IN 50 V BAND DATA PACKET +13V TX GND DATA IN GND GND BAND DATA A PACKET PTT BAND DATA B DATA OUT BAND DATA C BUSY BAND DATA D TX INH (as viewed from rear panel) (as viewed from rear panel) (as viewed from rear panel) RTTY ROT (ROTATOR) PHONE CW ROTATION SUB (VFO-B) SHIFT CCW ROTATION RX OUT SPEED PTT DIRECTION GND GND NC MAIN (VFO-A) GND (as viewed from rear panel) (as viewed from rear panel) REM (REMOTE) AF OUT EXT SPKR GND SUB (VFO-B) GND SIGNAL MAIN (VFO-A) GND SIGNAL RCA PLUG KEY For Internal Keyer For Straight Key GND or (---) DOT DASH COMMON KEY GND SIGNAL or (+) Do not use 2-conductor type plug IMPORTANT NOTE: The µ-TUNE, DMU, and PGM connectors are special connectors for this transceiver. Please do not connect any accessory or other device not specifically approved by Vertex Standard. Failure to observe this precaution may cause damage not covered by the Limited Warranty on this apparatus. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 15
  • 18. FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES POWER Switch MOX Switch Press and hold in this switch for one second to turn the Pressing this button engages the PTT (Push to Talk) transceiver on. Similarly, press and hold in this switch circuit, to activate the transmitter (the LED inside this for one second to turn the transceiver off. (The FP- button will glow red). It must be turned off (the red 2000’s [POWER] switch must also be set to on “I” LED will be off) for reception. This button replicates before this switch will function.) the action of the Push to Talk (PTT) switch on the mi- ADVICE: crophone. When engaging the [MOX] button (the LED The main power switch for the system is located inside this button glows red) or otherwise causing a on the front panel of the FP-2000 Power Supply. transmission to be started, be certain you have either When the FP-2000 main power switch is pushed an antenna or 50-Ohm dummy load connected to the down on the “I” side, the FP-2000 is turned on, selected Antenna jack. and the FT-2000D is placed in the “standby” state. If the FP-2000 main power switch is not turned on, it is not possible to turn on the FT-2000D trans- ceiver. For more details about the main power switch location on the FP-2000, please see the dis- cussion on page 34. If you press this switch momentarily while the trans- ceiver is turned on, the transceiver’s audio will be muted for three seconds. Page 16 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 19. FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES TUNE Switch Microphone Connector This is the on/off switch for the FT-2000D’s Auto- This 8-pin jack accepts input from a microphone uti- matic Antenna Tuner. lizing a traditional YAESU HF-transceiver pinout. Pressing this button momentarily places the antenna DIM Switch tuner in line between the transmitter final amplifier and Press this button to lower the illumination intensity of the antenna jack (“ ” icon will appear in the dis- the analog meter and the frequency display. Press it play). Reception is not affected. once more to restore full brightness. Pressing and holding in this button for 1/2 second, while ADVICE: receiving in an amateur band, activates the transmitter Menu Items “008 diSP DIM MTR” and “009 diSP for a few seconds while the automatic antenna tuner DIM VFD” allow you to configure the dimming levels rematches the antenna system impedance for minimum for the analog meter and the frequency display inde- SWR. The resulting setting is automatically stored in pendently, so you can customize the brightness levels. one of the antenna tuner’s 100 memories, for instant automatic recall later when the receiver is tuned near VOX Switch the same frequency. This button enables automatic voice-actuated transmit- Pressing this button momentarily, while the Tuner is ter switching in the SSB, AM, and FM modes. While engaged, will take the Automatic Antenna tuner out of activated, the LED inside this button glows red. The the transmit line. controls affecting VOX operation are the front panel’s NOTE: [VOX] and [DELAY] knobs. By proper adjustment of When the Automatic Antenna Tuner is tuning itself, a these controls, hands-free voice-actuated operation is signal is being transmitted. Therefore, be absolutely possible. certain that an antenna or dummy load is connected to ANTENNA Select Switch the selected antenna jack before pressing and holding [1/2]: Pressing this selects either the ANT 1 or 2 jack in the [TUNE] button to start antenna tuning. on the rear panel, and allows convenient antenna PHONES Jack switching at the press of button. The selected antenna A 1/4-inch, 3-contact jack accepts either monaural or jack is indicated at the upper left corner of the display. stereo headphones with 2- or 3-contact plugs. When a [RX]: Normally, the antenna connected to the ANT 1 plug is inserted, the loudspeaker is disabled. With ste- or 2 jack is used for receive (and always used for trans- reo headphones such as the optional YH-77STA, you mit). When the [RX] switch is pressed, an antenna con- can monitor both Main (VFO-A) and Sub (VFO-B) nected to the RX ANT will be used during receive. receiver channels at the same time during Dual Re- MONI (Monitor) Switch ceive operation. This button enables the transmit monitor in the SSB, NOTE: CW, AM, and FM modes. While activated, the “ ” When wearing headphones, we recommend that you icon appears in the display. Adjustment of the Monitor turn the AF Gain levels down to their lowest settings level is accomplished using the [MONI] knob. before turning power on, to minimize the impact on ADVICE: your hearing caused by audio “pops” during switch- When using headphones, the Monitor is highly useful on. for making adjustments to the Parametric Equalizer or KEY Jack other voice quality adjustments, because the voice qual- This 1/4-inch, 3-contact jack accepts a CW key or keyer ity heard in the headphones is such a “natural” repro- paddles (for the built-in electronic keyer), or output duction of the transmitted audio quality. from an external electronic keyer. Pinout is shown on page 15. Key up voltage is 5 V, and key down current is 1 mA. This jack may be configured for keyer, “Bug,” “straight key,” or computer keying interface operation via Menu item “052 A1A F-TYPE” (see page 121). There is another jack with the same name on the rear panel, and it may be configured independently for In- ternal Keyer or pseudo-straight-key operation. NOTE: You cannot use a 2-contact plug in this jack (to do so produces a constant “key down” condition). FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 17
  • 20. FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES PROC (Processor) Switch KEYER Switch This button enables the Parametric Microphone Equal- This button toggles the internal CW keyer on and off. izer and Speech Processor for SSB/AM transmission. While activated, the “ ” icon appears in the dis- When the Parametric Microphone Equalizer is acti- play. The Keyer sending speed and the CW Hang Time vated, the “ ” icon appears in the display. are adjusted via the front panel’s [SPEED] and [DE- When the Speech Processor is activated, the “ ” LAY] knobs. and “ ” icons appear in the display. Adjustment ATT Switch of the Processor level is accomplished using the This button selects the degree of attenuation, if any, to [PROC] knob. be applied to the receiver input. ADVICE: Available selections are –6 dB, –12 dB, –18 dB, or The Speech Processor is a tool for increasing the OFF, and the selected attenuation level appears in the average power output through a compression tech- ATT column of the Receiver Configuration Indicator nique. However, if the [PROC] knob is advanced on the display. too far, the increase in compression becomes ADVICE: counter-productive, as intelligibility will suffer. We The Attenuator affects both the Main (VFO-A) and recommend that you monitor the sound of your sig- Sub (VFO-B) receivers. nal using the Monitor (with headphones). The Attenuator may be used in conjunction with When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management the [IPO] switch to provide two stages of signal Unit is connected, you may use the Audio Scope/ reduction when an extremely strong signal is being Oscilloscope page to help you adjust the setting of received. the compression level of the Speech Processor for optimum performance using your voice and micro- phone. Page 18 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 21. FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES IPO (INTERCEPT POINT OPTIMIZATION) Switch NB Switch This button may be used to set the optimum front end This button turns the IF Noise Blanker on and off. characteristics of the receiver circuit for a very strong- Press this button momentarily to reduce a short-dura- signal environment. Available selections are AMP 1 tion pulse noise; the “ ” icon will appear in the dis- (low distortion amplifier), AMP 2 (2-stage low-distor- play. tion RF amplifier), or ON (bypasses the front end RF Press and hold in this button for one second to reduce amplifier), and the selected receiver RF amplifier ap- a longer-duration man-made pulse noise; the “ ” pears at the IPO column of the Receiver Configuration icon will blink for three seconds, then will appear con- Indicator in the display. tinuously in the display. ADVICE: Press this button again to disable the noise blanker; The IPO switch affects both the Main (VFO-A) and the “ ” icon will disappear. Sub (VFO-B) receivers. ADVICE: When you press (or press and hold) the [NB] button R.FLT Switch momentarily, it affects the Main band (VFO-A) re- This button selects the bandwidth for the Main Band ceiver. When you press the [B] button, then press (or (VFO-A) receiver’s first IF Roofing Filter. Available press and hold in) the [NB] button (within five sec- selections are 3 kHz, 6 kHz, 15 kHz, or Auto, and the onds of pressing the [B] button), it affects the Sub band selected bandwidth appears in the FLT column of the (VFO-B) receiver. Receiver Configuration Indicator on the display. ADVICE: METER Switch The Roofing Filter selection applies to the Main This control switch determines the function of the meter band (VFO-A) only. during transmission. Because the roofing filter is in the first IF, the pro- COMP: Indicates the speech compressor level (SSB tection it provides against interference is quite sig- mode only). nificant. When set to AUTO, the SSB bandwidth is ALC: Indicates the relative ALC voltage. 6 kHz, while CW is 3 kHz and FM/RTTY are 15 PO: Indicates the average power output level. kHz. On a crowded SSB band, however, you may SWR: Indicates the Standing Wave Ratio (Forward: wish to select the 3 kHz filter, for the maximum Reflected). possible interference rejection. ID: Indicates the final amplifier drain current. VDD: Indicates the final amplifier drain voltage. AGC Switch This button selects the AGC characteristics for the re- MONI PROC Knobs ceiver. Available selections are FAST, MID, SLOW, MONI Knob or AUTO, and the “AGC” icon will change according The inner [MONI] knob adjust the audio level of the to the AGC characteristics selected. transmit monitor during transmission (relative to the Press the [AGC] button repeatedly to select the de- AF GAIN control), when activated by the [MONI] sired receiver-recovery time constant. Press and hold button. in the [AGC] button for two seconds to disable the PROC Knob AGC (for testing or weak-signal reception). The outer [PROC] knob sets the compression (input) When the [AGC] button is pressed independently, it level of the transmitter RF Speech Processor in the SSB applies to the Main band (VFO-A) receiver. and AM modes, when activated by the [PROC] but- When you press the [B] button, followed by the [AGC] ton. button (within five seconds of pressing the [B] switch), BK-IN Switch it affects the Sub band (VFO-B) receiver. This button turns the CW break-in capability on and ADVICE: off. While the CW break-in is activated, the “ ” If the AGC receiver-recovery time is set to “Off” by icon appears in the display. pressing and holding in the [AGC] button, the S-meter will no longer deflect. Additionally, you will likely en- SPOT Switch counter distortion on stronger signals, as the IF ampli- This button turns on the CW receiver spotting tone; by fiers and the following stages are probably being over- matching the SPOT tone to that of the incoming CW loaded. signal (precisely the same pitch), you will be “zero beating” your transmitted signal on to the frequency of the other station. The Sub (VFO-B) frequency display will indicate the offset tone frequency when this button is pressed. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 19
  • 22. FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES SPEED PITCH Knobs NB SQL Knobs SPEED Knob NB Knob The inner [SPEED] knob adjusts the keying speed of The inner [NB] knob adjusts the noise blanking level the internal CW keyer (4 ~ 60 WPM). Clockwise rota- when the (analog) IF noise blanker is activated by press- tion increases the sending speed. ing the [NB] button. When turning this knob while pressing the [KEYER] SQL Knob button, the Sub (VFO-B) frequency display shows the The outer [SQL] knob sets the signal level threshold keying speed. at which the Main (VFO-A) receiver audio is muted, PITCH Knob in all modes. It is very useful during local rag-chews, The outer [PITCH] knob selects your preferred CW to eliminate noise between incoming transmissions. tone pitch (from 300 ~ 1050 Hz, in 50 Hz increments). This control is normally kept fully counter-clockwise The Tx sidetone, receiver IF passband, and display (off), except when scanning and during FM operation. offset from the BFO (carrier) frequency are all affected simultaneously. The Pitch control setting also affects the operation of the CW Tuning Indicator, as the cen- ter frequency of the CW Tuning Indicator will follow the setting of this control. Page 20 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 23. FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES MIC RF PWR Knobs SUB AF GAIN SUB RF GAIN MIC Knob AF GAIN Knob The inner [MIC] knob adjusts the microphone input The inner [SUB AF GAIN] knob sets the Sub (VFO- level for (non-processed) SSB transmission. B) receiver’s audio volume level. Typically, you will ADVICE: operate with this control set between the 9 o’clock and If you adjust the MIC Gain while speaking in a some- 10 o’clock positions. what-louder-than-normal voice level, watch the ALC RF GAIN Knob level and adjust the MIC Gain so that the ALC reaches The outer [SUB RF GAIN] knob is the Sub (VFO-B) just to the right edge of the ALC scale. Then, when receiver’s RF gain control, which adjusts the gain of you speak in a more normal voice level, you’ll be cer- the Sub (VFO-B) receiver’s RF and IF amplifier stages. tain not to be over-driving the mic amplifier stage. This control is normally left in the fully clockwise po- RF PWR Knob sition. The outer [RF PWR] knob is the main RF Power out- AF GAIN RF GAIN Knobs put control for the transceiver, active in all operating AF GAIN Knob modes. Clockwise rotation increases the power out- The inner [AF GAIN] knob sets the Main (VFO-A) put. Adjust this control for the desired power output receiver’s audio volume level. Typically, you will op- from the FT-2000D. erate with this control set between the 9 o’clock and VOX DELAY Knobs 10 o’clock positions. VOX Knob RF GAIN Knob The inner [VOX] knob sets the gain of the VOX cir- The outer [RF GAIN ] knob is the Main (VFO-A) cuit, to set the level of microphone audio needed to receiver’s RF gain control, which adjusts the gain of activate the transmitter during voice operation while the Main (VFO-A) receiver’s RF and IF amplifier the [VOX] switch is engaged. The [VOX] switch must stages. This control is normally left in the fully clock- be switched “ON” to engage the VOX circuit. wise position. DELAY Knob MODE Switches The outer [DELAY] knob sets the hang time of the [A], [B] Switch VOX circuit for voice operation and keying delay for Pressing the [A] or [B] button will illuminate the re- CW operation. spective indicator imbedded within the switch, allow- During voice operation, this knob sets the hang time, ing adjustment of the operating mode on the Main between the moment you stop speaking, and the auto- (VFO-A) or Sub (VFO-B) band. Usually, the [A] but- matic switch from transmit back to receive. Adjust this ton glow Red, signifying that the Main band (VFO-A) for smooth VOX operation, so the receiver is only ac- is being adjusted. Similarly, pressing the [B] button tivated when your transmission is ended and you wish will cause its indicator to blink Orange for five sec- to receive. onds, signifying Sub band (VFO-B) adjustment. For CW operation, this knob sets the keying delay, ADVICE: between the moment you stop sending, and the auto- When changing bands, confirm the [A] or [B] button matic switch from transmit back to receive during illumination status at first, then press the appropriate “Semi-break-in” operation. Adjust this just long enough [BAND] button, so as to change operating frequencies to prevent the receiver from being restored during word on the proper (Main or Sub) band. spaces at your preferred sending speed. [LSB], [USB], [CW], [AM/FM], [RTTY], [PKT] Switch SUB SQL Knob Pressing the [ LSB ] , [ USB ] , [ CW ] , [ AM/FM ] , This knob sets the signal level threshold at which Sub [RTTY], or [PKT] button will select the operating (VFO-B) receiver audio is muted, in all modes. It is mode. Pressing the [CW ], [AM/FM ], [RTTY ], or very useful during local rag-chews, to eliminate noise [PKT] button multiple times will switch between the between incoming transmissions. This control is nor- alternate operating features that can be used on these mally kept fully counter-clockwise (off), except when modes (covered later). scanning and during FM operation. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 21
  • 24. FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES F1 - F7 / DISPLAY Keys These keys can be used to control the Voice Memory [F7(P.BACK)] key capability for the SSB/AM/FM modes, and the Con- Press and hold in this button for 2 seconds to activate test Keyer for the CW mode. You can also play back the recording feature of the internal Digital Voice Re- up to 15 seconds of incoming received audio, as well, corder. The Voice Recorder allows you to record the for verification of a missed callsign or other purposes. Main band (VFO-A) receiver audio for the most-re- When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit cent 15 seconds. While you’re recording the receiver is connected, you can also use the “Function” keys for audio, the “ ” icon will appear in the display. the various functions associated with each “page” of Press this button momentarily to stop the recording, the external display’s capability. then press this button momentarily again to play back [F1(CH 1)] - [F4(CH 4)] key the receiver audio for the most-recent 15 seconds of In the case of Voice Memory, up to 20 seconds of au- reception before you stopped the recording. dio may be stored on each channel. For CW messages, While playing back the receiver audio, the “ ” icon up to 50 characters (“PARIS” specification) may be will appear in the display. stored into each channel. See page 76 (Voice Memory) Press and hold in this button for 2 seconds again to or page 88 (Contest Keyer) for details. resume recording. [F5(MEM)] key [DISPLAY] key This key is pressed for the purpose of storing either a Press and hold in this key for two seconds to cause the Voice Memory or a Contest Keyer Memory channel’s [F1(CH 1)] - [DISPLAY] keys to act as “Function” contents. See page 76 (Voice Memory) or page 88 keys for the optional DMU-2000 Data Management (Contest Keyer) for details. Unit if connected. [F6(DEC)] key When utilizing the sequential contest number capability of the Contest Keyer, press this key to decrement (back up) the current Contest Number by one digit (i.e. to back up from #198 to #197, etc.). See page 91 for details. Page 22 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 25. FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES QMB (Quick Memory Bank) Switches C.S Switch STO (Store) Button Press this button momentarily to recall a favorite Menu Pressing this button copies operating information (fre- Selection directly. quency, mode, bandwidth, and also repeater direction/ To program a Menu selection as the short-cut, press shift frequency and CTCSS functions on the FM mode) the [MENU] button to enter the Menu, then select the into consecutive QMB Memories. Menu item you want to set as the short-cut. Now press RCL (Recall) Button and hold in the [C.S] button for two seconds; this will Pressing this button recalls one of up to five Quick lock in the selected Menu item as the short-cut. Memory Bank memories for operation. RX Indicator/Switch NAR (Narrow) Switch This button, when pressed, engages the Main band In the SSB/CW modes on the Main band (VFO-A), this (VFO-A) receiver; the LED inside this button will glow button is used to set the bandwidth of the DSP (digital) Green when the Main receiver is active. IF filters to a user-programmed bandwidth (default When the Main (VFO-A) receiver is active, pressing values are SSB: 1.8 kHz and CW/RTTY/PSK: 300 Hz). this button momentarily will mute the receiver, and the ADVICE: indicator will blink. Pressing the button once more will When [NAR] has been engaged, the [WIDTH] knob restore receiver operation, and the indicator will glow will be disabled, although the [SHIFT] knob still works Green steadily. normally. TX Indicator/Switch In the SSB/CW modes on the Sub Band (VFO-B), this When this button is pushed, the LED inside this button button is used to toggle the receiver’s bandwidth be- will glow Red, and the transmitter will be engaged on tween wide (2.4 kHz) and narrow (1.0 kHz). the same frequency and mode as set up for the Main ADVICE: band (VFO-A) (subject to any Clarifier offset, of When the Sub Band’s (VFO-B) optional YF-122C (500 course). Hz) or YF-122CN (300 Hz) CW narrow filter is in- ADVICE: stalled, the optional narrow filter will be activated when If this indicator is not illuminated, it means that the the [NAR] switch has been engaged on the CW/RTTY/ Sub (VFO-B) TX indicator has been selected (it will PSK modes. be glowing Red). In this case, transmission will be ef- In the AM mode, this button is used to toggle the fected on the frequency and mode programmed for the receiver’s bandwidth between wide (9 kHz) and nar- Sub (VFO-B) band. row (6 kHz). In the FM mode on the 28 MHz and 50 MHz bands, Main Tuning Dial Knob this button is used to toggle the FM deviation/band- This large knob adjusts the operating frequency of the width between wide (±5.0 kHz Dev./25.0 kHz BW) Main band (VFO-A) or a recalled memory. Clockwise and narrow (±2.5 kHz Dev./12.5 kHz BW). rotation of this knob increases the frequency. Default Pressing the [A ] or [B] button (located above the tuning increments are 10 Hz (100 Hz in AM and FM [MODE] selection buttons) will select either the Main modes); when the [FAST] button is pressed, the tun- band (VFO-A) or Sub band (VFO-B) for individual ing steps increase. The available steps are: bandwidth setting. OPERATING MODE 1 STEP 1 DIAL ROTATION LSB/USB/CW/RTTY/PKT(LSB) 10 Hz (100 Hz) 10 kHz (100 kHz) SPLIT Switch AM/FM/PKT(FM) 100 Hz (1 kHz) 100 kHz (1 MHz) Pressing this button to activate split frequency opera- Numbers in parentheses indicate steps when the [FAST] button is On. tion between the Main band (VFO-A), used for recep- ADVICE: tion, and the Sub band (VFO-B), used for transmis- The tuning steps for the Main Tuning Dial knob are sion. If you press and hold in the [SPLIT] button for set, at the factory, to 10 Hz per step. Via Menu item two seconds, the “Quick Split” feature will be engaged, “116 tun DIALSTP,” however, you may change this whereby the Sub band VFO (VFO-B) will automati- setting from 10 Hz to 1 Hz instead. When 1 Hz basic cally be set to a frequency 5 kHz higher than the Main steps are selected, the action of the [FAST] button will band (VFO-A) frequency with same operating mode, be changed to 1/10 of the values listed above. and the transceiver will be placed in the Split mode. FAST Switch TXW “TX Watch” Switch Pressing this button will increase or decrease the tun- Pressing this button lets you monitor the transmit fre- ing rate of the Main Tuning Dial knob by a factor of quency when split frequency operation is engaged. ten, as mentioned in the previous section. Release the button to return to normal operation. When this function is activated, the “ ” icon ap- pears in the display. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 23
  • 26. FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES CLAR + LOCK Switch [V/M] Switch This button toggles locking of the Main Tuning Dial This button toggles Main band (VFO-A) receiver op- knob, to prevent accidental frequency changes. When eration between the memory system and the VFO. Ei- the button is active, the Main Tuning Dial knob can ther “ ” or “ ” will be displayed to the under still be turned, but the frequency will not change, and the main frequency display field to indicate the cur- the “ ” icon appears in the display. rent selection. If you have tuned off of a Memory chan- nel frequency (MT), pressing this button returns the [A B] Switch display to the original memory contents (MR), and Press this button momentarily to transfer data from the pressing it once more returns operation to the Main Main band (VFO-A) frequency (or a recalled memory VFO (no icon). channel) to the Sub band (VFO-B), overwriting any previous contents in the Sub band (VFO-B). Use this [M A] Switch key to set both Main band (VFO-A) and Sub band Pressing this button momentarily displays the contents (VFO-B) receivers to the same frequency and mode. of the currently-selected memory channel for three sec- onds. [A B] Switch Holding this button in for 2 seconds copies the data Pressing this button momentarily exchanges the con- from the currently-selected memory to the Main VFO tents of the Main band (VFO-A) (or a recalled memory (VFO-A), as two beeps sound. Previous data in the channel) and the Sub band (VFO-B). Main VFO will be overwritten. Page 24 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 27. FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES [A M] Switch VRF Knob Pressing and holding in this key for 1/2 second (until This knob tunes the passband of the VRF (Variable RF the double beep) copies the current operating data from Filter) preselector circuit for maximum receiver sensi- the Main band (VFO-A) into the currently selected tivity (and out-of-band interference rejection). memory channel, overwriting any previous data stored ADVICE: there. The relative position of the VRF passband can be Also, pressing and holding in this button after recall- observed on the Tuning Offset Indicator of the dis- ing a memory, without first retuning, causes the memory play via Menu item “010 diSP BAR SEL.” channel to be “masked,” and repeating the process re- When the optional RF µTuning Kit is connected, stores the masked memory. this knob allows adjustment of the center frequency of the µ-Tuning filter passband (which is much MENU Switch narrower than that of the VRF). This button is used for gaining access to the Menu sys- tem, for configuring various transceiver characteris- VRF Switch tics. Menu operation is described in detail, in this This button turns the VRF filter on and off. While ac- manual, beginning on page 112. tivated, the “ ” icon will appear in the FLT column IMPORTANT NOTE: of the Receiver Configuration Indicator on the display. Pressing this button momentarily activates the Menu, ADVICE: and the Menu items will appear on the display; once When the optional RF µTuning Kit is connected, press- you are finished, you must press and hold in the ing this button will engage the µ-Tuning filter. The [MENU] button for two seconds to save any configu- µTuning Kit provides much better RF selectivity than ration changes (momentarily pressing the [MENU] any other RF filter in the Amateur industry, yielding button to exit will not save the changes). outstanding protection from high RF levels not far re- moved from the current operating frequency. BAND Keys These keys allow one-touch selection of the desired NOTCH Switch Amateur band (1.8 ~ 50 MHz). This button turns the Main band (VFO-A) receiver’s What’s more, these keys may be used for direct entry IF Notch Filter on and off. of a desired operating frequency during VFO opera- When the IF Notch Filter is activated, the peak posi- tion. tion of the IF Notch Filter is depicted graphically in the display. The IF Notch Filter center frequency is RX CLAR Switch adjusted via the [NOTCH] knob. Pressing this button activates the RX Clarifier, to al- low offsetting the Main (VFO-A) receiving frequency DNF Switch temporarily. Press this button once more to return the This button turns the Main band (VFO-A) receiver’s Main receiver to the frequency shown on the main fre- Digital Notch Filter on and off. When the Digital Notch quency display field; the Clarifier offset will still be Filter is activated, the “ ” icon appears in the dis- present, though, in case you want to use it again. To play. This is an automatic circuit, and there is no ad- cancel the Clarifier offset, press the [CLEAR] button. justment knob for the DNF. TX CLAR Switch NOTCH Knob Pressing this button activates the TX Clarifier, to al- This knob adjusts the center frequency of the Main low offsetting the Main (VFO-A) transmit frequency band (VFO-A) receiver’s IF Notch Filter. The Notch temporarily. Filter is engaged via the [NOTCH] button. Press this button once more to return the transmitter to Initially, the approximate center frequency of the IF the Main (VFO-A) frequency shown on the main fre- Notch Filter is adjusted by the outer [COARSE] knob; quency display field; the Clarifier offset will still be then, fine tuning of the center frequency is adjusted by present, though, in case you want to use it again. To the inner [FINE] knob. cancel the Clarifier offset, press the [CLEAR] button. CLEAR Switch Pressing this button clears out any frequency offset you have programmed into the Clarifier register (thereby setting the offset to “Zero”). CLAR Knob This knob tunes the Clarifier offset frequency up to 9.99 kHz. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 25
  • 28. FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES CLAR + SHIFT WIDTH Knobs (EXCEPT ON FM MODE) SHIFT Knob WIDTH Knob The inner [SHIFT] knob provides adjustment of the The outer [WIDTH] knob sets the overall bandwidth IF DSP passband, using 20 Hz steps for precise ad- of the IF DSP filter for the Main (VFO-A) receiver. justment and easy reduction of interference on either The center (12 o’clock) position establishes the “de- side of your operating frequency. The total adjustment fault” bandwidth (for example, 2.4 kHz for SSB); range is ±1 kHz. The normal operating setting for this clockwise rotation of this knob increases the bandwidth knob is straight up, in the 12 o’clock position. (out to a maximum of 4 kHz), while counter-clock- ADVICE: wise rotation reduces the bandwidth. You may shift the Sub band (VFO-B) filter passband When the NAR (Narrow) filter selection is engaged, via Menu item “042 S-iF LSB SET” through “049 S- the [WIDTH] knob is disabled. iF PKT-USB.” The [SHIFT] knob may be used to re-center the pass- band response on the incoming signal, and you may find that the CONTOUR and IF Notch Filter may also help improve intelligibility and/or reduce interference. See also the discussions of the [CONTOUR] knob and [NOTCH] knob. ADVICE: When the [NAR] button has been pushed, the [WIDTH] knob no longer functions (except the CW mode). The IF SHIFT system is still fully operational, however. Page 26 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 29. FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES CONT Switch SUB VFO-B Knob This button turns the Main band (VFO-A) receiver’s Depending on the status of the [A/B] button located at CONTOUR filter on and off. When the CONTOUR the right bottom of the [SUB VFO-B] knob, the [SUB Filter is activated, the peak position of the CONTOUR VFO-B] knob is used for functions associated with the Filter is depicted graphically in the display. Adjustment Main (VFO-A) or Sub (VFO-B) frequency control reg- of the CONTOUR filter’s center frequency is provided isters. by the [CONTOUR] knob. (VFO-A) BAND Switch NOTE: Pressing this button allows you to select the Main There are times, when you’re trying to remove inter- (VFO-A) operating band (Amateur bands) using the ference with a sharp DSP filter, that the remaining sig- [SUB VFO-B] knob. nal has a somewhat unnatural sound. This is caused by the cutting of some frequency components, leaving (VFO-A) MHz Switch other components in excess. The CONTOUR filter al- Pressing this button allows you to tune the Main band lows you (especially) to roll off certain frequency com- (VFO-A) frequency down or up in 1 MHz increments, ponents inside the remaining passband, but in a smooth using the [SUB VFO-B] knob. manner that helps restore a natural sound and/or raise intelligibility. GRP Switch Pressing this button allows you to select the memory DNR Switch group using the [SUB VFO-B] knob. This button turns the Main band (VFO-A) receiver’s Digital Noise Reduction circuit on and off. When the M CH Switch Digital Noise Reduction is activated, the “ ” icon Pressing this button allows you to select the memory appears in the display. Adjustment of the Noise Re- channel using the [SUB VFO-B] knob. duction level is provided by the [DNR] knob. (VFO-B) BAND Switch CONTOUR DNR Knob When the [A/B] button is pressed, and the Orange lamp CONTOUR Knob to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob lights up, press- The inner [CONTOUR] knob selects the desired Main ing this button allows you to select the Sub (VFO-B) band (VFO-A) receiver’s CONTOUR filter response. operating band (Amateur bands) using the [SUB VFO- The CONTOUR filter is engaged via the [CONTOUR] B] knob. button. (VFO-B) MHz Switch DNR Knob When the [A/B] button is pressed, and the Orange lamp The outer [DNR] knob selects the Main band (VFO- to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob lights up, press- A) receiver’s optimum Digital Noise Reduction re- ing this button allows you to tune the Sub band (VFO- sponse. The Noise Reduction circuit is engaged via B) frequency down or up in 1 MHz increments, using the [DNR] button. the [SUB VFO-B] knob. RX Indicator/Switch FAST Switch This is the button that turns the Sub (VFO-B) receiver When the [A/B] button is pushed, and the Orange lamp On and Off. When this button is pressed to make the to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob lights up, the Sub (VFO-B) receiver active, the Green LED imbed- [SUB VFO-B] knob will be controlling the Sub band ded within the button will light up. Pressing the button (VFO-B) frequency; pressing the [FAST] button will again will disable this receiver, and the imbedded Green increase the tuning rate by a factor of 10. LED will turn off. A/B Switch TX Indicator/Switch The [A/B] button determines whether the actions of This is the button that turns the Sub (VFO-B) trans- the [SUB VFO-B] knob will be applied to the Main mitter On and Off. When this button is pressed to trans- band (VFO-A) or the Sub band (VFO-B). fer transmitter control to the Sub (VFO-B) frequency Pressing this button once causes the Orange lamp to and mode, the Red LED imbedded within the button the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob to light up; in this will light up. Pressing this button once more will trans- case, rotation of the [SUB VFO-B] knob affects op- fer frequency/mode control back to the Main (VFO- eration on the Sub band (VFO-B). Pressing the [A/B] A) side, and the Red LED imbedded within this button button once more causes the Orange lamp to turn off; will turn off. in this instance, rotation of the [SUB VFO-B] knob affects operations associated with the Main band (VFO- A). FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 27
  • 30. DISPLAY INDICATIONS (LEFT SIDE & CENTER) Receiver Configuration Indicators SHIFT ANT (1, 2, RX): Indicates the peak position of the DSP IF filter. Indicates the antenna selected for operation by the front panel [1/2] and [RX] antenna switches. NB ATT (OFF, –6 dB, –12 dB, –18 dB): This indicator appears when the Main band (VFO-A) Indicates the attenuation level selected for operation receiver’s (short duration) Noise Blanker is activated. by the front panel [ATT] button. This indicator will blink for three seconds, and there- FLT (VRF, µ-TUNE, THRU): after appears continuously, when the Main band (VFO- Indicates the RF filter selected for operation by the A) receiver’s longer-pulse Noise Blanker is activated. front panel [VRF] button. NAR ADVICE: This indicator appears whenever the Main band (VFO- The µ-TUNE filter is an option. The “ ” icon will A) receiver’s narrow IF DSP filter is engaged. not appear when the optional µ-TUNE unit is not con- nected. PROC IPO (AMP 1, AMP 2, ON): This indicator appears whenever the DSP Speech Pro- Indicates the front end RF amplifier selected for op- cessor is activated. eration by the front panel [IPO] button. MONI R.FLT This indicator appears whenever the transmit monitor Indicates the 1st IF Roofing Filter selected: AUTO circuit is activated. (mode-determined), 3 kHz, 6 kHz, or 15 kHz. AGC (AUTO, FAST, MID, SLOW): KEYER Indicates the AGC decay time selected for Main band This indicator appears whenever the internal CW keyer (VFO-A) operation by the front panel [AGC] switch. is activated. DNR BK-IN This indicator appears whenever the Digital Noise Re- This indicator appears whenever CW break-in opera- duction feature is activated. tion is activated. DNF TUNER This indicator appears whenever the Digital Notch Fil- This indicator appears when the internal Automatic An- ter is activated. tenna Tuner is activated. CONTOUR HI SWR The peak position of the CONTOUR Filter is depicted This indicator appears if the directional coupler and graphically here when the CONTOUR Filter is acti- microprocessor detect an abnormally high SWR con- vated. dition (over 3.0:1) that cannot be resolved by the Au- tomatic Antenna Tuner. NOTCH NOTE: The null position of the IF Notch Filter is depicted If this indicator appears, check to be sure that you have graphically here when the IF Notch Filter is activated. the correct antenna selected on the current operating WIDTH band. If so, you will need to check the condition of the Indicates the bandwidth of the DSP IF filter. antenna, its coaxial cable, and/or the connectors on the cable so as to locate and correct the fault. Page 28 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 31. DISPLAY INDICATIONS (CENTER) TX Tuning Offset Indicator This indicator appears during transmission on the Main This is a tuning scale that, as configured from the fac- band (VFO-A) frequency. tory, provides a visual CW tuning indication of the in- coming signal’s offset from your transceiver’s CW car- BUSY rier frequency, as programmed by the relative clarifier This indicator appears whenever the Main band (VFO- offset, or the peak position of the VRF/µ-TUNE filter. A) receiver squelch is open. If this indicator is not show- ing, and reception seems to have been lost on the Main REC receiver for no apparent reason, check the position of This indicator appears while the voice recorder is re- the SQL knob and rotate it fully counter-clockwise to cording the receiver audio, and/or the memory is re- restore reception. cording your CW or voice message. Main (VFO-A) Frequency Display PLAY This is the Main band (VFO-A) frequency display. This indicator appears while the voice recorder is play- ADVICE: ing back the recorded audio, and/or the memory is play- When setting the Menu items, the Menu item num- ing back the recorded CW or voice message. ber and Menu group name will appear in this area Multi-Display Window during setup. This window displays either the Clarifier offset or When setting the CTCSS frequency for Encoding Memory Channel Number. or Tone Squelch operation, the current tone infor- ADVICE: mation will appear in this area during setup. During FM operation, the Repeater Shift will be LOCK indicated in this window. A Negative frequency shift This indicator appears when the Main Tuning Dial knob will be indicated by “–” while a Positive frequency is locked. shift will be indicated by “+.” When setting the Menu items, the current setting FAST will appear in this area. This indicator appears when the Main Tuning Dial When setting the CTCSS frequency for Encoding knob’s tuning rate is selected to fast. or Tone Squelch operation, the current repeater shift MIC EQ direction will appear in this area. This indicator appears whenever the Three-Band Para- CLAR metric Microphone Equalizer is activated. This indicator appears whenever the Clarifier function CLASS-A is activated. This indicator appears when Class-A operation is en- MR gaged. This indicator appears when the FT-2000D is in the Memory Recall mode. MT This indicator appears when the FT-2000D is in the Memory Tune mode to indicate that the memory con- tents have been temporarily changed. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 29
  • 32. DISPLAY INDICATIONS (RIGHT SIDE) Sub (VFO-B) Receiver S-Meter LSB, USB, CW, AM, FM, RTTY, PKT Displays the strength of signals received on the Sub Displays the currently selected operating mode for the band (VFO-B). Sub (VFO-B) receiver. TX FAST This indicator appears during transmission on the Sub This indicator appears when the [SUB VFO-B] knob’s band (VFO-B) frequency. tuning rate is selected to fast. BUSY AGC A, F, M, S This indicator appears whenever the Sub band (VFO- Displays the currently selected AGC decay time for B) receiver squelch is open. If this indicator is not show- the Sub (VFO-B) receiver. ing, and reception seems to have been lost on the Sub A: Auto, F: Fast, M: Medium, S: Slow receiver for no apparent reason, check the position of NB the Sub [SQL] knob and rotate it fully counter-clock- This indicator appears when the Sub (VFO-B) wise to restore reception. receiver’s (short duration) Noise Blanker is activated. Sub (VFO-B) Frequency Display This indicator will blink for three seconds, and there- This is the Sub band (VFO-B) frequency display. after appears continuously, when the Sub (VFO-B) ADVICE: receiver’s longer-pulse Noise Blanker is activated. When setting the Menu items, the Menu item name NAR will appear in this area during setup. This indicator appears whenever the optional Sub When setting the CTCSS frequency for Encoding (VFO-B) receiver’s narrow filter is selected. or Tone Squelch operation, the current tone fre- quency will appear in this area during setup. When activating the CW Spot Tone, the current tone frequency will appear in this area. Page 30 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 33. REAR PANEL RX ANT OUT Jack COOLING FAN This BNC jack provides output of the receiver signal This is a cooling fan for cooling down the Power Am- lines from the Antenna jacks which are connected to plifier Unit. “RX” side of the transceiver’s main T/R switching cir- Usually, this cooling fan does not rotate. However, cuitry. when the temperature begins to rise, the cooling fan begins to rotate. RX ANT IN Jack This type-M jack is for a separate receive-only antenna. – DC 13.8 V ... IN Jack An antenna connected here can be used when the [RX] Connect this 6-pin connector to the DC 13.8 V Output antenna button on the front panel is pressed. Jack on the FP-2000 AC Power Supply, using the sup- If you want to use some special kind of external plied DC Power Cord. This connector provides +13.8 bandpass filter or preamplifier, you may connect it V DC supply voltage for the FT-2000D. between the RX ANT OUT and RX ANT IN jacks. – DC 50 V ... IN Jack ANT 1/2 Jacks Connect this 2-pin connector to the DC 50 V Output Connect your main antenna(s) here, using a type-M Jack on the FP-2000 AC Power Supply, using the sup- (PL-259) plug and coaxial feedline for each. These an- plied DC Power Cord. This connector provides +50 V tenna ports are always used for transmission, and also DC supply voltage for the power amplifier of the FT- are used for reception unless a separate receive an- 2000D. tenna is also used for the receiver. The internal antenna GND tuner affects only the antenna(s) connected here, and Use this terminal to connect the transceiver to a good only during transmission. earth ground, for safety and optimum performance. Use a large diameter, short braided cable for making ground ANTENNA (1/2) SWITCH TX/RX RELAY ANT “1” Transmitter Section connections, and please refer to page 9 for other notes ANT “2” ANTENNA (RX) SWITCH about proper grounding. Receiver Section µ-TUNE Jacks RX ANT “OUT” These jacks are used for signal input/output of the op- RX ANT “IN” tional RF µTuning Kit. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 31
  • 34. REAR PANEL ROT (ROTATOR) Jack PTT Jack This 5-pin MINI-DIN Jack accepts a cable connected This RCA input jack may be used to provide manual to a YAESU G-800DXA/-1000DXA/-2800DXA An- transmitter activation using a footswitch or other tenna Rotator (listed models are current as of early switching device. Its function is identical to the [MOX] 2006). You may control the antenna azimuth rotation button on the front panel. The same line is available at (and rotation speed) using the Function buttons on the the PACKET and RTTY jacks for TNC control. Open- front panel. circuit voltage is +13.5 VDC, and closed-circuit cur- rent is 5 mA. BND (BAND) DATA Jack This 8-pin output jack provides band selection data MIC (PATCH) Jack which may be used for control of optional accessories This RCA input jack accepts transmitter audio - either such as the VL-1000 Solid-state Linear Amplifier. AFSK or voice - for transmission. This line is mixed with the microphone audio input line, so the micro- PACKET Jack phone should be disconnected if using this jack and This 5-pin input/output jack provides receiver audio mixing is not desired. The optimum impedance is 500 and squelch signals, and accepts transmit (AFSK) au- ~ 600 Ohms, and the nominal input level should be 5 dio and PTT control, from an external Packet TNC. mV. Pinout is shown on page 15. The receiver audio level at this jack is approximately 100 mVp-p (@600 Ohms). TRV Jack This RCA jack provides a low level RF output for use RTTY Jack with a transverter. Maximum output is approximately This 4-pin input/output jack provides connections for –10 dBm (0.1 mW) at 50 Ohms. an RTTY terminal unit. Pinout is shown on page 15. The receiver audio level at this jack is at a constant REC Jack 100-mV (@600 Ohms) level. FSK keying at this jack This RCA jack provides low-level receiver audio out- is accomplished by a closure of the SHIFT line to put and transmit audio, for recording or external am- ground by the terminal unit. plification. Peak signal level is 30 mVp-p at 10 kOhms. EXT ALC Jack This RCA input jack accepts negative-going external ALC (Automatic Level Control) voltage from a linear amplifier, to prevent over-excitation by the transceiver. Acceptable input voltage range is 0 to –4 VDC. Page 32 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 35. REAR PANEL TX REQ Jack REM (REMOTE) Jack When this RCA jack shorted to ground, it puts the FT- By plugging in the optional FH-2 Remote Control Key- 2000D into the transmit mode, and sends out a steady pad to this gold-plated jack, direct access to the FT- CW carrier, for linear amplifier or manual antenna tuner 2000D CPU is provided for control functions such as adjustment. contest memory keying, plus frequency and function control. TX GND Jack This RCA jack’s center pin is closed to ground while EXT SPKR the transceiver’s transmitter is engaged. It may be used This gold-plated two-contact output jack provides re- for control of a peripheral device, most typically a lin- ceiving audio from the Main (VFO-A) and Sub (VFO- ear amplifier. To enable this jack, please set Menu item B) receivers for an external loudspeaker or speakers, “144 tGEn ETX-GND” to the “EnA” (Enable) selec- such as the SP-2000. Inserting a plug into this jack tion. disables the internal loudspeaker. Impedance is 4 ~ 8 The relay circuit of the FT-2000D used for this jack is Ohms. capable of switching AC voltage of 100 Volts at up to µ-TUNE Jack 300 mA, or DC voltages or 60 V at 200 mA or 30 V at This 10-pin MINI-DIN jack used for control of the up to 1 Amp. optional RF µTuning Kit. +13.8 V Jack DMU Jack This RCA output jack provides regulated, separately This 8-pin MINI-DIN jack accepts a cable connected fused 13.8 VDC at up to 200 mA, to power an external to an optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit. device such as a packet TNC. Make sure your device does not require more current (if it does, use a separate PGM (PROGRAM) Jack power source). This coverd 9-pin MINI-DIN jack is used at the fac- tory. Please do not connect any equipment to this jack. AF OUT This gold-plated 3-contact jack provides dual-channel CAT Jack low-level receiver output, for recording or external am- This 9-pin serial DB-9 jack allows external computer plification. Peak signal level is 300 mVp-p at 10 k- control of the FT-2000D. Connect a serial cable here Ohms. Main band (VFO-A) receiver audio is on the and to the RS-232C COM port on your personal com- left channel (tip), and sub band (VFO-B) receiver au- puter (no external interface is required). dio is on the right channel (ring). A stereo amplifier or KEY Jack recorder is recommended, to record each receiver’s This 1/4-inch phone jack accepts a CW key or keyer audio separately when dual reception is enabled (au- paddle. A 2-contact plug cannot be used in this jack. dio from either receiver, or both, may be used via this Key-up voltage is +5 V, and key-down current is 1 mA. jack). The front panel [AF GAIN] knobs do not affect Plug wiring is shown on page 15, and this jack may be the signals at this jack. configured for keyer, “Bug,” “straight key,” or com- puter keying interface operation via Menu item “054 A1A R-TYPE.” FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 33
  • 36. FP-2000 SWITCHES & JACKS POWER Switch AC IN Jack This is the FP-2000’s main ON (I)/OFF (O) switch. Connect the supplied 3-wire AC line cord to this socket. When turned on, the FP-2000 LED indicator will glow Cooling Fan red several seconds later. This is a fan for cooling the internal power supply unit. If this main switch is not set to the “(I)” position, the Usually, this fan does not rotate. However, when the FT-2000D’s [POWER] switch will not function. temperature begins to rise, the cooling fan begins to rotate. OUTPUT DC 13.8 V Jack Connect this 6-pin connector to the DC 13.8 V Input Jack on the FT-2000D, using the supplied DC Power Cord. The DC output is 13.8 Volts, with maximum current of 6 Amps. OUTPUT DC 50 V Jack Connect this 2-pin connector to the DC 50 V Input Jack on the FT-2000D, using the supplied DC Power Cord. The DC output is 50 Volts, with maximum cur- rent of 12 Amps. NOTE FUSE Rarely, when a rush of current flows, the FP-2000 This holder requires a 15 Amp fuse. Always use the 15 may buzz faintly. This is a normal condition. Amp fuse, whether operating on 100 - 120 VAC or 200 - 240 VAC. Page 34 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 37. BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS Before turning on main power, please verify the following items once more. Have you made all ground connections securely? See page 9 for details. Do you have your antenna(s) connected to the rear-panel Antenna jack(s)? See page 10 for details. Is your microphone (and/or key or paddle) connected? See pages 11 and 12 for details. If using a linear amplifier, have all interconnections been successfully completed? See pages 13 and 14 for details. Please rotate both [AF GAIN] controls to their fully counter-clockwise positions, to avoid a loud blast of audio when the transceiver turns on. See page 21 for details. Rotate the [RF PWR] control fully counter-clockwise, to set minimum power at first. See page 21 for details. If your AC mains power should suffer a significant fluctuation or interruption, we recommend that you go through a complete power-up cycle, in order to ensure that all circuits are properly initialized. To do this, be sure the FT-2000D’s [POWER] switch is turned off, then set the FP-2000’s [POWER] switch to the “O” position. Now unplug the AC cable from the rear panel of the FP-2000, and wait ten seconds before proceeding with the start-up procedure described on next page. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 35
  • 38. BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS Here is the typical start-up procedure for normal operation: (VFO-B) [BAND] Button [POWER] Switch [MODE] Button (VFO-B) [MHz] Button [ANTENNA] Button [SQL] Knob Main [RX] Button [FAST] Button Sub [RX] Button CLAR + Sub [SQL] Knob [AF GAIN] Knob Main Tuning Dial knob [BAND] Button [A/B] Button Sub [AF GAIN] Knob (VFO-A) [BAND] Button [SUB VFO-B] Knob (VFO-A) [MHz] Button 1. Set the FP-2000’s [ POWER ] Press the Sub [RX] button to switch to “I” position. engage Dual Reception (us- 2. Press and hold in the FT-2000D’s ing the Sub (VFO-B) re- [POWER] switch for one second ceiver in addition to the to turn the transceiver on. Main (VFO-A) receiver). 3. The transceiver will start up on 7.000.00 When you press the Sub MHz LSB, and normal operation may begin. [RX] button, its imbedded LED NOTE: will glow green; pressing this To turn power off, press and hold in the FT-2000D’s button once more will turn off [POWER] switch for one second. the Sub (VFO-B) receiver, and 4. Rotate the [AF GAIN] knob to set the imbeded LED will go dark. a comfortable audio level on incom- Use the Sub receiver’s Sub [AF ing signals or noise. Clockwise ro- GAIN] knob to adjust the Sub tation of the [AF GAIN] knob in- (VFO-B) receiver volume level. creases the volume level. 6. Press the [BAND] but- NOTE: ton corresponding to When using headphones, start by rotating the [AF the Amateur band on GAIN] knob counter-clockwise, then bring the volume which you wish to be- level up after you put the headphones on. This will gin operation. minimize the chance of damage to your hearing caused ADVICE: by an unexpectedly-high audio level. One-touch selec- 5. Press the Main [RX] but- tion of each Ama- ton to engage the Main teur band between (VFO-A) receiver; the 1.8 and 50 MHz is provided. imbedded LED will glow The FT-2000D utilizes a triple band-stack VFO Green. selection technique, which permits you to store up ADVICE: to three favorite frequencies and modes onto each If you press the Main band’s VFO register. For example, you may store [RX] button when the imbedded LED is already one frequency each on 14 MHz CW, RTTY, and glowing Green, the LED will now blink on and off; USB, then recall these VFOs by successive, mo- this indicates that the Main (VFO-A) receiver is mentary presses of the [14] MHz band button. Each temporarily muted. Just press the Main [RX] but- Amateur band button may similarly have up to three ton once more to restore Main (VFO-A) receiver frequency/mode settings applied. operation. Page 36 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 39. BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS If you press the (VFO-A) [BAND ] button, the When operating on the FM [SUB VFO-B] knob may be used as a band selec- mode, rotate the [SQL] tion knob. If you press the (VFO-A) [MHz] but- (Squelch) knob clockwise just ton, rotation of the [SUB VFO-B] knob allows fre- to the point where the back- quency navigation in 1 MHz steps. Depending on ground noise is just silenced. the setting of the (VFO-A) [BAND ], (VFO-A) This is the point of maximum [MHz], and [A/B] buttons, the function of the [SUB sensitivity to weak signals. Excessive VFO-B] knob will change. advancement of the [SQL] knob will degrade the ability of the receiver to detect weak signals. Adjustment of the Sub band (VFO-B) Squelch is accom- plished using the Sub [SQL] knob. 9. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to tune around the band, and begin normal operation. ADVICE: Clockwise rotation of the Main Tuning Dial knob increases the operating frequency, one “step” of the synthesizer at a time; similarly, counter-clockwise rotation of the Main Tuning Dial knob will decrease 7. Press the [ANTENNA 1/2] button to select the appro- the frequency. priate antenna for the band in use; alternatively, if one Two steps, one “normal” is connected, you may also press the and one “fast,” are available [ANTENNA RX] antenna selection on each operating mode. button. Two TX/RX antennas may be Pressing the [FAST] button connected, or one RX-only antenna. engages the “Fast” tuning ADVICE: selection. Once you have made your antenna selection, that an- It is possible to separate the frequency change over tenna is “remembered” by the microprocessor in con- one dial rotation, only while operating solely on junction with the VFO register (frequency and mode) the CW mode, using the Menu items “116 tun in use when you chose that particular antenna. DIALSTP,” and “117 tun CW FINE.” See page 127. 8. Press the appropriate [MODE] but- If you want to navigate quickly, so as to effect rapid ton to select the desired operating frequency change, there are several techniques mode. available: ADVICE: Direct keyboard entry of the frequency (see page By convention in the Amateur 49). bands, LSB is used on the 7 MHz Use the [SUB VFO-B] knob to tune in 1 MHz and lower bands (with the excep- steps (see page 49). tion of 60 meters), while USB is Use the microphone’s [UP]/[DWN] scanning utilized on the 14 MHz and keys, if your microphone is so equipped (see higher bands. page 49). When changing modes from SSB MAIN TUNING DIAL KNOB TUNING RATE to CW, you will observe a fre- OPERATING MODE 1 STEP 1 DIAL ROTATION quency shift on the display. This shift represents LSB, USB, CW, 10Hz 10kHz the BFO offset between the “zero beat” frequency RTTY, PKT(LSB) [100Hz] [100kHz] and the audible CW pitch (tone) you can hear (the AM, FM, PKT(FM) 100Hz [1kHz] 100kHz [1MHz] pitch is programmed by the [PITCH] knob), even [ ] : [FAST] switch set to “ON” though the actual tone that you hear is not chang- ing. If you do not want this frequency shift to ap- pear when changing modes from (for example) USB to CW, use the Menu item “061 A1A FRQDISP,” described on page 122. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 37
  • 40. BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS OPERATION ON 60-METER (5 MHZ) BAND (U.S. VERSION ONLY) The FT-2000D includes the capability for transmission and reception on the five spot frequencies assigned to the Ama- teur Service in the United States. To operate on the 5 MHz band: 1. Press the [V/M] button once to enter the “Memory” Main Tuning Dial Knob [M CH] Button mode (a memory channel number “USx” will appear on the Multi-Display Window in the display. 2. Press the [M CH] button. The LED imbedded in the button will glow red to signify that rotation of the [SUB VFO-B] knob will allow selection the memory chan- nel. ADVICE: If the memory channel selection seems not to be oper- [V/M] Button ating, check see if the orange lamp to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] Knob [SUB VFO-B] knob is illuminated. If so, pressing the [A/B] Button [A/B] button will cause the orange lamp to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob to go out. Now, press the [M CH] button to begin memory channel selection. 3. Memory channels “US1” through “US5” are pre-pro- grammed, at the factory, with the permitted frequen- cies in the 5 MHz band, and the USB mode is auto- matically selected on these channels. 4. To exit from 60-meter operation and return to the VFO mode, just press the [V/M] button. NOTE: The frequencies and operating mode for 5 MHz band op- eration are both fixed, and may not be changed. Page 38 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 41. BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS CLAR (CLARIFIER) OPERATION ON MAIN (VFO-A) The [TX CLAR], [RX CLAR], [CLEAR] buttons and [SUB VFO-B] knob are used to offset either the receive, transmit, or both frequencies from their settings on the Main band (VFO-A) frequency (the Clarifier does not affect the Sub band (VFO-B), however). The four small numbers on the Multi-Display Window show the current Clarifier offset. The Clarifier controls on the FT-2000D are designed to allow you to preset an offset (up to ±9.990 kHz) without actually retuning, and then to activate it via the Clarifier’s [RX CLAR] and [TX CLAR] buttons. This feature is ideal for following a drifting station, or for setting small frequency offsets sometimes utilized in DX “Split” work. Here is the technique for utilizing the Clarifier: [CLAR] Knob 1. Press the [RX CLAR] button. In the Multi-Display Window, the “RX” notation will appear, and the programmed off- set will be applied to the receive frequency. 2. Rotation of the [CLAR] knob will allow you to modify your initial offset on the fly. Offsets of up to ±9.990 kHz may be set using the Clarifier. [RX CLAR] Button [TX CLAR] Button To cancel Clarifier operation, press the [RX CLAR] but- [CLEAR] Button ton. The “RX” notation will disappear from the display. CLAR + ADVICE: Turning the Clarifier Off simply cancels the application of the programmed offset from the receive and/or transmit frequencies. To clear out the programmed Clarifier offset altogether, and reset it to “zero,” press the [CLEAR] but- ton. The programmed offset is displayed in the small multi- channel window of the frequency display. TX CLAR Without changing the receive frequency, you may alternatively apply the Clarifier offset to the trans- mit frequency (typically, for “split” DX pile-ups). See page 79 for details. The Tuning Offset Indicator provides a graphical representation of the Clarifier offset. On CW, the Tuning Offset Indicator is used for CW Center Tuning, instead of Clarifier Offset, as the transceiver is configured at the factory. If you wish to change this, so that the Clarifier Offset is also displayed on CW, use the following procedure: 1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode. [MENU] Button 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item “010 diSP BAR SEL.” 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select “CLAr (Clarifier)” (replacing the default “C-tn (CW TUN- ING)” selection). 4. Press and hold in the [MENU ] but- (TX Frequency < RX Frequency) ton for two seconds Main Tuning Dial knob [SUB VFO-B] knob to save the new set- ting and exit to nor- (TX Frequency = RX Frequency) mal operation. (TX Frequency > RX Frequency) FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 39
  • 42. BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS LOCK You may lock the setting of the Main Tuning Dial knob, to prevent accidental frequency change. [LOCK] Button To lock out the Main Tuning Dial knob, just press the [LOCK] but- ton that is located to the right of the Dial. To unlock the Dial setting, and restore normal tuning, just press the [LOCK] button once more. DIM The illumination level of the analog meter and frequency display may be reduced, if you are using the transceiver in a dark environment where high brightness is not desired. To reduce the illumina- [DIM] Button tion level, press the [DIM] button, located to the left of the analog meter. To restore full brightness, press the [ DIM ] button once more. You may also customize the amount of brightness reduc- tion engaged by the pressing of the [DIM] button, and may use different brightness levels for different front panel ar- eas. Menu item “008 diSP DIM MTR” adjusts the bright- ness level of the analog meter; while menu item “009 diSP DIM VFD” sets the brightness levels of the frequency dis- play (these settings are effective only when the [DIM] but- ton is pressed). Page 40 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 44. CONVENIENCE FEATURES DUAL RECEIVE The FT-2000D is capable of simultaneous reception on the same amateur band, using the Main (VFO-A) and Sub (VFO- B) receivers, in what is called the Dual Receive mode. Especially useful for DX work, here is the operating procedure for Dual Receive operation. 1. While receiving on the Main band (VFO-A), engage Sub [AF GAIN] Knob Main Tuning Dial Knob [SQL] Knob Sub [RX] Button the Sub (VFO-B) receiver by pressing the Sub [RX] button, located to the upper left of the [SUB VFO-B] knob. You will now be receiving on the two frequen- cies shown on the frequency display. 2. Adjusting the volume: To adjust the Main (VFO-A) audio level, rotate the Main [AF GAIN] knob. To adjust the Sub (VFO-B) audio level, rotate the Sub [AF GAIN] knob. In both Sub [SQL] Knob [B] Button [BAND] Button cases, clockwise rotation of the knob will increase the [AF GAIN] Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob volume level. 3. Press the [B] button. Within five seconds of pressing the [B] button, while the orange LED is blinking, you ADVICE: may now change the operating mode for the Sub (VFO- When operating in Dual Receive, the manner in which B) band by pressing the appropriate Mode selection the audio is fed to the left and right sides of your head- button. phones (Stereo, Monaural, or Mixed) may be config- 4. Having pressed the [B] button in the previous step, ured using Menu item “089 rout HEADPHN” (see you may also press the [BAND] buttons to select the page 124). operating band on which you want to set up the Sub When changing modes from SSB to CW, you will ob- (VFO-B) receiver. serve a frequency shift on the display. This shift repre- 5. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to adjust the Main sents the BFO offset between the “zero beat” frequency (VFO-A) frequency, and rotate the [SUB VFO-B] and the audible CW pitch (tone) you can hear (the pitch knob to adjust the Sub (VFO-B) frequency. is programmed by the [PITCH] knob), even though 6. To cancel Dual Receive operation, and receive just on the actual tone that you hear is not changing. If you do the Main (VFO-A) receiver, press the Sub [RX] but- not want this frequency shift to appear when changing ton; the imbedded green LED will go out, and modes from (for example) USB to CW, use the Menu monoband operation on the Main (VFO-A) receiver item “061 A1A FRQDISP,” described on page 122. will resume. When operating on the FM mode on the Sub band (VFO-B), rotate the Sub [SQL] knob clockwise just NOTE: to the point where the background noise is just silenced. Please remember that, while the [B] mode button is blink- This is the point of maximum sensitivity to weak sig- ing (for five seconds), any mode or band changes will still nals. Excessive advancement of the Sub [SQL] knob be applied to the Sub band (VFO-B), whether or not Dual will degrade the ability of the receiver to detect weak Receive is engaged. signals. Adjustment of the Main band (VFO-A) Squelch QUICK POINT: is accomplished using the Main [SQL] knob. By convention in the Amateur bands, LSB is used on the 7 The frequency ranges of the various fixed bandpass MHz and lower bands (with the exception of 60 meters), filters are shown in the chart below. You may operate while USB is utilized on the 14 MHz and higher bands. on Dual Receive RF BPF FREQUENCY DIVISION with both receivers 0.03000 MHz ~ 0.49999 MHz 0.50000 MHz ~ 1.69999 MHz set within the same 1.70000 MHz ~ 2.49999 MHz range, even if they 2.50000 MHz ~ 3.39999 MHz are not on the same 3.40000 MHz ~ 4.69999 MHz Amateur band (for 4.70000 MHz ~ 6.89999 MHz 6.90000 MHz ~ 9.89999 MHz example, the 14 and 9.90000 MHz ~ 13.89999 MHz 18 MHz, or 21 and 13.90000 MHz ~ 20.89999 MHz 24.9 MHz bands). 20.90000 MHz ~ 30.09999 MHz 30.10000 MHz ~ 44.99999 MHz Of course, a suitable 45.99999 MHz ~ 59.99999 MHz multiband antenna is required. Page 42 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 45. CONVENIENCE FEATURES DUAL RECEIVE Using Headphones for Dual Receive Sideband Diversity Reception To take advantage of dual reception, you will want to con- Here you receive a single AM signal through the two re- nect stereo headphones to the PHONES jack. Like the ceivers, each receiving the opposite sideband. Skywave- AF GAIN control, headphone audio mixing can also be propagated signals often show phase distortion in this configured as desired from Menu item “089 rout mode, but it gives you a view of the entire passband, from HEADPHN.” Three audio mixing schemes are selectable which you can then select the best sideband for listening as follows: (or for SWL Dx’ing, you may want to listen to both side- bands at the same time, to get the best copy). On SEP: Audio from the Main band (VFO-A) receiver is groundwave signals, where the phase of the sidebands is heard only in the left ear, and Sub band (VFO-B) likely to be the same, there is an interesting sense of depth receiver audio solely in the right ear. to the signal. Con1: Audio from both Main band (VFO-A) and Sub band (VFO-B) receivers can be heard in both ears, To tune in a signal using this mode, you should have ste- but Sub band (VFO-B) audio is attenuated in the reo headphones connected to the front panel PHONES left ear and Main band (VFO-A) audio is attenu- jack. ated in the right ear. Set the Main band (VFO-A) to either LSB or USB Con2: Audio from both Main band (VFO-A) and Sub mode, and tune for zero beat on the desired signal. band (VFO-B) receivers are combined and heard Press the [A B] button to copy this mode and fre- equally in both ears “Monaural” mode). quency into the Sub band (VFO-B), then press the mode button to select the opposite sideband for the Main band (VFO-A). If using headphones, set the headphone mixing scheme to the “Con1” mode via the Menu item “089 rout HEADPHN,” and activate dual reception. Adjust the [AF GAIN] knob(s) to balance the volume of the two receivers. If interference is present on one of the channels, you may have to turn its [AF GAIN] knob to suppress that channel (or press the green [RX] LED/button to dis- able the receiver with the sideband experiencing inter- ference). Otherwise, try changing the headphone au- dio mixing scheme to “Con2” or “SEP” in the Menu item “089 rout HEADPHN,” for different effects (or try settings with similar effects on your external am- plifier). Although you don’t get the “stereophonic” ef- fect in the monaural mode, the two signals are still mixed, offering the potential for much better copy than in regular AM or even single-sideband ECSS modes. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 43
  • 46. CONVENIENCE FEATURES DUAL RECEIVE Bandwidth Diversity Reception This mode involves receiving the same signal through two different bandpass filters. The frequency and mode of both the Main band (VFO-A) and Sub band (VFO-B) are the same. The Main band (VFO-A) can be set up for a wide bandpass, using the [WIDTH] knobs, and the Sub band (VFO-B) for a narrow bandpass, resulting in a spatial per- ception of the channel. Although any mode (except FM) can be used, CW offers the widest array of choices, and perhaps the most startling effects on crowded channels. Stereo headphones or an external stereo speaker are rec- ommended for this mode. To set up the transceiver for bandwidth diversity reception: Select the desired mode on the Main band (VFO-A). Tune to the signal of interest. Press the [A B] button to copy this mode and fre- quency into the Sub band (VFO-B). If using headphones, set the headphone mixing scheme to the “Con1” mode via the Menu item “089 rout HEADPHN,” and activate dual reception. Adjust the [AF GAIN] knob(s) to balance the volume of the two receivers. Now try manipulating the [SHIFT ] and [WIDTH ] knobs to observe the interesting effects of bandwidth diversity. Page 44 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 47. CONVENIENCE FEATURES P.BACK (AUDIO PLAYBACK) FROM MAIN (VFO-A) RECEIVER Once engaged by the operator, the FT-2000D begins the automatic recording of the last 15 seconds of incoming receiver audio on the Main band (VFO-A). This capability is especially useful for confirming a callsign that may have been difficult to copy due to noise or QRM, etc. Recording [AF GAIN] Knob Press and hold in the [F7(P.BACK)] button for two sec- onds to initiate record- ing; the “ ” icon will appear in the display to confirm that recording is in progress. The re- corder will store up to 15 seconds of the Main [F7(P.BACK)] Button band (VFO-A) received audio, and will retain the most-recent 15 seconds of audio on a running basis. Pressing the [F7(P.BACK)] button once more will halt Playback the recording, and the “ ” icon will go out. Press the [F7(P.BACK)] button momentarily, after record- NOTE: Stop ing has been halted, to begin playback of the recorded When the transceiver is audio; the “ ” icon will appear in the display to con- turned off, the contents of firm that playback is in progress. The last 15 seconds of the recording memory will audio will be heard in the speaker or headphones. If you be erased! do not intervene, the entire 15 seconds will be played back endlessly. To halt playback at any time, just press the [F7(P.BACK)] button momentarily again. The next time you press the [F7(P.BACK)] button, it will pick up the Start playback where you left off. ADVICE 15 Seconds You may adjust the playback level of the recording by the main [AF GAIN] knob P.BACK feature from the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad The [P/B] key of the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad can also serve as a remote-control recording/playback switch. Operation is described below. Recording Playback Press and hold in the FH-2’s [P/B] key for two sec- Press the FH-2’s [P/B] key momentarily, after record- onds to initiate recording. ing has been halted, to begin playback of the recorded The “ ” icon will appear audio; the “ ” icon will appear in the display to in the display to confirm that re- confirm that playback is in progress.. The last 15 sec- cording is in progress. LOCK onds of audio will be heard in the speaker or head- Press the FH-2’s [P/B] key mo- ON OFF phones. If you do not intervene, the entire 15 seconds mentarily to halt recording; the will be played back endlessly. To halt playback at any “ ” icon will go out. time, just press the [P/B] key momentarily again. The You may also press the front next time you press the [P/B] key, it will pick up the panel’s [F7(P.BACK)] button playback where you left off. You may also press the (momentarily) to halt recording, front panel’s [F7(P.BACK)] button (momentarily) to as well. play back the recorded audio, as well. When the transceiver is turned ADVICE off, the contents of the record- You may adjust the playback level of the recording by ing memory will be erased. the main [AF GAIN] knob FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 45
  • 48. CONVENIENCE FEATURES “MY BANDS” OPERATION When operating on an Amateur Band, it is possible to use the [BAND] buttons to engage the use of the [SUB VFO-B] knob for Amateur band selection. The “My Bands” feature allows you to select several Amateur bands, and make only those bands available for selection via the [SUB VFO-B] knob. This feature can be very useful in a contest, where the 10/18/24 MHz band are not used, or if you do not have antennas for some bands. “My Bands” Setup 1. Press the [MENU] button to engage the Menu mode. Main Tuning Dial knob [ENT] Button 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item “122 tun MY BAND.” 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to choose a band that you wish to skip (omit) from the band-selection loop (when using the [SUB VFO-B] knob for band selec- tion). The available choices are 1.8/3.5/5/7/10/14/18/ 21/24/28/50/GE (General Band)/AU (Transverter). 4. Press the [ENT] button to set the omission command [MENU] Button to ON. The “E” (Enable) notation at the right of the [SUB VFO-B] Knob band notation will change to “d” (disable). 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select/deselect as many bands as you like. NOTE: The “ON” command sets the selected band to be skipped, while the “OFF” command sets the selected band to be included in the band-selection list. Return the “d” notation to “E” to restore operation on a previ- ously-deleted band. ADVICE: 6. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds The “My Band” feature affects both the Main (VFO-A) to lock in the new configuration and exit to normal and Sub (VFO-B) bands. operation. “My Band” Operation 1. Press the (VFO-A) [BAND] button; the imbedded LED (VFO-B)[BAND] Button will glow Red, if you operate the “My Band” feature (VFO-A)[BAND] Button on the Main band (VFO-A). ADVICE: If the “My Band” feature on the Main band (VFO-A) seems not to be operating, check see if the orange lamp to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob is illuminated. If so, pressing the [A/B] key will cause the orange lamp to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob to go out. Now, press the (VFO-A) [BAND] button to begin “My Band” [SUB VFO-B] Knob [A/B] Button feature. 2. Press the (VFO-B) [BAND] button; the imbedded LED 1.8 MHz will glow Orange, if you operate the “My Band” fea- 3.5 MHz ture on the Sub band (VFO-B). 5 MHz 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to choose the Ama- 7 MHz 7 MHz 14 MHz 21 MHz teur band on which you wish to operate. Only those 10 MHz 3.5 MHz 3.5 MHz 28 MHz Amateur bands that have not been skipped will appear 14 MHz 7 MHz as you scroll through the bands. 18 MHz 14 MHz 21 MHz 21 MHz 24 MHz 28 MHz 28 MHz 50 MHz Page 46 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 49. CONVENIENCE FEATURES BAND STACK OPERATION The FT-2000D utilizes a triple band-stack VFO selection technique, that permits you to store up to three favorite frequen- cies and modes onto each band’s VFO register. For example, you may store one frequency each on 14 MHz CW, RTTY, and USB, then recall these VFOs by successive, momentary presses of the [14] MHz band button. Each Amateur band key may similarly have up to three frequency/mode settings applied. Both the Main (VFO-A) and Sub (VFO-B) systems have their own, independent, band stacks. A typical setup, for the 14 MHz band, might be arranged like this: 1. Program 14.025 MHz, CW Mode, then press the [14] MHz band button; 2. Program 14.080 MHz, RTTY Mode, then press the [14] MHz band button; 3. Program 14.195 MHz, SSB Mode, then press the [14] MHz band button. With this configuration, successive momentary presses of [BAND] Switch the [14] MHz band button will allow you to toggle se- quentially through these three VFOs. USB RTTY CW C.S (CUSTOM SWITCH) An often-used Menu mode selection may be brought out to the front panel’s [C.S] button. C.S Setup 1. Press the [MENU] button to engage the Menu mode; Main Tuning Dial Knob the Menu list will appear on the display. 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the Menu item you want to be able to access via the [C.S] but- ton. 3. Press and hold in the [C.S] button for two seconds to lock in your selection. 4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to save the new configuration and exit to normal op- [MENU] Button eration. [C.S] Button Menu Selection Recall via [C.S] button Press the [C.S] button. [MENU] Button The programmed Menu item will appear on the display. You may now rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to change the setting of this menu item. Press the [MENU] button for two seconds, when you are done, to save the new con- figuration and exit to normal operation. [C.S] Button [SUB VFO-B] Knob FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 47
  • 50. CONVENIENCE FEATURES ROTATOR CONTROL FUNCTIONS When using a YAESU model G-800DXA, G-1000DXA, or G-2800DXA rotator (not supplied), it is possible to control it from the front panel of the FT-2000D. 1 Press and hold in the [ENT] button (one of the [BAND] button) for two seconds. The frequency display area will change over to the “Rotator Control” configura- tion. 2 Press either the [F2(CH-2)] button or the [F3(CH-3)] button to rotate the antenna. Pressing the [F2(CH-2)] button will cause rotation to the left (counter-clock- wise), while pressing the [F3(CH-3)] button will cause [F5(MEM)], [F6(DEC)] Button [ENT] Button rotation to the right (clockwise). [F2(CH-2)], [F3(CH-3)] Button 3 Press the [F5(MEM)] button or the [F6(DEC)] button to control the speed of rotation. Pressing the Speed (0 % ~ 100 %) Direction (0° ~ 360°) [F5(MEM)] button will cause slower rotation, while pressing the [F6(DEC)] button will speed up rotation. Usually, you will be using the “100%” setting. When you are through exercising rotator control, press the [ENT] button momentarily. The frequency display will “Overlap” Indicator return to the main display field. Counter-clockwise Rotation Speed Up IMPORTANT NOTE Set to match the starting point of your rotator control indicator needle via the Menu item “012 diSP RTR STU.” The default setting is zero (north). If your controller starting point is Clockwise Rotation Speed Down south, the Menu item “012 diSP RTR STU” must be set to “180°.” If not set properly the FT-2000 display will not show the correct di- rection. When the rotator control indicator needle does not indicate the precise antenna direction, ad- justs the indicator needle precisely to the an- tenna direction via the Menu item “013 diSP RTR ADJ.” ~AC IN ANT 1 ANT 2 O PER ATI ON ADJ . MOD E F ULL O VER LAP A B O UT VOL MOD E SCA LE L ED A D J A DJ EX T SE LE CT A DJ P RES ET CO NT ROL SW T CH I ADJ ROT EXT CONTROL CONTROL REMOTE OPTIONAL CONNECTION CABLE (T9101556) Page 48 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 51. CONVENIENCE FEATURES MORE FREQUENCY NAVIGATION TECHNIQUES Keyboard Frequency Entry ADVICE: You may enter operating frequencies, for either the Main If you attempt to enter a frequency outside the operat- (VFO-A) or Sub (VFO-B) bands, using the front panel ing range of 30 kHz ~ 60 MHz, the microprocessor band/frequency selection keys. will ignore the attempt, and you will be returned to your previous operating frequency. If this happens, Example 1: please try again, taking care not to repeat the error in Enter 14.250.00 MHz into the Main band (VFO-A): the frequency entry process. 1. Press the [ENT] button to engage the direct fre- Using the [SUB VFO-B] knob quency entry process. You may change the Main band (VFO-A) frequency in 1 Now, beginning with MHz steps. If you press the (VFO-A) [BAND] button, the the “10 MHz” digit of 1 MHz steps will be applied to the Main band (VFO-A) the frequency (the frequency. The imbedded LED in the (VFO-A) [BAND] leftmost digit), we will button will glow Red in the latter case. enter the required dig- When tuning in 1 MHz steps, clockwise rotation of the its of the frequency. [SUB VFO-B] knob will increase the frequency, while 2. Press, in order, the digits of the operating frequency, counter-clockwise rotation will decrease the frequency. using the [BAND] buttons (which have the frequency- entry digit or decimal point on the right side of the Using the UP/DOWN Switches of the slash bar). In this example, enter Supplied MH-31B8 Hand Microphone [1.8/1] [10/4] [GEN/.] [3.5/2] The [UP]/[DWN] switches on [FST] Button [14/5] [50/0] [50/0] [50/0] [50/0] the supplied MH-31 B8 Hand [DWN] Button [UP] Button The decimal point after the “MHz” portion of the fre- Microphone may also be used quency must be entered, but no decimal point is re- for manually scanning upward or DWN FST UP quired after the “kHz” portion. downward in frequency, respec- 3. Press the [ENT] button once more. A short “beep” will tively. confirm that the frequency entry was successful, and The microphone’s [UP ]/ [DWN ] the new operating frequency will appear on the Main DYNAMIC MICROPHONE switches utilize the tuning steps of MH-31 (VFO-A) frequency display fields. the Main Tuning Dial knob; moreover, Example 2: when the microphone’s [FAST] key is Enter 7.100.000 MHz into the Sub band (VFO-B): pressed, the tuning rate increases by a 1. Press the [B] button. factor of ten, in a manner similar to the 2. Within five seconds (blinking the effect of the transceiver’s front-panel imbedded orange LED) of pressing [FAST] button. the [B] button, press the [ENT] but- ADVICE: ton to engage the direct frequency entry process. Now, In the AM and FM modes, you may independently set the beginning with the “10 MHz” digit of the frequency tuning steps when using the [UP]/[DWN] switches. To set (the leftmost digit), we will enter the required digits of new tuning steps, use Menu items “119 tun AM STEP” the frequency to be entered into the Sub band (VFO- and “120 tun FM STEP.” B) register. 3. Press, in order, the digits of the operating frequency, using the [BAND] buttons (which have the frequency- entry digit or decimal point on the right side of the slash bar). In this example, enter [21/7] [GEN/.] [1.8/1] [50/0] [50/0] [50/0] [50/0] [50/0] 4. Press the [ENT] button once more. A short “beep” will confirm that the frequency entry was successful, and the new operating frequency will appear on the Sub (VFO-B) frequency display fields. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 49
  • 52. CONVENIENCE FEATURES RECEIVER OPERATION (FRONT END BLOCK DIAGRAM) The FT-2000D includes a wide range of special features to suppress the many types of interference that may be encoun- tered on the HF bands. However, real world interference conditions are constantly changing, so optimum setting of the controls is somewhat of an art, requiring familiarity with the types of interference and the subtle effects of some of the controls. Therefore, the following information is provided as a general guideline for typical situations, and a starting point for your own experimentation. The FT-2000D’s interference-fighting circuitry begins in its “RF” stages, and continues throughout the entire receiver section. FT-2000D allows configuration of the features described below. However, the Sub band (VFO-B) receiver does not have the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) features. VRF (SEE PAGE 53) IF NOTCH (SEE PAGE 58) On the 1.9 - 28 MHz Amateur bands, Yaesu’s powerful The IF Notch filter is a high-Q notch filter that can signifi- VRF (Variable RF Filter) preselector circuit provides ex- cantly reduce, if not eliminate, an interfering carrier. The cellent suppression of out-of-band interference, with a Q (sharpness) of the filter may be adjusted using the Menu. passband much narrower than that provided by traditional fixed bandpass filters. DNR (DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION) (SEE PAGE 59) The DSP’s Digital Noise Reduction (DNR) feature uti- R. FLT (IF Roofing Filters) (SEE PAGE 54) lizes sixteen different mathematical algorithms to analyze On the Main (VFO-A) receiver, three automatically-se- and suppress different noise profiles encountered on the lected Roofing filters, in bandwidths of 15 kHz, 6 kHz, HF/50 MHz bands. Choose the selection that provides the and 3 kHz, are provided in the 69 MHz First IF, right after best noise suppression, which concurrently will allow the the first mixer. These filters provide narrow-band selec- signal to rise up out of the noise. tivity to protect the following IF and DSP stages, and the filters' automatically-selected bandwidths may be manu- DNF (DIGITAL NOTCH FILTER) (SEE PAGE 59) ally changed by the operator, if desired, for special oper- When multiple interfering carriers are encountered during ating circumstances. reception, the Digital Notch Filter can significantly reduce the level of these signals. The Sub (VFO-B) receiver’s 40 MHz IF includes a fixed Roofing filter, with a bandwidth of 15 kHz. AGC (SEE PAGE 62) The AGC system is highly adaptable to changing signal CONTOUR Filter (SEE PAGE 55) and fading characteristics, making reception possible un- The DSP Contour filter is a unique capability on the Main der the most difficult conditions. (VFO-A) receiver, providing either nulling or peaking of tunable segments of the receiver passband, so as to sup- SLOPED AGC (SEE PAGE 63) press interference or excessive frequency components on The Sloped AGC system on the Main (VFO-A) receiver, an incoming signal, or to peak those tunable frequency instead of clamping a fixed upper bound on audio output segments. The amount of nulling/peaking, and the band- across a wide range of input signals, actually allows the width over which it is applied, are adjustable via the Menu. audio output to rise, very gently, with ever-increasing sig- nal strength. This capability allows you to separate sig- IF SHIFT (SEE PAGE 56) nals, using your brain, according to signal strength in ad- The passband center frequency response of the IF DSP dition to slight frequency differences. filtering may be adjusted using this control. IF Filter Quality Adjustment (SEE PAGE 125) IF WIDTH (SEE PAGE 57) The “Q” (quality factor) of the IF DSP filters may be ad- The width of the IF DSP filtering may be adjusted using justed using the Menu. this control. Variable IF Filter Shape Factor (SEE PAGE 125) You may adjust the shape factor of the receiver IF DSP filters using the Menu. Main Band (VFO-A) RF 1st IF 2nd IF 3rd IF (DSP) 69.450 MHz 450 kHz 30 kHz THRU IPO OFF ROOFING OPTION FILTER µ-TUNE BPF RF AMP 1 1st CF 2nd DSP ATT IF AMP IF AMP UNIT ANTENNA 3k/6k/15k SELECTOR 1st Local 2nd Local 3rd Local VRF RF AMP 2 Sub Band (VFO-B) 1st IF 2nd IF 40.455 MHz 455 kHz ROOFING FILTER 1st CF 2nd DET IF AMP IF AMP 15k 1st Local 2nd Local Page 50 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 53. CONVENIENCE FEATURES IPO (INTERCEPT POINT OPTIMIZATION) The IPO feature allows the operator to optimize the characteristics of the receiver front end, depending on the current noise level and the strength of incoming signals. Press the [IPO] button several times to set the Receiver Configuration Indicator desired characteristic of the receiver front end, per the chart below. AMP1: Amplifies the incoming signal path using a low distortion RF preamplifier (gain: approx. 10 dB). AMP2: Amplifies incoming signal path using a 2- stage low-distortion RF preamplifier (total gain: approx. 17 dB). [IPO] Button ON: Bypasses the RF preamplifier, yielding di- rect feed to the first mixer. AMP1 AMP The selected receiver RF preamplifier will be indicated in the IPO column AMP2 AMP of the Receiver Configuration ON Indicator on the display. ADVICE: On the 10 MHz and lower bands, it generally is not necessary to use any preamplifier at all; selecting the “ON” position described above will increase the strong-signal-handling capability of the receiver, and generally will result in more pleas- ant reception due to reduced noise. If you can hear band noise with the preamplifiers disengaged, then a preamplifier is generally not needed. ATT Even with the IPO function on, extremely strong local signals or high noise can still degrade reception. In such situations, you can use the [ATT] button to insert 6, 12, or 18-dB of RF attenuation in front of the RF amplifier. 1. Press the [ATT] button several times to set Receiver Configuration Indicator the desired attenuation level, per the chart below. OFF: Attenuator is Off –6 dB: The incoming signal power is reduced by 6 dB (Signal voltage reduced by 1/2) –12 dB: The incoming signal power is reduced by 12 dB (Signal voltage reduced by 1/4) –18 dB: The incoming signal power is reduced by 18 [ATT] Button dB (Signal voltage reduced by 1/8) The selected attenuation level will be 2. To restore full signal strength through the Attenuator indicated in the ATT column of the Receiver Configu- circuit area, press the [ATT] button to restore the ATT ration Indicator on the display. display to the “OFF” position. ADVICE: The Attenuator affects both the Main (VFO-A) and Sub (VFO-B) bands. If background noise causes the S-meter to deflect on clear frequencies, press the [ATT] button until the S-meter drops to about “S-1.” This setting optimizes the trade-offs between sensitivity, noise, and interference immunity. Also, once you have tuned in a station you want to work, you may want to reduce sensitivity further (or add more attenuation) by pressing the [ATT] button to a more setting. This reduces the strength of all signals (and noise) and can make reception more comfort- able, important especially during long QSOs. When looking for weak signals on a quiet band, you will want maximum sensitivity, so the IPO should be disabled and the [ATT] button should be set to “OFF.” This situation is typical during quiet times on frequencies above 21 MHz, and when using a small or negative-gain receiving antenna on other bands. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 51
  • 54. CONVENIENCE FEATURES RF GAIN (SSB/CW/AM MODES) The RF Gain controls provide manual adjustment of the gain levels for the receiver RF and IF stages, to account for noise and/or signal strength conditions at the moment. 1. The Main [RF GAIN] knob should, initially, be ro- Main [RF GAIN] Knob tated to the fully clockwise position. This is the point of maximum sensitivity, and counter-clockwise rota- tion will gradually reduce the system gain. 2. The Sub [RF GAIN] knob operates identically to the Main [RF GAIN] knob. The fully clockwise position of the Sub [RF GAIN] knob should always be utilized as a starting point for operation. ADVICE: Sub [RF GAIN] Knob As the [RF GAIN] knob is rotated counterclockwise to reduce the gain, the S-meter reading will rise. This indicates that the AGC voltage being applied to the receiver is increasing (which causes a reduction in re- ceiver gain). Rotating the [RF GAIN] knob control to the fully counter-clockwise position will essentially disable the receiver, as the gain will be greatly reduced. In this case, as well, the S-meter will appear to be “pegged” against the right edge of the analog S-meter scale. The Sub [RF GAIN] knob operates identically to the Main [RF GAIN] knob. The effects of counter-clock- wise rotation of the Sub (VFO-B) receiver’s RF Gain control may be observed visually on the Sub band (VFO-B) S-meter. QUICK POINT: Reception frequently can be optimized by rotating the [RF GAIN] knob slightly counter-clockwise to the point where the incoming noise level is just about the same as the “stationary” meter needle position as set by the adjustment of the [RF GAIN] knob. This set- ting ensures that excessive gain is not being utilized, without so much gain reduction that incoming signals cannot be heard. The RF Gain control, along with the IPO and Attenua- tor features, all affect the system receiver gain in dif- ferent ways. As a first step in dealing with high noise or a crowded, high-level signal environment, the IPO generally should be the first feature engaged, if the fre- quency is low enough to allow the preamplifier to be bypassed. Thereafter, the RF Gain and Attenuator fea- tures may be employed to provide precise, delicate adjustment of the receiver gain so as to optimize per- formance fully. Page 52 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 55. ADVANCED INTERFERENCE-SUPPRESSION FEATURES: RF FRONT END The FT-2000D includes an unmatched array of RF selectivity-enhancing features. Please study the material below care- fully, so as to understand the various features completely. USING THE VRF (VARIABLE RF FRONT-END FILTER) The VRF system is a high-performance RF front-end preselector that has high Q factor and low insertion loss. VRF pro- vides outstanding rejection of out-of-band signals, and can significantly improve reception in tough co-location operations such as a contest or DX-pedition. The FT-2000D’s VRF system affects the 1.8 - 28 MHz amateur bands only. 1. Press the [VRF] button momentarily. The “ ” icon Receiver Configuration Indicator [VRF] Button will appear at the FLT column of the Receiver Con- figuration Indicator on the display, and the VRF sys- tem will be engaged, centered on your current Amateur band. 2. You may rotate the [VRF] knob to skew the position of the VRF system relative to your operating frequency. Offset Tuning Indicator [VRF] Knob Because the VRF system is relatively broad, although still much narrower than the fixed bandpass filter), you may not hear much difference in the background noise or signal quality when you make minor adjustments. However, if you have receiving problems associated by a very strong signal, rotation of the [VRF] knob may help reduce the strength of the interfering station, allowing improved reception of the desired signal if overload was degrading reception. ADVICE: ADVICE: You may observe the The VRF filter affects both the Main (VFO-A) and Sub relative skew of the (VFO-B) bands. VRF system in the Tun- The VRF Filter operational status will be memorized ing Offset Indicator on independently on each VFO in the VFO stack. the display while turning QUICK POINT: the [VRF] knob. The VRF filter, utilizing high-quality coils and capacitors After moving the passband of the VRF system that provide high Q, yields a passband that is approximately manually, you may re-center it on the current Ama- 20% to 30% the width of a traditional, fixed bandpass fil- teur band by pressing and holding in the [VRF] ter. As a result, significantly more “unwanted” signal re- button for two seconds. jection is provided. Within each Amateur band, the fol- 3. To switch VRF off, press the [VRF] button until the lowing adjustment steps are provided, if you wish to skew “ ” icon shows “ ” in the FLT column of the the response in a particular direction so as to enhance in- Receiver Configuration Indicator on the display; this terference rejection even more. The actual “sound” of the confirms that the VRF circuit has been removed from signal you are listening to will remain unchanged, how- the incoming received signal path. ever. AMATEUR BAND VRF ADJUSTMENT STEPS 1.8 MHz 62 steps 3.5 MHz 62 steps 5 MHz 62 steps 7 MHz 62 steps 10 MHz 30 steps 14 MHz 30 steps 18 MHz 20 steps 21 MHz 20 steps 24.5 MHz 20 steps 28 MHz 20 steps FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 53
  • 56. INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS OFF FREQUENCY BY JUST A FEW KHZ) R.FLT (ROOFING FILTERS) Narrow-band Roofing Filters of 15 kHz, 6 kHz, and 3 kHz bandwidths are provided in the first IF, right after the first mixer. These filters provide protection fort the 2nd mixer, DSP, and other circuitry that follow and can dramatically improve reception on a very crowded band (during a contest, etc.). Typically, the AUTO selection mode is satisfactory for most operating situations, but in an extremely crowded phone band you may wish to select, for example, the 3 kHz roofing filter for SSB operation. Press the [R.FLT] button to toggle the Roofing Receiver Configuration Indicator Filter selection. AUTO 15 kHz 6 kHz 3 kHz AUTO ADVICE: The Roofing filter selection affects the Main band (VFO-A) only. The Sub band’s (VFO-B) Roofing fil- ter is fixed at a bandwidth of 15 kHz. As you repeatedly press the [R.FLT] button, you will [R.FLT] Button observe changes in the notation in the R.FLT column of the Receiver Configuration Indicator on the display, denoting the Roofing Fil- ter currently in use. Typically, this selection will be set to “AUTO.” The Roofing Filter selection will be memorized inde- pendently on each VFO in the VFO stack. QUICK POINT: The “AUTO” selection of the Roofing Filter is based on the operating mode. However, you may override the automatic selection, if band conditions warrant a different (usually, a tighter) selection. The AUTO mode Roofing Filter selections are shown below: AM/FM/FM-PKT: 15 kHz LSB/USB/PKT: 6 kHz CW/RTTY: 3 kHz When the Roofing filter mode is set to “AUTO” and the Noise Blanker is turned On, the Roofing Filter band- width will automatically be set to 15 kHz, as this set- ting provides the most effective noise blanking. How- ever, you still may override the automatic setting, and select a more narrow Roofing Filter. Noise blanking may be compromised, however, with a tighter Roofing Filter in the line. TERMINOLOGY: A “Roofing Filter,” as its name implies, places a “Roof” over the receiver’s IF system bandwidth. This “Roof” pro- tects the circuitry downstream from the first mixer from interference, just as a roof on a house protects the contents from rain and snow. Page 54 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 57. INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ) CONTOUR CONTROL OPERATION The Contour filtering system provides a gentle perturbation of the IF filter passband, so as to suppress or enhance certain frequency components, thus enhancing the sound and/or readability of a received signal. 1. Press the [CONTOUR] button. The Contour notation CONTOUR Indicator [CONTOUR] Button will appear in the display to confirm that the Contour filter is engaged. 2. Rotate the [CONTOUR] knob to achieve the most natural-sounding audio reproduction on the incoming signal. 3. To cancel Contour tuning, press the [CONTOUR] but- ton once more. [CONTOUR] Knob ADVICE: The Contour filter affects the Main band (VFO-A) only. You may observe the graphically-depicted peak posi- tion of the CONTOUR Filter in the CONTOUR indi- cator on the display. [CONTOUR] button [CONTOUR] button Fully Clockwise Fully Clockwise [CONTOUR] button [CONTOUR] button Center Center With reference to Figure “B,” note the initial posi- [CONTOUR] button [CONTOUR] button tion (12 o’clock) of the [CONTOUR] knob when Fully Counter-Clockwise Fully Counter-Clockwise the [CONTOUR] button is pushed. You may ob- CONTOUR GAIN “MINUS” CONTOUR GAIN “PLUS” serve the “indentation” in the receiver passband where the Contour filter is placing a low-Q “notch” The Contour filter’s level (either nulling or peaking) (per the setting of Menu item “090,” referenced may be adjusted using Menu item “090 rdSP CNTR above). Counter-clockwise rotation (to the left) of LV.” The factory default setting is for a null of “–15” the [CONTOUR] knob causes the indentation to (dB). move towered a lower frequency within the pass- The bandwidth over which the Contour filter effect is band, while clockwise rotation (to the right) causes applied may be adjusted using Menu item “091 rdSP the indentation to move toward a higher frequency CNTR WI.” The factory default setting is “10.” within the passband. By removing interference or When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit unwanted frequency components on the incoming is connected, the Audio Scope (on the “Oscilloscope” signal, it is possible to make the desired signal rise page) is particularly useful when adjusting the Con- out of the background noise/interference, enhanc- tour control. Not only can you see the effect of the ing intelligibility. null/peak of the Contour system, but you also can see the position of the null/peak with respect to frequency A B C components of interest on the incoming signal. You may then observe (on the Audio Scope) the effect of the Contour control while listening to the effect on the signal, and this will help build your intuition on how best to use Contour tuning in the future. IF IF IF BANDWIDTH BANDWIDTH BANDWIDTH QUICK POINT: The steep slopes of the DSP filtering can, when adjusted aggressively, impart an unnatural sound to an incoming signal. Oftentimes, though, a narrow bandwidth is not the key to improving copy; the incoming signal itself may have undesirable or excessive frequency components, especially in the low-frequency range around 100-400 Hz. By judicious use of the Contour filter, the “shoulder” of the passband response may be altered, or components removed from within the passband, allowing the desired signal to rise above the background noise and interference in a manner not obtainable with other filtering systems. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 55
  • 58. INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ) IF SHIFT OPERATION (SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT/AM MODES) IF Shift allows you to vary the DSP filter passband higher or lower, without changing the pitch of the incoming signal, so as to reduce or eliminate interference. Because the carrier tuning frequency is not varied, there is no need to re-tune the operating frequency when eliminating the interference. The total passband tuning range for the IF Shift system is ±1 kHz. Rotate the [SHIFT] knob to the left or right to reduce the SHIFT Indicator [SHIFT] knob interference. ADVICE: The [SHIFT] knob affects the Main band (VFO-A) only. However, you may shift the Sub band (VFO-B) filter passband via Menu items “042 S-iF LSB SET” through “049 S-iF PKT-USB.” The position of the passband set by the IF Shift can be observed on the display. Referring to Figure “A,” note the depiction of the IF DSP filter as the thick line, with the [SHIFT] knob in the 12 o’clock position. In Figure “B,” an interfering signal has appeared inside the original passband. In Figure “C,” you can see the effect of rotating the [SHIFT] knob so as to reduce the in- terference level by moving the filter passband so that the interference is outside of the passband. A B C Desired Signal Desired Signal Desired Signal QRM QRM IF IF IF BANDWIDTH BANDWIDTH BANDWIDTH Page 56 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 59. INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ) WIDTH (IF DSP BANDWIDTH) TUNING (SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT MODES) The IF Width tuning system allows you to vary the width of the DSP IF passband, so as to eliminate interference. Moreover, the bandwidth may actually be expanded from its default setting, should you wish to enhance incoming signal fidelity when interference on the band is low. Rotate the [ WIDTH ] knob to adjust the bandwidth. WIDTH Indicator [WIDTH] Knob Counter-clockwise rotation reduces the bandwidth, while clockwise rotation increases the bandwidth. ADVICE: The IF Width affects the Main band (VFO-A) only. The bandwidth of the IF can be observed on the dis- play. CAUTION: When rotating the [WIDTH] control fully counter-clock- wise, the transition between 50 Hz and 25 Hz bandwidth may be accompanied by a “ping” sound, depending on the amount of noise present. This is a normal condition, and you should turn down the volume, when wearing head- phones, to minimize the amplitude of this momentary sound. Using IF Shift and Width Together The IF Shift and Variable IF Width features together form a very effective interference-fighting filter- Referring to Figure B, you can see the default band- ing system. width with the [WIDTH] knob set to the 12 o’clock position. For example, in Figure “A” you can see how inter- ference has appeared both on the high and low sides By rotating the [WIDTH] knob to the left, the band- of the desired signal. By rotating the [WIDTH] width will narrow (see Figure “A”), while rotation knob, as shown in Figure “B,” the interference from of the [WIDTH] knob to the right, as depicted in one side can be eliminated, and by re-positioning Figure “C,” will widen the bandwidth. the [SHIFT] knob (Figure “C”), the interference A B C on the opposite side can be removed, without re- introducing the interference previously eliminated in Figure “B.” Advice: For best interference reduction, the Width and Shift features are the primary tools you should IF IF IF use. After narrowing the bandwidth (Width) and/or BANDWIDTH BANDWIDTH BANDWIDTH adjusting the center of the passband (Shift), the Contour control may also yield additional signal- enhancement benefits on the net residual bandwidth. What’s more, the IF Notch Filter (see the next sec- tion) may also be utilized, in conjunection with the three other filter systems, to significant advantage. The default bandwidths , and total bandwidth ad- justment range, will vary according to the operat- A B C Desired Signal Desired Signal Desired Signal ing mode: QRM QRM QRM SSB Mode: 200 Hz ~ 4.0 kHz (2.4 kHz ) QRM QRM QRM CW Mode: 25 Hz ~ 2.4 kHz (2.4 kHz ) RTTY/PKT Modes: 25 Hz ~ 2.4 kHz (500 Hz ) : bandwidth at 12 o’clock position of [WIDTH] knob. IF IF IF BANDWIDTH BANDWIDTH BANDWIDTH FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 57
  • 60. INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ) IF NOTCH FILTER OPERATION (SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT/AM MODES) The IF Notch filter is a highly-effective system that allows you to slice out an interfering beat note or other carrier signal from inside the receiver passband. 1. Press the [NOTCH] button. The Notch characteristic NOTCH Indicator [NOTCH] Button will appear in the display to confirm that the Notch filter is engaged. 2. Initially, rough adjustment of the center frequency of the IF Notch Filter is adjusted using the outer [COARSE] knob; thereafter, fine tuning of the Notch frequency is adjusted using the inner [FINE] knob. 3. To switch the IF Notch filter off, press the [NOTCH] button once more. The Notch notation will turn off, [NOTCH] Knob confirming that the IF Notch filter is no longer operat- ing. ADVICE: The IF Notch filter affects the Main band (VFO-A) only. You may observe the graphically-depicted peak (maxi- mum null) position of the IF Notch Filter in the NOTCH indicator on the display. The width of the IF Notch null may be adjusted using Menu item “092 rdSP NOTCH W.” Both “Wide” and The performance of the IF Notch filter is shown in “Narrow” selections are available, with “Narrow” pro- Figure “A,” where the effect of rotation of the viding the least disruption of the “desired” signal. [NOTCH] knobs is depicted. In Figure “B,” you When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit can see the notching effect of the IF Notch filter as is connected, the effect of the IF Notch filter may be you rotate the [NOTCH] knobs to eliminate the observed on the Audio Scope (on the “Oscilloscope” incoming interference. page). The Notch will be observed as a “dip” in the A B noise platform observed. What’s more, the “Waterfall” Desired Signal Desired Signal display may be used to observe the effect of the IF Notch filter, which will appear as a white area in the colored background area. The tuning rate for the IF QRM QRM (Heterodyne) (Heterodyne) Notch is somewhat slow while you adjust the [FINE] knob, so the use of the Waterfall display to confirm proper adjustment is highly recommended. IF IF BANDWIDTH BANDWIDTH Page 58 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 61. INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ) DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION (DNR) OPERATION The Digital Noise Reduction (DNR) system is designed to reduce the level of random noise found on the HF and 50 MHz bands, and it is especially effective during SSB operation. By rotating the [DNR] knob, any of sixteen different noise- reduction algorithms can be selected; each of these algorithms was created for dealing with a different noise profile, and you will want to experiment with the DNR system to find the best setting according to the noise currently being experi- enced. 1. Press the [DNR] button. The “ ” icon will appear NOTCH Indicator [DNR] Knob in the display, confirming that the DNR system is en- gaged. 2. Rotate the [DNR] knob to select the setting that most effectively reduces the noise level. 3. To disable the DNR system, press the [DNR] button once more. The “ ” icon will turn off, confirming that the DNR system is not active. ADVICE: [DNR] Button The Digital Noise Reduction affects the Main band (VFO- A) only. DIGITAL NOTCH FILTER (DNF) OPERATION The Digital Notch Filter (DNF) is an effective beat-cancelling filter that can null out a number of interfering beat notes inside the receiver passband. Because this is an Auto-Notch feature, there is no adjustment knob associated with this filter. ADVICE: If a very strong interfering carrier is encountered, we recommend you first use the IF Notch filter, as it is the most effective notching tool in the receiver section. 1. Press the [DNF] button. The “ ” icon will [DNF] Button appear in the display, confirming that the DNF system is engaged. 2. To cancel DNF operation, press the [DNF] button once more. The “ ” icon will turn off, confirming that the Digital Notch Filter is no longer in operation. ADVICE: The Digital Notch Filter affects the Main (VFO-A) band only. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 59
  • 62. INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ) NARROW (NAR) ONE-TOUCH IF FILTER SELECTION Main band (VFO-A) “One-Touch Narrow” Operation Pressing the [NAR] button provides one-touch, mode-spe- WIDTH Indicator [WIDTH] Knob cific selection of a narrow IF DSP filter set- ting that does not depend on the setting of the [WIDTH] knob. Pressing the [NAR] but- ton once more returns the bandwidth control to the Width/Shift system. The factory de- fault bandwidths are: [NAR] SWITCH OPERATING MODE “ON” “OFF” [NAR] Button SSB 1.8 kHz CW 500 Hz RTTY/PKT-L/PKT-U 300 Hz PKT-FM 9 kHz 16 kHz AM 6 kHz 9 kHz FM (28/50 MHz Bands) 9 kHz 16 kHz : Depends on the [WIDTH] knob Sub band (VFO-B) ADVICE: “One-Touch Narrow” Operation When the narrow bandwidth is selected, the “ ” 1. Press the [B] button. icon will appear in the display and the bandwidth on 2. Within five seconds of pressing the [B] button (while the WIDTH indicator in the display will be reduced. the imbedded orange LED is blinking), press the [NAR] The bandwidth applied when the [NAR] button is button to toggle the bandwidth between “WIDE” and pressed may be adjusted using the Menu. This allows “Narrow.” When the narrow bandwidth is selected, the you to customize a quick-switch “Narrow” bandwidth “ ” icon will appear in the display. matching your operating needs. The default values for each mode below are underlined. [B] Button SSB mode: Menu item “104 rdsP SSB NAR” 200/400/600/850/1100/1350/1500/1650/ 1800/1950/2100/2250 Hz CW mode: Menu item “095 rdsP CW NARR” 25/50/100/200/300/400/500/800/1200/1400/ 1700/2000 Hz PSK mode: Menu item “098 rdsP PSK NAR” 25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz [NAR] Button RTTY mode: Menu item “101 rdsP RTY NAR” [NAR] SWITCH 25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz OPERATING MODE “ON” “OFF” When the [NAR] button has been pushed so as to en- SSB 1.1 kHz 2.25 kHz gage the narrow filter, the [WIDTH] knob will be dis- CW 1.2 kHz 2.0 kHz (300 Hz/500 Hz) abled, but IF Shift still is operational. For many appli- RTTY/PKT-L/PKT-U 1.2 kHz 1.2 kHz cations, you may find that simple adjustment of the PKT-FM 9 kHz 16 kHz [WIDTH] knob, instead of engaging the Narrow filter, AM 6 kHz 9 kHz may be satisfactory for interference reduction. FM (28/50 MHz bands) 9 kHz 16 kHz You may adjust the CW bandwidth using the [WIDTH] : Requires the optional CW Narrow Filter 300 Hz: YF-122CN, 500 Hz: YF-122C knob, even if the narrow filter is engaged. In this case, available bandwidth selections are 25 Hz ~ 2 kHz. When you press the [NAR] button in the FM mode, both the transmit and receive bandwidths are narrowed. NOTE: When the [NAR] button is pressed, the [WIDTH] knob no longer functions (except the CW mode). Page 60 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 63. INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ) IF NOISE BLANKER (NB) OPERATION The FT-2000D includes an effective IF Noise Blanker, which can significantly reduce noise caused by automotive ignition systems. Main band (VFO-A) NB Operation Main Band (VFO-A) “NB” Icon [NB] Button Sub Band (VFO-B) “NB” Icon 1. Press the [NB] button momentarily to reduce short- duration pulse noise such as from switching transients, automobile ignitions and power lines. The “ ” icon will appear in the display to confirm that the Narrow- NB is operating. Press and hold in the [NB] button for two seconds to reduce longer-duration man-made pulse noise. The “ ” icon will blink for five seconds, and thereafter will appear continuously, to confirm that the [B] Button Wide-NB is operating. [NB] Knob 2. Advance the [NB] knob to the point where the offend- ing noise is best reduced or eliminated. 3. To end Noise Blanker operation, press the [NB] but- ton once more. The “ ” icon will turn off, confirm- ing that the Noise Blanker is no longer in operation. ADVICE: When the Roofing filter mode is set to “AUTO” and the Noise Blanker is turned On, the Roofing Filter band- width will automatically be set to 15 kHz. The Roof- ing Filter may be changed to a narrower selection, as described previously, although Noise Blanker opera- tion may be compromised somewhat when using a nar- rower Roofing Filter. Sub band (VFO-B) NB Operation When you change the Noise Blanker level on the Main 1. Press the [B] button. (VFO-A) side, the Sub (VFO-B) band’s Noise Blanker 2. Within five seconds of pressing the [B] button (while level will automatically change to be the same as that the imbedded orange LED is blinking), press the [NB] for VFO-A, if the Sub (VFO-B) band’s Noise Blanker button momentarily to reduce short-duration pulse is engaged. noise such as from switching transients, automobile ig- nitions and power lines. The “ ” icon will appear in the display to confirm that the Narrow-NB is operat- ing. 3. Within five seconds of pressing the [B] button (while the imbedded orange LED is blinking), press and hold in the [NB] button for two seconds to reduce longer- duration man-made pulse noise. The “ ” icon will blink for five seconds, then appear continuously, to con- firm that the Wide-NB is operating. 4. To end Noise Blanker operation, press the [B] button, then press the [NB] button. The “ ” icon will turn off, confirming that the Noise Blanker is no longer in operation. ADVICE: When you change the Noise Blanker level on the Sub (VFO-B) side, the Main (VFO-A) band’s Noise Blanker level will automatically change to be the same as that for VFO-B, if the Main (VFO-A) band’s Noise Blanker is engaged. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 61
  • 64. TOOLS FOR COMFORTABLE AND EFFECTIVE RECEPTION AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL) The AGC system is designed to help compensate for fading and other propagation effects, with characteristics that can be of particular value on each operating mode. The basic objective of AGC is to maintain a constant audio output level once a certain minimum threshold of signal strength is achieved. Main Band (VFO-A) AGC Selection [AGC] Button Press the [AGC] button repeatedly to select the desired receiver-recovery time constant. You will observe the AGC status notation in the AGC column of the Receiver Con- figuration Indicator on the display, denoting the AGC re- ceiver-recovery time currently in use. For most operation, we recommend the “AUTO” mode. Additionally, you may disable the AGC by pressing and holding in the [AGC] button for two seconds. [B] Button Sub Band (VFO-B) AGC Selection 1. Press the [B] button. 2. Within five seconds of pressing the [B] button (while the imbedded orange LED is blinking), press the [AGC] button repeatedly to select the desired receiver-recov- ery time constant. You will observe the AGC notation below the Sub frequency on the display, denoting the Sub receiver’s current AGC receiver-recovery time. For most operation, we recommend the “AUTO” mode. Additionally, you may disable the AGC by pressing ADVICE: and holding in the [AGC] button for two seconds. If the AGC receiver-recovery time is set to “Off” by press- NOTE: ing and holding in the [AGC] button, the S-meter will no Pressing the [AGC] button allows selection of the desired longer deflect. Additionally, you will likely encounter dis- receiver-recovery time constant. Normally, the “AUTO” tortion on stronger signals, as the IF amplifiers and the selection is satisfactory for most situations, but in the event following stages are probably being overloaded. of operation on a crowded band where you wish to receive QUICK POINT a weak signal, you may wish to change the setting (to FAST, Several aspects of AGC performance may be configured for example). The “AUTO” mode selections are: via the Menu. However, because AGC can have such a OPERATING MODE AUTO AGC SELECTION profound impact on overall receiver performance, we gen- LSB SLOW USB SLOW erally do not recommend any changes to the AGC Menu CW FAST selections until you are thoroughly familiar with the per- AM FAST formance of the FT-2000D. FM FAST RTTY SLOW TERMINOLOGY: PKT (FM) FAST PKT (LSB) SLOW Automatic Gain Control, or AGC, is a circuit that senses the incoming signal strength, and then limits the gains of the RF and IF stages so as to keep the output audio vol- ume at a more-or-less constant level. AGC also protects the RF, IF, Audio, and DSP stages from overload, as it limits the signal strength that is allowed to flow, irrespec- tive of the input signal level. Page 62 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 65. TOOLS FOR COMFORTABLE AND EFFECTIVE RECEPTION AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL) SLOPED AGC Operation In traditional AGC systems, the audio output from the transceiver becomes essentially fixed once the threshold for AGC action is reached (usually several dozen dB above the no-signal noise SLOPED floor). The FT-2000D, however, includes an innovative Sloped AGC sys- Audio Output tem on the Main band (VFO-A) receiver, that allows the audio volume to NORMAL rise and fall slightly according to signal strength. Although the rise/fall slope is not dramatic, it is sufficient to allow you to use your ear to discern and separate signals according to signal strength, not just audio frequency. Input Signal Using Sloped AGC 1. Press the [MENU] button momentarily to enter the Menu mode. [MENU] Button 2. Use the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item “088 rout AGC SLP.” 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to change the set- ting to “SLP.” 4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two sec- onds to save the new setting and exit to normal op- eration. You will now be using the Sloped AGC system. Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob MUTE FEATURE (MAIN (VFO-A) BAND) There may be occasions, during Dual Receive operation, when you want to silence the Main (VFO-A) receiver tempo- rarily so as to concentrate on what’s being received on the Sub (VFO-B) receiver. The Mute feature makes this simple to accomplish. Press the Main [RX] LED/switch. The Main (VFO-A) re- Main [RX] Switch ceiver will be silenced, and the green LED in the [RX] switch will blink. To restore reception on the Main (VFO-A) receiver, just press the blinking [RX] switch/LED once more. ADVICE: If you press the [POWER] switch momentarily while the transceiver is turned on, the transceiver’s audio will be muted for three seconds. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 63
  • 66. SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION [MOX] Button [METER] Switch [MODE] Button CLAR + [MIC] Knob Main Tuning Dial knob [RF PWR] Knob 1. The operating mode is selected using the [MODE] 3. Press the microphone’s PTT (Push To Talk) switch to buttons to the left of the Main Tuning Dial knob, and begin transmission; speak into the microphone in a the VFO (A or B) to which the selection is applied is normal voice level. selected by the [A] or [B] button above the [MODE] ADVICE: buttons. Usually, the [A] button glows Red, signifying The “ ” indicator will light up in the frequency that the Main band (VFO-A) is be- display area, confirming that transmission is in ing adjusted. Similarly, pressing the progress. [B] button will cause its indicator to When transmitting in the AM mode, rotate the [RF blink Orange for five seconds, sig- PWR] knob so as to set a maximum (carrier) power nifying Sub band (VFO-B) adjust- output of 50 Watts. ment. Therefore, press the [A] or [B] 4. In the SSB mode, adjust the microphone amplifier gain button to select the desired VFO, to match the microphone and your then press the [LSB] or [USB] but- voice level, set the [METER ] ton to select one of the SSB modes. switch to the “ALC” position, For AM operation, press the [AM/ close the PTT switch, speak into FM] button repeatedly until the im- the microphone in a normal voice bedded LED glows red. level, and adjust the [MIC] (gain) knob QUICK POINT: so that the ALC voltage (displayed on By convention, LSB is used in the 7 MHz and lower the right meter) stays within the ALC Amateur bands for SSB communication, and USB zone of the meter (up to 2/3 of full scale is used on the 14 MHz and higher bands (the 10 deflection) on voice peaks. MHz band is used for CW and data modes only). ADVICE: When the [AM/FM] button glows orange, it indi- The microphone cates that FM operation is engaged. gain of the AM 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to adjust the oper- mode has been pro- ating frequency. Alternatively, you may use the [UP]/ grammed, at the [DWN] scanning buttons on the MH-31B8 Hand Mi- factory, to a level crophone to sweep up or down the current band. that should be satisfactory for most situations. How- ever, using Menu item “050 A3E MICGAIN,” you may set a different fixed value, or choose the “Ur” option, which then lets you use the front panel [MIC] knob to set the microphone gain in the AM mode. In this case, the [MIC] knob should not be advanced to the point where the ALC meter deflects. In many cases, the same setting as used on SSB will be satisfactory. 5. Release the PTT switch at the end of your transmis- sion. The transceiver will return to the receive mode. Page 64 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 67. SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION ADVICE: ALC meter deflection may be caused by excessive drive When performing tests (such as the setup of the [MIC] power, but also by reflected power detected in the an- or [RF PWR] knobs), be sure to check the frequency tenna system. If the impedance presented to the trans- before transmitting, so as to avoid interference to oth- ceiver is different from 50 Ohms, ALC meter action ers who may already be using the frequency. may be observed that is not related to the proper set- Four techniques for exercising Transmit/Receive con- ting of the [MIC] (gain) knob. Therefore, we recom- trol are provided on the FT-2000D, and you may mend that you make [MIC] knob adjustments into a choose the technique(s) that best suit your operating dummy load or antenna system presenting an imped- needs: ance very close to 50 Ohms. Pressing the microphone’s PTT switch will engage Rotate the [RF PWR] knob to set the desired power the transmitter. output. Clockwise rotation of the [RF PWR] knob will The rear panel PTT jack may be connected to a increase the power. The adjustment foot switch or other manual switching device in range is between 10 Watts and 200 order to engage the transmitter. Watts, and you should always use the Pressing the front panel [MOX] button will lock minimum power necessary for main- the transmitter on. Press the [MOX] button again taining reliable communications. to return to receive. The analog PO meter indicates the average power out- The VOX (Voice Operated Xmit) circuit will en- put level. SSB transmit average talk power is normally gage the transmitter automatically when you speak 10% to 50% of the peak power output. Voice charac- into the microphone. For details of VOX opera- teristics, microphone qualities, parametric equalizer tion, see page 78. and compression settings affect actual talk power out- put. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 65
  • 68. USING THE AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER The Automatic Antenna Tuner (hereinafter referred to as the “ATU”) built into each FT-2000D is crafted to ensure a 50- Ohm load for the final amplifier stage of the transmitter. We recommend that the ATU be used whenever you operate on the FT-2000D. ADVICE: The ATU of the FT-2000D, being located inside the station, only adjusts the impedance presented to the transceiver at the station end of your coaxial cable feedline. It does not “tune” the SWR at the antenna feedpoint itself. When design- ing and building your antenna system, we recommend that every effort be made to ensure a low SWR at the antenna feedpoint. The ATU of the FT-2000D includes 100 memories for tuning data. Eleven of these memories are allocated, one per Amateur band, so that each band has at least one setting preset for use on that band. The remaining 89 memories are reserved for the 89 most-recent tuning points, for quick frequency change without the need to retune the ATU. The ATU in the FT-2000D is designed to match impedances within the range of 16.5 Ohms to 150 Ohms, correspond- ing to an SWR of 3:1 or less on the HF amateur bands (6 m amateur band: 25 Ohms to 100 Ohms, corresponding to an SWR of 2:1 or less). Accordingly, simple non-resonant whip antennas, along with random-length wires and the “G5RV” antenna (on most bands) may not be within the impedance matching range of the ATU. ATU OPERATION 1. Rotate the [RF PWR] knob fully clockwise (to the [TUNE] Button right). 2. Use the Main Tuning Dial knob to set the radio to the desired operating frequency within the Amateur band. 3. Press the [TUNE] button momentarily to place the ATU in the transmit line (no adjustment/tuning will occur yet). The “ ” icon will appear in the display. QUICK POINT: The momentary press of the [TUNE] button will turn [RF PWR] Knob the tuner on, and the microprocessor will automatically ADVICE: select the tuning point closest to the current operating The ATU circuit is located between the final amplifier and frequency. the rear-panel antenna jack; reception is not affected by 4. Press and hold in the [TUNE] button for two seconds the ATU. to begin automatic tuning. The transmitter will be en- gaged, and the “ ” icon will blink while tuning is QUICK POINT: in progress. When the optimum tuning point has been As shipped from the factory, only one ATU alignment reached, the radio will return to receive, and the point is saved on each Amateur band. This was memo- “ ” icon will again glow steadily (instead of rized during the final alignment and performance veri- blinking). fication stages on the production line. 5. While tuning around the band using the Main Tuning The momentary flickering of the “ ” icon occurs Dial knob, you will observe that the “ ” icon whenever you cross over into a new 10 kHz ATU blinks momentarily every 10 kHz. This momentary memory window. blinking indicates that a new tuning window has been NOTE: entered. If you want to save tuning data associated with Please check the operating frequency before beginning the this 10 kHz window, repeat step 4 (above) for each tuning process, to be sure you are not interfering with oth- such window. On bands like 1.8 MHz where the im- ers who may already be using the frequency. pedance may change rapidly, the storage of a number of tuning points is recommended. TERMINOLOGY: 6. To disconnect the ATU from the transmit line, press Antenna Tuner Memories: The microprocessor of the ATU the [TUNE] button momentarily. The “ ” icon makes a note of the positions of the tuning capacitors and will turn off, confirming that the ATU has been turned the selected inductors, and stores the data for each 10 kHz off. In the “Off” mode, the transceiver will be directly window in which tuning has occurred. This eliminates the connected to the coaxial cable connected to your an- need to re-tune every time you return to a frequency on tenna, and will operate based on whatever impedance which you already have completed the tuning process. is present at the station end of the coax. Page 66 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 69. USING THE AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER ABOUT ATU OPERATION Figure 1 depicts a situation where normal tuning via the ATU has been successfully completed, and the tuning data has been stored in the ATU memory. The antenna system as seen by the transmitter is shown. In Figure 2, the operator has changed frequency, and the “ ” icon has become appeared. The operator presses and holds in the [TUNE] button for two seconds to begin impedance matching using the ATU. If a high SWR conditions exists (above 3:1), corrective action must be taken in the antenna system to bring the impedance closer to 50 Ohms. Besides the fact that the ATU will refuse to memorize settings on frequencies where the SWR exceeds 3:1, the high SWR may indicate a mechanical failure in the feed system, and such failures can lead to the generation of spurious signals causing TVI, etc. SWR: 2.0 Feed Point SWR SWR: 1.5 SWR: 1.0 Frequency SWR after ATU Tuning FIGURE 1 The “ ” icon appears on the display when you transmit on this frequency Memorized ATU Tuning SWR: 3.0 SWR: 3.0 SWR: 2.0 Retuned Setting SWR: 1.0 Frequency FIGURE 2 About ATU Memories SWR (Post-tuning) Less than 1.5:1 The tuning settings are committed to the ATU memory. SWR (Post-tuning) Greater than 1.5:1 Tuning data will not be retained in memory. If you return to the same frequency, the tuning process must be repeated. SWR (Post-tuning) Greater than 3:1 The “ ” icon will light up, and tuning settings, if achieved, will not be memorized. Please investigate and resolve the high SWR condition before attempting further operation using this antenna. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 67
  • 70. USING THE AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER LITHIUM BATTERY REPLACEMENT The memories for the ATU are backed up by a common Lithium backup battery (type CR2032 or equivalent). After two or more years of heavy use, you may notice that the tuner memories are not being maintained, and that you have to re-tune when returning to a frequency on which you had previously stored tuning data. In this case, please replace the ATU Backup Battery using the following procedure: 1. Turn the FT-2000D’s [POWER] switch “off,” then turn the FP-2000’s [POWER] switch “off.” 2. Unplug the AC cable from the AC jack on the FP- 2000 rear panel, then disconnect both DC cables from the FT-2000D rear panel. 3. Referring to Figure 1, remove the three screws from each side of the transceiver and three screws from the top edge of the rear panel. Slide the top case toward to the rear about 1/2 inch (1 cm), then remove the top case. 4. Turn the transceiver up side down. 5. Remove the seven screws affixing the bottom case, and then remove the bottom case (Figure 2). FIGURE 1 6. Locate the Lithium battery on the left side of the Con- trol Unit (Figure 3). 7. Turn the BACKUP switch “off.” 8. Follow the guidelines in Figure 4, and remove the old battery, replacing it with a new one of the identical type. 9. Connect both DC cables to the FT-2000D rear panel, then connect the AC cable to the AC jack on the FP- 2000 rear panel. 10. Turn the FP-2000’s [POWER] switch “on,” then turn the FT-2000D’s [POWER] switch “on.” Use extreme caution, as high voltages are present inside the trans- ceiver! FIGURE 2 11. Turn the BACKUP switch “on.” 12. Turn the FT-2000D’s [POWER] switch “off,” then turn the FP-2000’s [POWER] switch “off.” 13. Unplug the AC cable from the AC jack on the FP- 2000 rear panel, then disconnect both DC cables from Backup Battery the FT-2000D rear panel connectors. 14. Replace bottom case and its seven screws removed in step 5, and then replace the top case and its nine screws Backup Switch removed in step 3. 15. The ATU Backup Battery replacement is now com- plete. CAUTION: FIGURE 3 Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Removal of the Installing the Lithium Backup Battery Lithium Backup Battery QUICK POINT: After pusing in the direction of the Use your fingertip to push in the arrow, move your finger upward. indicated direction When the ATU Backup Battery is replaced, all tuner memo- ries will be erased, and new sets of tuning data will have to + + + + be stored. FIGURE 4 NOTES: Use care in the handling and storage of the Lithium battery. It is small, and presents a choking hazard to small children; therefore keep such batteries out of the reach of children at all times. Do not dispose of Lithium batteries in fire, and do not attempt to re-charge them under any circumstances. When opening/closing the case, take care with your screwdriver not to short out internal components, or touch them in a way that will cause them to short out against other components. The exhaustion of the ATU backup battery of the FT-2000D is a normal “wear and tear” situation, and the loss of the backup voltage is not a “defect” or other condition covered by the Limited Warranty on this product. Accordingly, if you do not feel capable of replacing the battery, and ask a service shop to do so on your behalf, a service fee may apply. Page 68 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 71. ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY ADJUSTING THE SSB TRANSMITTED BANDWIDTH (SSB MODE) For transmission on SSB, a default bandwidth of 2.4 kHz is provided. This bandwidth provides reasonable fidelity along with good talk power, and is typical of the bandwidth used for decades during SSB transmission. However, the bandwidth may be varied by the operator, so as to provide different levels of fidelity or talk power, according to your preferences. Here’s how to adjust the transmitted bandwidth on SSB: [MENU] Button 1. Press the [MENU] button to engage the Menu. 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob so as to select Menu item “083 A3J TX BPF.” 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the desired bandwidth. The available selections are 3000/ 50-3000/100-2900/200-2800/300-2700/400- 2600, and the default is 300-2700 Hz. A wider band- width will provide greater fidelity, while a narrow band- Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob width will compress the available transmitter power into less spectrum, resulting in more “talk power” for DX pile-ups. 4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. ADVICE: QUICK POINTS: The Transmit Monitor is very helpful way of verifying The higher fidelity associated with wide bandwidth will the effects on fidelity of changing the bandwidth. Press- be particularly enjoyable on the low bands, during lo- ing the [MONI] button then adjusting the [MONI] knob cal rag-chew QSOs. for a comfortable listening level while you are trans- The “3000” setting is a special hi-fidelity setting, mitting, you will be able to hear the difference in sound whereby the transmitted bandwidth is in excess of 3 quality as you make changes. kHz. This selection, in conjunction with judicious ad- When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit justment of the Parametric Microphone Equalizer (see is connected, you may verify the effect of your adjust- next chapter) can provide truly outstanding fidelity and ments of the transmitted bandwidth by observing the very natural-sounding audio. Audio Scope on the “Oscilloscope” page. When using the wider bandwidth selections (especially “3000”), the apparent power output from the transmit- ter may seem lower. This is because the available power from the transmitter is being distributed over a wider bandwidth, and the power detection circuitry does not compensate for the effect of the bandwidth selection (it is calibrated in the default 2.4 kHz bandwidth). FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 69
  • 72. ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY PARAMETRIC MICROPHONE EQUALIZER (SSB/AM/FM MODES) The FT-2000D includes a unique Three-Band Parametric Microphone Equalizer that provides precise, independent con- trol over the low, mid and treble ranges in your voice waveform. You may utilize one group of settings when the speech processor is off, and an alternate group of settings when the speech processor is on. The speech processor feature is described in the next chapter. QUICK POINT: The Parametric Equalizer is a unique technique for adjusting the signal quality. Because the three ranges may be adjusted so precisely, it is possible to craft a response that provides a more natural and pleasant sound than you have ever experi- enced before. Effective “talk power” can also be significantly enhanced. The aspects of configuration that you may adjust on the Parametric Equalizer are: Center Frequency: The center frequency of each of the three bands may be adjusted. Gain: The amount of enhancement (or suppression) within each band may be adjusted. Q: The bandwidth over which the equalization is applied may be adjusted. SETUP OF THE PARAMETRIC MICROPHONE EQUALIZER 1. Connect the microphone to the MIC jack. [MONI] Button Main Tuning Dial Knob 2. Set the [RF PWR] knob to its minimum value, so as not to cause interference to other users during adjustment. ADVICE: We recommend you consider connecting a dummy load to one of the Antenna jacks, and monitor your signal on a separate receiver, so as to prevent inter- ference to other users. You will have the best chance of hearing the ef- [RF PWR] Knob [MENU] Button fects of adjustments if you wear headphones (con- [SUB VFO-B] Knob nected to the monitor receiver) while monitoring your transmitted signal. 3. To adjust the Parametric Microphone Equalizer while the speech processor is disabled, press the [PROC] button until the “ ” icon appears in the display. To adjust the Parametric Microphone Equalizer with the speech processor engaged, press the [PROC] but- ton until the “ ” and “ ” icons appear in the display. 4. Press the [MONI] button, if you want to listen on the FT-2000D’s internal monitor. 5. Press the [MENU] button momentarily. The Menu list will appear in the display. 6. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to find the “EQ” Menu area, containing Menu items “123” through “131;” these parameters apply to the adjustment of the 9. When you have completed all adjustments, press and Parametric Microphone Equalizer when the speech hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to save processor is disabled. Menu items “132” through “140” the new settings and exit to normal operation. If you apply to the adjustment of the Parametric Microphone only press the [MENU] button momentarily to exit, Equalizer when the speech processor is engaged. any changes you performed will not be stored. 7. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to perform adjustments ADVICE: to a particular Menu item. To roll off excessive bass response in a wide-range studio 8. Close the PTT switch, and speak into the microphone microphone, try putting a 10 dB null at 100 Hz with a while listening to the effects of the changes you are mak- bandwidth of “1” or “2,” do about a 3 dB null centered on ing (in step 6). Because the overall effect on the sound 800 Hz with a bandwidth of “3,” and then put an 8 dB will change with each adjustment you make, you should peak centered on 2100 Hz with a bandwidth of “1.” These make several passes through each adjustment area, to are starting recommendations; each microphone and user’s be sure that you are achieving the optimum setting. voice will be different, often requiring different settings. Page 70 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 73. ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY PARAMETRIC MICROPHONE EQUALIZER (SSB/AM/FM MODES) ACTIVATING THE PARAMETRIC MICROPHONE EQUALIZER 1. Adjust the [MIC] (gain) knob for SSB use, as described [PROC] Button on page 64. 2. Press the [PROC] button momentarily. The “ ” icon will appear in the display, confirming that the Parametric Microphone Equalizer is engaged. ADVICE A blinking “ ” icon indicates the Parametric Microphone Equalizer menu settings have all been set to “OFF” (“123 tAUd EQ1 FRQ,” “126 tAUd EQ2 [MIC] Knob FRQ,” “129 tAUd EQ3 FRQ”). 3. Press the PTT switch on the microphone, and speak into the microphone in a normal voice level. 4. To switch the Parametric Microphone Equalizer off, press the [PROC] button repeatedly until the “ ” icon disappears. 3-STAGE PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER ADJUSTMENTS (SPEECH PROCESSOR: “OFF”) Center Frequency “123 tAUd EQ1-FREQ” “100” (Hz) ~ “700” (Hz) “126 tAUd EQ2-FREQ” “700” (Hz) ~ “1500” (Hz) “129 tAUd EQ3-FREQ” “1500” (Hz) ~ “3200” (Hz) Parametric Gain “124 AUd EQ1-LVL” (Low) “–10” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB) “127 tAUd EQ2-LVL” (Mid) “–10” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB) “130 tAUd EQ3-LVL” (High) “–10” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB) Q (Bandwidth) “125 tAUd EQ1-BW” (Low) “1” ~ “10” “128 tAUd EQ2-BW” (Mid) “1” ~ “10” “131 tAUd EQ3-BW” (High) “1” ~ “10” 3-STAGE PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER ADJUSTMENTS (SPEECH PROCESSOR: “ON”) Center Frequency “132 tAUd PE1-FREQ” “100” (Hz) ~ “700” (Hz) “135 tAUd PE2-FREQ” “700” (Hz) ~ “1500” (Hz) “138 tAUd PE3-FREQ” “1500” (Hz) ~ “3200” (Hz) Parametric Gain “133 tAUd PE1-LVL” (Low) “–10” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB) “136 tAUd PE2-LVL” (Mid) “–10” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB) “139 tAUd PE3-LVL” (High) “–10” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB) Q (Bandwidth) “134 tAUd PE1-BW” (Low) “1” ~ “10” “137 tAUd PE2-BW” (Mid) “1” ~ “10” “140 tAUd PE3-BW” (High) “1” ~ “10” +10dB Parametric Gain f1 f2 f3 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 71
  • 74. ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY USING THE SPEECH PROCESSOR (SSB/AM/FM MODES) The FT-2000D’s Speech Processor is designed to increase “talk power” by increasing the average power output, (via a sophisticated compression technique) and adjusting the audio quality to the menu settings (“132 tAUd PE1 FRQ,” “135 tAUd PE2 FRQ,” “138 tAUd PE3 FRQ”). The result is improved intelligibility when conditions are difficult. 1. Adjust the [MIC] (gain) knob for SSB use, as described [MONI] Button on page 64. [PROC] Button 2. Rotate the [METER] switch fully to the left, so as to select “COMP” (Compression). 3. Press the [PROC] button repeatedly until the “ ” and “ ” icons will appear on the display, indicat- ing the Speech Processor is engaged. 4. Press the PTT switch on the microphone, and speak into the microphone in a normal voice level. Observe the deflection of the meter needle on the COMP meter [METER] Switch scale. [MIC] Knob [MONI] Knob [RF PWR] Knob [PROC] Knob 5. Rotate the [PROC] knob so that the meter needle de- flects to not more than “10 dB” on the COMP scale. 6. To switch the Speech Processor off, press the [PROC] button once more. The “ ” and “ ” icons will turn off, confirming that the Speech processor is turned off. ADVICE: Excessive advancement of the [PROC] knob will re- sult in a degradation of the transmitted signal’s signal- to-noise ratio, thereby reducing intelligibility at the other end of the circuit. The Transmit Monitor is very helpful way of verifying proper adjustment of the compression level. Pressing the [MONI] button then adjusting the [MONI] knob for a comfortable listening level while you are trans- mitting, you will be able to hear the difference in sound quality as you make adjustments. The [RF PWR] knob still controls the RF power out- put, whether or not the Speech Processor is engaged. You may adjust the Parametric Microphone Equalizer when the speech processor is engaged, using Menu items “132” through “140.” See page 70 for details. When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit is connected, you may observe the effect of your com- pression level adjustments by viewing the wave-form on the “Oscilloscope” page. Page 72 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 75. ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY NOTE FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 73
  • 76. ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY LOW- DISTORTION CLASS-A OPERATION (SSB MODE) Class-A operation of the FT-2000D transmitter is provided, yielding ultra-low distortion products during SSB operation. Power output during Class-A operation is 75 Watts. To engage Class-A operation as following: [MENU] Button 1. Press the [MENU] button; the Menu list will appear in the display. 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item “141 tGEn BIAS.” 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the desired BIAS level “0 - 100” to set the transceiver for opera- tion anywhere between Class-A and Class-AB (Class- AB has lower heat dissipation but higher distortion Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob products). Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob clockwise to increases the BIAS. A menu setting of “100” will place the trans- mitter fully in Class-A operation. Counter-clockwise rotation of the [SUB VFO-B] knob will move the trans- mitter toward Class-AB operation. The menu setting “Ab” will place the transmitter fully in Class-AB op- eration. Advice: When the Class-A operation is engaged, “ ” icon will appear in the display. ADVICE 4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds We recommend that menu item “141 tGEn BIAS” be pro- to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. grammed to the [C.S] button for easy access to Class-A To exit from the Class-A mode, repeat the above proce- operation. dure, rotating the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select “Ab” in step 3 above. Id: Drain Current VDS: Drain Voltage CLASS-AB CLASS-A Page 74 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 77. ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY LOW- DISTORTION CLASS-A OPERATION (SSB MODE) ADVICE During Class-A operation, ten Amps of Bias current will be flowing, regardless of the modulation level that leads to actual power output. Therefore, if the ambient temperature in your operation location is high, the transceiver tempera- ture may rise as well, due to the high bias level (which must be dissipated as heat). Depending on the temperature, you may wish to reduce the BIAS level using menu item “141 tGEn BIAS,” to reduce the amount of heat being generated. When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit and a video monitor are connected, you can monitor the heat sink temperature on the video monitor; thus, you can always be aware of a rise in temperature during Class-A operation. Normally, the temperature is below 80 °C. If the temperature rises to near or above this value, however, we recommend you adjust the BIAS level toward Class-AB via menu item “141 tGEn BIAS” (decrease the numerical value to reduce the heat being dissipated). An innovative aspect of the “Class-A” mode is that the actual power output is always limited to 75 Watts. So even though you might adjust the BIAS in the direction of Class-AB operation, the power output will not rise; this eliminates the need to re-tune your linear amplifier, if used. QUICK POINT Class-A operation provides a significant improvement in transmitter distortion suppression. During Class-A operation, the 3rd-order IMD products are typically suppressed 45 dB. The 5th- and higher-order IMD products that can cause “splatter” and interfere with others, will typically be suppressed 70 dB or more. If you are using a linear amplifier such as the VL-1000, the low distortion produced by the FT-2000D’s transmitter means these intermodulation distortion products will not exist to be amplified by your linear. Class-A 75W PEP IMD Class-AB 200W PEP IMD The High-Power 200-Watt Final Amplifier Stage of the FT-2000D utilizes a pair of ST Micro Electronics Corp. SD2931 MOSFET devices operating at 50 Volts. The push-pull configuration provides low distortion along with high power output. The 92 mm thermostatically-controlled cooling fan directs forced air across the heat sink, when triggered by a rise in heat sink temperature. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 75
  • 78. TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES VOICE MEMORY (SSB/AM/FM MODES) You may utilize the Voice Memory capability of the FT-2000D for repetitive messages. The Voice Memory system in- cludes four memories capable of storing up to 20 seconds of voice audio each. The maximum that any memory can hold is 20 seconds. Recording Your Own Voice in Memory Checking Your Recording 1. Select the LSB, USB, AM, or FM mode using the front 1. Be sure that the front panel [MOX] button is “Off” panel [MODE] buttons. (the LED imbedded in the switch is must be off). 2. Press the [F5(MEM)] button. A blinking “ ” icon 2. Press the [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button (which- will appear in the display. ever one you just recorded in), and you will hear the 3. Within five seconds of pressing the [F5(MEM)] but- contents of the voice memory you just recorded. ton, press any of the buttons numbered [F1(CH-1)] ADVICE: through [F4(CH-4)] to select that memory storage reg- You may adjust the playback level of the recording via ister. If you do not press the PTT switch (see next step) Menu item “015 dUS RX LVL.” within five seconds, the memory storage process will Transmitting the Recorded Message be cancelled. 1. Select the LSB, USB, AM, or FM mode using the front 4. Press the microphone’s PTT switch momentarily, the panel [MODE] buttons. “ ” icon will glow steadily, and recording will 2. Press the front panel’s [BK-IN] button. begin. 3. Press the [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button, depend- 5. Speak into the microphone in a normal voice level to ing on which memory register’s message you wish to record the message (such as “CQ DX, CQ DX, this is transmit. If you hit the key again during playback, the W 6 Delta X-Ray Charlie, W 6 Delta X-Ray Charlie, message will be terminated. Over”). Remember that the time limit for recording ADVICE: any message is 20 seconds. You may adjust the transmit (audio) level of the recording 6. Press the [F5(MEM)] button to terminate the message via Menu item “016 dUS TX LVL.” storage process. [MOX] Button [BK-IN] Button [F5(MEM)] Button [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] Button Page 76 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 79. TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES VOICE MEMORY (SSB/AM/FM MODES) Voice Memory Operation from the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad You may also utilize the Voice Memory capability of the FT-2000D from the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad which plugs into the rear panel’s REM jack. When using the FH-2 Remote Control Keypad, you may record five memories with up to 20 seconds of voice audio each. Recording Your Own Voice in Memory Checking Your Recording 1. Select the LSB, USB, AM, or FM mode using the front 1. Be sure that the front panel [MOX] button is “Off” panel [MODE] selector buttons. (the LED imbedded in the button must be off). 2. Press the [MEM] key on the FH-2. 2. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key (whichever one you just recorded in), and you will hear the contents of the voice memory you just recorded. LOCK ON OFF LOCK ON OFF 3. Press any of the FH-2’s keys numbered [1] through [5] to select that memory storage register. If you do not press the PTT key (see next step) within five sec- ADVICE: onds, the memory storage process will be cancelled. You may adjust the playback level of the recording via Menu item “015 dUS RX LVL.” Transmitting the Recorded Message LOCK ON OFF 1. Select the LSB, USB, AM, or FM mode using the front panel [MODE] selector buttons. 2. Press the front panel’s [BK-IN] button. 3. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key, depending on which memory register’s message you wish to transmit. If you hit the key again during playback, the message will be terminated. 4. Press the microphone’s PTT switch momentarily, the LOCK “ ” icon will glow steadily, and recording will ON OFF begin. 5. Speak into the microphone in a normal voice level to record the message (such as “CQ DX, CQ DX, this is W 6 Delta X-Ray Charlie, W 6 Delta X-Ray Charlie, Over”). Remember that the time limit for recording any message is 20 seconds. 6. Press the FH-2’s [MEM] key to terminate the message storage process. ADVICE: You may adjust the transmit (audio) level of the recording via Menu item “016 dUS TX LVL.” LOCK ON OFF FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 77
  • 80. TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES VOX (AUTOMATIC TX/RX SWITCHING USING VOICE CONTROL: SSB/AM/FM MODES) Instead of using the microphone’s PTT switch or the front panel [MOX] switch to activate the transmitter, the VOX (Voice Operated TX/RX Control) system provides hands-free, automatic activation of the transmitter, based on voice input into the microphone. Setup of the VOX system takes only a few seconds. 1. To start, set the [VOX ] and [DELAY] knobs fully [VOX] Button counter-clockwise (to the left). 2. Press the [VOX] button to engage VOX operation. 3. Speak into the microphone in a normal voice level, and rotate the [VOX] knob clockwise (to the right) until the point where your voice input activates the trans- mitter. ADVICE: Do not advance the setting of the [VOX] knob too [VOX] Knob [DELAY] Knob much, because to do so will make the transmitter re- spond to minor background noises in your station. 4. Now stop speaking, and note the amount of time it takes ADVICE: for the receiver to recover. If the hang time is too long The Anti-Trip setting sets the negative feedback of re- or too short; rotate the [DELAY] knob, while speaking ceiver audio to the microphone, to prevent receiver briefly into the microphone and then pausing, so as to audio from activating the transmitter (via the micro- set the desired hang time. Clockwise rotation of the phone) can be adjusts via Menu item “040 GEnE [DELAY] control will increase the hang time. ANTIVOX.” 5. To exit from VOX operation, press the [VOX] button VOX operation may be engaged on either Voice modes once more. We recommend doing this if you are going (SSB/AM/FM) and on AFSK-based Data modes. Use to leave your station, to prevent inadvertent activation Menu item “137 tGEn VOX SEL” (the selections are of the VOX system by a ringing nearby telephone, “niC (MIC)” and “dAtA (DATA)”). speaker audio from a TV, etc. MONITOR (SSB/AM/FM MODES) You may listen to the quality of your transmitted signal using the Monitor feature. 1. Press the [MONI] button. The “ ” icon will ap- [MONI] Button pear in the display, indicating that the Monitor is turned on. 2. During transmission, rotate the [MONI] knob to ad- just the audio level from the Monitor. Clockwise rota- tion of this knob will increase the volume level. 3. To switch the Monitor off again, press the [MONI] button once more. The “ ” icon will turn off, con- firming that the Monitor is now disengaged. [MONI] Knob ADVICE: If you are using the speaker for monitoring, instead of headphones, excessive advancement of the [MONI] knob can cause feedback to occur. Additionally, this feedback can cause the VOX system to hang up in a loop, making it impossible to return to receive. There- fore, we recommend the use of headphones, if at all possible, or the minimum usable setting of the [MONI] knob, if the speaker must be used. Because the Monitor feature utilizes a sampling of the transmitter’s IF signal, it can be very useful for check- ing the adjustment of the Speech Processor or Para- metric Equalizer on SSB, and for checking the general signal quality on AM and FM. Page 78 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 81. TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES SPLIT OPERATION USING THE TX CLARIFIER (VFO-A OPERATION) For split TX/RX operation in “casual” pile-ups, where the split is less than 10 kHz, the TX Clarifier (Offset Tuning) feature may be utilized. 1. Press the [TX CLAR] button. [CLAR] Knob The “TX” icon will appear in the Multi-Display Window in the display. QUICK POINT: The Clarifier is frequently used for receiver offset tun- ing. However, for DX pile-ups where the DX station is using a split of less than 10 kHz, the TX Clarifier func- tion is usually the quickest way to set the transmitter to [RX CLAR] Button [TX CLAR] Button the desired offset frequency. [CLEAR] Button 2. Rotate the [CLAR] knob to set the desired transmitter offset. A maximum split of ±9.99 kHz may be set. CLAR + 3. To exit from TX Clarifier operation, press the [TX CLAR] button once more. The “TX” icon will disap- pear from the Multi-Display Window. ADVICE: To listen to the pile-up calling the DX station, so as to find the station currently being worked, you may press the [RX CLAR] button. Once you have zeroed in on the station calling the DX (use the SPOT function on CW for precise alignment of your frequency), you may then press the [RX CLAR] button again to cancel the RX Clarifier, and return to reception on the DX station’s QUICK POINT: frequency. When attempting to work a DX station on CW, in a split- Just as with receiver Clarifier operation, the amount of frequency pile-up, remember that a large number of other offset from the original VFO frequency will appear in stations may also be using Yaesu transceivers with capa- the small display window. bility similar to that of your FT-2000D. On the DX side As with receiver Clarifier operation, when you turn the of the pile-up, everyone calling precisely on the same CW TX Clarifier off the last-used offset is not lost, and will frequency will sound like a single tone! So you may have be available if you turn the TX Clarifier back on. To more success if you use the RX Clarifier to find a hole in clear the Clarifier offset, press the [CLEAR] button. the pile-up, instead of trying to zero-beat the last station worked by the DX station. Clarifier Offset Bar Indicator A visual depiction of the relative offset of the Clarifier may be displayed, using the Bar Indicator. 1. Press the [MENU] button; the Menu list will ap- [MENU] button pear in the display. 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item “010 diSP BAR SEL.” 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select “CLAr” from the available choices; the factory default is “C-tn.” 4. Press and hold in the [MENU ] but- Main Tuning Dial knob [SUB VFO-B] knob (TX Frequency < RX Frequency) ton for two seconds to save the new set- ting and exit to nor- (TX Frequency = RX Frequency) mal operation. (TX Frequency > RX Frequency) FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 79
  • 82. TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION A powerful capability of the FT-2000D is its flexibility in Split Frequency operation, using the Main (VFO-A) and Sub (VFO-B) frequency registers. This makes the FT-2000D especially useful for high-level DX-pedition use, as the Split operation capability is very advanced and easy to use. 1. Set the Main (VFO-A) frequency as desired. MAIN [RX] Switch MAIN [TX] Switch 2. Set the Sub (VFO-B) frequency. 3. Now press the [SPLIT] button. The front panel switch/LEDs will look like this: Main (VFO-A) [RX ] switch “ON” (LED glows Green) [TX] switch “OFF” (LED Off) [SPLIT] Button Sub [RX] Switch Sub (VFO-B) Sub [TX] Switch [RX] switch “OFF” (LED Off) [TX] switch “ON” (LED glows Red) During Split operation, the Main (VFO-A) register will be VFO Tracking Feature used for reception, while the Sub (VFO-B) register will be In the default setting, the Main Band (VFO-A) frequency used for transmission. If you press the [SPLIT] button and Sub Band (VFO-B) frequency are changed individu- once more, Split operation will be cancelled. ally using the Main Tuning Dial knob and the [SUB VFO- B] knob. You may also press the Main [TX] switch located above and to the right of the Main Tuning Dial knob to return If you want to tune the Main Band (VFO-A) frequency transmit frequency control to the Main (VFO-A) side, and Sub Band (VFO-B) frequency together, the VFO thereby cancelling Split operation. Tracking feature is very useful. ADVICE: Here is the procedure for activating the VFO Tracking fea- During normal (non-split) VFO-A operation, you may ture: simply press the Sub (VFO-B) [TX] switch (located 1. Press the [MENU] button to engage the Menu mode. above and to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob) to 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item engage Split operation. The Sub [TX] indicator will “032 GEnE TRACK.” glow Red when you press the switch. 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the desired During Split operation, pressing the [A B] button will Tracking mode. reverse the contents of the Main and Sub VFOs. Press OFF: Disables the VFO Tracking feature. the [A B] button once more to return to the original bAND: When you change bands on the Main (VFO- frequency alignment. A) side, the Sub (VFO-B) band’s VFO will au- During Split operation, if you press the [RX] switch tomatically change to be the same as that of above and to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob, you VFO-A. will engage Dual Receive operation, and now can lis- FrEq: This function is the almost same as “bAND;” ten to both sides of the DX pile-up, while transmitting that is, the Sub band’s (VFO-B) frequency on the Sub (VFO-B) frequency. This is very useful for changes together with the Main Band’s (VFO- maintaining the timing of your calls, while also moni- A) frequency when turning the Main Dial Tun- toring both sides of the pile-up. ing knob. During Split operation, you may also listen the TX fre- 4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds quency temporarily while pressing the [TXW] button to lock in the new configuration and exit to normal (below and to the left of the Main Tuning Dial knob). operation. It is possible to set different operating modes (for ex- [MENU] Button ample, LSB and USB) on the two VFOs used during Split operation. During Split operation, it also is possible to set the Main and Sub VFOs to different Amateur bands. But remember that Dual Reception must be within the same band. Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob Page 80 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 83. TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION Quick Split Operation The Quick Split feature allows you to set a one-touch offset of +5 kHz to be applied to your radio’s transmit frequency on the Sub (VFO-B), compared to the Main (VFO-A) frequency. 1. Start with regular transceiver op- MAIN [RX] Switch MAIN [TX] Switch eration on the Main (VFO-A) band. MAIN (VFO-A) [RX] switch “ON” (LED glows Green) [TX] switch “ON” (LED glows Red) SUB (VFO-B) [RX] switch “OFF” (LED Off) [SPLIT] Button Sub [RX] Switch [TX] switch “OFF” (LED Off) Sub [TX] Switch 2. Press and hold in the [SPLIT] button for two sec- onds to engage the Quick Split feature, and apply a frequency 5 kHz above the Main (VFO-A) fre- quency to the Sub (VFO-B) frequency register. Press and hold in the [SPLIT] button for two sec- onds to increment the Main (VFO-A) frequency to +5 kHz. The VFO configuration will then be: MAIN (VFO-A) [RX] switch “ON” (LED glows Green) [TX] switch “OFF” (LED Off) SUB (VFO-B) [RX] switch “OFF” (LED Off) [TX] switch “ON” (LED glows Red) QUICK POINTS: The operating mode applied to the Sub (VFO-B) register will be the same as that in use on the Main (VFO-A) register. The offset of the Sub (VFO-B) from the Main VFO (VFO-A) is programmed via the Menu, and is set to +5 kHz at the factory. Other offsets may be se- lected, however, using the following procedure: 1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode. [MENU] Button 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item “031 gene Q SPLIT.” 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the de- sired offset. The available selections are –20kHz ~ +20kHz (factory default: +5 kHz). 4. When you have completed all adjustments, press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob save the new setting and exit to normal operation. If you only press the [MENU] button momentarily to exit, any changes you performed will not be stored. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 81
  • 84. CW MODE OPERATION The powerful CW operating capabilities of the FT-2000D include operation using both an electronic keyer paddle and a “straight key” or emulation thereof, as is provided by a computer-based keying device. SETUP FOR STRAIGHT KEY (AND STRAIGHT KEY EMULATION) OPERATION Before starting, connect your key line(s) to the front and/or rear panel KEY jack(s), and be sure the [KEYER] button on the front panel is turned off for now. 1. Press the [CW] mode button to en- [A] Button gage CW operation. [BK-IN] Button [B] Button ADVICE: The operating mode is selected using the [MODE] buttons to the left of the Main Tuning Dial knob, and the VFO (A or B) to which the selection is applied is selected by the [A] or [B] button above the [MODE] buttons. Usu- [CW] Button ally, the [A] button glow Red, sig- nifying Main band (VFO-A) is being adjusted. Similarly, pressing the [B] button will cause its indicator to blink Orange for five sec- onds, signifying Sub band (VFO-B) adjustment. Therefore, press the [A] or [B] button to select the desired VFO, then press the [CW] button to select the CW mode. If you press the [CW] button once more, after ini- tially selecting CW, you will engage the “CW Re- verse” mode (see page 86), whereby the “oppo- site” sideband injection is used, compared to the ADVICE: “normal” sideband. The CW LED will blink for You can monitor your sending by pressing the [MONI] three seconds if you select CW Reverse. button, and adjusting the [MONI] knob for a comfort- 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the desired able listening level on the CW sidetone. operating frequency. If you set the [VOX] and [BK-IN] buttons to Off, you 3. Press the [BK-IN] button to engage automatic activa- may practice your sending without having the signal tion of the transmitter when you close the CW go out over the air (sidetone only). key. The “ ” icon will appear in the dis- If you reduce power using the [RF PWR] knob, the play. ALC meter reading will increase; this is normal and ADVICE: does not indicate any problem whatsoever (because When you close your CW key, the transmitter will increased ALC voltage is being used to lower the automatically be activated, and the CW carrier will power). be transmitted. When you release the key, trans- mission will cease after a brief delay; the delay time TERMINOLOGY: is user-programmable, per the discussion on page Semi-break-in 83. This is a pseudo- “VOX” mode used on CW, whereby As shipped from the factory, the FT-2000D TX/ the closure of the CW key will engage the transmitter, RX system for CW is configured for “Semi-break- and release of the key will allow the receiver to re- in” operation. However, using Menu item “058 cover after a short delay. No signals will be heard be- A1A BK-IN,” you may change this setup for full tween the spaces between dots and dashes (unless the break-in (QSK) operation, whereby the switching sending speed is extremely slow). is quick enough to hear incoming signals in the spaces between the dots and dashes of your trans- Full break-in mission. This may prove very useful during con- Full break-in (Also known as “Full QSK”) involves test and traffic-handling operations. very fast switching between transmit and receive, such 4. Operation using your CW key may now proceed. that incoming signals may be heard between the dots and dashes as you send them. This allows you to hear a station that suddenly starts transmitting on your fre- quency, while you are in the midst of a transmission. Page 82 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 85. CW MODE OPERATION USING THE BUILT-IN ELECTRONIC KEYER Connect the cable from your keyer paddle to the front or rear panel KEY jack. 1. Press the [CW] mode button to en- [KEYER] Button [A] Button gage CW operation. [BK-IN] Button [B] Button ADVICE: The operating mode is selected using the [MODE] buttons to the left of the Main Tuning Dial knob, and the VFO (A or B) to which the selection is applied is selected by the [A] or [B] button above the [MODE] buttons. Usu- [CW] Button ally, the [A] button glow Red, sig- [SPEED] Knob nifying Main band (VFO-A) is being adjusted. Similarly, pressing the [B] button will cause its indicator to blinks Orange for five second, signifying Sub band (VFO-B) adjustment. Therefore, press the [A] or [B] button to select the desired VFO, then press the [CW] button to select the CW mode. If you press the [CW] button once more, after ini- tially selecting CW, you will engage the “CW Re- verse” mode (see page 86), whereby the “oppo- site” sideband injection is used, compared to the “normal” sideband. The CW LED will blink for three seconds if you select CW Reverse. 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the desired operating frequency. 3. Press the [KEYER] button. The “ ” icon will ap- pear in the display, confirming that the built- ADVICE: in Electronic Keyer is now active. If you reduce power using the [RF PWR] knob, the ALC 4. Rotate the [SPEED] knob to set the meter reading will increase; this is normal and does not desired sending speed (4 ~ 60 WPM). indicate any problem whatsoever (because increased ALC Clockwise rotation of the [SPEED] voltage is being used to lower the power). knob will increase the keying speed. ADVICE: You may confirm the keying speed when turning Full Break-in (QSK) Operation the [SPEED] knob while pressing the [KEYER] button. The Sub (VFO-B) frequency display shows As shipped from the factory, the FT-2000D TX/ the keying speed. RX system for CW is configured for “Semi-break- When you press either the “Dot” or “Dash” side of in” operation. However, using Menu item “058 your paddle, the transmitter will automatically be A1A BK-IN,” you may change this setup for full activated. break-in (QSK) operation, whereby the switching 5. If you press the [BK-IN] button, “semi-break-in” op- is quick enough to hear incoming signals in the eration (discussed previously) will be engaged. spaces between the dots and dashes of your trans- 6. CW operation utilizing your paddle may now mission. commence. 1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu ADVICE: mode. When you utilize your keyer paddle, the transmitter 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select will automatically be activated, and the CW charac- Menu item “058 A1A BK-IN.” ters (or a strong of dots and dashes) will be transmit- 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set this ted. When you release the keyer paddle contacts, trans- Menu item to “FuLL.” mission will cease after a brief delay; the delay time is 4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two user-programmable, per the discussion on page 83. seconds to save the new setting and exit. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 83
  • 86. CW MODE OPERATION USING THE BUILT-IN ELECTRONIC KEYER A number of interesting and useful features are available during Electronic Keyer operation. Setting the Keyer Weight (Dot/Space:Dash) Ratio The Menu may be used to adjust the Weight for the built-in Electronic Keyer. The default weighting is 3:1 (a dash is three times longer than a dot or space). 1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode. [MENU] Button 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item “060 AIA WEIGHT.” 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set the weight to the desired value. The available adjustment range is for a Dot/Space:Dash ratio of “2.5” ~ “4.5” (de- fault value: “3.0”). 4. When you are finished, press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to save the new Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob setting and exit to normal operation. Selecting the Keyer Operating Mode The configuration of the Electronic Keyer may be customized independently for the front and rear KEY jacks of the FT-2000. This permits utilization of Automatic Character Spacing (ACS), if desired, as well as the use of the electronic keyer via the front jack and a straight key or computer-driven keying line via the rear panel. 1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode. [MENU] Button 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item “052 A1A F-TYPE” (for the front KEY jack) or “054 A1A R-TYPE” (for the rear-panel’s KEY jack). 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set the keyer to the desired mode. The available selections are: OFF: The built-in Electronic Keyer is turned off (“straight key” mode). Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob buG: Dots will be generated automatically by the keyer, but dashes must be sent manually. ELE: Both dots and dashes will be generated au- ACS “OFF” tomatically when you use your paddle. Morse ACS: Same as “ELE” except that the spacing be- “E” & “T” Inter-character tween characters is precisely set by the keyer spacing to short ACS “ON” to be the same length as a dash (three dots in Morse “E” & “T” length) 4. When you are finished, press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. Page 84 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 87. CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES CW SPOTTING (ZERO-BEATING) “Spotting” (zeroing in on another CW station) is a handy technique for ensuring that you and the other station are precisely on the same frequency. For everyday operation, the (CW) [PITCH] knob allows you to set the center of the receiver passband, as well as the offset pitch of your CW carrier signal, to the tone pitch you prefer to listen to. The Tuning Offset Indicator in the display may also be moved so you can adjust your receiver frequency to center the incoming station on the pitch corresponding to that of your transmitted signal. Using the SPOT System While pressing the front panel’s [SPOT] button, the Spot [PITCH] Knob Tuning Offset Indicator tone will be heard and the Sub (VFO-B) frequency dis- play will show the Spot tone frequency. This tone corre- sponds to the pitch of your transmitted signal, and if you adjust the receiver frequency to match the pitch of the re- ceived CW signal to that of the Spot tone, your transmit- ted signal will be precisely matched to that of the other station. [SPOT] Button Release the [SPOT] button to turn the Spot tone off. ADVICE: In a tough DX pile-up, you may actually want to use the SPOT system to find a “gap” in the spread of call- ing stations, instead of zeroing in precisely on the last station being worked by the DX station. From the DX side, if a dozen or more operators (also using Yaesu’s SPOT system) all call precisely on the same frequency, their dots and dashes merge into a single, long tone QUICK POINTS: that the DX station cannot decipher. In such situations, The CW Spotting process utilizes the Spot tone or the calling slightly higher or lower may get your call Tuning Offset Indicator, with the actual offset pitch through. being set by the [PITCH] knob on the front panel. The The Tuning Offset Indicator in the display may be uti- offset pitch may be set to any frequency between 300 lized for CW frequency adjustment, as well. Its con- Hz and 1050 Hz, in 50 Hz steps, and you can either figuration is set via Menu item “010 diSP BAR SEL” match tones audibly (using the [SPOT] button) or align at the factory, and the Tuning Offset Indicator is al- the receiver frequency so that the central red LED on ready set to the “CW TUNE” selection. the Tuning Offset Indicator lights up. Note that there are 21 “dots” on the Tuning Offset Indicator, and de- Retune: Shift to Lower Frequency pending on the resolution selected, the incoming CW signal may fall outside the visible range of the bar in- Zero-In dicator, if you are not reasonably close to the proper alignment of tones. The displayed frequency, on CW, normally reflects the Retune: Shift to Higher Frequency “zero beat” frequency of your offset carrier. That is, if you were to listen on USB on 14.100.00 MHz to a : When the CW reversefeature is activated, the signal with a 700 Hz offset, the “zero beat” frequency indicator of the Tuning Offset Indicator will also of that CW carrier would be 14.000.70 MHz; the latter be reversed. frequency is what the FT-2000D displays, by default. However, you can change the display to be identical to what you would see on SSB by using Menu item “061 A1A FRQDISP” and setting it to “dIr” instead of its default “OFSt” setting. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 85
  • 88. CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES USING CW REVERSE If you experience a difficult interference situation, where an interfering station cannot readily be eliminated, you may wish to try receiving using the opposite sideband. This may throw the interfering station’s frequency in a direction that may lend itself more readily to rejection. 1. To start, let’s use a typical example where you have set [B] Button the CW mode (using the default “USB” injection) onto the Main (VFO-A) receiver. 2. Now be sure your mode selection is still set for the Main (VFO-A) regis- ter, and press the [CW] mode button once more. The “LSB” LED will blink for three seconds, indicating that the “LSB” injection side has now [CW] Button been selected. 3. When using Dual Receive, press the [B] button, then (within five seconds of pressing the [B] button) press the [CW] button to engage CW Reverse on the Sub (VFO-B) receiver, in ex- In the illustration, Figure A demonstrates the nor- actly the same way as for the Main (VFO-A) receiver. mal CW injection setup, using the USB side. In 4. Press the [CW] mode button once more to return to Figure B, CW Reverse has been engaged, so as to the normal (USB) injection side and cancel CW Re- receive using LSB-side injection to eliminate in- verse operation (the “USB” LED will blink for three terference. seconds). The beneficial effect of switching sidebands can NOTES: clearly be seen in this example. When CW Reverse is engaged, the Tuning Offset In- A Normal CW Carrier dicator action will concurrently be reversed as to its ( USB ) indication. When the incoming signal pitch tone is properly QRM aligned, the central red marker lights up whether or not CW Reverse is engaged. RX Passband Retune: Shift to Lower Frequency B CW Reverse Carrier ( LSB ) Zero-In QRM Retune: Shift to Higher Frequency RX Passband Page 86 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 89. CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES CW DELAY TIME SETTING During semi-break-in (not QSK) operation, the hang time of the transmitter, after you have finished sending, may be adjusted to a comfortable value consistent with your sending speed. This is the functional equivalent to the “VOX Delay” adjustment used on voice modes, and the delay may be varied anywhere between 20 milli-seconds ([DELAY] knob set fully counter-clockwise) and 5 seconds (fully clockwise). 1. Press the [BK-IN] button to enable CW transmission [BK-IN] Button (Menu item “058 A1A BK-IN” must be set to “SEni”). 2. Start sending, and adjust the [DELAY] knob so that the hang time is as you prefer for comfortable opera- tion. [DELAY] Knob CW PITCH ADJUSTMENT Rotation of the front panel’s [PITCH] knob will allow [PITCH] Knob Sub (VFO-B) frequency display adjustment of the center frequency of the receiver pass- band, as well as the pitch of your offset CW carrier, to the tone you prefer. The tone may be varied between 300 Hz and 1050 Hz, in 50 Hz steps. ADVICE: You may confirm the Spot tone frequency when turning the [PITCH] knob while pressing the [SPOT] button. Sub [SPOT] Button (VFO-B) frequency display will shows the Spot tone fre- quency. TERMINOLOGY: CW Pitch: If you tuned to an exact “zero beat” on an incoming CW signal, you could not copy it (“Zero beat” implies a 0 Hz tone). Therefore, the receiver is offset sev- eral hundreds of Hz (typically), so as to allow your ear to detect the tone. The BFO offset associated with this tun- ing (that produces the comfortable audio tone) is called the CW Pitch. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 87
  • 90. CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES CONTEST MEMORY KEYER The FT-2000D in capable of the automatic sending of CW messages (as you might do in a contest). Two techniques for message storage are available: you may either send the desired message contents using your keyer paddle (“Message Memory”), or you may input the text characters using the Main Dial Tuning knob and [SUB VFO-B] knobs (“Text Memory”). Message Memory Five memory channels capable of retaining 50 characters total are provided (using the PARIS standard for characters and word length). Example: CQ CQ CQ DE W6DXC K (19 characters) -- • -- • -- -- • -- -- • -- • -- -- • -- -- • -- • -- -- • -- -- •• • • ---- -- •••• -- •• -- •• -- -- • -- • -- • -- (C) (Q) (C) (Q) (C) (Q) (D) (E) (W) (6) (D) (X) (C) (K) STORING A MESSAGE INTO MEMORY [MENU] Button 1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode. 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the CW Memory Register into which you wish to store the message; for now, we are just selecting the message entry technique (Keyer entry). 020 tEy CW MEM1 021 tEy CW MEM2 022 tEy CW MEM3 023 tEy CW MEM4 Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob 024 tEy CW MEM5 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set the selected Memory Register to “tyP2.” If you want to use your keyer paddle for message entry on all memories, set all five Menu items (#020 ~ 024) to “tyP2.” 4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to save the new settings and exit. MESSAGE MEMORY PROGRAMMING (USING YOUR PADDLE) 1. Set the operating mode to CW. [KEYER] Button 2. Set the [BK-IN] button to Off. [BK-IN] Button 3. Turn the internal Electronic Keyer On by pressing the [KEYER] button, if necessary. 4. Press the [F5(MEM)] button on the front panel. 5. Press the [F1(CH1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button to begin the memory storage process. 6. Send the desired message using your keyer paddle. 7. Press the [F5(MEM)] button once more at the end of your message. Up to 50 characters may be stored among [F5(MEM)] Button the five memories. [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] Button NOTE: You must exercise care in sending to ensure that the spaces between letters and words are accurately done; if your tim- ing is off, the spacing may not come out right in the stored message. For ease in setting up the keyer memories, we recommend TERMINOLOGY: you set Menu item “051 A1A F-TYPE” and/or “053 A1A PARIS Word Length: By convention in the Amateur R-TYPE” to “ACS” (Automatic Character Spacing) while industry (utilized by ARRL and others), the length of one you are programming the keyer memories. “word” of CW is defined as the length of the Morse Code characters spelling the word “PARIS.” This character (dot/ dash/space) length is used for the rigorous definition of code speed in “words per minute.” Page 88 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 91. CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES CONTEST MEMORY KEYER CHECKING THE CW MEMORY CONTENTS [BK-IN] Button 1. Be sure that Break-in is still turned Off by the [BK-IN] button. 2. Press the [MONI] button to enable the CW monitor. 3. Press the [F1(CH1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button to check your work. You will hear the results in the sidetone, but no RF energy will be transmitted. NOTE: Adjust the monitor level using the [MONI] knob. [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] Button ON-THE-AIR CW MESSAGE PLAYBACK [BK-IN] Button 1. Press the [BK-IN] button to enable transmission. Ei- ther Full- or Semi-break-in will be engaged, depend- ing on the setting of Menu item “058 A1A BK-IN.” 2. Press the [F1(CH1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button to transmit the programmed message. NOTE: If you subsequently decide to use the “Text Memory” tech- nique for memory storage, please note that the contents of [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] Button a message stored using keyer paddle input will not be trans- ferred over when you select “Text Memory technique” on a particular memory register (the Menu Mode Setting is set to “tyP1”). Transmitting in the Beacon Mode It is possible to transmit, repetitively in a “Beacon” mode, any message programmed either via paddle input or via the “Text” input method. The time delay between message repeats may be set anywhere between 0 and 255 seconds via Menu item “017 tEy BEACON.” If you do not wish the message to repeat in a “Beacon” mode, please set this Menu item to “off.” Press the [F1(CH1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button, depending on the register into which the Beacon message is stored. Repetitive transmission of the Beacon message will begin. Press one of these keys once more to halt the Beacon transmissions. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 89
  • 92. CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES CONTEST MEMORY KEYER TEXT Memory The four channels of CW message memory (up to 50 characters total) may also be programmed using a text-entry tech- nique. This technique is somewhat slower than when you send the message directly from your keyer paddle, but accuracy of character spacing is ensured. Example 1: CQ CQ CQ DE W6DXC K} (20 characters) And we will utilize another powerful feature of the CW Memory Keyer, the sequential Contest Number (“Countup”) feature. Example 2: 599 10 200 # K} (15 characters) STORING A MESSAGE INTO MEMORY 1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode. [MENU] Button 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the CW Memory Register into which you wish to store the message; for now, we are just selecting the message entry technique (Keyer entry). 020 tEy CW MEM1 021 tEy CW MEM2 022 tEy CW MEM3 023 tEy CW MEM4 Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob 024 tEy CW MEM5 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set the selected Memory Register to “tyP1.” If you want to text mes- sage entry on all memories, set all five Menu items (#020 ~ 024) to “tyP1.” 4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button to save the new settings and exit. TEXT MESSAGE PROGRAMMING 1. Press the [CW] mode button to set the operating mode [BK-IN] Button Main Tuning Dial Knob to CW. 2. Be sure that Break-in is Off by pressing the [BK-IN] button, if necessary. 3. Press the [F5(MEM)] button on the front panel. 4. Press the [F1(CH1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button to select the desired Message Memory Register into which you wish to program the text. 5. Use the Main Tuning Dial knob to set the cursor posi- [F5(MEM)] Button [SUB VFO-B] Knob tion and use the [SUB VFO-B] knob to choose the [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] Button letter/number to be programmed in each slot of the Current Cursor Position Cursor memory. In the case of the second example above, the “#” character designates the slot where the Contest Number will appear. 6. When the message is complete, add the “}” character at the end to signify the termination of the message. CW Memory Register Number Message 7. Press and hold in the [F5(MEM)] button for 2 seconds to exit, once all characters (including “}”) have been programmed. ADVICE: Deleting Previously-stored Characters Use the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the last correct letter in the message. Now rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the “}” character; everything after the “}” charac- ter will be deleted. Page 90 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 93. CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES CONTEST MEMORY KEYER CHECKING THE CW MEMORY CONTENTS [BK-IN] Button 1. Be sure that Break-in is still turned Off by the [BK-IN] button. 2. Press the [MONI] button to enable the CW monitor. 3. Press the [F1(CH1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button to check your work. You will hear the results in the sidetone, but no RF energy will be transmitted. NOTE: Adjust the monitor level using the [MONI] knob. [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] Button ON-THE-AIR CW MESSAGE PLAYBACK [BK-IN] Button 1. Press the [BK-IN] button to enable transmission. Ei- ther Full- or Semi-break-in will be engaged, depend- ing on the setting of Menu item “058 A1A BK-IN.” 2. Press the [F1(CH1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] button to transmit the programmed message. NOTE: If you subsequently decide to use the Message Memory technique for memory storage, please note that the con- tents of a message stored using text input will not be trans- [F1(CH-1)] ~ [F4(CH-4)] Button ferred over when you select Message Memory technique on a particular memory register (the Menu Mode Setting is set to “tyP2”). Contest Number Programming Decrementing the Contest Number Use this process if you are starting a contest, or if Use this process if the current contest number gets you somehow get out of sync with the proper num- slightly ahead of the actual number you want to ber in the middle of a contest. send (in case of a duplicate QSO, for example). 1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu Press the [F6(DEC)] button on the front panel. The mode. current Contest Number will be reduced by one. 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Press the [F6(DEC)] button as many times as nec- Menu item “019 tEy CONTEST.” essary to reach the desired number. If you go too 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set the Con- far, use the “Contest Number Programming” tech- test Number to the desired value. nique desired above. Advice: Press the [CLEAR] button (located below and to the left of the [CLAR] knob) to reset the Con- test Number to “1.” 4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to store the new number and exit to normal operation. TEXT DISPLAY CW CODE TEXT DISPLAY CW CODE TEXT DISPLAY CW CODE TEXT DISPLAY CW CODE ! SN ( KN / DN @ @ “”” AF “)” KK “:” OS “[” --- # --- --- ; KR AL * $ SX + AR < --- ] --- % KA , MIM = BT ^ --- & AS --- DU > --- _ IQ ‘’’ WG . AAA ? IMI ‘}’ --- FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 91
  • 94. CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES CONTEST MEMORY KEYER (USING THE OPTIONAL FH-2 REMOTE CONTROL KEYPAD) You may also utilize the CW message capability of the FT-2000D from the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad, which plugs into the rear panel’s REM jack. Message Memory Five memory channels capable of retaining 50 characters total are provided (using the PARIS standard for characters and word length). Example: CQ CQ CQ DE W6DXC K (19 characters) STORING A MESSAGE INTO MEMORY [MENU] Button 1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode. 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the CW Memory Register into which you wish to store the message; for now, we are just selecting the message entry technique (Keyer entry). 020 tEy CW MEM1 021 tEy CW MEM2 022 tEy CW MEM3 023 tEy CW MEM4 Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob 024 tEy CW MEM5 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set the selected Memory Register to “tyP2.” If you want to use your keyer paddle for message entry on all memories, set all five Menu items (#020 ~ 024) to “tyP2.” 4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button to save the new settings and exit. Page 92 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 95. CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES CONTEST MEMORY KEYER (USING THE OPTIONAL FH-2 REMOTE CONTROL KEYPAD) MESSAGE MEMORY PROGRAMMING (USING YOUR PADDLE) CHECKING THE CW MEMORY CONTENTS 1. Set the operating mode to CW. 1. Be sure that Break-in is still turned Off. 2. Set the [BK-IN] button to Off. 2. Press the [MONI] button to enable the CW monitor. 3. Turn the internal Electronic Keyer On by pressing the 3. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key to check your work. [KEYER] button, if necessary. You will hear the results in the sidetone, but no RF 4. Press the FH-2’s [MEM] key. energy will be transmitted. LOCK ON OFF LOCK ON OFF 5. Press the [1] ~ [5] key on the FH-2 to begin the memory NOTE: storage process. You may adjust the monitor level using the [MONI] knob. ON-THE-AIR CW MESSAGE PLAYBACK LOCK 1. Press the [BK-IN] button to enable transmission. Ei- ON OFF ther Full- or Semi-break-in will be engaged, depend- ing on the setting of Menu item “058 A1A BK-IN.” 2. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key to transmit the pro- grammed message. LOCK ON OFF 6. Send the desired message using your keyer paddle. 7. Press the [MEM] key on the FH-2 once more at the end of your message. Up to 50 characters may be stored among the five memories. LOCK ON OFF NOTE: If you subsequently decide to use the “Text Memory” tech- nique for memory storage, please note that the contents of a message stored using keyer paddle input will not be trans- ferred over when you select “Text Memory technique” on a particular memory register (the Menu Mode Setting is set to “tyP1”). NOTE: You must exercise care in sending to ensure that the spaces between letters and words are accurately done; if your tim- ing is off, the spacing may not come out right in the stored message. For ease in setting up the keyer memories, we recommend you set Menu item “052 A1A F-TYPE” and/or “054 A1A R-TYPE” to “ACS” (Automatic Character Spacing) while you are programming the keyer memories. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 93
  • 96. CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES CONTEST MEMORY KEYER (USING THE OPTIONAL FH-2 REMOTE CONTROL KEYPAD) TEXT Memory The five channels of CW message memory (up to 50 characters total) may also be programmed using a text-entry tech- nique. This technique is somewhat slower than when you send the message directly from your keyer paddle, but accuracy of character spacing is ensured. Example 1: CQ CQ CQ DE W6DXC K} (20 characters) And we will utilize another powerful feature of the CW Memory Keyer, the sequential Contest Number (“Countup”) feature. Example 2: 599 10 200 # K} (15 characters) TEXT MEMORY STORAGE 1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode. [MENU] Button 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the CW Memory Register into which you wish to store the message; we are now selecting the message entry tech- nique (Text entry). 020 tEy CW MEM1 021 tEy CW MEM2 022 tEy CW MEM3 023 tEy CW MEM4 Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob 024 tEy CW MEM5 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set the selected Memory Register to “tyP1.” 4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to save the new settings and exit. TEXT MESSAGE PROGRAMMING 1. Press the [CW] mode button to set the operating mode 5. Use the FH-2’s [ ] and [ ] keys to set the cursor to CW. position and use the [ ] and [ ] keys to choose the 2. Be sure that Break-in is Off by pressing the [BK-IN] letter/number to be programmed in each slot of the button, if necessary. memory. In the case of the second example above, the 3. Press the FH-2’s [MEM] key. “#” character designates the slot where the Contest Number will appear. LOCK ON OFF LOCK ON OFF 4. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key to select the desired Message Memory Register into which you wish to pro- Current Cursor Position Cursor gram the text. LOCK ON OFF CW Memory Register Number Message ADVICE: You may also use the Main Tuning Dial knob and the [SUB VFO-B] knobs to program the message charac- ters. Page 94 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 97. CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES CONTEST MEMORY KEYER (USING THE OPTIONAL FH-2 REMOTE CONTROL KEYPAD) 6. When the message is complete, add the “}” character CHECKING THE CW MEMORY CONTENTS at the end to signify the termination of the message. 1. Be sure that Break-in is still turned Off. 7. Press and hold in the FH-2’s [MEM] key for 2 sec- 2. Press the [MONI] button to enable CW monitor. onds to exit, once all characters (including “}”) have 3. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key to check your work. been programmed. You will hear the results in the sidetone, but no RF energy will be transmitted. LOCK ON OFF LOCK ON OFF ADVICE: Deleting Previously-stored Characters NOTE: Use the FH-2’s [ ] and [ ] keys or Main Tuning Dial You may adjust the monitor level using the [MONI] knob. knob to select the last correct letter in the message. Now use the [ ] and [ ] keys or [SUB VFO-B] knob to se- ON-THE-AIR CW MESSAGE PLAYBACK lect the “}” character; everything after the “}” character 1. Press the [BK-IN] button to enable transmission. Ei- will be deleted. ther Full- or Semi-break-in will be engaged, depend- ing on the setting of Menu item “058 A1A BK-IN.” 2. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key to transmit the pro- grammed message. LOCK ON OFF NOTE: If you subsequently decide to use the “Message Memory” technique for memory storage, please note that the con- tents of a message stored using text input will not be trans- ferred over when you select “Message Memory technique” Decrementing the Contest Number on a particular memory register (the Menu Mode Setting By pressing the FH-2’s [DEC] key momentarily, is set to “tyP2”). you may reduce the current Contest Number by one. LOCK ON OFF FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 95
  • 98. FM MODE OPERATION BASIC OPERATION 1. Press the [AM/FM] button several [MOX] Button times, until the imbedded LED glows orange, to select the FM operating mode. QUICK POINT: When the [AM/FM] button glows red, it indicates AM operation. 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob (in the case of Main (VFO-A) op- [AM/FM] Button eration) to select the desired operat- i n g f r e q u e n c y. P r e s s i n g t h e microphone’s [UP] or [DWN] but- ton will cause frequency change in 5 kHz steps. 3. Press the microphone’s PTT switch (or press the front panel [MOX] button) to transmit. Speak into the mi- crophone in a normal voice level. Release the PTT or [MOX] switch to return to receive. 4. Adjustment of the microphone gain may be accom- plished in two ways. At the factory, a default level has been programmed that should be satisfactory for most situations. However, using Menu item “072 F3E MICGAIN,” you may set a different fixed value, or choose the “ur” option, which then lets you use the front panel [MIC] knob to set the microphone gain in the FM mode. ADVICE: The Transmit Monitor is another helpful way of veri- fying proper adjustment of the FM MIC Gain. By press- ing the [MONI] button then adjusting the [MONI] knob for a comfortable listening level while you are trans- mitting, you will be able to hear the difference in de- viation as you make adjustments. FM is only used in the 28 MHz and 50 MHz Amateur bands covered in the FT-2000D. Please do not use FM on any other bands. Page 96 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 99. FM MODE OPERATION REPEATER OPERATION The FT-2000D may be utilized on 29 MHz and 50 MHz repeaters. 1. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to the output fre- [MOX] Button [AM/FM] Button quency (downlink) from the repeater. 2. If CTCSS Tone operation is desired/needed, press and hold in the [AM/FM] button for two seconds to en- gage the CTCSS mode. 3. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the desired CTCSS mode. If you just need to send the uplink en- coding tone, select “tn.” For encode/decode operation, choose “ts” instead. The available choices are Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob “oFF” “tn” “ts” “oFF.” 4. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the desired CTCSS Operation Repeater Shift Direction tn: Tone Encoder –: Minus Shift CTCSS Tone to be used. A total of 50 standard CTCSS tS: Tone Squelch +: Plus Shift tones are provided (see the CTCSS Tone Chart). oFF: OFF S: Simplex 5. Press the [AM/FM] Mode button to select the desired repeater shift direction. The selections are “S” “+” “–” “S” where “S” represents “Simplex” operation (not used on a repeater). CTCSS Tone Frequency 6. Press and hold in the [AM/FM] button for two seconds to exit from the repeater setup mode. CTCSS TONE FREQUENCY (Hz) 67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7 82.5 85.4 7. Close the microphone’s PTT switch (or press the 88.5 91.5 94.8 97.4 100.0 103.5 107.2 110.9 [MOX] button) to begin transmission. You will observe 114.8 118.8 123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5 141.3 146.2 that the frequency has shifted to correspond to the pro- 151.4 156.7 159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9 171.3 173.8 gramming you set up in the previous steps. Speak into 177.3 179.9 183.5 186.2 189.9 192.8 196.6 199.5 203.5 206.5 210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6 241.8 the microphone in a normal voice level, and release 250.3 251.4 the PTT switch or [MOX] button to return to the re- ceive mode. ADVICE: The conventional repeater shift used on 29 MHz is 100 kHz, while on the 50 MHz band the shift may vary between 500 kHz and 1.7 MHz (or more). To program the proper repeater shift, use Menu items “073 F3E 28 RPT” (28 MHz) and “074 F3E 50 RPT” (50 MHz), as appropriate. You may also use “Tone Squelch” whereby your receiver will be kept silent until an incoming signal bearing a matching CTCSS tone is receiver. Your receiver’s squelch will then open in response to the reception of the required tone. 1. Rotate the Main tuning Dial to the output frequency (downlink) from the repeater. [AM/FM] Button 2. Press and hold in the [AM/FM] button for two sec- onds to engage the CTCSS mode. 3. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial to choose “ts” from the available choices of “oFF” “tn” “ts” “oFF.” 4. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the de- sired CTCSS Tone to be used. A total of 50 stan- dard CTCSS tones are provided (see the CTCSS Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob Tone Chart). 5. Press and hold in the [AM/FM] button for two sec- Tone Decoder “ON” onds. On the display, just below the “10 Hz” fre- quency digit, a small “d” will indicate that the Tone Decoder is engaged. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 97
  • 100. MEMORY OPERATION CONVENIENT MEMORY FUNCTIONS The FT-2000D contains ninety-nine regular memories, labeled “01” through “99,” nine special programmed limit memory pairs, labeled “P-1L/1U” through “P-9L/9U,” and five QMB (Quick Memory Bank) memories, labeled “C-1” through “C-5.” Each stores various settings, not only the Main band’s (VFO-A) frequency and mode (See below). By default, the 99 regular memories are contained in one group; however, they can be arranged in up to six separate groups, if desired. QUICK POINT: The FT-2000D’s memory channels store the following data (not just the operating frequency): Frequency Mode Clarifier status and its Offset Frequency ANT status ATT status IPO status VRF status Roofing filter status and its Bandwidth Noise Blanker status CONTOUR status and its Peak Frequency DSP Noise Reduction (DNR) status and its Reduction algorithm selection. DSP Notch filter (NOTCH) status NAR bandwidth status DSP Auto Notch filter (DNF) status Repeater Shift Direction and Shift Frequency CTCSS status and Tone Frequency REGULAR MEMORY CHANNELS PMS MEMORY CHANNELS 99 P-9L/9U 98 P-8L/8U 97 P-7L/7U P-6L/6U P-5L/5U P-4L/4U 03 P-3L/3U 02 P-2L/2U 01 P-1L/1U QMB MEMORY CHANNEL Page 98 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 101. MEMORY OPERATION QMB (QUICK MEMORY BANK) The Quick Memory Bank consists of five memories (labeled “C-1” through “C-5.”) independent from the regular and PMS memories. These can quickly store operating parameters for later recall. QMB Channel Storage 1. Tune to the desired frequency on the Main (VFO-A) [QMB(STO)] Button band. 2. Press the blue [QMB(STO)] button. The “beep” will confirm that the contents of the Main (VFO-A) band have been writ- ten to the currently-available QMB memory. If you repeatedly press the [QMB(STO)] button, the QMB memories will be written in the following order: C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-1 ...... Once all five QMB memories have data on them, previous data (starting with channel “C-1”) will be over-written on a first-in, first-out basis. QMB Channel Recall 1. Press the [QMB (RCL )] button. The current QMB [QMB(RCL)] Button channel’s data will be shown on the Main (VFO-A) frequency display field and the QMB memory channel number will be shown in the Multi-Display Window. 2. Repeatedly pressing the [QMB(RCL)] button will toggle you through the QMB channels: C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-1 ...... 3. Press the [V/M] button to return to the VFO or Memory [V/M] Button mode. ADVICE: Rotating the Main Tuning Dial knob, or changing the op- erating mode, will place the transceiver in the “Memory Tune” mode, which is a temporary “pseudo-VFO” method of tuning off of a stored memory channel. If you do not over-write the contents of the current memory channel, the original contents will not be disturbed by the initiation of Memory Tune operation. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 99
  • 102. MEMORY OPERATION STANDARD MEMORY OPERATION The Standard Memory of the FT-2000D allows storage and recall of up to 99 memories, each storing frequency, mode, and a wide variety of status information detailed previously. Memories may be grouped into as many as six Memory Groups, and additionally you get nine pairs of band-limit (PMS) memories along with five QMB (Quick Memory Bank) memories. Memory Storage 1. Set the Main band (VFO-A) up with all frequency, [A M] Button mode, and status the way you want to have it stored. 2. Press the [A M] button momentarily (the current chan- nel number will start blinking in the multi-panel win- dow); the contents of the current memory channel will be shown on the Sub band (VFO-B) display field. 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the memory channel onto which you wish to store the data. If you have selected a channel on which data is already stored, [SUB VFO-B] Knob that frequency will appear on the Sub band’s (VFO-B) frequency display field. 4. Press and hold in the [A M] button for two seconds to store the frequency and other data into the selected memory channel. A double beep will confirm that you have held the [A M] button in long enough. Memory Channel Recall [V/M] Button [A/B] Button 1. Press the [V/M ] button, if necessary, to enter the [SUB VFO-B] Knob Memory mode. A memory channel number will ap- pear in the multi-panel window. 2. Press the [M CH] button. The Red LED inside the but- ton will light up, indicating that you are ready to recall a memory channel. ADVICE: If the Red LED imbedded in the [M CH] button does not light up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to [GRP] Button the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob is not illuminated. [M CH] Button If it is, press the [A/B] switch to make it go out, then press the [M CH] button again. 3. After pressing the [M CH] button, you may rotate the [M CH] knob to select the desired memory channel. ADVICE: To work within a particular Memory Group, press the [GRP] button (the imbedded LED will glow Red), then rotate the [SUB VFO-B ] knob to select the desired Memory Group. Now press the [M CH] button (the im- bedded LED will glow Red); you may now choose the memory channel within the selected Memory Group. Page 100 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 103. MEMORY OPERATION STANDARD MEMORY OPERATION Checking a Memory Channel’s Status Before programming a channel into memory, you can check the current contents of that channel without the danger of over- writing the channel accidentally. 1. Press the [A M] button momentarily. [A M] Button The data stored in the currently-selected memory chan- nel will be displayed in the Sub band (VFO-B) fre- quency field. However, since you are only checking the contents of the memory channel, your radio will not have moved to the memory channel’s frequency. 2. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select a different memory channel. To exit from the Memory Check mode, press the [A M] button momentarily once [SUB VFO-B] Knob more. ADVICE: While the Memory Check function is engaged, the memory channel number will blink in the multi-panel window. While operating in the VFO mode, using Memory Check, you may store the current contents of the Main (VFO-A) register into the selected memory by press- ing and holding in the [A M] button for two seconds (until the double beep). Conversely, if you wish to write the contents of the current memory into the Main (VFO- A) register, press and hold in the [M A] button for two seconds. Erasing Memory Channel Data 1. Press the [A M] button. [LOCK] Button The data stored in the currently-selected memory chan- nel will be displayed in the Sub (VFO-B) band fre- quency field. 2. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the memory channel that you would like to erase. 3. Press the [LOCK] button to erase the contents of the selected memory channel. ADVICE: [SUB VFO-B] Knob [A M] Button After erasure, only the memory channel number will remain; the frequency data will disappear from the dis- play. If you make a mistake and wish to restore the memory’s contents, just repeat steps (1) through (3) above. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 101
  • 104. MEMORY OPERATION STANDARD MEMORY OPERATION Moving Memory Data to the Main Band (VFO-A) You may transfer the contents of the currently-selected memory channel into the Main band (VFO-A) register, if you like. 1. Press the [V/M] button, as necessary, to go to the [V/M] Button Memory mode. The memory channel number will ap- [SUB VFO-B] Knob pear in the multi-panel window. 2. Press the [M CH] button. The Red LED inside the switch will light up, indicating that you are ready to recall a memory channel. ADVICE: If the Red LED imbedded in the [M CH] button does not light up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob is not illuminated. [M CH] Button If it is, press the [A/B] switch to make it go out, then [M A] Button press the [M CH] button again. 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the memory channel the contents of which you wish to transfer to the Main band (VFO-A). 4. Press and hold in the [M A] button for two seconds, until you hear the double beep. The data in the selected memory channel will now be transferred to the Main band (VFO-A). ADVICE: This transfer of data to the Main band (VFO-A) does not affect the original contents of the memory channel; this is a “copy” function that leaves the memory contents un- changed. Memory Tune Operation You may freely tune off of any memory channel in a “Memory Tune” mode that is similar to VFO operation. So long as you do not over-write the contents of the current memory, Memory Tune operation will not alter the contents of the memory channel. 1. Press the [V/M] button to recall any memory channel. [V/M] Button 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob; you will now ob- serve that the memory channel’s frequency is chang- ing. ADVICE: The “ ” icon will replace the “ ” icon in the multi-panel window, indicating you are in the “Memory Tune” mode. During Memory Tune operation, you may change Main Tuning Dial Knob operating modes, and engage the Clarifier, if de- sired. NOTE: 3. Press the [V/M] button momentarily to return to the Computer software programs utilizing the CAT system originally-memorized frequency of the current memory interface port may presume that the transceiver is operat- channel. One more press of the [V/M] button will re- ing in the VFO mode for certain features like “band map- turn you to VFO operation. ping” and/or frequency logging. Because the “Memory Tune” mode so closely resembles the VFO mode, be sure that you have the FT-2000D operating in a control mode compatible with your software’s requirements. Use the VFO mode if you’re not sure. Page 102 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 105. MEMORY OPERATION MEMORY GROUPS Memory channels may be grouped into as many as six convenient batches, for easy identification and selection. For ex- ample, you might want to set aside memory groups for AM BC stations, shortwave broadcast stations, contest frequencies, repeater frequencies, and PMS limits, or any other groupings you like. Each memory group is capable of holding up to 22 memory channels (the Group size is fixed). When a memory channel is grouped, the channel numbers change to correspond to the chart below: Memory Group Assignment [MENU] Button 1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode. 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item “030 GEnE MEM GRP.” 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set this Menu item to “On” (the default setting is “OFF”). 4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to save the new setting and exit. Operation will now be restricted to the six Memory Groups. Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob To cancel Memory Group operation, repeat steps (1) MEMORY CHANNEL NUMBER through (4) above, choosing “OFF” in step (3). GROUP MEMORY “OFF” GROUP MEMORY “ON” ADVICE 01 ~ 19 1-01 ~ 1-19 20 ~ 39 2-01 ~ 2-20 Note that for the PMS memory group, the PMS memories 40 ~ 59 3-01 ~ 3-20 “P-1L” through “P-9U” will be so designated, so as to avoid 60 ~ 79 4-01 ~ 4-20 confusion. 80 ~ 99 5-01 ~ 5-20 P-1L/1U ~ P-9L/9U P-1L/1U ~ P-9L/9U Choosing the Desired Memory Group [V/M] Button [A/B] Button You may recall memories just within a particular Memory [SUB VFO-B] Knob Group, if desired. 1. Press the [V/M ] button, if necessary, to enter the Memory mode. 2. Press the [GRP] button (below and to the left of the [SUB VFO-B] knob). The imbedded LED inside the switch will light up. 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the desired Memory Group. [GRP] Button [M CH] Button 4. Press the [M CH] button (just below the [GRP] but- ton). The imbedded LED inside the switch will light up. 5. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the desired Memory Channel within the Selected Memory Group. ADVICE: If the Red LED imbedded in the [GRP] and [M CH] buttons does not light up, check to be sure that the or- ange lamp to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob is not illuminated. If it is, press the [A/B] button to make it go out, then press the [GRP] or [M CH] button again. If no channels have been assigned to a particular Memory Group, you will not have access to that Group. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 103
  • 106. OPERATION ON ALASKA EMERGENCY FREQUENCY: 5167.5 KH (U.S. VERSION ONLY) Z Section 97.401(d) of the regulations governing amateur radio in the United States permit emergency amateur communica- tions on the spot frequency of 5167.5 kHz by stations in (or within 92.6 km of) the state of Alaska. This frequency is only to be used when the immediate safety of human life and/or property are threatened, and is never to be used for routine communications. The FT-2000D includes the capability for transmission and reception on 5167.5 kHz under such emergency conditions via the Menu system. To activate this feature: 1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode. [MENU] Button 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select “147 tGEn EMERGENCY.” 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select “EnA (En- able).” 4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for 2 seconds to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. Emer- gency communication on this spot frequency is now possible. Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob 5. Press the [V/M ] button, as necessary, to enter the Memory mode. Press the [M CH] button, then rotate [V/M] Button [A/B] Button the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select the emergency chan- [SUB VFO-B] Knob nel (“EUS”), which is found between channels “P-9U” and “01.” ADVICE: If the Red LED imbedded in the [M CH] button does not light up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob is not illuminated. If it is, press the [A/B] switch to make it go out, then press the [M CH] button again. [M CH] Button NOTE: The receive-mode CLARIFIER functions normally while using this frequency, but variation of the trans- mit frequency is not possible. Activation of “147 tGEn EMERGENCY” does not enable any other out-of-ama- teur-band capability on the transceiver. The full speci- fications of the FT-2000D are not necessarily guaran- teed on this frequency, but power output and receiver sensitivity should be fully satisfactory for the purpose of emergency communication. If you wish to disable operation capability on the Alaska Emergency Frequency, repeat the above procedures, but set “147 tGEn EMERGENCY” to “diS” in step 3. In an emergency, note that a half-wave dipole cut for this frequency should be approximately 45’3” on each leg (90’6” total length). Emergency operation on 5167.5 kHz is shared with the Alaska-Fixed Service. This transceiver is not authorized for operation, under the FCC’s Part 87, for aeronautical communications. Page 104 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 107. VFO AND MEMORY SCANNING You may scan wither the VFO or the memories of the FT-2000D, and the radio will halt the scan on any station with a signal strong enough to open the receiver’s squelch. VFO SCANNING 1. Set the VFO to the frequency on which you would like to begin scanning. 2. Rotate the Main [SQL] knob so that the background noise is just silenced. ADVICE: Rotate the Sub [SQL] knob so that the background noise is just silenced, if you would like to begin scan- ning on the Sub band (VFO-B). 3. Press and hold in the microphone’s [UP] or [DWN] Main [SQL] Knob key for 1/2 second to start scanning in the specified MAIN BAND (VFO-A) SCANNING direction on the Main (VFO-A) band. ADVICE: [B] Button If you would like to begin scanning on the Sub band (VFO-B), press the [B] button first, then (within five seconds of pressing the [B] button, while the orange imbedded LED is blinking), press and hold in the microphone’s [UP] or [DWN] key for 1/2 second. 4. If the scanner halts on an incoming signal, the decimal point between the “MHz” and “kHz” digits of the fre- quency display will blink. SUB [SQL] Knob ADVICE: If the incoming signal disappears, scanning will re- SUB BAND (VFO-B) SCANNING sume in about five seconds. On the SSB/CW and SSB-based Data modes, the scanner will pause on a received signal, then will step across the signal very slowly, giving you time to stop the scan, if you like. In these modes on the VFO, the scanner does not stop, however. 5. To cancel the scanning, press the microphone’s [UP] or [DWN] key momentarily. ADVICE: You may select the manner in which the scanner resumes while it has paused on a signal, using Menu item “039 GEnE SCN RSM.” The default “5Sec” setting will cause the scanner to resume scanning after five seconds; you may change it, however, to resume only after the carrier has dropped out, if you like See page 119. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 105
  • 108. VFO AND MEMORY SCANNING MEMORY SCAN 1. Set the transceiver up in the memory mode by pressing [V/M] Button [A/B] Button the [V/M] button, if necessary. [SUB VFO-B] Knob 2. Rotate the Main [SQL] knob so that the background noise is just silenced. 3. Press the [M CH] button momentarily. When you press the [M CH] button, the Red LED im- bedded within the switch should light up, indicating that you are ready to choose a channel into which to store the data. ADVICE: Main [SQL] Knob [M CH] Button If the Red LED imbedded in the [M CH] button does not light up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob is not illuminated. If it is, press the [A/B] button to make it go out, then press the [M CH] button again. 4. Press and hold in the microphone’s [UP] or [DWN] key for 1/2 second to start scanning in the specified direction. ADVICE: If the scanner halts on an incoming signal, the deci- mal point between the “MHz” and “kHz” digits of the frequency display will blink. If the incoming signal disappears, scanning will re- sume in about five seconds. 5. To cancel the scanning, press the microphone’s [UP] or [DWN] key momentarily. ADVICE: QUICK POINT: During Memory Group operation, only the channels If you have no interest in scanning, and wish to prohibit within the current Memory Group will be scanned. the microphone’s [UP]/[DWN] keys from initiating scan- If the scan has paused on a signal, pressing the ning, you may disable scanning control from the micro- microphone’s [UP] or [DWN] key will cause scanning phone using Menu item “038 GEnE MIC SCN” (set it to to resume instantly. “Off”). If you press the microphone’s PTT switch during scan- ning, the scanner will halt at once. Pressing the PTT switch during scanning will not cause transmission, however. You may select the manner in which the scanner re- sumes while it has paused on a signal, using Menu item “039 GEnE SCN RSM.” The default “5Sec” setting will cause the scanner to resume scanning after five seconds; you may change it, however, to resume only after the carrier has dropped out, if you like See page 119. Page 106 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 109. PMS (PROGRAMMABLE MEMORY SCANNING) To limit scanning (and manual tuning) within a particular frequency range, you can use the Programmable Memory Scan- ning (PMS) feature, which utilizes nine special-purpose memory pairs (“P-1L/P-1U” through “P-9L/P-9U”). The PMS feature is especially useful in helping you to observe any operating sub-band limits which apply to your Amateur license class. 1. Store the Lower and Upper tuning/scanning limit fre- [V/M] Button [A/B] Button quencies into the memory pair “P-1L” and “P-1U,” re- [SUB VFO-B] Knob spectively, or any other “L/U” pair of memories in the special PMS memory area. See page 97 for details re- garding memory storage. 2. Press the [V/M] button to enter the Memory mode. 3. Press the [M CH] button momentarily. When you press the [M CH] button, the Red LED im- bedded within the switch should light up, indicating that you are ready to choose a channel into which to Main [SQL] Knob [M CH] Button store the data. ADVICE: If the Red LED imbedded in the [M CH] button does not light up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to the right of the [SUB VFO-B] knob is not illuminated. If it is, press the [A/B] button to make it go out, then press the [M CH] button again. 4. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to select memory chan- nel “P-1L” or “P-1U.” 5. Rotate the Main [SQL] knob so that the background noise is just silenced. 6. Turn the Main Tuning Dial knob slightly (to activate memory tuning). Tuning and scanning are now limited to the range within the P-1L/P-1U limits until you press the [V/M] button to return to memory channel or Main band (VFO-A) operation. 7. Press and hold in the microphone’s [UP] or [DWN] key for 1/2 second to start scanning in the specified direction. ADVICE: If the scanner halts on an incoming signal, the deci- mal point between the “MHz” and “kHz” digits of the frequency display will blink. If the incoming signal disappears, scanning will re- sume in about five seconds. On the SSB/CW and SSB-based Data modes, the scanner will pause on a received signal, then will step across the signal very slowly, giving you time to stop the scan, if you like. In these modes on the VFO, the scanner does not stop, however. If the scan has paused on a signal, pressing the microphone’s [UP] or [DWN] key will cause scan- ning to resume instantly. 8. If you rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob in the oppo- site direction from the current scanning direction (in other words, you rotate the dial to the left when scan- ning toward a higher frequency), the direction of the scan will reverse. 9. If you press the microphone’s PTT switch during scan- ning, the scanner will halt at once. Pressing the PTT switch during scanning will not cause transmission, however. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 107
  • 110. PACKET OPERATION Packet operation is easily accomplished on the FT-2000D by connecting your TNC (Terminal Node Controller) to the transceiver, per the illustration. “Packet” operation also applies to SSB-based AFSK data modes, such as PSK31, etc. DATA DATA PTT OUT IN PACKET ② ④ ⑤ PACKET JACK TNC ① ③ Pin 1 (DATA IN) DATA OUT Pin 2 (GND) GND Pin 3 (PACKET PTT) PTT Pin 4 (DATA OUT) DATA IN Pin 5 (BUSY) (SQL Control) PACKET SETUP (INCLUDING SUBCARRIER FREQUENCY) Before operation can commence, MENU ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES MENU ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES some basic setup procedures must 064 dAtA DATA IN dAtA (DATA) / PC (PC) 068 dAtA VOX DLY 30 ~ 3000 msec be performed, using the Menu, to 065 dAtA DT GAIN 0 ~ 100 069 dAtA V GAIN 0 ~ 100 066 dAtA DT OUT nAin (Main) / Sub (Sub) 070 dAtA PKTDISP –3000 ~ +3000 Hz configure your radio for the data 067 dAtA OUT LVL 0 ~ 100 071 dAtA PKT SFT –3000 ~ +3000 Hz mode to be used. BASIC SETUP During Packet operation via the rear panel’s PACKET 1. Press the [PKT] button. jack, the front panel MIC jack is cut off, so you won’t ADVICE: have a “live microphone” problem during data opera- For HF operation, SSB-based Data operation is gen- tion. erally used. One press of the [PKT] button will engage Packet operation in the “LSB” mode (by NOTE: default). Both the “PKT” and “LSB” LEDs will If you anticipate making data transmissions of longer than become illuminated. a few minutes, we recommend that you use the [RF PWR] If you need to do FM-based 1200-baud packet on knob to reduce the transmitter power to 1/3 ~ 1/2 of its the 29/50 MHz bands, press the [PKT] button re- normal maximum. peatedly to illuminate the “PKT” LED to orange, QUICK POINT: to engage the “PKT-FM” mode. PACKET Jack Specifications When both the “PKT” and “USB” LEDs are illu- DATA IN (Pin 1) minated, the FT-2000D has engaged Packet op- Input Level: 50 mVp-p eration in the “USB” mode. Input Impedance: 10 k-Ohms 2. When the “transmit” command is received from the DATA OUT (Pin 4) TNC, the transmitter of the FT-2000D will automati- Fixed level, does not respond to setting of [AF GAIN] cally be engaged. Likewise, the command to return to or [SQL] knob. receive will cause the radio to revert to the receive Output Level: 100 mVp-p max. mode. Output Impedance: 10 k-Ohms ADVICE: If you need to adjust the output level from the “DATA OUT” pin of the PACKET jack (pin 4) on the radio, please use Menu item “067 dAtA OUT LVL.” For the input level from the TNC, as applied to the DATA IN pin of the PACKET jack (pin 1), please do so at the TNC side. Page 108 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 111. RTTY (RADIO TELETYPE) OPERATION Most RTTY operation today is accomplished using a TNC or other computer-based system that utilizes AFSK tones. As such, the previous discussion on LSB-mode “Packet” operation will apply for Baudot operation, as well. For RTTY opera- tion using a Terminal Unit (TU) or the “FSK” output from a TNC, please see the discussion below. See also the illustration for details regarding connection to your TU. FSK FSK PTT OUT IN RTTY ② ③ ① ④ RTTY JACK RTTY Machine Pin 1 (SHIFT) FSK OUT Pin 2 (RX OUT) AF IN Pin 3 (PTT) PTT Pin 4 (GND) GND SETTING UP FOR RTTY OPERATION Before commencing RTTY operation, please direct your MENU ITEM AVAILABLE VALUES attention to the setup steps shown in the chart to the right. 076 rtty R PLRTY nor (normal) / rEU (reverse) 077 rtty T PLRTY nor (normal) / rEU (reverse) 078 rtty RTY OUT nAin (Main) / Sub (Sub) 079 rtty OUT LEL 0 ~ 100 080 rtty SHIFT 170/200/425/850 Hz 081 rtty TONE 1275/2125 Hz BASIC SETUP 1. Press the [RTTY] button to enter the RTTY mode. The Mark/Space Shift utilized in most Amateur RTTY One press of the [RTTY] button will engage RTTY operation is 170 Hz. Other shifts may be configured, operation using “LSB” injection, which is generally however, using Menu item “080 rtty SHIFT.” used in the Amateur service. In this mode, both the The FT-2000D is set up for “high tone” operation (cen- “RTTY” and “LSB” LEDs will light up. tered on 2125 Hz) by default, but you may configure it To switch to USB-side injection in RTTY, press the for low tone (1275 Hz) operation using Menu item [RTTY ] button once more. Both the “RTTY” and “081 rtty TONE.” “USB” LEDs will now be illuminated. Repeatedly You may find that you are unable to decode some RTTY pressing the [RTTY] button will toggle between LSB stations, even if they are of sufficient signal strength. and USB injection on RTTY. If this is observed, there may be a Mark/Space polarity 2. When you begin typing on your TU or computer key- problem between your station and the other station. If board, the command to transmit should automatically so, try setting Menu item “076 rtty R PLRTY” to “rEU” be sent to the transceiver, causing it to enter the trans- (“Reverse”) to see if that permits copy. A separate Menu mit mode. item permits reversal of your transmitter’s Mark/Space polarity: “077 rtty T PLRTY.” NOTE: If you anticipate making data transmissions of longer than QUICK POINT: a few minutes, we recommend that you use the [RF PWR] In the FT-2000D, “RTTY” is a mode defined as being an knob to reduce the transmitter power to 1/2 ~ 1/3 of its “FSK” mode, whereby the closing and opening of a key- normal maximum. ing line (to ground) causes the Mark/Space tones to alter- nate. The RTTY mode is not an AFSK based mode in this ADVICE: transceiver, and the AFSK output tones from a TNC will There is no adjustment of the DATA input level (Pin 1 not cause Mark/Space shifting to occur. Use the “Packet” (“DATA IN”) of the RTTY jack) on the rear panel; mode for AFSK-based Baudot and other data modes. please make any needed level adjustments at the TU side. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 109
  • 112. MISCELLANEOUS AFSK-BASED DATA MODES The FT-2000D may also be used for a host of other SSB-based Data modes. Please set up your system using the illustration as a guideline. LINE IN or MIC IN LINE OUT or MIC OUT COM PORT PACKET ② ④ ⑤ PACKET JACK Interface ① ③ Pin 1 (DATA IN) DATA OUT Pin 2 (GND) GND Pin 3 (PACKET PTT) PACKET PTT Pin 4 (DATA OUT) DATA IN Pin 5 (BUSY) Interface QUICK POINT: When you have configured Menu item “146 tGEn VOX SEL” to “dAtA,” the transceiver will operate in a “VOX” mode, and it is not necessary to connect a PTT line. This makes for very convenient interfacing to computer Sound Cards, etc. Page 110 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 113. ABOUT THE TRANSVERTER OUTPUT TERMINAL You may connect an after-market transverter to the rear panel’s TRV (Transverter) jack. The output, at 28 MHz, is approxi- mately –10 dBm (0.1 mW) at 50 Ohms. VHF/UHF Antenna Transceiver V/U ANT TX GND RF IN TX GND TRV SETUP OPERATION 1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode. 1. Set up the frequency offset for transverter use, as de- 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item scribed previously. “122 tun MY BAND.” 2. Choose the “Transverter” Band with the “MY Bands” 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to find the Menu pa- procedures, as described on page 46. rameter “AU d” (this is the factory default setting). 3. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to set the desired 4. Press the [ENT] button to change the parameter to operating frequency. Operation is basically unchanged “ON” (a “d” notation will replace the “E” notation). from normal transceiver operation. 5. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item ADVICE: “144 tGEn ETX-GND.” When the “TRV” mode is turned on, power output will 6. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to set this Menu item not be allowed to pass to the “ANT 1” or “ANT 2” main to “EnA” to enabling the rear panel’s TX GND jack antenna jacks. So one of these may be connected to your 7. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for at least two transverter’s “RX” jack. Just be certain to disconnect the seconds to save the new setting and exit to normal op- transverter when returning to HF operation, as the selected eration. Antenna jack will now be capable of passing RF power. Setting the Transverter Frequency Offset You may set up the frequency display so that it shows the actual band on which your transverter is operating (instead of the “IF” used by the transverter, which is the 28 MHz band on your FT-2000D). Example: Setting up the FT-2000D display for use with a 144 MHz Transverter 1. Connect the 144 MHz transverter to the FT-2000D. 2. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode. 3. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select Menu item “034 GEnE TRV SET” is set to “44” (the factory default setting). 4. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob so as to select “44” on the display. 5. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for at least two seconds to save the new setting and exit. The “100 MHz” digit of the frequency is not displayed, so when you are operating on 2 meters and see “45 MHz” on the frequency readout, this indicates “145 MHz” instead. Advice: With the setup described above, tuning the operating range 28-29 MHz will correspond to an actual operating frequency of 144-145 MHz, with “44-45” being displayed on the front panel of the transceiver. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 111
  • 114. MENU MODE The Menu system of the FT-2000D provides extensive customization capability, so you can set up your transceiver just the way you want to operate it. The Menu items are grouped by general utilization category, and are numbered from “001 AGc FST DLY” to “147 tGEn EMRGNCY.” USING THE MENU 1. Press the [MENU] button momentarily, to engage the Menu mode. The Main (VFO-A) frequency display will show the Menu Number and Menu Group name, while the Sub (VFO-B) frequency display will show the Menu item; the Multi-Display window shows the current setting of the currently-selected Menu item. 2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the Menu [MENU] Button item you wish to work on. Main Tuning Dial Knob [SUB VFO-B] Knob 3. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to change the current setting of the selected Menu item. 4. When you have finished making your adjustments, Menu Number Menu Group Name Menu Item press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. If you only momentarily press the [MENU] button, the new settings will not be retained. Menu Setting Menu Mode Reset You may reset all the Menu settings to their original factory defaults, if desired. 1. Turn the front panel [POWER] switch off. 2. Press and hold in the [MENU] button, and while holding it in, press the [POWER] switch to turn the transceiver back on. Now release the [MENU] button. Page 112 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 115. MENU MODE GROUP NO. MENU FUNCTION AVAILABLE VALUES DEFAULT SETTING AGC 001 AGc FST DLY 20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step) 300 msec AGC 002 AGc FST HLD 0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step) 0 msec AGC 003 AGc MID DLY 20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step) 700 msec AGC 004 AGc MID HLD 0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step) 0 msec AGC 005 AGc SLW DLY 20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step) 2000 msec AGC 006 AGc SLW HLD 0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step) 0 msec DISPLAY 007 diSP COLOR bL1/bL2/bL3/ub1/ub2 bL1 DISPLAY 008 diSP DIM MTR 0 ~ 15 7 DISPLAY 009 diSP DIM VFD 0~7 4 DISPLAY 010 diSP BAR SEL CLAr/C-tn/u-tn C-tn DISPLAY 011 diSP PK HLD OFF/0.5/1.0/2.0 sec OFF DISPLAY 012 diSP RTR STU 0/90/180/270 ° 0° DISPLAY 013 diSP RTR ADJ –30 ~ 0 0 DISPLAY 014 diSP QMB MKR On/OFF On 1 DVS 015 dUS RX LVL 0 ~ 100 50 DVS 016 dUS TX LVL 0 ~ 100 50 KEYER 017 tEy BEACON OFF/1 ~ 255 sec OFF KEYER 018 tEy NUM STL 1290/AunO/Aunt/A2nO/A2nt/12nO/12nt 1290 KEYER 019 tEy CONTEST 1 ~ 9999 1 KEYER 020 tEy CW MEM1 tyP1/tyP2 tyP2 KEYER 021 tEy CW MEM2 tyP1/tyP2 tyP2 KEYER 022 tEy CW MEM3 tyP1/tyP2 tyP2 KEYER 023 tEy CW MEM4 tyP1/tyP2 tyP2 KEYER 024 tEy CW MEM5 tyP1/tyP2 tyP2 GENERAL 025 GEnE ANT SEL bAnd/rEG bAnd GENERAL 026 GEnE BEP LVL 0 ~ 255 50 GENERAL 027 GEnE CAT BPS 4800/9600/192H(19200)/384H (38400) bps 4800 bps GENERAL 028 GEnE CAT TOT 10/100/1000/3000 msec 10 msec GENERAL 029 GEnE CAT RTS On/OFF On GENERAL 030 GEnE MEM GRP On/OFF OFF GENERAL 031 GEnE Q SPLIT –20 ~ 0 ~ +20 kHz (1 kHz Step) +5 kHz GENERAL 032 GEnE TRACK OFF/bAnd/FrEq OFF GENERAL 033 GEnE TX TOT OFF/5/10/15/20/25/30 min OFF GENERAL 034 GEnE TRV SET 30 ~ 49 MHz 44 MHz GENERAL 035 GEnE µT DIAL StP1/ StP2/OFF StP1 GENERAL 036 GEnE SNB LVL nAin(MAIN)/0~100 nAin(MAIN) GENERAL 037 GEnE SUB FIL 1200/300/500 Hz 1200 Hz GENERAL 038 GEnE MIC SCN On/OFF On GENERAL 039 GEnE SCN RSM CAr/5Sec 5SEc GENERAL 040 GEnE ANTIVOX 0 ~ 100 50 GENERAL 041 GEnE FRQ ADJ –25 ~ 0 ~ +25 0 S IF SFT 042 S-iF LSB SFT –1000 ~ +1000 Hz 0 Hz S IF SFT 043 S-iF USB SFT –1000 ~ +1000 Hz 0 Hz S IF SFT 044 S-iF CWL SFT –1000 ~ +1000 Hz 0 Hz S IF SFT 045 S-iF CWU SFT –1000 ~ +1000 Hz 0 Hz S IF SFT 046 S-iF RTTY –1000 ~ +1000 Hz 0 Hz S IF SFT 047 S-iF RTTY-R –1000 ~ +1000 Hz 0 Hz S IF SFT 048 S-iF PKT-LSB –1000 ~ +1000 Hz 0 Hz S IF SFT 049 S-iF PKT-USB –1000 ~ +1000 Hz 0 Hz MODE-AM 050 A3E MICGAIN Ur/0 ~ 100 30 MODE-AM 051 A3E MIC SEL Frnt/dAtA/PC Frnt MODE-CW 052 A1A F-TYPE OFF/buG/ELE/ACS ELE MODE-CW 053 A1A F-REV nor/rEU nor MODE-CW 054 A1A R-TYPE OFF/buG/ELE/ACS ELE : Requires optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 113
  • 116. MENU MODE GROUP NO. MENU FUNCTION AVAILABLE VALUES DEFAULT SETTING MODE-CW 055 A1A R-REV nor/rEU nor MODE-CW 056 A1A CW AUTO OFF/50/On OFF MODE-CW 057 A1A BFO USb/LSb/Auto USb MODE-CW 058 A1A BK-IN SEni/FuLL SEni MODE-CW 059 A1A SHAPE 1/2/4/6 msec 4 msec MODE-CW 060 A1A WEIGHT (1:) 2.5 ~ 4.5 3.0 MODE-CW 061 A1A FRQDISP dir/OFSt OFSt MODE-CW 062 A1A PC KYNG EnA (Enable)/diS (Disable) diS (Disable) MODE-CW 063 A1A QSKTIME 15/20/25/30 msec 15 msec MODE-DAT 064 dAtA DATA IN dAtA/PC dAtA MODE-DAT 065 dAtA DT GAIN 0 ~ 100 50 MODE-DAT 066 dAtA DT OUT nAin (Main)/Sub (Sub) nAin (Main) MODE-DAT 067 dAtA OUT LVL 0 ~ 100 50 MODE-DAT 068 dAtA VOX DLY 30 ~ 3000 msec 300 msec MODE-DAT 069 dAtA V GAIN 0 ~ 100 50 MODE-DAT 070 dAtA PKTDISP –3000 ~ +3000 Hz (10 Hz/step) 0 Hz MODE-DAT 071 dAtA PKT SFT –3000 ~ +3000 Hz (10 Hz/step) 1000 Hz MODE-FM 072 F3E MICGAIN Ur/0 ~ 100 50 MODE-FM 073 F3E MIC SEL Frnt/dAtA/PC Frnt MODE-FM 074 F3E 28 RPT 0 ~ 1000 kHz (10 kHz/step) 100 kHz MODE-FM 075 F3E 50 RPT 0 ~ 4000 kHz (10 kHz/step) 1000 kHz MODE-RTY 076 rtty R PLRTY nor/rEU nor MODE-RTY 077 rtty T PLRTY nor/rEU nor MODE-RTY 078 rtty RTY OUT nAin (Main)/Sub (Sub) nAin (Main) MODE-RTY 079 rtty OUT LEL 0 ~ 100 50 MODE-RTY 080 rtty SHIFT 170/200/425/850 Hz 170 Hz MODE-RTY 081 rtty TONE 1275/2125 Hz 2125 Hz MODE-SSB 082 J3E MIC SEL Frnt/dAtA/PC Frnt MODE-SSB 083 J3E TX BPF 1-30/1-29/2-28/3-27/4-26/3000 3-27 MODE-SSB 084 J3E LSB CAR –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz/step) 0 Hz MODE-SSB 085 J3E USB CAR –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz/step) 0 Hz MODE-SSB 086 J3E SLSB CR –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz/step) 0 Hz MODE-SSB 087 J3E SUSB CR –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz/step) 0 Hz RX AUDIO 088 rout AGC SLP nor/SLP nor RX AUDIO 089 rout HEADPHN SEP/Con1/Con2 SEP RX DSP 090 rdSP CNTR LV –40 ~ +20 dB –15 dB RX DSP 091 rdSP CNTR WI 1 – 11 10 RX DSP 092 rdSP NOTCH W nArr (Narrow)/uuid (Wide) uuid (Wide) RX DSP 093 rdSP CW SHAP SOFt/ShAP ShAP RX DSP 094 rdSP CW SLP StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/GEnt(GENTLE) nEd (MEDIUM) RX DSP 095 rdSP CW NARR 25/50/100/200/300/400/500/800/1200/1400/ 500 Hz 1700/2000 Hz RX DSP 096 rdSP PKT SHP SOFt/ShAP ShAP RX DSP 097 rdSP PKT SLP StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/GEnt(GENTLE) nEd (MEDIUM) RX DSP 098 rdSP PKT NAR 25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz 300 Hz RX DSP 099 rdSP RTY SHP SOFt/ShAP ShAP RX DSP 100 rdSP RTY SLP StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/GEnt(GENTLE) nEd (MEDIUM) RX DSP 101 rdSP RTY NAR 25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz 300 Hz RX DSP 102 rdSP SSB SHP SOFt/ShAP ShAP RX DSP 103 rdSP SSB SLP StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/GEnt(GENTLE) nEd (MEDIUM) RX DSP 104 rdSP SSB NAR 200/400/600/850/1100/1350/1500/1650/1800/ 1800 Hz 950/2100/2250 Hz SCOPE 105 SCP 1.8 FI 1.800 - 1.999 MHz (1 kHz/step) 1.800 MHz SCOPE 106 SCP 3.5 FI 3.500 - 3.999 MHz (1 kHz/step) 3.500 MHz : Requires optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit. Page 114 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 117. MENU MODE GROUP NO. MENU FUNCTION AVAILABLE VALUES DEFAULT SETTING SCOPE 107 SCP 5.0 FI 5.250 - 5.499 MHz (1 kHz/step) 5.250 MHz SCOPE 108 SCP 7.0 FI 7.000 - 7.299 MHz (1 kHz/step) 7.000 MHz SCOPE 109 SCP 10.1 FI (1)0.100 - (1)0.149 MHz (1 kHz/step) (1)0.100 MHz SCOPE 110 SCP 14.0 FI (1)4.000 - (1)4.349 MHz (1 kHz/step) (1)4.000 MHz SCOPE 111 SCP 18.0 FI (1)8.000 - (1)8.199 MHz (1 kHz/step) (1)8.068 MHz SCOPE 112 SCP 21.0 FI (2)1.000 - (2)1.449 MHz (1 kHz/step) (2)1.000 MHz SCOPE 113 SCP 24.8 FI (2)4.800 - (2)4.989 MHz (1 kHz/step) (2)4.890 MHz SCOPE 114 SCP 28.0 FI (2)8.000 - (2)9.699 MHz (1 kHz/step) (2)8.000 MHz SCOPE 115 SCP 50.0 FI (5)0.000 - (5)3.999 MHz (1 kHz/step) (5)0.000 MHz TUNING 116 tun DIALSTEP 1 or 10 Hz 10 Hz TUNING 117 tun CW FINE EnA/diS diS TUNING 118 tun MHz SEL 1/0.1 MHz 1 MHz TUNING 119 tun AM STEP 2.5/5/9/10/12.5 kHz 5 kHz TUNING 120 tun FM STEP 5/6.25/10/12.5/25 kHz 5 kHz TUNING 121 tun FM DIAL 10/100 Hz 100 Hz TUNING 122 tun MY BAND 1.8 ~ 50/GE/AU –– TX AUDIO 123 tAUd EQ1 FRQ OFF/100 ~ 700 Hz (100 Hz/step) OFF TX AUDIO 124 tAUd EQ1 LVL –10 ~ +10 +5 TX AUDIO 125 tAUd EQ1 BW 1 ~ 10 10 TX AUDIO 126 tAUd EQ2 FRQ OFF/700 ~ 1500 Hz (100 Hz/step) OFF TX AUDIO 127 tAUd EQ2 LVL –10 ~ +10 +5 TX AUDIO 128 tAUd EQ2 BW 1 ~ 10 10 TX AUDIO 129 tUAd EQ3 FRQ OFF/1500 ~ 3200 Hz (100 Hz/step) OFF TX AUDIO 130 tUAd EQ3 LVL –10 ~ +10 +5 TX AUDIO 131 tUAd EQ3 BW 1 ~ 10 10 TX AUDIO 132 tAUd PE1 FRQ OFF/100 ~ 700 Hz (100 Hz/step) 200 Hz TX AUDIO 133 tAUd PE1 LVL –10 ~ +10 –10 TX AUDIO 134 tAUd PE1 BW 1 ~ 10 2 TX AUDIO 135 tAUd PE2 FRQ OFF/700 ~ 1500 Hz (100 Hz/step) 800 Hz TX AUDIO 136 tAUd PE2 LVL –10 ~ +10 –3 TX AUDIO 137 tAUd PE2 BW 1 ~ 10 1 TX AUDIO 138 tUAd PE3 FRQ OFF/1500 ~ 3200 Hz (100 Hz/step) 2100 Hz TX AUDIO 139 tUAd PE3 LVL –10 ~ +10 +6 TX AUDIO 140 tUAd PE3 BW 1 ~ 10 1 TX GNRL 141 tGEn BIAS Ab/0 ~ 100 Ab TX GNRL 142 tGEn MAX PWR 20/50/100/200 W 200 W TX GNRL 143 tGEn PWRCTRL ALL/Car ALL TX GNRL 144 tGEn ETX-GND EnA(ENABLE)/diS(DISABLE) diS(DISABLE) TX GNRL 145 tGEn TUN PWR 20/50/100/200 W 100 W TX GNRL 146 tGEn VOX SEL nic/dAtA nic TX GNRL 147 tGEn EMRGNCY EnA(ENABLE)/diS(DISABLE) diS(DISABLE) : Requires optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 115
  • 118. MENU MODE AGC GROUP DISPLAY GROUP 001 AGc FST DLY 007 diSP COLOR Function: Sets the delay time for the AGC FAST mode of Function: Selects the Display color when the optional Data the Main band (VFO-A) receiver. Management Unit (DMU-2000) is connected. Available Values: 20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step) Available Values: bL1/bL2/bL3/ub1/ub2 Default Setting: 300 msec bL1: COOL BLUE bL2: CONTRAST BLUE 002 AGc FST HLD bL3: FLASH WHITE Function: Sets the hang time of the AGC peak voltage for ub1: CONTRAST UMBER the AGC FAST mode of the Main band (VFO-A) receiver. ub2: UMBER Available Values: 0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step) Default Setting: bL1 (COOL BLUE) Default Setting: 0 msec ADVICE: 003 AGc MID DLY If the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit is not Function: Sets the delay time for the AGC MID mode of connected, this adjustment has no effect. the Main band (VFO-A) receiver. 008 diSP DIM MTR Available Values: 20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step) Function: Setting of the meter brightness level when Default Setting: 700 msec “DIM” is selected. 004 AGc MID HLD Available Values: 0 ~ 15 Function: Sets the hang time of the AGC peak voltage for Default Setting: 4 the AGC MID mode of the Main band (VFO-A) receiver. 009 diSP DIM VFD Available Values: 0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step) Function: Setting of the frequency display brightness level Default Setting: 0 msec when “DIM” is selected. 005 AGc SLW DLY Available Values: 0 ~ 15 Function: Sets the delay time for the AGC SLOW mode of Default Setting: 8 the Main band (VFO-A) receiver. 010 diSP BAR SEL Available Values: 20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step) Function: Selects one of three parameters to be viewed Default Setting: 2000 msec on the Tuning Offset Indicator. 006 AGc SLW HLD Available Values: CLAr/C-tn/u-tn Function: Sets the hang time of the AGC peak voltage for Default Setting: C-tn the AGC SLOW mode of the Main band (VFO-A) receiver. CLAr: Displays relative clarifier offset. Available Values: 0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step) C-tu: Displays relative tuning offset between the in- Default Setting: 0 msec coming signal and transmitted frequency. u-tn: Displays the peak position of the VRF or µ- TUNE filter. NOTE: The µ-TUNE filter is an option. 011 diSP PK HLD Function: Selects the peak hold time of the Sub (VFO-B) receiver’s S-meter. Available Values: OFF/0.5/1.0/2.0 sec Default Setting: OFF 012 diSP RTR STU Function: Selects the starting point of your rotator controller’s indicator needle. Available Values: 0/90/180/270 ° Default Setting: 0 ° 013 diSP RTR ADJ Function: Adjusts the indicator needle precisely to the starting point set in menu item “012 diSP RTR STU.” Available Values: –30 ~ 0 Default Setting: 0 Page 116 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 119. MENU MODE DISPLAY GROUP KEYER GROUP 014 diSP QMB MKR 017 tEy BEACON Function: Enables/Disables the QMB Marker (White ar- Function: Sets the interval time between repeats of the row “ ”) to display on the Spectrum Band Scope when beacon message. the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit is con- Available Values: OFF/1 ~ 255 sec nected. Default Setting: OFF Available Values: On/OFF Default Setting: On 018 tEy NUM STL ADVICE: Function: Selects the Contest Number “Cut” format for If the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit is not an imbedded contest number. connected, this adjustment has no effect. Available Values: 1290/AunO/Aunt/A2nO/A2nt/12nO/ 12nt Default Setting: 1290 DVS GROUP 1290: Does not abbreviate the Contest Number AunO: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “U” for “Two,” 015 dUS RX LVL “N” for “Nine,” and “O” for “Zero.” Function: Sets the audio output level from the voice Aunt: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “U” for “Two,” memory. “N” for “Nine,” and “T” for “Zero.” Available Values: 0 ~ 100 A2nO: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “N” for “Nine,” Default: 50 and “O” for “Zero.” 016 dUS TX LVL A2nt: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “N” for “Nine,” Function: Sets the microphone input level to the voice and “T” for “Zero.” memory 12nO: Abbreviates to “N” for “Nine,” and “O” for Available Values: 0 ~ 100 “Zero.” Default: 50 12nt: Abbreviates to “N” for “Nine,” and “T” for “Zero.” 019 tEy CONTEST Function: Enters the initial contest number that will in- crement/decrement after sending during contest QSOs. Available Values: 1 ~ 9999 Default Setting: 1 ADVICE: Press the [CLEAR] button to reset the contest number to “1.” 020 tEy CW MEM1 Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message register 1. Available Values: tyP1/tyP2 Default Setting: tyP2 tyP1: You may enter the CW message from the front panel’s Function Keys. tyP2: You may enter the CW message from the CW keyer. 021 tEy CW MEM2 Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message register 2. Available Values: tyP1/tyP2 Default Setting: tyP2 tyP1: You may enter the CW message from the front panel’s Function Keys. tyP2: You may enter the CW message from the CW keyer. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 117
  • 120. MENU MODE KEYER GROUP GENERAL GROUP 022 tEy CW MEM3 025 GEnE ANT SEL Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message Function: Sets the method of antenna selection. register 3. Available Values: bAnd/rEG Available Values: tyP1/tyP2 Default Setting: bAnd Default Setting: tyP2 bAnd:The antenna is selected in accordance with the tyP1: You may enter the CW message from the front operating band. panel’s Function Keys. rEG: The antenna is selected in accordance with the tyP2: You may enter the CW message from the CW band stack (different antennas may be utilized keyer. on the same band, if so selected in the band 023 tEy CW MEM4 stack). Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message 026 GEnE BEP LVL register 4. Function: Sets the beep level. Available Values: tyP1/tyP2 Available Values: 0 ~ 255 Default Setting: tyP2 Default Setting: 50 tyP1: You may enter the CW message from the front panel’s Function Keys. 027 GEnE CAT BPS tyP2: You may enter the CW message from the CW Function: Sets the transceiver’s computer-interface cir- keyer. cuitry for the CAT baud rate to be used. Available Values: 4800/9600/192H(19200)/384H (38400) 024 tEy CW MEM5 bps Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message Default Setting: 4800 bps register 5. Available Values: tyP1/tyP2 028 GEnE CAT TOT Default Setting: tyP2 Function: Sets the Time-Out Timer countdown time for a tyP1: You may enter the CW message from the front CAT command input. panel’s Function Keys. Available Values: 10/100/1000/3000 msec tyP2: You may enter the CW message from the CW Default Setting: 10 msec keyer. The Time-Out Timer shuts off the CAT data input after the ADVICE: continuous transmission of the programmed time. If the optional FH-2 Remote Control Keypad is not con- 029 GEnE CAT RTS nected, this adjustment has no effect. Function: Enables/Disables the RTS port of the CAT jack. Available Values: On/OFF Default Setting: On 030 GEnE MEM GRP Function: Enables/Disables Memory Group Operation. Available Values: On/OFF Default Setting: OFF 031 GEnE Q SPLIT Function: Selects the tuning offset for the Quick Split fea- ture. Available Values: –20 ~ 0 ~ +20 kHz (1 kHz Step) Default Setting: +5 kHz Page 118 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 121. MENU MODE GENERAL GROUP 032 GEnE TRACK 036 GEnE SNB LVL Function: Sets the VFO Tracking feature. Function: Adjusts the Sub band (VFO-B) receiver’s IF Available Values: OFF/bAND/FrEq Noise Blanker level, when the Noise Blanker is engaged. Default Setting: OFF Available Values: nAin(MAIN)/0~100 OFF: Disables the VFO Tracking feature. Default Setting: nAin(MAIN) bAND: When you change bands on the Main (VFO- When this menu is set to “nAin(MAIN),” you may adjust A) side, the Sub (VFO-B) band’s VFO will the Noise Blanker level using the front panel’s [NB] knob. automatically change to be the same as that of 037 GEnE SUB FIL VFO-A. Function: Defines the Sub band (VFO-B) receiver’s CW FrEq: This function is almost the same as “bAND,” narrow filter. however, furthermore, the Sub band’s (VFO- Available Values: 1200/300/500 Hz B) frequency changes together with the Main Default Setting: 1200 Hz Band’s (VFO-A) frequency when turning the ADVICE: Main Dial Tuning knob. This Menu item tells the microprocessor which (if any) 033 GEnE TX TOT optional filter has been installed. Function: Sets the Time-Out Timer countdown time. 038 GEnE MIC SCN Available Values: OFF/5/10/15/20/25/30 min Function: Enables/disables scanning access via the Default Setting: OFF microphone’s [UP]/[DWN] keys. The Time-Out Timer shuts off the transmitter after con- Available Values: On/OFF tinuous transmission of the programmed time. Default Setting: On 034 GEnE TRV SET 039 GEnE SCN RSM Function: Sets the 10’s and 1’s of the MHz digits display Function: Selects the Scan Resume mode. for operation with a transverter. Available Values: CAr/5SEc Available Values: 30 ~ 49 MHz Default Setting: 5SEc Default Setting: 44 MHz CAr: The scanner will hold until the signal disappears, The default setting would be used with a 144 MHz then will resume after one second. transverter. If you connect a 430 MHz transverter to the 5SEc: The scanner will hold for five seconds, then re- radio, set this menu to “30” (the “100 MHz” digits are sume whether or not the other station is still hidden on this radio). transmitting. 035 GEnE µT DIAL 040 GEnE ANTIVOX Function: Selects the µ-TUNE mode. Function: Adjusts the Anti-VOX Trip Gain which is the Available Values: StP1/ StP2/OFF level of negative feedback of receiver audio to the micro- Default Setting: StP1 phone, to prevent receiver audio from activating the trans- StP-1: Activates the µ-TUNE system using mitter (via the microphone) during VOX operation. “COARSE” steps of the [VRF] knob (2 steps/ Available Values: 0 ~ 100 click) on the 7 MHz and lower amateur bands. Default Setting: 50 On the 10/14 MHz bands, “FINE” [VRF] knob steps (1 step/click) will be used. 041 GEnE FRQ ADJ StP2: Activates the µ-TUNE system using “FINE” Function: Adjusts the reference oscillator. steps of the [VRF] knob (1 step/click) on the Available Values: –25 ~ 0 ~ +25 14 MHz and lower amateur bands on the Main Default Setting: 0 band (VFO-A). Connect a 50-Ohm dummy load and frequency counter to OFF: Disables the µ-TUNE system. Activates the the antenna jack; adjust the [SUB VFO-B] knob so that VRF feature on the 14 MHz and lower amateur the frequency counter reading is same as the VFO fre- bands on the main band (VFO-A). quency while pressing the PTT switch. ADVICE: ADVICE: If the optional RF µTuning Kit is not connected, this ad- Do not perform this Menu item unless you have a high- justment has no effect. performance frequency counter. Perform this Menu item after the transceiver and frequency counter have been turned on and brought up to operating temperature (at least 30 minutes). FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 119
  • 122. MENU MODE S IF SFT (SUB BAND IF SHIFT) GROUP MODE-AM GROUP 042 S-iF LSB SFT 050 A3E MICGAIN Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO- Function: Sets the microphone gain for the AM mode. B) receiver’s IF filter in the LSB mode. Available Values: Ur/0 ~ 100 Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz Default Setting: 30 Default Setting: 0 Hz When this menu is set to “Ur,” you may adjust the micro- phone gain using the front panel’s [MIC] knob. 043 S-iF USB SFT Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO- 051 A3E MIC SEL B) receiver’s IF filter in the USB mode. Function: Selects the microphone to be used on the AM Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz mode. Default Setting: 0 Hz Available Values: Frnt/dAtA/PC Default Setting: Frnt 044 S-iF CWL SFT Frnt: Selects the microphone connected to the front Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO- panel’s MIC jack while using the AM mode. B) receiver’s IF filter in the CW (LSB) mode. dAtA:Selects the microphone connected to pin 1 of Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz the PACKET Jack while using the AM mode. Default Setting: 0 Hz PC: This parameter is for future expansion of this 045 S-iF CWU SFT transceiver’s capabilities, but at this time is not Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO- supported. B) receiver’s IF filter in the CW (USB) mode. Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz Default Setting: 0 Hz 046 S-iF RTTY Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO- B) receiver’s IF filter in the RTTY mode. Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz Default Setting: 0 Hz 047 S-iF RTTY-R Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO- B) receiver’s IF filter in the RTTY reverse mode. Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz Default Setting: 0 Hz 048 S-iF PKT-LSB Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO- B) receiver’s IF filter in the Packet (LSB) mode. Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz Default Setting: 0 Hz 049 S-iF PKT-USB Function: Sets the center frequency of the Sub band (VFO- B) receiver’s IF filter in the Packet (USB) mode. Available Values: –1000 ~ +1000 Hz Default Setting: 0 Hz Page 120 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 123. MENU MODE MODE-CW GROUP 052 A1A F-TYPE 056 A1A CW AUTO Function: Selects the desired keyer operation mode for Function: Enables/disables CW keying while operating the device connected to the front panel’s KEY jack. on SSB. Available Values: OFF/buG/ELE/ACS Available Values: OFF/50/On Default Setting: ELE Default Setting: OFF OFF: Disables the front panel’s keyer (“straight key” OFF: Disables CW keying while operating on SSB. mode for use with external keyer or computer- 50: Enables CW keying only while operating SSB driven keying interface). on 50 MHz (but not HF). buG: Mechanical “bug” keyer emulation. One paddle On: Enables CW keying while operating on SSB (all produces “dits” automatically, while the other TX bands). paddle manually produces “dahs.” NOTE: ELE: Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character This feature allows you to move someone from SSB to Spacing) disabled. CW without having to change modes on the front panel. ACS: Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character 057 A1A BFO Spacing) enabled. Function: Sets the CW carrier oscillator injection side for 053 A1A F-REV the CW mode. Function: Selects the keyer paddle’s wiring configuration Available Values: USb/LSb/Auto for the KEY jack on the front panel. Default Setting: USb Available Values: nor/rEU USb: Injects the CW carrier oscillator on the USB side. Default Setting: nor LSb: Injects the CW carrier oscillator on the LSB side. nor: Tip = Dot, Ring = Dash, Shaft = Ground Auto: Injects the CW carrier oscillator on the LSB side rEU: Tip = Dash, Ring = Dot, Shaft = Ground while operating on the 7 MHz band and below, and the USB side while operating on the 10 MHz 054 A1A R-TYPE band and up. Function: Selects the desired keyer operation mode for the device connected to the rear panel’s KEY jack. 058 A1A BK-IN Available Values: OFF/buG/ELE/ACS Function: Sets the CW “break-in” mode. Default Setting: ELE Available Values: SEni/FuLL OFF: Disables the rear panel’s keyer (“straight key” Default Setting: SEni mode for use with external keyer or computer- SEni (SEMI): The transceiver will operate in the semi driven keying interface). break-in mode. The delay (receiver re- buG: Mechanical “bug” keyer emulation. One paddle covery) time is set by the front panel’s produces “dits” automatically, while the other [DELAY] knob. paddle manually produces “dahs.” FuLL: The transceiver will operate in the full ELE: Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character break-in (QSK) mode. Spacing) disabled. 059 A1A SHAPE ACS: Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character Function: Selects the CW carrier wave-form shape (rise/ Spacing) enabled. fall times). 055 A1A R-REV Available Values: 1/2/4/6 msec Function: Selects the keyer paddle’s wiring configuration Default Setting: 4 msec for the KEY jack on the rear panel. 060 A1A WEIGHT Available Values: nor/rEU Function: Sets the Dot:Dash ratio for the built-in elec- Default Setting: nor tronic keyer. nor: Tip = Dot, Ring = Dash, Shaft = Ground Available Values: (1:) 2.5 ~ 4.5 rEU: Tip = Dash, Ring = Dot, Shaft = Ground Default Setting: 3.0 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 121
  • 124. MENU MODE MODE-CW GROUP MODE-DAT GROUP 061 A1A FRQDISP 064 dAtA DATA IN Function: Selects the frequency Display Format for the Function: Selects the data input path to be used on the CW mode. PKT mode. Available Values: dir/OFSt Available Values: dAtA/PC Default Setting: OFSt Default Setting: dAtA dir (Direct Frequency): Displays the receiver carrier dAtA:Uses the data input line connected to pin 1 of frequency, without any offset the PACKET jack while using the PKT mode. added. When changing PC: This parameter is for future expansion of this modes between SSB and CW, transceiver’s capabilities, but at this time is not the frequency display re- supported. mains constant. 065 dAtA DT GAIN OFSt (Pitch Offset): This frequency display re- Function: Sets the data input level from the TNC to the flects the added BFO offset. AFSK modulator. 062 A1A PC KYNG Available Values: 0 ~ 100 Function: Enables/disables CW keying from the “DATA Default Setting: 50 IN” terminal on the rear panel’s PACKET jack while op- 066 dAtA DT OUT erating on the CW mode. Function: Selects the receiver to be connected to the data Available Values: EnA (Enable)/diS (Disable) output port (pin 4) of the PACKET jack. Default Setting: diS (Disable) Available Values: nAin (Main)/Sub (Sub) 063 A1A QSKTIME Default Setting: nAin (Main) Function: Selects the time delay between when the PTT 067 dAtA OUT LVL is keyed and the carrier is transmitted during QSK opera- Function: Sets the AFSK data output level at the output tion when using the internal keyer. port (pin 4) of the PACKET jack. Available Values: 15/20/25/30 msec Available Values: 0 ~ 100 Default Setting: 15 msec Default Setting: 50 068 dAtA VOX DLY Function: Adjusts the “VOX” delay (receiver recovery) time on the PKT mode. Available Values: 30 ~ 3000 msec Default Setting: 300 msec 069 dAtA V GAIN Function: Adjusts the “VOX” gain on the PKT mode. Available Values: 0 ~ 100 Default Setting: 50 070 dAtA PKTDISP Function: Sets the packet frequency display offset. Available: –3000 ~ +3000 Hz (10 Hz/step) Default: 0 Hz 071 dAtA PKT SFT Function: Sets the carrier point during the SSB packet operation. Available: –3000 ~ +3000 Hz (10 Hz/step) Default: 1000 Hz (typical center frequency for PSK31, etc.) Page 122 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 125. MENU MODE MODE-FM GROUP MODE-RTY GROUP 072 F3E MICGAIN 076 rtty R PLRTY Function: Sets the microphone gain for the FM mode. Function: Selects normal or reverse Mark/Space polarity Available Values: Ur/0 ~ 100 for RTTY receive operation. Default Setting: 50 Available Values: nor/rEU When this menu is set to “Ur,” you may adjust the micro- Default Setting: nor phone gain using the front panel’s [MIC] knob. 077 rtty T PLRTY 073 F3E MIC SEL Function: Selects normal or reverse Mark/Space polarity Function: Selects the microphone to be used on the FM for RTTY transmit operation. mode. Available Values: nor/rEU Available Values: Frnt/dAtA/PC Default Setting: nor Default Setting: Frnt 078 rtty RTY OUT Frnt (FRONT): Selects the microphone connected to Function: Selects the receiver to be connected to the data the front panel’s MIC jack while us- output port (pin 1) of the RTTY jack. ing the FM mode. Available Values: nAin (Main)/Sub (Sub) dAtA: Selects the microphone connected to Default Setting: nAin (Main) pin 1 of the PACKET Jack while us- ing the FM mode. 079 rtty OUT LEL PC: This parameter is for future expansion Function: Sets the FSK RTTY data output level at the of this transceiver’s capabilities, but output port (pin 1) of the RTTY jack. at this time is not supported. Available Values: 0 ~ 100 Default Setting: 50 074 F3E 28 RPT Function: Sets the magnitude of the repeater shift on the 080 rtty SHIFT 28 MHz band. Function: Selects the frequency shift for FSK RTTY op- Available Values: 0 ~ 1000 kHz (10 kHz/step) eration. Default Setting: 100 kHz Available Values:170/200/425/850 Hz Default Setting: 170 Hz 075 F3E 50 RPT Function: Sets the magnitude of the repeater shift on the 081 rtty TONE 50 MHz band. Function: Selects the Mark tone for RTTY operation. Available Values: 0 ~ 4000 kHz (10 kHz/step) Available Values: 1275/2125 Hz Default Setting: 1000 kHz Default Setting: 2125 Hz FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 123
  • 126. MENU MODE MODE-SSB GROUP RX AUDIO GROUP 082 J3E MIC SEL 088 rout AGC SLP Function: Selects the microphone to be used on the SSB Function: Selects the gain curve of the AGC amplifier. modes (LSB and USB). Available Values: nor/SLP Available Values: Frnt/dAtA/PC Default Setting: nor Default Setting: Frnt nor (NORMAL): The AGC output level will follow a Frnt (FRONT): Selects the microphone connected to linear response to the antenna input the front panel’s MIC jack while using level, while AGC is activated. the SSB modes. SLP (SLOPED): The AGC output level will increase dAtA: Selects the microphone connected to at 1/10 the rate of the antenna input pin 1 of the PACKET Jack while us- level, while AGC is activated. ing the SSB modes. SLOPE PC: This parameter is for future expansion Audio Output of this transceiver’s capabilities, but at NORMAL this time is not supported. 083 J3E TX BPF Function: Selects the audio passband of the DSP modula- Input Signal tor on the SSB mode. Available Values: 1-30/1-29/2-28/3-27/4-26/3000 089 rout HEADPHN 1-30: 50-3000(Hz) Function: Selects one of three audio mixing modes when 1-29: 100-2900(Hz) 2-28: 200-2800(Hz) using headphones during Dual Receive operation. 3-27: 300-2700(Hz) Available Values: SEP/Con1/Con2 4-26: 400-2600(Hz) Default Setting: SEP 3000: 3000WB SEP (SEPARATE): Audio from the Main (VFO-A) Default Setting: 3-27 (300-2700 Hz) receiver is heard only in the left NOTE: ear, and Sub (VFO-B) receiver The apparent power output, when using the widest band- audio solely in the right ear. widths, may seem lower. This is normal, and it occurs be- Con1 (COMBINE 1): Audio from both Main (VFO- cause the available transmitter power is distributed over a A) and Sub (VFO-B) receivers wider bandwidth. The greatest compression of power out- can be heard in both ears, but put, conversely, occurs when using the “4-26” setting (400- Sub (VFO-B) audio is attenu- 2600 Hz), and this setting is highly recommended for con- ated in the left ear and Main test or DX pile-up work. (VFO-A) audio is attenuated in the right ear. 084 J3E LSB CAR Con2 (COMBINE 2): Audio from both Main (VFO- Function: Adjusts the receiver carrier point for the Main A) and Sub (VFO-B) receivers band’s (VFO-A) LSB mode. is combined and heard equally Available Values: –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz steps) in both ears. Default Setting: 0 Hz 085 J3E USB CAR Function: Adjusts the receiver carrier point for Main band’s (VFO-A) USB mode. Available Values: –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz/step) Default Setting: 0 Hz 086 J3E SLSB CR Function: Adjusts the receiver carrier point for the Sub band’s (VFO-B) LSB mode. Available Values: –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz/step) Default Setting: 0 Hz 087 J3E SUSB CR Function: Adjusts the receiver carrier point for Sub band’s (VFO-B) USB mode. Available Values: –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz/step) Default Setting: 0 Hz Page 124 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 127. MENU MODE RX DSP GROUP 090 rdSP CNTR LV 096 rdSP PKT SHP Function: Adjusts the parametric equalizer gain of the Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP Contour filter. filter for the PKT mode. Available Values: –40 ~ +20 dB Available Values: SOFt/ShAP Default Setting: –15 dB Default Setting: ShAP SOFt (SOFT): Primary importance is attached to the 091 rdSP CNTR WI amplitude of the filter factor. Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the Contour filter. ShAP (SHARP): Primary importance is attached to the Available Values: 1 - 11 phase of the filter factor. Default Setting: 10 “Q” 097 rdSP PKT SLP Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for “+” Gain the PKT mode. “-- ” Gain Available Values: StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/ GEnt(GENTLE) Default Setting: nEd (MEDIUM) 098 rdSP PKT NAR Function: Selects the passband of the DSP filter for the IF PKT “Narrow” mode. BANDWIDTH Available Values: 25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz CONTOUR “GAIN” AND “Q” Default Setting: 300 Hz 099 rdSP RTY SHP 092 rdSP NOTCH W Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP Function: Selects the bandwidth of the DSP NOTCH fil- filter for the RTTY mode. ter Available Values: SOFt/ShAP Available Values: nArr (Narrow)/uuid (Wide) Default Setting: ShAP Default Setting: uuid (Wide) SOFt (SOFT): Primary importance is attached to the 093 rdSP CW SHAP amplitude of the filter factor. Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP ShAP (SHARP): Primary importance is attached to the filter for the CW mode. phase of the filter factor. Available Values: SOFt/ShAP 100 rdSP RTY SLP Default Setting: ShAP Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for SOFt (SOFT): Primary importance is attached to the the RTTY mode. amplitude of the filter factor. Available Values: StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/ ShAP (SHARP): Primary importance is attached to the GEnt(GENTLE) phase of the filter factor. Default Setting: nEd (MEDIUM) 094 rdSP CW SLP 101 rdSP RTY NAR Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for Function: Selects the passband of the DSP filter for the the CW mode. RTTY “Narrow” mode. Available Values: StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/ Available Values: 25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz GEnt(GENTLE) Default Setting: 300 Hz Default Setting: nEd (MEDIUM) 095 rdSP CW NARR Function: Selects the passband of the DSP filter for the CW “Narrow” mode. Available Values: 25/50/100/200/300/400/500/800/1200/ 1400/1700/2000 Hz Default Setting: 500 Hz FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 125
  • 128. MENU MODE RX DSP GROUP SCOPE GROUP ADVICE: 102 rdSP SSB SHP This group’s adjustment has no effect, if the optional Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP DMU-2000 Data Management Unit is not connected. filter for the SSB modes (LSB and USB). Available Values: SOFt/ShAP 105 SCP 1.8 FI Default Setting: ShAP Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode SOFt (SOFT): Primary importance is attached to the Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 160 m amateur amplitude of the filter factor. band. ShAP (SHARP): Primary importance is attached to the Available Values: 1.800 - 1.999 MHz (1 kHz/step) phase of the filter factor. Default Setting: 1.800 MHz 103 rdSP SSB SLP 106 SCP 3.5 FI Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode the SSB modes (LSB and USB). Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 80 m amateur Available Values: StP(STEEP)/nEd(MEDIUM)/ band. GEnt(GENTLE) Available Values: 3.500 - 3.999 MHz (1 kHz/step) Default Setting: nEd (MEDIUM) Default Setting: 3.500 MHz 104 rdSP SSB NAR 107 SCP 5.0 FI Function: Selects the passband of the DSP filter for the Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode “Narrow” SSB mode. Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 60 m amateur Available Values: 200/400/600/850/1100/1350/1500/ band. 1650/1800/1950/2100/2250 Hz Available Values: 5.250 - 5.499 MHz (1 kHz/step) Default Setting: 1800 Hz Default Setting: 5.250 MHz 108 SCP 7.0 FI Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 40 m amateur band. Available Values: 7.000 - 7.299 MHz (1 kHz/step) Default Setting: 7.000 MHz STEEP 109 SCP 10.1 FI MEDIUM Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode GENTLE Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 30 m amateur DSP FILTER PASSBAND band. Available Values: (1)0.100 - (1)0.149 MHz (1 kHz steps) Default Setting: (1)0.100 MHz SHARP SOFT DSP FILTER SHAPE Page 126 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 129. MENU MODE SCOPE GROUP TUNING GROUP 110 SCP 14.0 FI 116 tun DIALSTEP Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode Function: Setting of the Main Tuning Dial knob’s tuning Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 20 m amateur speed on the SSB, CW, and AM modes. band. Available Values: 1 or 10 Hz Available Values: (1)4.000 - (1)4.349 MHz (1 kHz/step) Default Setting: 10 Hz Default Setting: (1)4.000 MHz 117 tun CW FINE 111 SCP 18.0 FI Function: Enabling/disabling of the “Fine” tuning speed Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode in the CW mode. Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 17 m amateur Available Values: EnA (ENABLE) / diS (DISABLE) band. Default Setting: diS (DISABLE) Available Values: (1)8.000 - (1)8.199 MHz (1 kHz/step) EnA (ENABLE): Tuning in 1 Hz steps on the CW Default Setting: (1)8.068 MHz mode. diS (DISABLE): Tuning according to the steps deter- 112 SCP 21.0 FI mined via menu item “116 tun Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode DIALSTEP.” Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 15 m amateur band. 118 tun MHz SEL Available Values: (2)1.000 - (2)1.449 MHz (1 kHz/step) Function: Selects the tuning steps for the [SUB VFO-B] Default Setting: (2)1.000 MHz knob when the [MHz] button is pressed. Available Values: 1/0.1 MHz 113 SCP 24.8 FI Default Setting: 1 MHz Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 12 m amateur 119 tun AM STEP band. Function: Selects the tuning steps for the microphone’s Available Values: (2)4.800 - (2)4.989 MHz (1 kHz/step) [UP]/[DWN] keys in the AM mode. Default Setting: (2)4.890 MHz Available Values: 2.5/5/9/10/12.5 kHz Default Setting: 5 kHz 114 SCP 28.0 FI Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode 120 tun FM STEP Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 10 m amateur Function: Selects the tuning steps for the microphone’s band. [UP]/[DWN] keys in the FM mode. Available Values: (2)8.000 - (2)9.699 MHz (1 kHz/step) Available Values: 5/6.25/10/12.5/25 kHz Default Setting: (2)8.000 MHz Default Setting: 5 kHz 115 SCP 50.0 FI 121 tun FM DIAL Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode Function: Setting of the Main Tuning Dial knob’s tuning Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 6 m amateur band. speed in the FM mode. Available Values: (5)0.000 - (5)3.999 MHz (1 kHz/step) Available Values: 10/100 Hz per step Default Setting: (5)0.000 MHz Default Setting: 100 Hz per step 122 tun MY BAND Function: Programs a band to be skipped while selecting bands using the [SUB VFO-B] knob. Available Values: 1.8 ~ 50/GE/AU Default Setting: --- To program the band to be skipped, rotate the [SUB VFO- B] knob to recall the band to be skipped while selecting bands via the [SUB VFO-B] knob, then press the [ENT] button to change this setting to “ON” (a “d” notation will replace the “E” notation). Repeat the same procedures to cancel the setting (skipped “Off”: “d” notation appears). FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 127
  • 130. MENU MODE TX AUDIO GROUP 123 tAUd EQ1 FRQ 129 tUAd EQ3 FRQ Function: Selects the center frequency of the lower range Function: Selects the center frequency of the high range for the parametric microphone equalizer. for the parametric microphone equalizer. Available Values: OFF/100 ~ 700 Hz (100 Hz/step) Available Values: OFF/1500 ~ 3200 Hz (100 Hz/step) Default Setting: OFF Default Setting: OFF OFF: The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set to OFF: The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set factory defaults (flat). to factory defaults (flat). 100 ~ 700: Center frequencies of 100 Hz ~ 700 Hz. 1500 ~ 3200: Center frequencies of 1500 Hz ~ 3200 Hz. You may adjust the equalizer gain and Q- You may adjust the equalizer gain and factor at this selected audio frequency via Q-factor in this selected audio fre- menu items “124 tAUd EQ1 LVL” and quency via menu items “130 tUAd EQ3 “125 tAUd EQ1 BW.” LVL” and “131 tUAd EQ3 BW.” 124 tAUd EQ1 LVL 130 tUAd EQ3 LVL Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the low range of Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the high range of the parametric microphone equalizer. the parametric microphone equalizer. Available Values: –10 ~ +10 Available Values: –10 ~ +10 Default Setting: +5 Default Setting: +5 125 tAUd EQ1 BW 131 tUAd EQ3 BW Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the low range of the Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the high range of the parametric microphone equalizer. parametric microphone equalizer. Available Values: 1 ~ 10 Available Values: 1 ~ 10 Default Setting: 10 Default Setting: 10 126 tAUd EQ2 FRQ 132 tAUd PE1 FRQ Function: Selects the center frequency of the middle range Function: Selects the center frequency of the lower range for the parametric microphone equalizer. for the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech Available Values: OFF/700 ~ 1500 Hz (100 Hz/step) processor is activated. Default Setting: OFF Available Values: OFF/100 ~ 700 Hz (100 Hz/step) OFF: The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set Default Setting: 200 Hz to factory defaults (flat). OFF: The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set to 700 ~ 1500: Center frequencies of 700 Hz ~ 1500 Hz. factory defaults (flat). You may adjust the equalizer gain and 100 ~ 700: Center frequencies of 100 Hz ~ 700 Hz. Q-factor at this selected audio frequency You may adjust the equalizer gain and Q- via menu items “127 tAUd EQ2 LVL” factor at this selected audio frequency via and “128 EQ2 BW.” menu items “133 tAUd PE1 LVL” and “134 tAUd PE1 BW.” 127 tAUd EQ2 LVL Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the middle range 133 tAUd PE1 LVL of the parametric microphone equalizer. Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the low range of Available Values: –10 ~ +10 the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech pro- Default Setting: +5 cessor is activated. Available Values: –10 ~ +10 128 tAUd EQ2 BW Default Setting: –10 Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the middle range of the parametric microphone equalizer. 134 tAUd PE1 BW Available Values: 1 ~ 10 Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the low range of the Default Setting: 10 parametric microphone equalizer when the speech proces- sor is activated. Available Values: 1 ~ 10 Default Setting: 2 Page 128 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 131. MENU MODE TX AUDIO GROUP TX GNRL GROUP 135 tAUd PE2 FRQ 141 tGEn BIAS Function: Selects the center frequency of the middle range Function: Selects the Final Amplifier’s operation between for the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech the “Class-A” and “Class-AB” mode, and adjusts the Bias processor is activated. level while in “Class-A” operation. Available Values: OFF/700 ~ 1500 Hz (100 Hz/step) Available Values: Ab “Class-AB”/0 ~ 100 “Class-A” Default Setting: 800 Hz Default Setting: Ab OFF: The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set 142 tGEn MAX PWR to factory defaults (flat). Function: Selects a maximum output power limit. 700 ~ 1500: Center frequencies of 700 Hz ~ 1500 Hz. Available Values: 20/50/100/200 W You may adjust the equalizer gain and Default Setting: 200 W Q-factor at this selected audio frequency via menu items “136 tAUd PE2 LVL” 143 tGEn PWRCTRL and “137 PE2 BW.” Function: Configures the [RF PWR] knob. Available Values: ALL/CAr 136 tAUd PE2 LVL Default Setting: ALL Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the middle range ALL:The [RF PWR] knob is enabled on all modes. of the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech CAr: The [RF PWR] knob is enabled in all modes processor is activated. except SSB. In this configuration, the SSB out- Available Values: –10 ~ +10 put power will be set to maximum, regardless Default Setting: –3 of the [RF PWR] knob’s position. 137 tAUd PE2 BW 144 tGEn ETX-GND Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the middle range of the Function: Enables/Disables the TX GND jack on the rear parametric microphone equalizer when the speech proces- panel. sor is activated. Available Values: EnA(ENABLE)/diS(DISABLE) Available Values: 1 ~ 10 Default Setting: diS(DISABLE) Default Setting: 1 145 tGEn TUN PWR 138 tUAd PE3 FRQ Function: Selects a maximum output power limit for driv- Function: Selects the center frequency of the high range ing the input circuit of an external linear RF amplifier for the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech while tuning (while using the Remote Control function processor is activated. of the linear RF amplifier). Available Values: OFF/1500 ~ 3200 Hz (100 Hz/step) Available Values: 20/50/100/200 W Default Setting: 2100 Hz Default Setting: 100 W OFF: The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set to factory defaults (flat). 146 tGEn VOX SEL 1500 ~ 3200: Center frequencies of 1500 Hz ~ 3200 Hz. Function: Selects the audio input source for triggering You may adjust the equalizer gain and TX during VOX operation. Q-factor in this selected audio fre- Available Values: nic/dAtA quency via menu items “139 tUAd PE3 Default Setting: nic LVL” and “140 tUAd PE3 BW.” nic(MIC): The VOX function will be activated by microphone audio input. 139 tUAd PE3 LVL dAtA(DATA): The VOX function will be activated Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the high range of by data audio input. the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech pro- cessor is activated. Available Values: –10 ~ +10 Default Setting: +6 140 tUAd PE3 BW Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the high range of the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech proces- sor is activated. Available Values: 1 ~ 10 Default Setting: 1 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 129
  • 132. MENU MODE TX GNRL GROUP 147 tGEn EMRGNCY Function: Enables Tx/Rx operation on the Alaska Emer- gency Channel, 5167.5 kHz. Available Values: EnA(ENABLE)/diS(DISABLE) Default Setting: diS(DISABLE) When this Menu Item is set to “EnA(ENABLE),” the spot frequency of 5167.5 kHz will be enabled. The Alaska Emergency Channel will be found between the Memory channels “P-1” and “01 (or 1-01).” IMPORTANT: The use of this frequency is restricted to stations operat- ing in or near Alaska, and only for emergency purposes (never for routine operations). See §97.401(c) of the FCC’s regulations for details. Page 130 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 133. MENU MODE NOTE FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 131
  • 134. SPECIFICATIONS General Rx Frequency Range: 30 kHz - 60 MHz (operating) 160 - 6 m (specified performance, Amateur bands only) Tx Frequency Ranges: 160 - 6 m (Amateur bands only) Frequency Stability: ±0.5 ppm (after 1 minute @+77 °F [+25 °C]) ±1.0 ppm (after 1 minute @+14 °F ~ +122 °F [–10 °C ~ +50 °C]) Operating Temperature Range: 14 °F ~ +122 °F (–10 °C ~ +50 °C) Emission Modes: A1A (CW), A3E (AM), J3E (LSB, USB), F3E (FM), F1B (RTTY), F1D (PACKET), F2D (PACKET) Frequency Steps: 1/10 Hz (SSB,CW, & AM), 100 Hz (FM) Antenna Impedance: 50 Ohms, unbalanced 16.7 - 150 Ohms, unbalanced (Tuner ON, 160 - 10 m Amateur bands) 25 - 100 Ohms, unbalanced (Tuner ON, 6 m Amateur band) Power Consumption: Rx (no signal) 70 VA Rx (signal present) 80 VA Tx (200 W) 720 VA Supply Voltage: AC: 90 VAC - 132 VAC or 180 VAC- 264 VAC Dimensions (WxHxD): 16.1” x 5.3” x 13.8” (410 x 135 x 350 mm) Weight (approx.): 34.1 lbs (15.5 kg) Transmitter Power Output: 10 - 200 watts 10 - 75 watts (Class-A, SSB) 5 - 50 watts (AM carrier) Modulation Types: J3E (SSB): Balanced, A3E (AM): Low-Level (Early Stage), F3E (FM): Variable Reactance Maximum FM Deviation: ±5.0 kHz/±2.5 kHz Harmonic Radiation: Better than –60 dB SSB Carrier Suppression: At least 60 dB below peak output Undesired Sideband Suppression: At least 60 dB below peak output Audio Response (SSB): Not more than –6 dB from 300 to 2700 Hz 3rd-order IMD: –31 dB @14 MHz, 200 watts PEP –45 dB @14 MHz, 75 watts Class-A Microphone Impedance: 600 Ohms (200 to 10 kOhms) FP-2000 Power Supply Input Voltage: 90 VAC - 264 VAC, 50/60 Hz (Universal) Output Voltage: 50 VDC , 13.8 VDC Maximum Power Consumption (approx.): 720 VA Maximum Output Current: 50 V: 12 A, 13.8 V: 6 A Case Size (WxHxD): 3.9” x 5.3” x 13.8” (100 x 135 x 350 mm) Weight (approx.): 7.9 lb (3.6 kg) Page 132 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 135. SPECIFICATIONS Receiver Circuit Type: Main (VFO-A); Triple-conversion superheterodyne Sub (VFO-B); Double-conversion superheterodyne Intermediate Frequencies: Main (VFO-A); 69.450 MHz/450 kHz/30 kHz (24 kHz for AM/FM), Sub (VFO-B); 40.455 MHz/455 kHz Sensitivity (RF AMP 2 “ON”): SSB (2.4 kHz, 10 dB S+N/N) 2 µV (0.1 - 1.8 MHz) 0.2 µV (1.8 - 30 MHz) 0.125 µV (50 - 54 MHz) AM (6 kHz, 10 dB S+N/N, 30 % modulation @400 Hz) 6 µV (0.1 - 1.8 MHz) 2 µV (1.8 - 30 MHz) 1 µV (50 - 54 MHz) FM (BW: 15 kHz, 12 dB SINAD) 0.5 µV (28 - 30 MHz) 0.35 µV (50 - 54 MHz) There is no specification in frequency ranges not listed. Squelch Sensitivity: SSB/CW/AM (RF AMP 2 “ON”) 2 µV (0.1 - 30 MHz) 2 µV (50 - 54 MHz) FM 1 µV (28 - 30 MHz) 1 µV (50 - 54 MHz) There is no specification in frequency ranges not listed. Selectivity (–6/–60 dB): Main (VFO-A) Mode –6 dB –60 dB CW/RTTY/PKT 0.5 kHz or better 750 Hz or less SSB 2.4 kHz or better 3.6 kHz or less AM 6 kHz or better 15 kHz or less FM 15 kHz or better 25 kHz or less (WIDTH: Center, VRF: OFF) Sub (VFO-B) Mode –6 dB –60 dB CW/RTTY/PKT 1.1 kHz or better 3.0 kHz or less SSB 2.2 kHz or better 4.5 kHz or less AM 6 kHz or better 25 kHz or less FM 12 kHz or better 30 kHz or less Image Rejection: 70 dB or better (160 - 10m Amateur bands) 60 dB or better (6m Amateur band) Maximum Audio Output: 2.5 W into 4 Ohms with 10% THD Audio Output Impedance: 4 to 8 Ohms (4 Ohms: nominal) Conducted Radiation: Less than 4000 µµW Specifications are subject to change, in the interest of technical improvement, without notice or obligation, and are guaranteed only within the amateur bands. FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL Page 133
  • 136. INSTALLATION OF THE OPTIONAL FILTER (YF-122C OR YF-122CN) 1. Turn the FT-2000D’s [POWER] switch “off,” then turn the FP-2000’s [POWER] switch “off.” 2. Unplug the AC cable from the AC jack on the FP- 2000 rear panel. 3. Disconnect the all of the cables from the transceiver. 4. Referring to Figure 1, remove the three screws from each side of the transceiver, and three screws from the top edge of the rear panel. Slide the top cover toward to the rear about 1/2 inch (1 cm), then remove the top cover. 5. Refer to Figure 2 for the mounting location for the optional filter. Position the filter so that its connectors are aligned with the mounting pins on the board, and push it into place. 6. Replace the top cover and its nine screws. 7. Filter installation is now complete. Now you must en- able the newly-installed filter, using the Menu. 8. Connect the two DC cables to the FT-2000D rear panel, FIGURE 1 and then connect the AC cable to the AC jack on the FP-2000 rear panel. Optional Filter 9. Turn the FP-2000’s [POWER] switch “on,” then turn the FT-2000D’s [POWER] switch “on.” 10. Press the [MENU] button momentarily to engage the RX-2 UNIT Menu mode. 11. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the Menu item “037 GEnE SUB FIL.” RX-2 UNIT 12. Rotate the [SUB VFO-B] knob to choose the selec- tion appropriate for the filter you have just installed (“300” for YF-122CN, “500” for YF-122C). 13. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds FIGURE 2 to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. Page 134 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 138. NOTE Page 136 FT-2000D OPERATING MANUAL
  • 139. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: -- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. -- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. -- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. -- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 1. Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by VERTEX STANDARD could void the user’s authorization to operate this device. 2. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation. 3. The scanning receiver in this equipment is incapable of tuning, or readily being altered, by the User to operate within the frequency bands allocated to the Domestic public Cellular Telecommunications Service in Part 22. DECLARATION BY MANUFACTURER The scanner receiver is not a digital scanner and is incapable of being converted or modified a digital scanner receiver by any user. WARNING: MODIFICATION OF THIS DEVICE TO RECEIVE CELLULAR RADIOTELEPHONE SERVICE SIGNALS IS PROHIBITED UNDER FCC RULES AND FEDERAL LAW.
  • 140. Copyright 2006 Printed in Japan VERTEX STANDARD CO., LTD. 0612X-0Y All rights reserved No portion of this manual may be reproduced without the permission of VERTEX STANDARD CO., LTD. E H 0 2 5 H 1 4 0